Canon Pixma MP560 Series Instruction manual

Canon MP560 series On-screen Manual
Page 1 of 949 pages
How to Use This Manual
Printing This Manual
MC-4116-V1.00
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Describes the summary of
this product.
Describes the detailed
function of this product.
Troubleshooting
MP560 series Basic Guide
Page 2 of 949 pages
How to Use This Manual
Printing This Manual
MP-3719-V1.20
Advanced Guide
Contents
Overview of the Machine
Other Usages
Main Components
Printing the Template Forms such as Notebook
Paper
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD
Printing Photos Directly from Your Digital
Camera or Mobile Phone
Printing from a Memory Card
Machine Settings
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card /
USB Flash Drive
Useful Software Applications
Using Various Functions
Inserting the Memory Card
Inserting the USB Flash Drive
Loading Paper / Originals
Loading Paper
Loading Originals
Copying
Making Copies
Using Various Copy Functions
Routine Maintenance
Replacing an Ink Tank
When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are
Incorrect
Printing Photos from Printed Photos
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller
Reprinting Printed Photos
Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette
Using Various Functions
Appendix
Scanning
Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer
Using Various Scan Functions
Printing from Your Computer
Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX)
Printing Documents (Windows)
Printing Documents (Macintosh)
Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and
Use of Images
Tips on How to Use Your Machine
Overview of the Machine
Page 3 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Overview of the Machine
Overview of the Machine
This section shows the component names of the machine and describes the basic operations you need
to know before using it.
Main Components
Front View
Rear View
Inside View
Operation Panel
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD
Selecting Menus on the HOME Screen
Selecting Setting Items
Other Operations
Page top
Main Components
Page 4 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Overview of the Machine > Main Components
Main Components
Front View
Rear View
Inside View
Operation Panel
Front View
(1) Document Cover
Open to load an original on the Platen Glass.
(2) Paper Support
Raise and tip back to load paper in the Rear Tray.
(3) Paper Guides
Slide to align with both sides of the paper stack.
(4) Rear Tray
Load photo paper or envelopes which you can use on the machine. Two or more sheets of the same size
and type of paper can be loaded at the same time, and fed automatically one sheet at a time.
See Loading Paper .
(5) LCD (Liquid Crystal Display)
Displays messages, menu selections, and the operation status. You can also preview photos on the LCD
before printing.
Note
The LCD will turn off if the machine is not operated for about 5 minutes. To restore the
display, press any button except the ON button or perform the print operation.
(6) Operation Panel
Main Components
Use to change the settings of the machine or to operate it.
See Operation Panel .
(7) Wi-Fi lamp
Lights or flashes in blue to indicate the wireless LAN status.
Lights : Wireless LAN active is selected.
Flashes : Printing or scanning over wireless LAN. Also flashes while searching for wireless LAN access
point during setup and when connecting to the access point.
(8) Paper Output Tray
Opens automatically when printing or copying starts and printed paper is ejected.
(9) Output Tray Extension
Open to support the printouts. Open it when printing or copying.
(10) Platen Glass
Load an original to copy or scan.
(11) Cassette
Load A4, B5, A5, or Letter-sized plain paper and insert it into the machine. Two or more sheets of the same
size of plain paper can be loaded at the same time, and fed automatically one sheet at a time.
See Loading Paper .
(12) Direct Print Port
Connect a PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera or the optional Bluetooth Unit BU-30* to print
directly.
See Printing Photos Directly from Your Digital Camera or Mobile Phone .
You can also insert a USB flash drive to this port.
See Inserting the USB Flash Drive.
* The Bluetooth Unit is not available in some countries or regions depending on the local laws and
regulations. For details, contact the service center.
Warning
Do not connect any equipments other than PictBridge compliant devices, the optional
Bluetooth Unit BU-30, and USB flash drives to the Direct Print Port of the machine. This
may cause fire, electric shock, or damage to the machine.
Important
Do not touch the metal casing.
Do not use the USB cable longer than around 10 feet / 3 meters to connect any PictBridge
compliant device to the machine since it may affect the operation of other peripheral
devices.
(13) Card Slot Cover
Open to insert a memory card.
Page 5 of 949 pages
Main Components
See Inserting the Memory Card .
Rear View
(14) USB Port
Plug in the USB cable to connect the machine with a computer.
Important
Do not touch the metal casing.
Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable while the machine is printing or scanning originals
with the computer.
(15) Rear Cover
Detach to remove jammed paper.
(16) Power Cord Connector
Plug in the supplied power cord.
Inside View
(17) Ink lamps
Light or flash red to indicate the ink tank status.
See Checking the Ink Status.
(18) Print Head Lock Lever
Locks the Print Head into place.
Important
Do not raise this lever after installing the Print Head.
(19) Print Head Holder
Install the Print Head.
(20) Scanning Unit (Cover)
Page 6 of 949 pages
Main Components
Scans originals. Open it to replace ink tanks, to check ink lamps, or to remove jammed paper inside the
machine. When opening the Scanning Unit (Cover), lift it with the Document Cover closed.
(21) Card Slot
Insert a memory card.
See Inserting the Memory Card .
(22) Access lamp
Lights or flashes to indicate the memory card status.
See Inserting the Memory Card .
Note
For details on installing the Print Head and ink tanks, refer to the printed manual: Getting
Started .
Operation Panel
(1) ON button
Turns the power on or off. Before turning on the power, make sure that the Document Cover is closed.
Important
Disconnecting the power plug
When disconnecting the power plug after turning off the power, be sure to confirm that
the Power lamp is not lit. If the power plug is disconnected from the wall outlet while the
Power lamp is lit or flashing, the machine may become unable to print properly since the
Print Head is not protected.
(2) Buttons to use when navigating menus on the LCD
See How to Navigate Menus on the LCD .
(3) [+] [-] buttons
Specifies the number of copies to copy or print.
(4) Stop button
Cancels operation when a print, copy, or scan job is in progress.
(5) Alarm lamp
Lights or flashes orange when an error, such as paper-out or ink-out, occurs.
(6) Power lamp
Lights green after flashing when the power is turned on.
(7) Color button
Starts color printing, copying, or scanning.
Page 7 of 949 pages
Main Components
Page 8 of 949 pages
(8) Black button
Starts black & white copying, scanning, etc.
(9) OK button
Selects a menu or setting item. See How to Navigate Menus on the LCD .
Resolves an error when printing is in progress or resumes the machine's normal operation after removing
jammed paper.
Page top
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD
Page 9 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Overview of the Machine > How to Navigate Menus on the LCD
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD
This machine allows you to print photos on a memory card or USB flash drive, make copies, or scan an
original without a computer. To operate the machine, you can turn around the Easy-Scroll Wheel on the
button on the Easy-Scroll Wheel to navigate menus or
Operation Panel or press the , , , or
select setting items on the LCD, then press the OK button.
This section describes the basic operation to navigate menus on the HOME screen and to select setting
items necessary for printing.
Using the Easy-Scroll Wheel (B)
The Easy-Scroll Wheel is used to select menus or setting items.
The Easy-Scroll Wheel can be used in two ways. You can operate the machine either way.
(D) Turn around the Easy-Scroll Wheel with your finger to select items.
Or
, or
(E) Press the , ,
button to select items.
, or
When it is indicated in this guide that the , ,
operation procedure, i.e., "the Easy-Scroll Wheel (the
button can be used, it is also described in the
or
button)".
Selecting Menus on the HOME Screen
The HOME screen will appear when the power is turned on or when the HOME button is pressed.
To start printing photos on a memory card or USB flash drive, copying, or scanning, select menus on the
HOME screen.
1.
Press the HOME button (A).
The HOME screen will appear.
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD
2.
Page 10 of 949 pages
Turn around the Easy-Scroll Wheel (B) to select the menu to use, and press the
OK button (C).
You can also use the
or
button on the Easy-Scroll Wheel (B) to select the menu.
The selected menu screen will appear.
The following menus are available on the HOME screen.
You can change copy scale or erase dark frame or shade of bound part
when copying a book. And also you can copy an original in various layouts.
See Copying.
:
Copy
You can print photos saved on a memory card of your digital camera or USB
flash drive.
See Printing from a Memory Card.
Memory card
:
You can scan printed photos and print them easily. You can also specify
the number of copies for each photo.
See Printing Photos from Printed Photos .
Easy photo
:
reprint
:
Settings
Photo index
:
sheet
Scan
:
You can maintain the condition of the machine, configure wireless LAN,
change settings of the machine, or print the template forms such as
notebook paper, etc.
See When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect , Cleaning the
Paper Feed Roller , Machine Settings , or Printing the Template Forms such as
Notebook Paper .
You can easily print photos on a memory card or USB flash drive using the
Photo Index Sheet.
See Using Photo Index Sheet to print .
You can forward scanned data to your computer or save them on a
memory card or USB flash drive inserted into the machine with the
Operation Panel.
See Scanning .
Selecting Setting Items
The displayed screen varies depending on the menu you selected, but the operation is the same.
This section describes the procedure to select a setting item, using the operation to change the print
quality on the print confirmation screen in Select and print of Memory card as an example.
1.
Use the Easy-Scroll Wheel (the
the OK button (C).
or
button) (B) to select Standard, and press
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD
2.
Use the Easy-Scroll Wheel (the
press the OK button.
Page 11 of 949 pages
or
button) to select High (quality-priority), and
The screen will return to the print confirmation screen in Select and print.
Other Operations
Selecting Items at the Bottom of the LCD
You can use the two Function buttons (F) to select items displayed at the bottom of the LCD.
You can press the right Function button to select the item on the right, and the left Function button to
select the item on the left. The displayed items vary depending on the screen.
How to Navigate Menus on the LCD
Page 12 of 949 pages
Returning to the Previous Screen
You can press the Back button (G) to return to the previous screen.
Performing the Frequently-Used Functions with Easy
Operation
You can use the NAVI button (H) to perform the frequently-used functions easily, just by following the
instructions displayed on the screen. You can also display the information on the functions or
instructions on how to load paper.
1.
Press the NAVI button (H).
The NAVI screen will appear.
Note
When you press the Back button while the NAVI screen appears, the HOME screen will
appear.
2.
Use the Easy-Scroll Wheel (the
OK button.
or
button) to select the item, and press the
Follow the instructions on the LCD.
Canceling Printing, Copying, or Scanning
You can press the Stop button (I) to cancel a print, copy, or scan job in progress.
Page top
Printing from a Memory Card
Page 13 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Printing from a Memory Card
Printing from a Memory Card
You can preview each photo from a memory card or USB flash drive on the LCD, to select and print the
desired photo.
You can also print your favorite photos in various layouts or use them for making a calendar or sticker.
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive
Changing the Settings
Using Various Functions
Printing Photos in Various Layouts
Changing the Display
Cropping Photos / Searching Photos by a Specified Date
Correcting Images
Printing Photos with Shot Date or File Number
Inserting the Memory Card
Before Inserting the Memory Card
Inserting the Memory Card
Removing the Memory Card
Inserting the USB Flash Drive
Inserting the USB Flash Drive
Removing the USB Flash Drive
Page top
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive
Advanced Guide
Page 14 of 949 pages
Troubleshooting
Contents > Printing from a Memory Card > Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive
Preview each photo from the memory card or USB flash drive on the LCD, to select and print the desired
photo.
This section describes the procedure to print borderless photos on 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm photo paper.
For the operation, see the notes and operation procedure described in the reference page.
You need to prepare:
A memory card with saved photos. See Before Inserting the Memory Card .
A USB flash drive with saved photos. See Inserting the USB Flash Drive .
Paper for photo printing. See Media Types You Can Use .
1.
Prepare for printing.
(1) Turn on the power.
See Operation Panel .
(2) Load paper.
See Loading Paper .
Here we load 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm photo paper in the Rear Tray.
Note
Load A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the Cassette. Load other sizes or types of paper in
the Rear Tray.
(3) Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive
2.
Insert a memory card or USB flash drive.
(1) Select Memory card
on the HOME screen, and press the OK button.
See Selecting Menus on the HOME Screen.
(2) Select Select and print
, and press the OK button.
(3) Insert the memory card or USB flash drive.
Memory card:
Insert it WITH THE LABELED SIDE FACING TO THE LEFT into the Card Slot. For the types of memory card
compatible with the machine and locations to insert them, see Inserting the Memory Card .
USB flash drive:
Insert it into the Direct Print Port. See Inserting the USB Flash Drive.
The photo selection screen will appear.
Page 15 of 949 pages
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive
(A) USB Flash Drive
(B) Memory Card
Note
The screen can also be changed to the photo selection screen in Select and print of
Memory card by inserting a memory card or USB flash drive while the HOME screen or
any screen of Copy and Easy photo reprint appears.
You can also select useful printing functions other than Select and print.
See Using Various Functions .
Do not insert memory card and USB flash drive at the same time. Also do not insert two or
more memory cards at the same time.
When Read/write attribute is set to Writable from USB PC or Writable from LAN PC, you
cannot print image data from the memory card using the Operation Panel on the machine.
To print image data from the memory card, select Advanced settings in Device settings of
Settings on the HOME screen, and set Read/write attribute to Not writable from PC.
* The image data on the USB flash drive can be printed.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
3.
Select photos to print.
(1) Use the Easy-Scroll Wheel (the
print.
or
button ) (C) to display the photo to
Note
may appear on the LCD while reading photos. If you use the
button) to display the photo while
not be selected.
or
Easy-Scroll Wheel (the
appears on the LCD, the desired photo may
(2) Press the [ +] or [-] button (D) to specify the number of copies.
(3) Repeat the procedures of (1) and (2) to specify the number of copies for each
photo.
Note
Other options
To change the display of photos, see Changing the Display.
To crop photos (Trimming), see Cropping Photos / Searching Photos by a Specified Date .
To search photos by a specified date (Search), see Cropping Photos / Searching Photos
by a Specified Date .
(4) Press the OK button (E).
Page 16 of 949 pages
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive
The print confirmation screen will appear.
4.
Start printing.
(1) Confirm the page size, media type, print quality, etc.
Here we confirm that 4"x6" (10x15cm) is selected for Page size and the type of loaded photo paper for
Media type.
To change the settings, use the Easy-Scroll Wheel (the
and press the OK button (G).
or
button) (F) to select the item to change,
See Selecting Setting Items and Changing the Settings .
Note
When Plain paper is selected for Media type and A4 or 8.5"x11" (LTR) for Page size,
Cassette will appear for Paper source.
When other sizes or types of paper are selected, Rear tray will appear.
Confirm that the selected paper is loaded in the correct paper source.
(2) Confirm the number of sheets to be used for printing the selected photos.
(3) Press the right Function button (H) to select Check photo, and confirm the
selected photos and number of copies for each photo.
Press the OK button (G) to return to the print confirmation screen.
(4) Press the Color button (I).
The machine starts printing photos.
Note
If you press the left Function button (J) to select Advanced, Date setting, File no.setting and
Auto photo fix will appear.
You can correct photos automatically or manually if you select the Auto photo fix.
See Using Various Functions .
Press the Stop button to cancel printing.
Printing does not start if you press the Black button.
You can display the Memory card menu screen and select other useful printing functions, if
you press the Back button after printing is completed. If you press the HOME button or
remove the memory card or USB flash drive, the HOME screen will appear.
To remove the memory card, see Removing the Memory Card .
To remove the USB flash drive, see Removing the USB Flash Drive .
Page 17 of 949 pages
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive
Page 18 of 949 pages
Changing the Settings
or
You can use the Easy-Scroll Wheel (the
button) to change the print settings such as page size,
media type, or print quality to print.
For the setting operation, see Selecting Setting Items .
(1) Page size
Select the page size of the paper to print: 4"x6" (10x15cm), A4, etc.
(2) Media type
Select the media type of the paper to print: Plus Glossy II, Plain paper, etc.
Note
If you do not select the page size and media type correctly, the machine may feed paper
from the wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality.
See Paper Source to Load Paper .
(3) Print quality
Adjust the print quality: High(quality-priority) or Standard.
(4) Borderless print
Select bordered or borderless print: Bordered or Borderless.
Note
When Plain paper is selected for Media type, you cannot select Borderless.
If the ratio of the height to the width differs from the image data when Borderless is
selected, a portion of the image may not be printed depending on the size of the media
used.
(5) Paper source
The paper source for the selected page size and media type appears on the screen.
When A4 or Letter-sized plain paper is selected, Cassette will appear.
When other sizes or types of paper are selected, Rear tray will appear.
Confirm that the selected paper is loaded in the paper source displayed on the screen.
For details on the paper source setting, refer to the on-screen manual:
Advanced Guide .
Note
The settings of the page size, media type, print quality, image correction, borderless print,
etc.are retained, and these settings will appear next time when the Memory card menu is
selected even if the power is turned off and on.
Combination of some items cannot be specified depending on the function.
Using Photo Index Sheet to print
Thumbnails of photos on the memory card or USB flash drive are printed on A4 or Letter-sized paper
(this printed sheet is called Photo Index Sheet). You can select photos, number of copies, page size, etc.
on this sheet, and print them.
on the HOME screen, and Index sheet print
Select Photo index sheet
operation, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
. For details on the
Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive
Page 19 of 949 pages
Page top
Using Various Functions
Page 20 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Various Functions
Using Various Functions
You can print photos in various ways when you select Memory card
also use the useful functions to print photos.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
on the HOME screen. You can
Printing Photos in Various Layouts
You can select various layouts on the Memory card menu screen. You can also select DPOF print.
Layout print
Sticker print
Photo index print
Print all photos
ID photo size print
Calendar print
Captured info print
Changing the Display
You can change the display of photos by pressing the left Function button when Change display appears
at the bottom of the screen. You can also select Slide show.
Thumbnail display
Full-screen display
Enlarged display
Cropping Photos / Searching Photos by a Specified Date
You can specify the function by pressing the right Function button when Edit appears at the bottom of the
screen.
Using Various Functions
Wide (16:9)
Page 21 of 949 pages
Standard (4:3)
Trimming
Search
Correcting Images
You can correct images by pressing the left Function button to select Auto photo fix when Advanced
appears at the bottom of the screen. You can correct images automatically or manually, such as
adjusting brightness, contrast, and color hue, or add effects to images.
Auto photo fix ON (Default)
Printing Photos with Shot Date or File Number
You can print photos with shot date or file number by pressing the left Function button to select Date
setting or File no.setting when Advanced appears at the bottom of the screen.
Date setting
File no.setting
Using Various Functions
Page 22 of 949 pages
Page top
Inserting the Memory Card
Page 23 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Printing from a Memory Card > Inserting the Memory Card
Inserting the Memory Card
Before Inserting the Memory Card
The following types of memory cards and image data are compatible with the machine.
Important
If you took and saved photos on a type of memory card that does not guarantee the operation on
your digital camera, the image data may be unreadable on the machine or damaged. For information
on memory cards that your digital camera guarantees operation, refer to the instruction manual
supplied with your digital camera.
Format the memory card with a digital camera compliant with the Design rule for Camera File system
(Exif 2.2/2.21 compliant), TIFF (Exif 2.2/2.21 compliant). The memory card may not be compatible
with the machine if it is formatted on a computer.
Memory Cards that Do Not Require a Card Adapter
SD Secure Digital memory card
SDHC memory card
MultiMediaCard
MultiMediaCard Plus
Compact Flash (CF) Card
Supports Type I/II (3.3 V)
Microdrive
Memory Stick
Memory Stick PRO
Memory Stick Duo
Memory Stick PRO Duo
Memory Cards that Require a Card Adapter
Important
Be sure to attach the special card adapters to the following memory cards before inserting to
the Card Slot.
If one of the following memory cards is inserted without the card adapter, you may not be able
to remove the memory card. In this case, refer to " Troubleshooting" in the on-screen manual:
Advanced Guide .
miniSD Card *1
miniSDHC Card *1
microSD Card *1
microSDHC Card *1
xD-Picture Card *2
xD-Picture Card Type M *2
xD-Picture Card Type H *2
Inserting the Memory Card
Page 24 of 949 pages
RS-MMC *3
Memory Stick Micro *4
*1 Use the special "SD Card Adapter".
*2 Requires purchase of a separate compact flash card adapter for xD-Picture Card.
*3 Use the special card adapter.
*4 Use the special Duo size adapter or full size adapter.
Printable Image Data
This machine accepts images taken with a camera compliant with the Design rule for Camera File
system (Exif 2.2/2.21 compliant), TIFF (Exif 2.2/2.21 compliant). Other image or movie types such as
RAW images cannot be printed.
Inserting the Memory Card
Important
When a memory card is inserted into the Card Slot, the Access lamp is lit. When the Access lamp
is flashing, the machine is accessing the memory card. In this case, do not touch the area around
the Card Slot.
Note
When Read/write attribute is set to Writable from USB PC or Writable from LAN PC, you cannot print
image data from the memory card or save scanned data on the memory card using the Operation
Panel of the machine. After using the Card Slot as the memory card drive of a computer, remove
the memory card, select Advanced settings in Device settings of Settings on the HOME screen,
then set Read/write attribute to Not writable from PC. For details, refer to the on-screen manual:
Advanced Guide .
When you use a computer to edit or enhance photos saved on a memory card, be sure to print them
from the computer. If you use the Operation Panel, the photos may not be printed properly.
1.
Prepare your memory card.
Attach a special card adapter if your memory card requires one.
See Memory Cards that Require a Card Adapter .
2.
Turn on the power, and open the Card Slot Cover.
Inserting the Memory Card
3.
Page 25 of 949 pages
Insert only one memory card into the Card Slot.
The location to insert a memory card varies depending on each type of memory card. Insert your memory card
straightforward WITH THE LABELED SIDE FACING TO THE LEFT into the Card Slot, according to the insert
location in the figure below.
When the memory card is inserted properly, the Access lamp (A) will light up.
Be sure to attach the card adapter for memory card with the mark
Slot as shown below.
(asterisk), and then insert it into the Card
For Memory Stick Duo, Memory Stick PRO Duo,
or Memory Stick Micro (with the Duo size adapter)
:
For SD Secure Digital memory card, SDHC memory card, MultiMediaCard, MultiMediaCard Plus,
miniSD Card , miniSDHC Card ,
microSD Card , microSDHC Card ,
Memory Stick, Memory Stick PRO,
Memory Stick Micro (with the full size adapter)
or RS-MMC:
,
For Compact Flash (CF) Card, Microdrive,
xD-Picture Card
, xD-Picture Card Type M
, or xD-Picture Card Type H
:
Important
Part of the memory card will protrude from the Card Slot, but do not force it into the slot any
further. This can damage the machine or the memory card.
Make sure that the memory card is correctly oriented before inserting it into the Card Slot. If
you force the memory card into the Card Slot in the wrong orientation, the memory card or the
machine can be damaged.
Do not insert more than one memory card at a time.
Inserting the Memory Card
4.
Page 26 of 949 pages
Close the Card Slot Cover.
Removing the Memory Card
Important
If you used the Card Slot as the memory card drive of a computer, you must perform the "safe
removal" operation on your computer before physically removing the memory card from the
machine.
- In Windows, if you are connecting the machine with a USB cable, right-click the removable disk
icon and click Eject. If Eject does not appear on the screen, make sure that the Access lamp is
lit, and then remove the memory card. If you used the Card Slot via the LAN, you do not need to
perform the "safe removal" operation on your computer.
- In Macintosh, drag
(Mount drive) into the Trash.
1.
Open the Card Slot Cover.
2.
Make sure that the Access lamp is lit, and remove the memory card.
Hold the part of the memory card that is protruding and remove it straightforward from the machine.
Important
Do not remove the memory card while the Access lamp is flashing. The Access lamp flashes
while the machine is reading or writing data from/to the memory card. If you remove the
memory card or turn off the power while the Access lamp is flashing, the data saved on the
memory card can be damaged.
3.
Close the Card Slot Cover.
Page top
Inserting the USB Flash Drive
Page 27 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Printing from a Memory Card > Inserting the USB Flash Drive
Inserting the USB Flash Drive
Inserting the USB Flash Drive
Note
Before inserting the USB flash drive
If your USB flash drive cannot be inserted into the Direct Print Port of the machine, you may be
required to use an extension cable for the USB flash drive. Purchase it at electronics retail stores.
Some USB flash drives may have recognition problem, and these devices may not guarantee proper
operation of the machine.
You may not be able to use USB flash drives with security function.
1.
Insert the USB flash drive into the Direct Print Port.
Make sure that the USB flash drive is correctly oriented before inserting it straightforward into the Direct Print
Port.
Removing the USB Flash Drive
1.
Make sure that the machine is not reading or writing data from/to the USB flash
drive.
Check if the reading or writing operation is completed on the LCD.
Important
Do not remove the USB flash drive or turn off the power while the machine is operating.
Note
If your USB flash drive has the access lamp, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the
USB flash drive to check if the reading or writing operation is completed on the USB flash
drive.
2.
Remove the USB flash drive.
Hold the USB flash drive and remove it straightforward from the machine.
Inserting the USB Flash Drive
Page 28 of 949 pages
Page top
Copying
Page 29 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Copying
Copying
You can copy in the various methods such as enlarging/reducing or copying two original pages onto a
single sheet of paper.
Making Copies
Changing the Settings
Using Various Copy Functions
Page top
Making Copies
Page 30 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Copying > Making Copies
Making Copies
This section describes the procedure to copy a document of A4 size on plain paper.
For the operation, see the notes and operation procedure described in the reference page.
You need to prepare:
Originals to copy. See Originals You Can Load .
Paper for printing. See Media Types You Can Use .
1.
Prepare for copying.
(1) Turn on the power.
See Operation Panel .
(2) Load paper.
See Loading Paper .
Here we make sure that A4 plain paper is loaded in the Cassette.
Note
Load A4, B5, A5, or Letter-sized plain paper in the Cassette. Load other sizes or types of
paper in the Rear Tray.
(3) Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
(4) Select Copy
on the HOME screen, and press the OK button.
See Selecting Menus on the HOME Screen.
Making Copies
Page 31 of 949 pages
(5) Load an original on the Platen Glass.
See Loading Originals.
Load the original WITH THE SIDE TO COPY FACING DOWN and align it with the alignment mark
as
shown below.
Then close the Document Cover gently.
Note
For details on the types and conditions of the original which can be copied, see Originals
You Can Load .
2.
Start copying.
(1) Confirm the page size, media type, magnification, etc.
Here we confirm that 100% is selected for Magnification, A4 for Page size, and Plain paper for Media type.
To change the settings, use the Easy-Scroll Wheel (the
and press the OK button (B).
or
button) (A) to select the item to change,
See Selecting Setting Items and Changing the Settings .
Note
When Plain paper is selected for Media type and A4, B5, A5, or 8.5"x11" (LTR) for Page
size, Cassette will appear for Paper source.
When other sizes or types of paper are selected, Rear tray will appear.
Confirm that the selected paper is loaded in the correct paper source.
You can check the preview of print result if you press the right Function button (C) to
select Preview.
Refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
You can select various copy functions, such as Two-sided copy, Borderless copy, 2-on1 copy, and Frame erase, if you press the left Function button (D) to select Special copy.
See Using Various Copy Functions .
Making Copies
(2) Press the [ +] or [-] button (E) to specify the number of copies.
(3) Press the Color button (F) for color copying, or the Black button (G) for black &
white copying.
The machine starts copying.
Remove the original on the Platen Glass after copying is completed.
Important
Do not open the Document Cover or move the loaded original until copying is completed.
Note
Press the Stop button to cancel copying.
Repeat the procedures from (5) of step 1 to copy another original.
You can exit the Copy menu and display the HOME screen if you press the HOME button.
Changing the Settings
or
You can use the Easy-Scroll Wheel (the
button) to change the print settings such as page size,
media type, or print quality to print.
For the setting operation, see Selecting Setting Items .
(1) Magnification
Specify the enlargement/reduction manner. You can specify the copy scale by selecting the optional
number or the page size: A4 to A5, A4 to B5, etc. If you do not want to enlarge/reduce the page size,
select 100%.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
(2) Intensity
Specify the intensity when you want to make the darkened/lightened copy. You can also set the intensity to
automatically adjust according to the original.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
(3) Page size
Page 32 of 949 pages
Making Copies
Page 33 of 949 pages
Select the page size of the paper to print: A4, 8.5"x11" (LTR), etc.
(4) Media type
Select the media type of the paper to print: Plain paper, Plus Glossy II, etc.
Note
If you do not select the page size and media type correctly, the machine may feed paper
from the wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality.
See Paper Source to Load Paper .
(5) Print quality
Adjust the print quality according to the original to copy: High(quality-priority), Standard, etc. The available
print quality settings depend on the paper selected for Media type.
(6) Paper source
The paper source for the selected page size and media type appears on the screen.
When A4, B5, A5, or Letter-sized plain paper is selected, Cassette will appear.
When other sizes or types of paper are selected, Rear tray will appear.
Confirm that the selected paper is loaded in the paper source displayed on the screen.
For details on the paper source setting, refer to the on-screen manual:
Advanced Guide .
Note
If Two-sided copy is selected, select A4 or 8.5"x11" (LTR) for Page size and Plain paper for
Media Type.
If 2-on-1 copy or 4-on-1 copy is selected, select A4 or 8.5"x11" (LTR) for Page size.
If Borderless copy is selected, select 8.5"x11"(LTR), A4, 4"x6"(10x15cm), or 5"x7"(13x18cm)
for Page size and any types of paper except Plain paper for Media type.
If Borderless copy is selected, slight cropping may occur at the edges since the copied image
is enlarged to fill the whole page.
The settings of the page size, media type, print quality, automatic intensity, etc. are retained,
and these settings will appear next time when the Copy menu is selected even if the power is
turned off and on.
Combination of some items cannot be specified depending on the function.
If you select Fast (speed-priority) with the media type set to Plain paper and the quality is not
as good as expected, select Standard or High(quality-priority) and then try copying again.
Page top
Using Various Copy Functions
Page 34 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Copying > Using Various Copy Functions
Using Various Copy Functions
You can make various kinds of copies if you press the left Function button to select Special copy at the
bottom of the Copy screen.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
Two-sided copy
Borderless copy
2-on-1 copy
4-on-1 copy
Image repeat
Frame erase
Trimming
Masking
Page top
Printing Photos from Printed Photos
Page 35 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Printing Photos from Printed Photos
Printing Photos from Printed Photos
You can reprint printed photos in various layouts.
Reprinting Printed Photos
Using Various Functions
Printing Photos in Various Layouts
Correcting Images
Page top
Reprinting Printed Photos
Page 36 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Printing Photos from Printed Photos > Reprinting Printed Photos
Reprinting Printed Photos
Reprint printed photos.
This section describes the procedure to scan printed photos and print them on 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm photo
paper.
Note
You cannot save scanned images with this function.
To save scanned images, see Scanning .
You need to prepare:
Printed photos.
Paper for photo printing. See Media Types You Can Use .
1.
Prepare for reprinting printed photos.
(1) Turn on the power.
See Operation Panel .
(2) Load paper.
See Loading Paper .
Here we load 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm photo paper in the Rear Tray.
(3) Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
(4) Select Easy photo reprint
on the HOME screen, and press the OK button.
(5) When the guidance screen appears, press the OK button again.
2.
Load photos on the Platen Glass to scan.
Reprinting Printed Photos
Page 37 of 949 pages
(1) Open the Document Cover.
(2) Load the photos WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN on the Platen
Glass.
See Loading Originals.
(A) To load four photos on the Platen Glass
(B) To load two photos on the Platen Glass
Note
Place the photo(s) at least 0.4 inches / 10 mm away from and in square with the edges of
the Platen Glass.
When loading two or more photos at the same time, place them at least 0.4 inches / 10 mm
apart from each other. If photos are placed closer, they may be scanned as a single
image.
The Skew Correction function automatically compensates for photos placed at an angle of
up to approximately 10 degrees.
Slanted photos with a long edge of 7.1 inches / 180 mm or more cannot be corrected.
If
appears on the preview screen, check the followings and reset the photos properly
to scan them again.
- The slant is not too large.
- The photos are not placed too close to the edge of the Platen Glass.
Photos smaller than approximately 1 inch / 25 mm square will not be scanned properly.
The types of photos listed below may not be scanned properly.
- Photos that are non-rectangular or irregular shaped (such as cut out photos)
- Photos that are entirely white
- Photos that have white surrounds
The borders of bordered photos may not be scanned properly. Crop photos if necessary.
Refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
(3) Close the Document Cover gently, and press the OK button.
The machine starts scanning.
Important
The photos are rescanned before printing starts. Do not open the Document Cover or move the
loaded photos until printing is completed.
3.
Specify the number of copies.
(1) Select Select and print
, and press the OK button.
Note
You can also select useful printing functions other than Select and print.
See Using Various Functions .
(2) Use the Easy-Scroll Wheel (the
or
button) to display a photo to print.
(3) Press the [ +] or [-] button to specify the number of copies.
Reprinting Printed Photos
Note
If
appears next to the photo on the screen, it may not have been scanned properly.
Press the Back button, and press the left Function button to select Rescan. Confirm the
message, and repeat the procedures from step 2 to scan the photo again.
Other options
To change the display of photos, see Changing the Display.
(You can also select Full-screen display and Enlarged display other than Normal screen
display.)
To crop of photos (Trimming), see Cropping Photos / Searching Photos by a Specified
Date.
(4) Repeat the procedures of (2) and (3) to specify the number of copies for each
photo.
(5) Press the OK button.
4.
Start printing.
(1) Confirm the page size, media type, print quality, etc.
Here we confirm that 4"x6" (10x15cm) is selected for Page size and the type of loaded photo paper for
Media type.
Note
To change the settings, select each item, and press the OK button.
See Changing the Settings .
The settings of the page size, media type, print quality, etc. are retained, and these
settings will appear next time when the Easy photo reprint menu is selected even if the
power is turned off and on.
(2) Confirm the number of sheets to be used for printing the selected photos.
Note
You can correct photos automatically or manually, if you press the left Function button to
select Advanced.
See Using Various Functions .
(3) Press the Color button to print in color, or the Black button to print in black &
white.
The machine starts printing.
Remove the photos on the Platen Glass after printing is completed.
Note
Page 38 of 949 pages
Reprinting Printed Photos
Page 39 of 949 pages
Press the Stop button to cancel printing.
You can exit the Easy photo reprint menu and display the HOME screen, if you press the
HOME button after printing is completed. Confirm the message and select Yes to delete the
scanned image data.
Page top
Using Various Functions
Page 40 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Printing Photos from Printed Photos > Using Various Functions
Using Various Functions
This section introduces a few of the useful functions in the Easy photo reprint menu.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
Printing Photos in Various Layouts
You can select a layout and print photos other than Select and print.
Sticker print
Print all photos
Correcting Images
You can correct images by pressing the left Function button when Advanced appears at the bottom of the
screen. You can correct images automatically or manually, such as adjusting brightness, contrast, and
color hue, or apply the fade restoration.
Brightness
Contrast
Page top
Scanning
Page 41 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Scanning
Scanning
You can forward scanned data to your computer, and edit or process them with the supplied software
application. You can also save scanned data on a memory card or USB flash drive inserted into the
machine.
Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer
Preparing for Scanning with the Operation Panel
Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer
Using Various Scan Functions
Page top
Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer
Page 42 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Scanning > Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer
Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer
You can forward scanned data to the computer with the USB cable or via a network.
This section describes the procedure to detect the type of original automatically with Auto scan, and
forward the scanned data to the computer connecting with the USB cable, according to the settings
specified with MP Navigator EX.
For other operations to save scanned data on a memory card or USB flash drive and to scan originals
from the computer, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Important
Please note that Canon shall not be liable for any damage or loss of the data for any reason
whatsoever, even within the warranty period of the machine.
Note
You can select Auto scan only when forwarding scanned data to the computer with the USB
cable.
The machine can detect the types of original with Auto scan: photo, postcard, business card,
magazine, newspaper, text document, and DVD/CD. For other originals, select the type of originals
to scan them.
Preparing for Scanning with the Operation Panel
Before scanning originals, confirm the following:
Are the necessary software applications (MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX) installed?
Install MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX from the Setup CD-ROM when it has not been installed or
has been uninstalled. To install MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX, select MP Drivers and MP
Navigator EX in Custom Install.
Are the type of original and processing method specified with MP Navigator EX?
When you forward scanned data to the computer with the Operation Panel, you can specify the
settings such as the type of original and processing method in Preferences of MP Navigator EX.
For details on the settings, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Does the original to be scanned meet the requirements for the original to be loaded on the Platen
Glass?
For details, see Originals You Can Load .
If the Machine Is Connected via USB
Confirm that the connection with USB cable between the machine and the computer is physically
secure.
Important
Do not plug in or unplug the USB cable while the machine is scanning originals with the
computer.
If the Machine Is Connected over a Network
When you use a computer connected over a network, confirm the following:
Is the machine selected in the settings screen of the Canon IJ Network
Scan Utility (Windows) or Canon IJ Network Scanner Selector
(Macintosh)?
For details on the setting procedure, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Is the Canon IJ Network Scan Utility/Canon IJ Network Scanner
Selector running?
Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer
Page 43 of 949 pages
For details, refer to the instructions for scanning over a network in the on-screen manual:
Advanced Guide .
If You Are Using Mac OS X v.10.3.9
You need to set MP Navigator EX as the starting software application in Image Capture under
Applications of Mac OS X.
(1) Select Applications on the Go menu, and double-click the Image Capture icon.
(2) Click Options at lower left of the scanner window, select MP Navigator EX 3 in
Application to launch when scanner button is pressed, then click OK.
To quit Image Capture, select Quit Image Capture on the Image Capture menu.
Note
If Options does not appear, select Preferences on the Image Capture menu, click Scanner, and
click Use TWAIN software whenever possible to clear the option. Then quit Image Capture and
restart it.
Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer
1.
Select the scan operation.
(1) Turn on the power.
See Operation Panel .
(2) Select Scan
on the HOME screen, and press the OK button.
(3) Use the Easy-Scroll Wheel (the
the OK button.
or
button) to select PC
, and press
The computer selection screen will appear.
(4) Use the Easy-Scroll Wheel (the or button) to select the computer to
forward scanned data, and press the OK button.
Here we select USB.
The document type selection screen will appear.
Note
For the network connection, select the computer name to forward scanned data in the list.
For the connection via USB only, only USB appears on the LCD.
(5) Use the Easy-Scroll Wheel (the
press the OK button.
or
button) to select the type of original, and
Here we select Auto scan.
Note
If the computer connected over a network is selected in (4), Auto scan does not appear
on the LCD.
The type of original other than Auto scan is Document and Photo. If you select other than
Auto scan, you can save all scanned data in a PDF file, attach it to a mail, or open it with a
software application.
Forwarding Scanned Data to the Computer
Page 44 of 949 pages
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
2.
Load an original on the Platen Glass.
Make sure to load the original correctly according to the type of original that you have selected.
See Loading Originals.
3.
Press the Color or Black button to start scanning.
MP Navigator EX will be started, the original will be scanned according to the settings specified with MP
Navigator EX, and then the scanned data will be forward to the computer.
Scanning... will appear while scanning the original.
If you want to scan another original, load it on the Platen Glass, and press the
Color or Black button again.
Remove the original on the Platen Glass after scanning is completed.
Important
Do not turn off the power while the machine is operating.
Do not open the Document Cover or move the loaded original until scanning is completed.
Note
Press the HOME button to exit the Scan menu and display the HOME screen.
Note
The position or size of the original may not be scanned correctly depending on the type of original.
If the scan is not performed correctly, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide to change
the settings in Document Type and Document Size of MP Navigator EX to match the original and
scan it again.
When the program selection screen appears:
The program selection screen may appear after performing step 3.
If the program selection screen appears, select MP Navigator EX Ver3.0 and click OK.
To start MP Navigator EX automatically without displaying the program selection screen, follow the
procedure below.
For Windows Vista users, refer to "For Windows Users" in " Troubleshooting " of the on-screen
manual: Advanced Guide .
For Windows XP users, select MP Navigator EX Ver3.0 as the software application to be used in
the program selection screen, select Always use this program for this action, then click OK.
Page top
Using Various Scan Functions
Page 45 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Scanning > Using Various Scan Functions
Using Various Scan Functions
You can forward the data scanned with the machine to a computer, and also save them on a USB flash
drive or memory card inserted into the machine.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
Selecting a Device to Save the Scanned Data
You can select the device to save scanned data as processing method as shown below.
Memory card
USB flash drive
Selecting Various Processing Methods
To forward the scanned data to the computer, you can select the processing method for scanned
data if other than Auto scan is selected for the type of original.
Save to PC
Save as PDF file
Attach to E-mail
Open with application
Note
Options for scan operation can be specified with MP Navigator EX.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Page top
Printing from Your Computer
Page 46 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Printing from Your Computer
Printing from Your Computer
This section describes the procedure to print documents or photos with a computer.
You can easily print photos taken with your digital camera by using Easy-PhotoPrint EX supplied with the
machine.
Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX)
Using Various Functions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Printing Documents (Windows)
Printing Documents (Macintosh)
For Mac OS X v.10.5.x
For Mac OS X v.10.4.x or Mac OS X v.10.3.9
Page top
Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX)
Page 47 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Printing from Your Computer > Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX)
Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX)
Print image data saved on your computer by using Easy-PhotoPrint EX supplied with the machine.
This section describes the procedure to print borderless photos on 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm photo paper.
For details on Easy-PhotoPrint EX, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Note
The screens used in this section are for printing with Windows. The operations are also the same
for printing with Macintosh.
Install Easy-PhotoPrint EX from the Setup CD-ROM when it has not been installed or has been
uninstalled. To install Easy-PhotoPrint EX, select Easy-PhotoPrint EX in Custom Install.
1.
Prepare for printing.
(1) Make sure that the machine is turned on.
See Operation Panel .
(2) Load paper.
See Loading Paper .
Here we load 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm photo paper in the Rear Tray.
Note
Load A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the Cassette and other sizes or types of paper
such as photo paper in the Rear Tray.
(3) Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
2.
Start Easy-PhotoPrint EX, and select Photo Print.
(1) Start Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Double-click
(Easy-PhotoPrint EX) on the desktop.
Click Here: Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX)
Page 48 of 949 pages
Select the Go menu, Applications, Canon Utilities, Easy-PhotoPrint EX, then double-click EasyPhotoPrint EX.
Note
To start Easy-PhotoPrint EX from Solution Menu, double-click
(Solution Menu) on the
desktop and click
(Print photos or albums, etc.).
See Solution Menu .
To start Easy-PhotoPrint EX from the Start menu, select All Programs (or Programs), Canon
Utilities, Easy-PhotoPrint EX, then Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
To start Easy-PhotoPrint EX from Solution Menu, click
(Solution Menu) in the Dock and
click
(Print photos or albums, etc.).
See Solution Menu .
(2) Click Photo Print.
Note
You can select Album, Calendar, Stickers, etc., besides Photo Print.
See Using Various Functions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
3.
Select a photo to print.
(1) Select the folder in which images are saved.
(2) Click the image to print.
The number of copies appears as "1", and the image you selected appears in the selected image area (A).
You can select two or more images at the same time.
Note
To print two or more copies, click
(Up arrow) to change the number of copies.
To cancel the selection, click the image to cancel in the selected image area and click
(Delete Imported Image). You can also use
(Down arrow) to change the number of
copies to zero.
You can also correct or enhance the selected image.
See Using Various Functions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
(3) Click Select Paper.
Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX)
4.
Page 49 of 949 pages
Select the loaded paper.
(1) Make sure that your machine's name is selected in Printer.
(2) Make sure that Automatically Select is selected in Paper Source.
Note
For details on other settings for Paper Source, refer to the on-screen manual:
Guide.
Advanced
(3) Select the size and type of the loaded paper in Paper Size and Media Type.
Here we select 4"x6" 10x15cm in Paper Size and the type of the loaded photo paper in Media Type.
Note
If you select A4 or Letter-sized plain paper when Automatically Select is selected in Paper
Source, the machine feeds the paper from the Cassette. If you select other sizes or types
of paper such as photo paper, the machine feeds the paper from the Rear Tray.
If you select the wrong page size or media type, the machine may feed paper from the
wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality.
(4) Click Layout/Print.
5.
Select a layout and start printing.
(1) Select the layout of the photo.
Here we select Borderless (full).
The preview will appear in the selected layout for confirmation of the required print result.
Note
You can change the direction of photo or crop photos (trimming) to print.
For details on the operation, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX)
Page 50 of 949 pages
(2) Click Print.
Note
To cancel a print job in progress, press the Stop button on the machine or click Cancel Printing
on the printer status monitor. After canceling the print job, blank sheets of paper may be
ejected.
To display the printer status monitor, click Canon XXX Printer (where " XXX" is your machine's
name) on the taskbar.
Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the list of print jobs in progress.
To cancel a print job in progress, select the desired job in the Name list and click Delete.
To temporarily stop a job in progress, click Hold. To temporarily stop all the jobs in the list, click
Pause Printer (or Stop Jobs). After canceling the print job, blank sheets of paper may be
ejected.
Page top
Using Various Functions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Page 51 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Printing from Your Computer > Printing Photos (Easy-PhotoPrint EX) > Using Various Functions of EasyPhotoPrint EX
Using Various Functions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX
This section introduces a few of the useful functions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
Creating Your Own Prints
You can create an album or calendar using your photos.
Album
Calendar
Stickers
Layout Print
Correcting Images
You can use Red-Eye Correction, Face Sharpener, Digital Face Smoothing, Brightness, Contrast,
etc. to adjust, correct, or enhance images automatically or manually.
Brightness
Page top
Printing Documents (Windows)
Page 52 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Printing from Your Computer > Printing Documents (Windows)
Printing Documents (Windows)
This section describes the procedure to print a document of A4 size on plain paper.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
Note
Operations may vary depending on your software application. For details on the operation, refer to
the instruction manual of your application.
The screens used in this section are for printing with Windows Vista operating system Ultimate
Edition (hereafter referred to as "Windows Vista").
1.
Make sure that the machine is turned on.
See Operation Panel .
2.
Load paper.
See Loading Paper .
Here we make sure that A4 plain paper is loaded in the Cassette.
Note
Load A4, B5, A5, or Letter-sized plain paper in the Cassette and other sizes or types of paper
such as photo paper in the Rear Tray.
3.
Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
4.
Create (or open) a document to print using an appropriate software application.
5.
Open the printer driver setup window.
(1) Select Print on the File menu or the command bar in your software application.
The Print dialog box will appear.
(2) Make sure that your machine's name is selected.
Note
If another printer's name is selected, click and select your machine's name.
(3) Click Preferences (or Properties).
Printing Documents (Windows)
6.
Specify the required print settings.
(1) Select Business Document in Commonly Used Settings.
Note
When the print object such as Business Document or Photo Printing is selected in
Commonly Used Settings, the items in Additional Features will be selected automatically.
The settings suitable for the print object such as media type or print quality will also
appear.
When you specify two or more copies in Copies, the Collate check box will be selected.
(2) Make sure of the displayed settings.
Here we make sure that Plain Paper in Media Type, Standard in Print Quality, A4 in Printer Paper Size, and
Automatically Select in Paper Source are selected.
Note
The settings can be changed.
However, after changing Printer Paper Size, confirm that the setting for Page Size on the
Page Setup sheet matches the setting set in the software application.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
If you select A4, B5, A5, or Letter-sized plain paper when Automatically Select is selected
in Paper Source, the machine feeds the paper from the Cassette. If you select other sizes
or types of paper such as photo paper, the machine feeds the paper from the Rear Tray.
If you select the wrong page size or media type, the machine may feed paper from the
wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality.
(3) Click OK.
Note
For details on the printer driver functions, click Help or Instructions to view the online help or
Page 53 of 949 pages
Printing Documents (Windows)
Page 54 of 949 pages
the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide . The Instructions button appears on the Quick Setup,
Main and Maintenance sheets if the on-screen manual is installed on your computer.
You can name the changed settings and add to Commonly Used Settings.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
If the Always Print with Current Settings check box is selected, the current settings will be
applied from the next print job onward. Some software applications may not have this
function.
To display the preview to confirm the print result, select the Preview before printing check
box. Some software applications may not have a preview function.
You can specify the detailed print settings on the Main sheet or Page Setup sheet.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
7.
Start printing.
Click Print (or OK) to start printing.
Note
To cancel a print job in progress, press the Stop button on the machine or click Cancel Printing
on the printer status monitor. After canceling the print job, blank sheets of paper may be
ejected.
To display the printer status monitor, click Canon XXX Printer (where " XXX" is your machine's
name) on the taskbar.
If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are unsatisfactory, adjust the print head
position.
See Aligning the Print Head .
Page top
Printing Documents (Macintosh)
Page 55 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Printing from Your Computer > Printing Documents (Macintosh)
Printing Documents (Macintosh)
This section describes the procedure to print a document of A4 size on plain paper.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
Note
Operations may vary depending on your software application. For details on the operation, refer to
the instruction manual of your application.
For Mac OS X v.10.5.x
1.
Make sure that the machine is turned on.
See Operation Panel .
2.
Load paper.
See Loading Paper .
Here we make sure that A4 plain paper is loaded in the Cassette.
Note
Load A4, B5, A5, or Letter-sized plain paper in the Cassette and other sizes or types of paper
such as photo paper in the Rear Tray.
3.
Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
4.
Create (or open) a document to print using an appropriate software application.
5.
Open the Print dialog box.
Select Print on the File menu in your software application.
The Print dialog box will appear.
Note
If the dialog box below appears, click
6.
(Down arrow).
Specify the required print settings.
(1) Make sure that your machine's name is selected in Printer.
Printing Documents (Macintosh)
Page 56 of 949 pages
(2) Select the page size of the loaded paper in Paper Size.
Here we select A4.
(3) Select Quality & Media in the pop-up menu.
(4) Select the media type of the loaded paper to print in Media Type.
Here we select Plain Paper.
Note
If you select A4, B5, A5, or Letter-sized plain paper when Automatically Select is selected
in Paper Source, the machine feeds the paper from the Cassette. If you select other sizes
or types of paper such as photo paper, the machine feeds the paper from the Rear Tray.
If you select the wrong page size or media type, the machine may feed paper from the
wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality.
(5) Make sure that Automatically Select is selected in Paper Source.
Note
For details on other settings for Paper Source, refer to the on-screen manual:
Guide.
Advanced
(6) Select the print quality in Print Quality.
Here we select Standard.
Note
For details on the print quality, refer to the on-screen manual:
Advanced Guide .
Note
(Question) on the Quality & Media, Color
For details on the printer driver functions, click
Options, Borderless Printing, or Duplex Printing & Margin screen.
The preview appears on the left of the dialog box to confirm the print result. Some software
applications may not have a preview function.
Printing Documents (Macintosh)
7.
Start printing.
Click Print to start printing.
Note
Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the list of print jobs in progress.
To cancel a print job in progress, select the desired job in the Name list and click Delete. To
temporarily stop a job in progress, click Hold. To temporarily stop all the jobs in the list, click
Pause Printer. After canceling the print job, blank sheets of paper may be ejected.
If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are unsatisfactory, adjust the print head
position.
See Aligning the Print Head .
For Mac OS X v.10.4.x or Mac OS X v.10.3.9
Note
The screens used in this section are for printing with Mac OS X v.10.4.x.
1.
Make sure that the machine is turned on.
See Operation Panel .
2.
Load paper.
See Loading Paper .
Here we make sure that A4 plain paper is loaded in the Cassette.
Note
Load A4, B5, A5, or Letter-sized plain paper in the Cassette and other sizes or types of paper
such as photo paper in the Rear Tray.
3.
Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
4.
Create (or open) a document to print using an appropriate software application.
5.
Specify the page size.
(1) Select Page Setup on the File menu in your software application.
The Page Setup dialog box will appear.
(2) Make sure that your machine's name is selected in Format for.
(3) Select the page size of the loaded paper in Paper Size.
Here we select A4.
(4) Click OK.
Page 57 of 949 pages
Printing Documents (Macintosh)
6.
Page 58 of 949 pages
Specify the required print settings.
(1) Select Print on the File menu in your software application.
The Print dialog box will appear.
(2) Make sure that your machine's name is selected in Printer.
(3) Select Quality & Media in the pop-up menu.
(4) Select the media type of the loaded paper in Media Type.
Here we select Plain Paper.
Note
If you select A4, B5, A5, or Letter-sized plain paper when Automatically Select is selected
in Paper Source, the machine feeds the paper from the Cassette. If you select other sizes
or types of paper such as photo paper, the machine feeds the paper from the Rear Tray.
If you select the wrong page size or media type, the machine may feed paper from the
wrong paper source or may not print with the proper print quality.
(5) Make sure that Automatically Select is selected in Paper Source.
Note
For details on other settings for Paper Source, refer to the on-screen manual:
Guide.
Advanced
(6) Select the print quality in Print Quality.
Here we select Standard.
Note
For details on the print quality, refer to the on-screen manual:
Advanced Guide .
Note
(Question) on the Quality & Media, Color
For details on the printer driver functions, click
Options, Special Effects, Borderless Printing, or Duplex Printing & Margin screen.
To display the preview to confirm the print result, click Preview. Some software applications
may not have a preview function.
Printing Documents (Macintosh)
7.
Page 59 of 949 pages
Start printing.
Click Print to start printing.
Note
Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the list of print jobs in progress.
To cancel a print job in progress, select the desired job in the Name list and click Delete. To
temporarily stop a job in progress, click Hold. To temporarily stop all the jobs in the list, click
Stop Jobs. After canceling the print job, blank sheets of paper may be ejected.
If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are unsatisfactory, adjust the print head
position.
See Aligning the Print Head .
Page top
Other Usages
Page 60 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Other Usages
Other Usages
This section introduces the procedure to print the template forms such as the notebook, etc., the setting
items of the machine, and the function to print directly from a digital camera or mobile phone.
This section also introduces useful software applications you can use with the machine.
Printing the Template Forms such as Notebook Paper
Printing the Various Template Forms
Printing Photos Directly from Your Digital Camera or Mobile Phone
Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device
Printing Photos from a Wireless Communication Device
Machine Settings
Useful Software Applications
Solution Menu
My Printer
Easy-WebPrint EX
Page top
Printing the Template Forms such as Notebook Paper
Page 61 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Other Usages > Printing the Template Forms such as Notebook Paper
Printing the Template Forms such as Notebook Paper
This section describes the procedure to select and print the template forms.
You need to prepare:
A4, B5, or Letter-sized plain paper. See Media Types You Can Use .
1.
Prepare for printing.
(1) Turn on the power.
See Operation Panel .
(2) Make sure that A4, B5, or Letter-sized plain paper is loaded in the Cassette.
See Loading Paper in the Cassette .
(3) Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
2.
Select a template form.
(1) Select Settings
on the HOME screen, and press the OK button.
(2) Select Template print
, and press the OK button.
(3) Use the Easy-Scroll Wheel (the
print, and press the OK button.
or
button) to select a template form to
Printing the Template Forms such as Notebook Paper
Page 62 of 949 pages
Note
For details on the available template forms, see Printing the Various Template Forms .
3.
Start printing.
(1) Confirm the page size and two-sided copy settings.
To change the setting, use the Easy-Scroll Wheel (the
press the OK button.
or
button) to select the item to change, and
Note
You can only select A4, B5, or 8.5"x11" (LTR) for Page size. B5 may not be available
depending on the selected template. The media type is limited to Plain paper and cannot be
changed.
(2) Press the [ +] or [-] button to specify the number of copies.
(3) Press the Color or Black button.
The machine starts printing.
Printing the Various Template Forms
You can print the following templates with Template print.
Notebook paper 1
8 mm spacing
Notebook paper 2
7 mm spacing
Notebook paper 3
6 mm spacing
Graph paper 1
Graph 5 mm
Graph paper 2
Graph 3 mm
Checklist
List with checkboxes
Printing the Template Forms such as Notebook Paper
Staff paper 1
Staff paper 10 staves
Handwriting paper
Rows of three lines
Page 63 of 949 pages
Weekly schedule
Vertical type
Staff paper 2
Staff paper 12 staves
Monthly schedule
Calendar type
Page top
Printing Photos Directly from Your Digital Camera or Mobile Phone
Advanced Guide
Page 64 of 949 pages
Troubleshooting
Contents > Other Usages > Printing Photos Directly from Your Digital Camera or Mobile Phone
Printing Photos Directly from Your Digital Camera or Mobile
Phone
Printing Photos from a PictBridge Compliant Device
You can connect the PictBridge compliant device to this machine with a USB cable that is recommended
by the device's manufacturer, and print saved images directly.
For details on how to print saved images connecting the PictBridge compliant device, refer to the onscreen manual: Advanced Guide .
For details on the print settings on the PictBridge compliant device, refer to the instruction manual
supplied with the device.
Connectable devices:
Any PictBridge compliant device can be connected to this machine regardless of the manufacturer or
model as long as it is compliant with the PictBridge Standard.
Important
Do not use the USB cable longer than around 10 feet / 3 meters to connect any PictBridge compliant
device to the machine since it may affect the operation of other peripheral devices.
Note
PictBridge is the Standard to print your photos directly without using a computer, connecting a
device such as a digital still camera, digital camcorder, or camera-equipped mobile phone.
(PictBridge) A device with this mark is PictBridge compliant.
Printable image data format:
This machine accepts images* taken with a camera compliant with the Design rule for Camera File
system and PNG files.
* Exif 2.2/2.21 compliant
Note
When printing from the PictBridge compliant device, set the print quality with the Operation Panel on
the machine. You cannot set the print quality on the PictBridge compliant device.
Printing Photos from a Wireless Communication Device
Printing Photos Directly from Your Digital Camera or Mobile Phone
Page 65 of 949 pages
If the optional Bluetooth Unit BU-30 is connected to the machine, you can print image data with wireless
communication from Bluetooth compatible mobile phones or computers.
For details on the operation, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
Page top
Machine Settings
Page 66 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Other Usages > Machine Settings
Machine Settings
This section describes the items you can set or change in Device settings of the Settings menu. For
details on setting or changing, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
Plain paper feed settings
Selects the paper source (Rear Tray or Cassette) in which you load plain paper. The machine feeds
plain paper from the Cassette by default. Use this setting to change the paper source for plain
paper to the Rear Tray.
Print settings
Prevent paper abrasion
Use this setting only if the print surface becomes smudged.
Extended copy amount
Selects the amount of image that extends off the paper when making borderless copies.
Auto Photo Fix setting
Selects whether or not to prioritize printing Exif information saved on a photo when Auto photo fix ON
is selected.
LAN settings
WLAN active/inactive
Selects whether to activate or inactivate the wireless LAN.
Wireless LAN setup
Configures the wireless LAN connection according to an access point or connection environment. If
the access point supports the WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), you can configure a wireless LAN
easily. The access point settings can also be configured manually.
For details, refer to the printed manual: Getting Started .
Confirm LAN settings
Displays the wireless LAN configurations of the machine on the LCD, or prints this information from
the machine.
Other settings
Configures other network settings including the printer's network name, IPv4/IPv6 settings, memory
card sharing, WSD (Web Services on Devices) setting, etc.
Reset LAN settings
Sets the machine network settings back to the default.
Advanced settings
Machine Settings
Page 67 of 949 pages
Date display
Selects the format of date that is printed or displayed on the screen.
Read/write attribute
Selects whether to use the Card Slot of the machine as the memory card drive of a computer.
Quiet mode
Enables this function if you want to reduce the operating noise of the machine, such as when using
the machine at night (when copying, printing from the memory card, printing from the PictBridge
compliant device, printing with wireless communication, etc.).
Guide display settings
Changes the time interval before the guide display, such as Change set. and Copy, appears at the
top of the LCD, or hides the guide display.
Key repeat
Enables to increase or decrease numbers rapidly by pressing and holding down the button when
inputting numbers. When this setting is disabled, holding down the button is the same as pressing
it once.
Mobile phone print setting
Specifies paper or image correction when you print from the wireless communication device. This
setting appears only when the optional Bluetooth Unit is connected to the machine.
Bluetooth settings
Changes the Bluetooth settings, such as the device name or passkey. This setting appears only
when the optional Bluetooth Unit is connected to the machine.
PictBridge print settings
Specifies paper, print quality, etc. when you print from the PictBridge compliant device.
Language selection
Changes the language for LCD messages and menus.
Reset setting
Sets the machine settings back to the default. (However, the settings configured in the LAN settings,
the values set for the print head alignment, the settings for Read/write attribute, and the language
set in the Language selection will not be reset).
Page top
Useful Software Applications
Page 68 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Other Usages > Useful Software Applications
Useful Software Applications
The machine can be used with useful software applications such as Solution Menu, My Printer, and Easy
-WebPrint EX.
Solution Menu
With Solution Menu, you can start the software applications supplied with the machine or display the
operating instructions.
Double-click
(Solution Menu) on the desktop.
Click Here: Solution Menu
Click
(Solution Menu) in the Dock.
* The screens below are for Windows Vista.
Click the button of a function to use.
After starting Solution Menu, click the button on the title bar to reduce the window size.
Note
Install Solution Menu from the Setup CD-ROM when it has not been installed or has been
uninstalled. To install Solution Menu, select Solution Menu in Custom Install.
The buttons displayed on the screen may vary depending on the country or region of purchase.
To start Solution Menu from the Start menu, select All Programs (or Programs), Canon Utilities,
Solution Menu, then Solution Menu.
To start Solution Menu from the menu bar, select the Go menu, Applications, Canon Utilities, Solution
Menu, then double-click Solution Menu.
My Printer
With My Printer, you can display the printer driver setup window. It also provides you with the information
on how to take an action when you have trouble with the operation.
My Printer is not available in Macintosh.
Useful Software Applications
Double-click
(My Printer) on the desktop.
Note
You can also start My Printer from Solution Menu or the taskbar.
Install My Printer from the Setup CD-ROM when it has not been installed or has been uninstalled. To
install My Printer, select My Printer in Custom Install.
To start My Printer from the Start menu, select All Programs (or Programs), Canon Utilities, My
Printer, then My Printer.
Easy-WebPrint EX
Easy-WebPrint EX provides quick and easy printing of web pages for Internet Explorer. You can print web
pages automatically resized to fit the paper width without cutting off the sides of pages, or preview and
select the desired web pages to print.
Easy-WebPrint EX is not available in Windows 2000 and Macintosh.
Important
It is unlawful to reproduce or edit the copyrighted work of another person without permission from
the copyright holder, except for personal use, use within the home, or other use within the limited
scope as defined by the copyright. Additionally, reproducing or editing photographs of people may
infringe on portrait rights.
When Easy-WebPrint EX is installed, it adds a toolbar to your Internet Explorer screen. The toolbar is
available whenever Internet Explorer is running.
The clip function, for example, allows you to clip desired parts of web pages and edit them to print.
Page 69 of 949 pages
Useful Software Applications
For details on printing web pages, click
Page 70 of 949 pages
(Help) to view the online help.
Note
Installing Easy-Web Print EX
If Easy-Web Print EX is not installed, the guidance for installation of Easy-Web Print EX may appear
from the taskbar on the desktop.
To install Easy-Web Print EX, click the displayed guidance and follow the instructions on the screen.
You can also install Easy-Web Print EX from the Setup CD-ROM .
To install Easy-Web Print EX, select Easy-Web Print EX in Custom Install.
To install Easy-Web Print EX on your computer, Internet Explorer 7 or later is required and the
computer must be connected to the Internet.
Page top
Loading Paper / Originals
Page 71 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Loading Paper / Originals
Loading Paper / Originals
This section describes types of paper or originals you can load, how to load printing paper in the Rear
Tray or Cassette, and how to load originals to copy or scan.
Loading Paper
Paper Source to Load Paper
Loading Paper in the Cassette
Loading Paper in the Rear Tray
Media Types You Can Use
Media Types You Cannot Use
Loading Originals
Loading Originals
How to Load Originals for Each Function
Originals You Can Load
Page top
Loading Paper
Page 72 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Paper
Loading Paper
Paper Source to Load Paper
Loading Paper in the Cassette
Loading Paper in the Rear Tray
Media Types You Can Use
Media Types You Cannot Use
Paper Source to Load Paper
The machine has two paper sources to feed paper; Cassette and Rear Tray.
You can load paper in either one of the paper sources, depending on the page size and media type of
paper. Paper is fed from the Cassette or Rear Tray depending on the selection of the page size or media
type.
See Media Types You Can Use .
Note
When printing, select the correct page size and media type. If you select the wrong page size or
media type, the machine may feed paper from the wrong paper source or may not print with the
proper print quality.
For details on how to load paper in each paper source, see Loading Paper in the Cassette or
Loading Paper in the Rear Tray .
Loading Plain Paper in the Cassette
When you use A4, B5, A5, or Letter-sized plain paper, load it in the Cassette.
The machine feeds paper from the Cassette automatically by selecting plain paper (A4, B5, A5, or
Letter size) in the print settings with the Operation Panel or the printer driver when printing.
For details on how to change the paper source setting, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced
Guide.
Loading Photo Paper in the Rear Tray
When you use photo paper, load it in the Rear Tray.
The machine feeds paper from the Rear Tray automatically by selecting the media types other than
plain paper, such as photo paper, in the print settings with the Operation Panel or the printer driver
when printing.
When you use plain paper other than A4, B5, A5, or Letter size, also load it in the Rear Tray.
Loading Paper
Page 73 of 949 pages
Page top
Loading Paper in the Cassette
Page 74 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Paper > Loading Paper in the Cassette
Loading Paper in the Cassette
You can load only A4, B5, A5, or Letter-sized plain paper in the Cassette.
Load other sizes or types of paper in the Rear Tray.
See Media Types You Can Use .
Note
We recommend Canon genuine photo paper for printing photos.
For details on the Canon genuine paper, see Media Types You Can Use .
You can use general copy paper.
For the page size and paper weight you can use for this machine, see Media Types You Can Use .
1.
Prepare paper.
Align the edges of paper. If paper is curled, flatten it.
Note
Align the edges of paper neatly before loading. Loading paper without aligning the edges may
cause paper jams.
If paper is curled, hold the curled corners and gently bend them in the opposite direction until
the paper becomes completely flat.
For details on how to flatten curled paper, refer to " Troubleshooting" in the on-screen manual:
Advanced Guide .
2.
Load paper.
(1) Pull out the Cassette from the machine.
(2) Load the paper stack WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING DOWN and THE
LEADING EDGE TO THE FAR SIDE, and align it against the right side of the
Cassette.
(3) Slide the Paper Guide (A) to align with the mark of page size.
Loading Paper in the Cassette
The Paper Guide (A) will stop when it aligns with the corresponding mark of page size.
Note
There may be a little space between the Paper Guide (A) and the paper stack.
(4) Slide the Paper Guide (B) on the left to align completely with the side of the
paper stack.
Note
Do not load sheets of paper higher than the Load Limit Mark (C).
(5) Insert the Cassette into the machine.
Push the Cassette all the way into the machine.
3.
Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
Note
After loading paper
When using the machine to copy or print without a computer, select the size and type of the
loaded paper for Page size and Media type of the print settings in each menu of the HOME
screen.
See Changing the Settings in "Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive" or
Changing the Settings in "Making Copies".
When printing with a computer, select the size and type of the loaded paper in Printer Paper
Size (or Paper Size) and Media Type in the printer driver.
Page 75 of 949 pages
Loading Paper in the Cassette
Page 76 of 949 pages
See Printing Documents (Windows) or Printing Documents (Macintosh) .
Page top
Loading Paper in the Rear Tray
Page 77 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Paper > Loading Paper in the Rear Tray
Loading Paper in the Rear Tray
You can load photo paper or envelope in the Rear Tray.
Loading Photo Paper
Important
If you cut plain paper into small size such as 4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm, 4" x 8" / 101.6 x 203.2 mm, 5" x 7"
/ 13 x 18 cm, or 2.16" x 3.58" / 55.0 x 91.0 mm (Card size) to perform trial print, it can cause paper
jams.
1.
Prepare paper.
See Prepare paper. in "Loading Paper in the Cassette".
Align the edges of paper. If paper is curled, flatten it.
2.
Load paper.
(1) Open the Paper Support, raise it, then tip it back.
(2) Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
(3) Slide the Paper Guides (A) to open them, and load the paper in the center of the
Rear Tray WITH THE PRINT SIDE FACING YOU.
Important
Always load paper in the portrait orientation (B). Loading paper in the landscape
orientation (C) can cause paper jams.
Loading Paper in the Rear Tray
(4) Slide the Paper Guides (A) to align them with both sides of the paper stack.
Do not slide the Paper Guides too hard. The paper may not be fed properly.
Note
Do not load sheets of paper higher than the Load Limit Mark (D).
Note
After loading paper
When using the machine to copy or print without a computer, select the size and type of the
loaded paper for Page size and Media type of the settings screen in each mode.
See Changing the Settings in "Printing Photos Saved on the Memory Card / USB Flash Drive" or
Page 78 of 949 pages
Loading Paper in the Rear Tray
Changing the Settings in "Making Copies".
When printing with a computer, select the size and type of the loaded paper in Printer Paper
Size (or Paper Size) and Media Type in the printer driver.
See Printing Documents (Windows) or Printing Documents (Macintosh) .
Loading Envelopes
You can print on European DL and US Comm.Env.#10-sized envelopes.
The address is automatically rotated and printed according to the envelope's direction by specifying
with the printer driver properly.
Important
You can only print on envelopes with the computer.
You cannot use the following envelopes.
- Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface
- Envelopes with a double flap (or sticker flaps)
- Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive
1.
Prepare envelopes.
Press down on all four corners and edges of the envelopes to flatten them.
If the envelopes are curled, hold the opposite corners and gently twist them in the
opposite direction.
If the corner of the envelope flap is folded, flatten it.
Use a pen to press the leading edge in the inserting direction flat and sharpen the
crease.
The figures above show a side view of the leading edge of the envelope.
Important
The envelopes may jam in the machine if they are not flat or the edges are not aligned. Make
sure that no curl or puff exceeds 0.1 inches / 3 mm.
2.
Load envelopes.
(1) Open the Paper Support, raise it, then tip it back.
See Load paper. in "Loading Photo Paper" of "Loading Paper in the Rear Tray".
(2) Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
See Load paper. in "Loading Photo Paper" of "Loading Paper in the Rear Tray".
Page 79 of 949 pages
Loading Paper in the Rear Tray
(3) Slide the Paper Guides (A) to open them, and load the envelopes in the center of
the Rear Tray WITH THE ADDRESS SIDE FACING YOU.
The folded flap of the envelope will be faced down on the left side.
Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded at once.
(4) Slide the Paper Guides (A) to align them with both sides of the envelopes.
Do not slide the Paper Guides too hard. The envelopes may not be fed properly.
(B) Rear side
(C) Address side
3.
Specify the settings with the printer driver.
(1) Select Envelope in Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup sheet.
(2) Select DL Env. or Comm.Env.#10 in the Envelope Size Setting window.
(3) Select Landscape in Orientation.
(1) Select Envelope in Media Type.
(2) Select DL Envelope or #10 Envelope in Paper Size.
(3) Select the landscape orientation in Orientation.
Important
If you do not specify the envelope size or orientation properly, the address will be printed
upside down or will be turned to 90 degrees.
Note
In Windows, if the print result is upside down, open the printer driver setup window, select
Envelope in Commonly Used Settings, then select the Rotate 180 degrees check box in
Additional Features.
For details on the printer driver settings, see Printing Documents (Windows) or Printing
Documents (Macintosh) .
Page 80 of 949 pages
Loading Paper in the Rear Tray
Page 81 of 949 pages
Page top
Media Types You Can Use
Page 82 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Paper > Media Types You Can Use
Media Types You Can Use
Choose paper suitable for printing, for the best print results. Canon provides you various types of paper
to enhance the fun of printing, such as stickers as well as papers for photo or document. We
recommend the use of Canon genuine paper for printing your important photos.
Media Types
Commercially available papers
Name of
Paper
<Model
Paper Load Limit
Plain Paper
(Recycled
paper) *2
Envelopes *4
Cassette
Rear Tray
No.>*1
Paper Output
Tray Load
Limit
Settings in Media Type
Printer
Driver
Operation
Panel
Approx. 150
sheets*3
A4, B5, A5, and Letter /
8.5" x 11": Approx. 150
sheets
Approx. 50
sheets
Plain paper
Plain Paper
10 envelopes
Not loadable *5
*6
-
Envelope
Canon genuine papers
Paper Load Limit
Name of Paper
<Model No.> *1
Rear Tray
Cassette
Paper
Output Tray
Load Limit
Not
*6
Settings in Media Type
Operation
Panel
Printer
Driver
For printing photos:
Photo Paper Pro
Platinum
<PT-101>*7
Photo Paper Pro
II
A4, Letter / 8.5" x 11", 5"
x 7" / 13 x 18 cm, and 8"
x 10" / 20 x 25 cm: 10
sheets
4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm: 20
sheets
Pro Platinum
Photo Paper
Pro Platinum
Pro II
Photo Paper
loadable *5
Pro II
<PR-201>*7
Glossy Photo
Paper "Everyday
Use"
Glossy Photo Glossy Photo
Paper
Paper
<GP-501>*7
Photo Paper
Glossy
Glossy Photo Glossy Photo
Paper
Paper
<GP-502>*7
Photo Paper Plus
Glossy II
Plus Glossy II Photo Paper
Plus Glossy II
<PP- 201>*7
Photo Paper Plus
Semi-gloss
Plus Semi-
gloss
Photo Paper
Plus Semigloss
Matte Photo
Paper
Matte Photo
Paper
<SG-201>*7
Matte Photo
Paper
Media Types You Can Use
Page 83 of 949 pages
<MP-101>
For printing business documents:
High Resolution
Paper
80 sheets
Not
50 sheets
-
High
Resolution
Paper
*6
-
T-Shirt
loadable *5
<HR-101N> *4
For creating your own prints:
T-Shirt
1 sheet
Not
loadable *5
Transfers
Transfers
<TR-301>*4
Photo Stickers
1 sheet
<PS-101> *8, *9
Glossy Photo Glossy Photo
Paper
Paper
*1 Paper with a Model Number is Canon genuine paper. Refer to the instruction manual supplied with
the paper for detailed information on the printable side and notes on handling paper. For information on
the page sizes available for each Canon genuine paper, visit our website. You may not be able to
purchase some Canon genuine papers depending on the country or region of purchase. Paper is not
sold in the US by Model Number. Purchase paper by name.
*2 Proper feeding of paper may not be possible at the maximum capacity depending on the type of paper
or environmental conditions (either very high or low temperature or humidity). In such cases, reduce the
number of paper you load at a time to less than half (100% recycled paper can be used).
*3 A4, B5, A5, or Letter-sized plain paper can be loaded only when Rear tray is selected for Plain paper
feed settings in Device settings of the Settings menu.
For details on the settings, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
*4 Available only when printing from your computer.
*5 Feeding this paper from the Cassette can damage the machine. Always load in the Rear Tray.
*6 We recommend that you remove the previously printed sheet from the Paper Output Tray before
continuously printing to avoid blurs and discoloration.
*7 When loading paper in stacks, the print side may become marked as it is fed or paper may not feed
properly. In this case, load one sheet at a time.
*8 When scanning printed photos to print onto sticker paper, be sure to select Sticker print in Easy photo
reprint. If Sticker print is selected, the type of paper cannot be selected.
See Printing Photos in Various Layouts .
When printing photos saved on a memory card or USB flash drive onto sticker paper, be sure to select
Sticker print in Memory card. If Sticker print is selected, the type of paper cannot be selected.
See Printing Photos in Various Layouts .
When printing photos saved on your mobile phone onto sticker paper, select Stickers for the page size in
Mobile phone print setting. Refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide.
*9 You can easily specify print settings for sticker paper with Easy-PhotoPrint EX provided on the Setup
CD-ROM . Install it on your computer.
Note
To specify the page size and media type when printing photos saved on a PictBridge compliant
device or mobile phone, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Page Sizes
You can use the following page sizes.
Note
Media Types You Can Use
Page 84 of 949 pages
You can load plain paper of the following page sizes in the Cassette:
A4, B5, A5, and Letter sizes
Plain paper of other sizes cannot be loaded in the Cassette. Load them in the Rear Tray.
In Macintosh, Choukei 3 and Choukei 4 are not available.
Standard sizes:
Letter (8.50 x 11.00 inches / 215.9 x 279.4 mm)
Legal (8.50 x 14.00 inches / 215.9 x 355.6 mm)
A5 (5.83 x 8.27 inches / 148.0 x 210.0 mm)
A4 (8.27 x 11.69 inches / 210.0 x 297.0 mm)
B5 (7.17 x 10.12 inches / 182.0 x 257.0 mm)
4" x 6" (4.00 x 6.00 inches / 10 x 15 cm)
4" x 8" (4.00 x 8.00 inches / 101.6 x 203.2 mm)
5" x 7" (5.00 x 7.00 inches / 13 x 18 cm)
8" x 10" (8.00 x 10.00 inches / 20 x 25 cm)
L (3.50 x 5.00 inches / 89.0 x 127.0 mm)
2L (5.00 x 7.01 inches / 127.0 x 178.0 mm)
Hagaki (3.94 x 5.83 inches / 100.0 x 148.0 mm)
Hagaki 2 (7.87 x 5.83 inches / 200.0 x 148.0 mm)
Comm.Env.#10 (4.12 x 9.50 inches / 104.6 x 241.3 mm)
DL Env.(4.33 x 8.66 inches / 110.0 x 220.0 mm)
Choukei 3 (4.72 x 9.25 inches / 120.0 x 235.0 mm)
Choukei 4 (3.54 x 8.07 inches / 90.0 x 205.0 mm)
Youkei 4 (4.13 x 9.25 inches / 105.0 x 235.0 mm)
Youkei 6 (3.86 x 7.48 inches / 98.0 x 190.0 mm)
Card (2.16 x 3.58 inches / 55.0 x 91.0 mm)
Wide (4.00 x 7.10 inches / 101.6 x 180.6 mm)
Non-standard sizes:
You can also specify a custom size within the following range.
Minimum size:
2.17 x 3.58 inches / 55.0 x 91.0 mm (Rear Tray)
5.83 x 8.27 inches / 148.0 x 210.0 mm (Cassette)
Maximum size:
8.50 x 26.61 inches / 215.9 x 676.0 mm (Rear Tray)
8.50 x 11.69 inches / 215.9 x 297.0 mm (Cassette)
Paper Weight
17 to 28 lb / 64 to 105 g/m 2 (except for Canon genuine paper)
Do not use heavier or lighter paper (except for Canon genuine paper), as it could jam in the machine.
Notes on Storing Paper
Take out only the necessary number of paper from the package, just before printing.
To avoid curling, when you do not print, put unused paper back into the package and keep it on a
level surface. And also, store it avoiding heat, humidity, and direct sunlight.
Notes on Paper for Full-page Borderless Printing
You cannot use A5, B5, and Legal-sized paper, and envelopes for full-page borderless printing.
You can use plain paper for full-page borderless printing only when printing from a computer.
However, this may result in lower print quality. We recommend using plain paper for a trial print.
Page top
Media Types You Cannot Use
Page 85 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Paper > Media Types You Cannot Use
Media Types You Cannot Use
Do not use the following types of paper. Using such paper will cause not only unsatisfactory results, but
also the machine to jam or malfunction.
Folded, curled, or wrinkled paper
Damp paper
Paper that is too thin (weighing less than 17 lb / 64 g/m 2)
Paper that is too thick (weighing more than 28 lb / 105 g/m 2, except for Canon genuine paper)
Paper thinner than a postcard, including plain paper or notepad paper cut to a small size (when
printing on paper smaller than A5)
Picture postcards
Postcards affixed with photos or stickers
Envelopes with a double flap (or sticker flaps)
Envelopes with an embossed or treated surface
Envelopes whose gummed flaps are already moistened and adhesive
Any type of paper with holes
Paper that is not rectangular
Paper bound with staples or glue
Paper with adhesives
Paper decorated with glitter, etc.
Page top
Loading Originals
Page 86 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Originals
Loading Originals
Loading Originals
How to Load Originals for Each Function
Originals You Can Load
This section describes the procedure to load originals on the Platen Glass.
You may have to load the original in a different position depending on the function you selected in Copy,
Easy photo reprint, or Scan. Load the original in the correct position according to the selected function. If
you do not load the original correctly, it may not be scanned properly.
Important
After loading the original on the Platen Glass, be sure to close the Document Cover before starting
to copy or scan.
Loading Originals
You can load originals to copy or scan on the Platen Glass.
1.
Load an original on the Platen Glass.
(1) Open the Document Cover.
Important
Do not place any object on the Document Cover. It will fall into the Rear Tray when the
Document Cover is opened and cause the machine to malfunction.
(2) Load the original WITH THE SIDE TO COPY OR SCAN FACING DOWN on the
Platen Glass.
Make sure the proper position to load the original for each function.
See How to Load Originals for Each Function .
Important
Do not place any objects weighing more than 4.4 lb / 2.0 kg on the Platen Glass.
Do not press or put weight on the original with pressure exceeding 4.4 lb / 2.0 kg. Doing so
may cause the scanner to malfunction or the Platen Glass to break.
Loading Originals
2.
Page 87 of 949 pages
Close the Document Cover gently.
Page top
How to Load Originals for Each Function
Page 88 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Originals > How to Load Originals for Each Function
How to Load Originals for Each Function
Load originals to make copy
Select in the Scan menu
- USB flash drive or Memory card to scan originals
- PC to scan magazine, newspaper, or text document
Scan magazine, newspaper, or text document with a software
application on a computer
Load the original WITH THE SIDE TO READ FACING DOWN to be aligned with the alignment mark
.
Important
The machine cannot scan the shaded area (A) (0.04 inches / 1 mm from the edges of the
Platen Glass).
Load printed photos in Easy photo reprint
Select PC in the Scan menu and scan printed photo, postcard,
business card, or DVD/CD
Scan printed photo, postcard, business card, or DVD/CD with a
software application on a computer
Load the original WITH THE SIDE TO SCAN FACING DOWN in an appropriate way according to the
number of originals.
How to Load Originals for Each Function
Page 89 of 949 pages
Load only one original
Load the original at least 0.4 inches / 10 mm away from the edges of the Platen Glass.
Load two or more originals
Place two or more originals at least 0.4 inches / 10 mm away from the edges of the Platen Glass
and at least 0.4 inches / 10 mm apart from each other.
(A) 0.4 inches / 10 mm
Note
The Skew Correction function automatically compensates for the originals placed at an angle
of up to approximately 10 degrees.
Slanted photos with a long edge of 7.1 inches / 180 mm or more cannot be corrected.
Page top
Originals You Can Load
Page 90 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Loading Paper / Originals > Loading Originals > Originals You Can Load
Originals You Can Load
You can copy or scan the following originals.
Types of originals:
Text document, magazine, or newspaper
Printed photo, postcard, business card, or DVD/CD
Size (W x L):
Max. 8.5 x 11.7 inches / 216 x 297 mm
Note
When loading a thick original such as a book on the Platen Glass, you can load it by removing the
Document Cover from the machine.
For details on how to remove or attach the Document Cover, refer to the on-screen manual:
Advanced Guide .
Page top
Routine Maintenance
Page 91 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Routine Maintenance
Routine Maintenance
This section describes the procedure to replace ink tanks when they run out of ink, to clean the machine
when the print result is faint, or to take an action when paper does not feed properly.
Replacing an Ink Tank
Replacing Procedure
Checking the Ink Status
When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern
Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern
Cleaning the Print Head
Cleaning the Print Head Deeply
Aligning the Print Head
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller
Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette
Page top
Replacing an Ink Tank
Page 92 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Routine Maintenance > Replacing an Ink Tank
Replacing an Ink Tank
When ink runs out while printing is in progress, an error message will appear on the LCD or your
computer screen. Make sure which ink tank has run out of ink and replace it with a new one.
Note
If the error message appears, confirm the displayed message and take an appropriate action.
For details, refer to "An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD" in " Troubleshooting " of the onscreen manual: Advanced Guide .
For information on the compatible ink tanks, refer to the printed manual: Getting Started .
If print results become faint or white streaks appear despite sufficient ink levels, see When Printing
Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect .
Replacing Procedure
When the ink tanks run out of ink, follow the procedure below to replace them.
Important
Handling ink
To maintain optimal print quality, we recommend the use of specified Canon brand ink tanks. Refilling
the ink is not recommended.
If you remove an ink tank, replace it immediately. Do not leave the machine with ink tanks removed.
Use new ink tanks for replacement. Installing used ink tanks may cause the nozzles to clog.
Furthermore, with such ink tanks, the machine will not be able to inform you when to replace the ink
tanks properly.
Once an ink tank has been installed, do not remove it from the machine and leave it out in the open.
This will cause the ink tank to dry out, and the machine may not operate properly when it is
reinstalled. To maintain optimal printing quality, use an ink tank within six months of first use.
Note
Color ink may be consumed even when printing a black-and-white document or when black-andwhite printing is specified.
Every ink is also consumed in the standard cleaning and deep cleaning of the Print Head, which
may be necessary to maintain the machine's performance. When an ink tank is out of ink, replace it
immediately with a new one.
1.
Make sure that the power is turned on, and open the Paper Output Tray gently.
2.
Lift the Scanning Unit (Cover) until it stops.
The Print Head Holder moves to the replacement position.
Replacing an Ink Tank
Caution
Do not hold the Print Head Holder to stop or move it forcibly. Do not touch the Print Head Holder
until it stops completely.
Important
Do not place any object on the Document Cover. It will fall into the Rear Tray when the
Document Cover is opened and cause the machine to malfunction.
Be sure to lift the Scanning Unit (Cover) with the Document Cover closed.
Do not touch the metallic parts or other parts inside the machine.
If the Scanning Unit (Cover) is left open, the Print Head Holder moves to the right. In this case,
close and reopen the Scanning Unit (Cover).
Note
The machine may make operating noise when the Print Head Holder moves to the replacement
position.
3.
Remove the ink tank with the lamp flashing fast.
Push the tab (A) and lift the ink tank to remove.
Do not touch the Print Head Lock Lever (B).
Important
Handle the ink tank carefully to avoid staining of clothing or the surrounding area.
Discard the empty ink tank according to the local laws and regulations regarding disposal of
consumables.
Note
Do not remove two or more ink tanks at the same time. Be sure to replace ink tanks one by one
when replacing two or more ink tanks.
For details on ink lamp flashing speed, see Checking the Ink Status .
Page 93 of 949 pages
Replacing an Ink Tank
4.
Page 94 of 949 pages
Prepare the new ink tank.
(1) Take a new ink tank out of its package, pull the orange tape (
).
of the arrow to peel it off, then remove the film (
) in the direction
Important
Make sure that the film is completely removed from the air hole (C).
If the air hole is blocked with the remaining film, ink may leak out or may not eject properly.
(2) Hold the orange protective cap (D) as indicated in the figure below, then twist
and remove it from the bottom of the ink tank.
Remove the protective cap while holding it to prevent the ink from staining your fingers.
Discard the protective cap once it is removed.
Important
Do not touch the electrical contacts (E) on the ink tank. It can cause the machine to
malfunction or become unable to print.
Important
If you shake the ink tank, the ink may spill out and stain your hands and the surrounding area.
Be careful to handle the ink tank.
Do not squeeze the side of ink tanks as this may cause the ink to leak out.
Be careful not to stain your hands and the surrounding area with ink on the removed
protective cap.
Do not reattach the protective cap once you have removed it. Discard it according to the local
laws and regulations regarding disposal of consumables.
Do not touch the open ink port once the protective cap is removed, as this may prevent the ink
from being ejected properly.
Replacing an Ink Tank
5.
Page 95 of 949 pages
Install the new ink tank.
(1) Insert the front end of ink tank into the Print Head at a slant.
Make sure that the position of the ink tank matches the label.
(2) Press the mark
place.
(Push) on the ink tank until the ink tank snaps firmly into
Make sure that the ink lamp lights up red.
Important
You cannot print if the ink tank is installed in the wrong position. Be sure to install the ink tank in
the correct position according to the label on the Print Head Holder.
You cannot print unless all the ink tanks are installed. Be sure to install all the ink tanks.
6.
Lift the Scanning Unit (Cover) slightly, and then close it gently.
Note
If the error message appears after the Scanning Unit (Cover) is closed, refer to "
Troubleshooting" in the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
When you start printing after replacing the ink tank, the machine starts cleaning the Print Head
automatically. Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the cleaning of
the Print Head.
If printed ruled lines are misaligned or the print head position is misaligned, adjust the print head
position.
See Aligning the Print Head .
The machine may make noise during operation.
Page top
Checking the Ink Status
Page 96 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Routine Maintenance > Replacing an Ink Tank > Checking the Ink Status
Checking the Ink Status
You can check the ink status on the LCD or with ink lamps.
With the LCD on the Machine
(1) Make sure that the power is turned on, and press the HOME button.
(2) Press the left Function button.
Check if any symbol (A) appears on the remaining ink volume screen.
Sufficient ink is left for printing if no symbol appears.
(Ink low) is running low. You can continue printing for a while, but we recommend you to
The ink with
have a new ink tank available.
Note
You can also check the ink status on a screen of the LCD displayed while printing.
With Ink Lamps
(1) Make sure that the power is turned on, and open the Paper Output Tray gently.
(2) Lift the Scanning Unit (Cover) until it stops.
See Lift the Scanning Unit (Cover) until it stops. in "Replacing Procedure".
(3) Check the ink lamps.
Close the Scanning Unit (Cover) after confirming the ink lamp status.
Ink lamp is on
The ink tank is correctly installed and there is sufficient ink left for printing.
Ink lamp is flashing
Flashing slowly (at around 3-second intervals)
...... Repeats
Ink is low. You can continue printing for a while, but we recommend you to have a new ink tank available.
Flashing fast (at around 1-second intervals)
...... Repeats
The ink tank is installed in the wrong position or it is empty. Make sure that the ink tank is installed in the
Checking the Ink Status
Page 97 of 949 pages
correct position as indicated by the label on the Print Head Holder. If the position is correct but the lamp
flashes, the ink tank is empty. Replace it with a new one.
Ink lamp is off
The ink tank is not installed properly or the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled. If the ink
(Push) on the ink tank until the ink tank clicks into place. If it
tank is not installed properly, press the mark
does not click into place, make sure that the orange protective cap has been removed from the bottom of
the ink tank. If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is disabled, replace the ink tank with a new
one.
See Replacing Procedure .
If the ink lamp is still off after reinstalling the ink tank, there has been an error and the machine cannot print.
Check the error message displayed on the LCD.
Refer to "Troubleshooting" in the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Page top
When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect
Page 98 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect
When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect
If print results are blurred or colors are not printed correctly, the pint head nozzles are probably clogged.
Follow the procedure below to print the nozzle check pattern, check the print head nozzle condition, then
clean the Print Head.
If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, aligning the Print Head
may improve print quality.
Important
Do not rinse or wipe the Print Head and ink tanks. This can cause trouble with the Print Head and ink
tanks.
Note
Before performing maintenance
Open the Scanning Unit (Cover) and make sure that all lamps on the ink tanks are lit red.
If not, see Checking the Ink Status and take an appropriate action.
Increasing the print quality in the printer driver settings may improve the print result.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
When the Print Results Are Blurred or Uneven:
Step 1
See Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern .
See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern.
If there are missing lines or horizontal white streaks in
the pattern:
After cleaning the Print Head, print
and examine the nozzle check
pattern.
Step 2
See Cleaning the Print Head .
If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Print Head
twice:
Step 3
See Cleaning the Print Head Deeply .
Note
When you have performed the procedure until step 3 and the problem has not been resolved, turn
off the power and clean the Print Head deeply again after 24 hours. If the problem is still not
resolved, the Print Head may be damaged. Contact the service center.
When the Print Results Are Not Even such as the Ruled Lines
Are Misaligned:
See Aligning the Print Head .
When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect
Page 99 of 949 pages
Note
You can also perform the maintenance operations from your computer.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Page top
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern
Page 100 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect > Printing the Nozzle Check
Pattern
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern
Print the nozzle check pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head nozzles.
Note
If the remaining ink level is low, the nozzle check pattern will not be printed correctly. Replace the
ink tank whose ink is low.
See Replacing an Ink Tank .
You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper
1.
Make sure that the power is turned on.
2.
Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper are loaded in
the Cassette.
3.
Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
4.
Print the nozzle check pattern.
(1) Select Settings
on the HOME screen, and press the OK button.
The Settings screen will appear.
(2) Select Maintenance
, and press the OK button.
The Maintenance screen will appear.
(3) Select Nozzle check pattern, and press the OK button.
The pattern print confirmation screen will appear.
(4) Select Yes, and press the OK button.
The nozzle check pattern will be printed and two pattern confirmation screens will appear on the LCD.
5.
Examine the nozzle check pattern.
See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern.
Printing the Nozzle Check Pattern
Page 101 of 949 pages
Page top
Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern
Page 102 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect > Examining the Nozzle
Check Pattern
Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern
Examine the nozzle check pattern, and clean the Print Head if necessary.
1.
Check if there are missing lines in the pattern (1) or horizontal white streaks in the
pattern (2).
(A) No missing lines/No horizontal white streaks
(B) Lines are missing/Horizontal white streaks are present
2.
Select the pattern that is closer to the printed nozzle check pattern on the
confirmation screen.
For (A) (no missing lines or no horizontal white streaks) in both
(1) and (2):
(1) Select All A and press the OK button.
The cleaning is not required.
(2) Confirm the message and press the OK button.
The screen will return to the Maintenance screen.
Note
Press the HOME button to exit the Settings menu and display the HOME screen.
Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern
For (B) (lines are missing or horizontal white streaks are present) in
Page 103 of 949 pages
(1) or (2), or in both (1) and
(2):
(1) Select Also B and press the OK button.
Clean the Print Head. The cleaning confirmation screen will appear.
(2) Select Yes and press the OK button.
The machine starts cleaning the Print Head.
See Cleaning the Print Head .
Page top
Cleaning the Print Head
Page 104 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect > Cleaning the Print Head
Cleaning the Print Head
Clean the Print Head if lines are missing or if horizontal white streaks are present in the printed nozzle
check pattern. Cleaning unclogs the nozzles and restores the print head condition. Cleaning the Print
Head consumes ink, so clean the Print Head only when necessary.
You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper
1.
Make sure that the power is turned on.
2.
Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper are loaded in
the Cassette.
3.
Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
4.
Clean the Print Head.
(1) Select Settings
on the HOME screen, and press the OK button.
The Settings screen will appear.
(2) Select Maintenance
, and press the OK button.
The Maintenance screen will appear.
(3) Select Cleaning, and press the OK button.
The confirmation screen will appear.
(4) Select Yes, and press the OK button.
The machine starts cleaning the Print Head.
Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the cleaning of the Print Head. This takes
about 1 minute 30 seconds.
The pattern print confirmation screen will appear.
(5) Select Yes, and press the OK button.
The nozzle check pattern will be printed.
5.
Examine the nozzle check pattern.
See Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern.
Note
Press the HOME button to exit the Settings menu and display the HOME screen.
If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Print Head twice, clean the Print Head deeply.
Cleaning the Print Head
Page 105 of 949 pages
See Cleaning the Print Head Deeply .
Page top
Cleaning the Print Head Deeply
Page 106 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect > Cleaning the Print Head
Deeply
Cleaning the Print Head Deeply
If print quality does not improve by the standard cleaning of the Print Head, clean the Print Head deeply.
Cleaning the Print Head deeply consumes more ink than the standard cleaning of the Print Head, so
clean the Print Head deeply only when necessary.
You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper
1.
Make sure that the power is turned on.
2.
Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper are loaded in
the Cassette.
3.
Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
4.
Clean the Print Head deeply.
(1) Select Settings
on the HOME screen, and press the OK button.
The Settings screen will appear.
(2) Select Maintenance
, and press the OK button.
The Maintenance screen will appear.
(3) Select Deep cleaning, and press the OK button.
The confirmation screen will appear.
(4) Select Yes, and press the OK button.
The machine starts cleaning the Print Head deeply.
Do not perform any other operations until the machine completes the deep cleaning of the Print Head. This
takes about 2 minutes.
The pattern print confirmation screen will appear.
(5) Select Yes, and press the OK button.
The nozzle check pattern will be printed.
5.
Examine the nozzle check pattern.
See step 1 in Examining the Nozzle Check Pattern.
If a particular color is not printed properly, replace the ink tank of that color.
See Replacing an Ink Tank .
Cleaning the Print Head Deeply
Page 107 of 949 pages
If the problem is not resolved, turn off the power and clean the Print Head deeply again after 24 hours.
If the problem is still not resolved, the Print Head may be damaged. Contact the service center.
Note
Press the HOME button to exit the Settings menu and display the HOME screen.
Page top
Aligning the Print Head
Page 108 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Routine Maintenance > When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect > Aligning the Print Head
Aligning the Print Head
If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, adjust the print head
position.
Note
If the remaining ink level is low, the print head alignment sheet will not be printed correctly. Replace
the ink tank whose ink is low.
See Replacing an Ink Tank .
The print head alignment pattern is printed in black and blue.
You need to prepare: a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper*
* Be sure to use paper that is white and clean on both sides.
1.
Make sure that the power is turned on.
2.
Make sure that one or more sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper are loaded in
the Cassette.
3.
Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
4.
Print the print head alignment sheet.
(1) Select Settings
on the HOME screen, and press the OK button.
The Settings screen will appear.
(2) Select Maintenance
, and press the OK button.
The Maintenance screen will appear.
(3) Select Auto head align, and press the OK button.
The confirmation screen will appear.
(4) Select Yes, and press the OK button.
The print head alignment sheet will be printed.
Aligning the Print Head
Page 109 of 949 pages
Important
Do not touch any printed part on the print head alignment sheet.
Be careful not to get the print head alignment sheet dirty. If the sheet is stained or
wrinkled, it may not be scanned properly.
(5) When the message "Did the patterns print correctly?" appears, confirm that the
pattern is printed correctly, select Yes, then press the OK button.
5.
Scan the print head alignment sheet to adjust the print head position.
(1) Load the print head alignment sheet on the Platen Glass.
Load the print head alignment sheet WITH THE PRINTED SIDE FACING DOWN and align the mark
upper left corner of the sheet with the alignment mark
on the
.
(2) Close the Document Cover gently, and press the OK button.
The machine starts scanning the print head alignment sheet, and the print head position will be adjusted
automatically.
When adjusting the print head position is completed, remove the print head alignment sheet on the Platen
Glass.
Aligning the Print Head
Page 110 of 949 pages
Important
Do not open the Document Cover or remove the print head alignment sheet on the Platen
Glass until adjusting the print head position is completed.
If the massage "Failed to scan." appears, press the OK button and confirm the following:
- The Platen Glass and print head alignment sheet are not dirty.
- The print head alignment sheet is placed in the correct position with the printed side
facing down.
Refer to "Troubleshooting" in the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Note
Press the HOME button to exit the Settings menu and display the HOME screen.
If the print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position as
described above, adjust the print head position manually from a computer.
For details, refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
To print and check the current head position adjustment values, select Head alignment print
in the Maintenance menu.
Page top
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller
Page 111 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Routine Maintenance > Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller
If the Paper Feed Roller is dirty or paper powder is attached to it, paper may not be fed properly.
In this case, clean the Paper Feed Roller. Cleaning will wear out the Paper Feed Roller, so perform this
only when necessary.
You need to prepare: three sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper
1.
Make sure that the power is turned on.
2.
Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
3.
Select Roller cleaning.
(1) Select Settings
on the HOME screen, and press the OK button.
The Settings screen will appear.
(2) Select Maintenance
, and press the OK button.
The Maintenance screen will appear.
(3) Select Roller cleaning, and press the OK button.
The confirmation screen will appear.
(4) Select Yes, and press the OK button.
(5) Select the paper source to clean (Rear tray or Cassette), and press the OK
button.
4.
Clean the Paper Feed Roller without paper.
(1) Follow the message to remove paper in the paper source you selected in (5) of
step 3.
(2) Press the OK button.
The Paper Feed Roller will rotate as it is cleaned.
5.
Clean the Paper Feed Roller with paper.
(1) Make sure that the Paper Feed Roller has stopped rotating, then follow the
message to load three sheets of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the paper
source you selected in (5) of step 3.
(2) Press the OK button.
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller
Page 112 of 949 pages
The machine starts cleaning.
The cleaning will be completed after the paper is ejected.
Note
Press the HOME button to exit the Settings menu and display the HOME screen.
If the problem is not resolved after cleaning the Paper Feed Roller, contact the service center.
Page top
Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette
Page 113 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Routine Maintenance > Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette
Cleaning the Pad in the Cassette
If the Pad in the Cassette is smeared with paper powder or dirt, two or more sheets of paper may be
ejected. Follow the procedure below to clean the Pad in the Cassette.
You need to prepare: cotton swab
1.
Pull out the Cassette from the machine, and remove all the papers.
2.
Clean the Pad (A) sideways with a moistened cotton swab.
Important
After cleaning the smeared Pad, dry it completely.
If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.
Page top
Appendix
Page 114 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Appendix
Appendix
Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images
Tips on How to Use Your Machine
Page top
Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images
Advanced Guide
Page 115 of 949 pages
Troubleshooting
Contents > Appendix > Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images
Legal Limitations on Use of Your Product and Use of Images
It may be unlawful to make copies of, scan, print, or use reproductions of the following documents.
The list provided is non-exhaustive. When in doubt, check with a legal representative in your jurisdiction.
Paper money
Money orders
Certificates of deposit
Postage stamps (canceled or
uncanceled)
Identifying badges or insignias
Selective service or draft papers
Checks or drafts issued by
governmental agencies
Motor vehicle licenses and
certificates of title
Traveler's checks
Food stamps
Passports
Immigration papers
Internal revenue stamps (canceled or
uncanceled)
Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
Stock certificates
Copyrighted works/works of art without
permission of copyright owner
Page top
Tips on How to Use Your Machine
Page 116 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide
Troubleshooting
Contents > Appendix > Tips on How to Use Your Machine
Tips on How to Use Your Machine
This section introduces the tips on how to use your machine and for printing with optimal quality.
Ink is used for various purposes.
How is ink used for various purposes other than printing?
Ink may be used for purposes other than printing. Ink is not only used for printing, but also for
cleaning the Print Head to maintain the optimal printing quality.
The machine has the function to automatically clean the ink jet nozzles to prevent clogging. In the
cleaning procedure, ink is pumped out from the nozzles. Used ink for nozzle cleaning is limited to a
small amount.
Does black-and-white printing use color ink?
Black-and-white printing may use ink other than black ink depending on the type of printing paper or
the settings of the printer driver. So, color ink is consumed even when printing in black-and-white.
Why does the machine have two black ink tanks?
There are two kinds of black ink in the machine: dye ink (BK) and pigment ink (PGBK).
The dye ink is used mainly for printing photos, illustration, etc., and the pigment ink is used for textbased documents. Each has different purposes so that even if one runs out, another will not be
used instead. If either of them runs out, the ink tank replacement is required.
These two inks are automatically used depending on the type of printing paper or the settings of the
printer driver. You cannot change the usage of these inks yourself.
Ink lamp indicates when ink is running low.
The inside of the ink tank consists of (A) the part where ink is preserved and (B) the sponge with
absorbed ink.
When the ink (A) runs out, the ink lamp flashes slowly to indicate that the ink is running low. Then,
when the ink (B) runs out, the ink lamp flashes fast to indicate that the ink tank needs to be replaced
with a new one.
See Replacing an Ink Tank .
Printing on special paper: How to print with optimal quality!?
Tip!: Check the machine status before printing!
Is the Print Head OK?
If print head nozzles are clogged, print will be faint and papers will be wasted. Print the nozzle
check pattern to check the Print Head.
See When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect .
Tips on How to Use Your Machine
Page 117 of 949 pages
Is the inside of the machine smeared with ink?
After printing large quantities of paper or performing borderless printing, the area where papers
go through may get smeared with ink. Clean the inside of your machine with the Bottom Plate
Cleaning.
Refer to the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Tip!: Check how to load the paper correctly!
Is the paper loaded in the correct orientation?
When loading paper in the Rear Tray or Cassette, make sure the orientation of paper.
Cassette
Rear Tray
To load paper in the Rear Tray, load paper
with the printing side facing you.
To load paper in the Cassette, load paper with the
printing side facing down.
Is the paper curled?
The curled paper causes paper jam. Flatten the curled paper, then reload it.
Refer to "Troubleshooting " in the on-screen manual: Advanced Guide .
Tip!: After loading paper, be sure to specify the paper settings!
After loading paper, be sure to select the loaded paper for Media type with the Operation Panel or
Media Type with the printer driver. If the type of paper is not selected, you may not be able to get the
satisfactory print result.
See Loading Paper .
There are various types of paper: paper with special coating on the surface for printing photos with
optimal quality and paper suitable for documents. Media type of the Operation Panel or Media Type
of the printer driver has different settings for each type of paper in advance (such as using ink,
ejecting ink, or distance from nozzles) so that you can print on each paper with the optimal image
quality. You can print with different settings in Media type (or Media Type) suitable for each type of
loaded paper.
Use the Stop button to cancel printing!
Tip!: Never press the ON button!
If you press the ON button while printing is in progress, the print data sent from the computer
queues in the machine and you may not be able to continue to print.
Press the Stop button to cancel printing.
Note
If you cannot cancel printing by pressing the Stop button while printing from a computer, open
the printer driver setup window to delete the unnecessary print jobs from the printer status
monitor (Windows).
Does the machine need to be handled with care when using or
transporting?
Tips on How to Use Your Machine
Page 118 of 949 pages
Tip!: Do not use or transport the machine vertically or slanted!
If the machine is used or transported vertically or slanted, the machine may become damaged or
ink may leak from the machine.
Be sure not to use or transport the machine vertically or slanted.
Tip!: Do not place any object on the Document Cover!
Do not place any object on the Document Cover. It will fall into the Rear Tray when the Document
Cover is opened and cause the machine to malfunction.
Also, place the machine where objects will not fall on it.
Tip!: Carefully choose the area to place the machine!
Note when you place the machine near other electrical appliances such
as fluorescent lamps
Place the machine at least 5.91 inches / 15 cm away from other electrical appliances such as
fluorescent lamps. If the machine is placed closer to those, it may not be able to work properly
due to fluorescent noises.
Note when you use the machine on wireless LAN
Since the microwave oven and the wireless LAN system use the same frequency bandwidth, the
microwave oven can be the potential source of interference when the microwave oven is on.
Placing this machine close to microwave oven may result in the poor status of radio.
How to maintain the optimal printing quality?
The key to printing with the optimal printing quality is to prevent the Print Head from drying or clogging.
Always follow the following steps for optimal printing quality.
Follow the procedure below to disconnect the power plug.
1. Press the ON button on the machine to turn it off.
2. Make sure that the Power lamp is not lit.
3. Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, or turn off the extender cable connector.
Tips on How to Use Your Machine
Page 119 of 949 pages
If you press the ON button to turn off the power, the machine caps the Print Head (nozzles)
automatically to prevent from drying. If you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet or turn
off the extender cable connector before the Power lamp is turned off, the Print Head will not be
capped properly and this will cause drying or clogging.
To disconnect the power plug, be sure to follow this procedure.
Print periodically!
Just as the tip of a felt pen becomes dry and unusable if it has not been used for a long time,
even if it is capped, the Print Head too, may become dried or clogged if the machine has not
been used for a long time.
We recommend you to use the machine at least once a month.
Note
Depending on the type of paper, ink may blur if you trace the printed area with a highlight pen or
paint-stick, or bleed if water or sweat comes in contact with the printed area.
Colors are uneven, and print results are blurred.
Tip!: Print the nozzle check pattern to check if the nozzles are
clogged.
If the print head nozzles are clogged, colors may become uneven or the print results may be blurred.
In this case
Print the nozzle check pattern
Check the printed check pattern to see if the nozzles are clogged.
See When Printing Becomes Faint or Colors Are Incorrect .
Page top
MP560 series Advanced Guide
Page 120 of 949 pages
MC-4155-V1.00
Basic Guide
Printing
Scanning
Copying
Printing
Printing from a Computer
Printing with the Bundled Application Software
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX?
Troubleshooting
How to Use This Manual
Printing Photos
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Selecting a Photo
Printing This Manual
Selecting the Paper
Maintenance
Printing
About Bluetooth Communication
Creating an Album
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Changing the Machine Settings
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Appendix
Selecting a Photo
About Network Communication
When you display this on-screen
manual in a language
environment other than English,
some English descriptions may
be displayed.
Editing
Printing
Printing Calendars
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Selecting a Photo
Editing
Printing
Printing Stickers
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Selecting a Photo
Editing
Printing
Printing Layout
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Selecting a Photo
Editing
Printing
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
Using the Face Brightener Function
MP560 series Advanced Guide
Page 121 of 949 pages
Using the Face Sharpener Function
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
Using the Blemish Remover Function
Adjusting Images
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Questions and Answers
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing
Start from?
How Do I Print with Even Margins?
What Is "C1" or "C4"?
Photo Print Settings
Printing Vivid Photos
Reducing Photo Noise
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page
Printing an Index
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
Printing Photo Information
Saving Photos
Opening Saved Files
Other Settings
Changing Layout
Changing Background
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Attaching Comments to Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Saving
Setting Holidays
Setting Calendar Display
Opening Saved Files
Printing with Other Application Software
Various Printing Methods
Printing with Easy Setup
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Setting the Stapling Margin
Borderless Printing
Fit-to-Page Printing
Scaled Printing
MP560 series Advanced Guide
Page 122 of 949 pages
Page Layout Printing
Poster Printing
Booklet Printing
Duplex Printing
Stamp/Background Printing
Registering a Stamp
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
Printing an Envelope
Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level
and a Halftoning Method
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Specifying Color Correction
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Printing with ICC Profiles
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Simulating an Illustration
Representing Image Data with a Single Color
Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors
Smoothing Jagged Outlines
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration
Reducing Photo Noise
Overview of the Printer Driver
Printer Driver Operations
Canon IJ Printer Driver
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
Maintenance Tab
Canon IJ Status Monitor
Canon IJ Preview
Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Printing Lined Paper or Graph Paper
Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph
Paper
Printing from a Memory Card
Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card
Setting Items
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet
Using Useful Printing Functions
Printing Memory Card Photos in Various Layouts
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
MP560 series Advanced Guide
Page 123 of 949 pages
Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper
(Layout Print)
Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print)
Print all photos
Photo index print
DPOF print
Captured info print
Printing ID Photo-ID photo size print
Creating a Calendar-Calendar print
Using Useful Display Functions
Changing the Display
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date
(Search)
Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the
Computer
Printing from a USB Flash Drive
Printing Photographs Saved on a USB Flash Drive
Setting Items
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet
Using Useful Printing Functions
Printing USB Flash Drive Photos in Various Layouts
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper
(Layout Print)
Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print)
Print all photos
Photo index print
DPOF print
Captured info print
Printing ID Photo-ID photo size print
Creating a Calendar-Calendar print
Using Useful Display Functions
Changing the Display
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date
(Search)
Photo Printing from Printed Photo
Printing from Printed Photo
Setting Items
Using Useful Printing Functions
Special Printing of Photo
Settings for Printing a Scanned Photo
Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print)
Printing All Photos (Print All Photos)
Using Useful Display Functions
Changing the Display
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
MP560 series Advanced Guide
Page 124 of 949 pages
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a
Wireless Communication Device
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device
About PictBridge Print Settings
Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device
Settings on the Machine
Printing Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device
Printing via Bluetooth Communication
Printing through Bluetooth Communication
Changing the Bluetooth Settings
Setting the Page Size, Media Type, and Layout When
Printing from a Mobile Phone
Displaying the Mobile phone print setting screen
Scanning
Scanning
Scanning Images
Scanning Images
Before Scanning
Placing Documents
Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card
Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory
Card Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Setting Items
Deleting Scanned Data on USB Flash Drive/Memory
Card
Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of
the Machine
Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation
Panel of the Machine
Appendix: Various Scan Settings
Network Scan Settings
Selecting a Response to Commands from the
Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX
Scanning with the Bundled Application Software
What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)?
Let's Try Scanning
Starting MP Navigator EX
Scanning Photos and Documents
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch
Assist)
Easy Scanning with One-click
Useful MP Navigator EX Functions
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
Adjusting Images
MP560 series Advanced Guide
Page 125 of 949 pages
Searching Images
Classifying Images into Categories
Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX
Saving
Saving as PDF Files
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing Documents
Printing Photos
Sending via E-mail
Editing Files
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
MP Navigator EX Screens
Navigation Mode Screen
Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab
View & Use Images on your Computer Tab
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import
Window)
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Save Dialog Box
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
PDF Settings Dialog Box
Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window)
View & Use Window
Create/Edit PDF file Window
Print Document Dialog Box
Print Photo Dialog Box
Send via E-mail Dialog Box
Correct/Enhance Images Window
One-click Mode Screen
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Save Dialog Box
Exif Settings Dialog Box
PDF Dialog Box
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Mail Dialog Box
OCR Dialog Box
Custom Dialog Box
Preferences Dialog Box
General Tab
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail)
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Open with Application)
Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images
MP560 series Advanced Guide
Page 126 of 949 pages
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Scanning with Other Application Software
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear
(Scanner Driver)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear
(Scanner Driver)
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust
and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.)
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
Adjusting Histogram
Adjusting Tone Curve
Setting Threshold
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
Basic Mode Tab
Advanced Mode Tab
Input Settings
Output Settings
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Buttons
Auto Scan Mode Tab
Preferences Dialog Box
Scanner Tab
Preview Tab
Scan Tab
Color Settings Tab
Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Resolution
File Formats
Color Matching
Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Screens
Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen
Other Scanning Methods
Scanning with WIA Driver
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
Copying
Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
MP560 series Advanced Guide
Page 127 of 949 pages
Copying
Making Copies
Setting Items
Reducing or Enlarging a Copy
Changing Intensity Setting
Displaying the Preview Screen
Using Useful Copy Functions
Special Copy
Settings for Special Copy
Copying onto Both Sides of the Paper (Two-Sided
Copy)
Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (2-on-1
Copy)
Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (4-on1 Copy)
Copying without Borders (Borderless Copy)
Repeating an Image on a Page (Image Repeat)
Copying Thick Originals Such as Books (Frame
Erase)
Copying a Specified Area (Trimming)
Copying Images with Erasing a Part (Masking)
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
If an Error Occurs
The Machine Cannot Be Powered On
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD
LCD Cannot Be Seen At All
An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD
Cannot Install the MP Drivers
Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly
Printing or Scanning Speed Is Slow/Hi-Speed USB
Connection Does Not Work/"This device can perform
faster" Message Is Displayed
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Cannot Print to End of Job
Part of the Page Is Not Printed
No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/
White Streaks
Lines Are Misaligned
Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched
Back of the Paper Is Smudged
Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout
Colors Are Uneven or Streaked
Printing Does Not Start
Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed
MP560 series Advanced Guide
Page 128 of 949 pages
Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected
Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected
Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for
Replacing
Paper Does Not Feed Properly
Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the
Printer Driver
Paper Jams
Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear
Tray
Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine at the Transport
Unit
Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic
Duplex Printing
In Other Cases
Message Appears on the Computer Screen
Error Number: B200 A printer error has occurred. Turn the
printer off and unplug the power cord of the printer from
the power supply. Then contact the service center. Is
Displayed
Error Number: **** A printer error has occurred. Turn the
printer off and then on again. If this doesn't clear the error,
see the user's guide for more detail. Is Displayed
Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error
Error Regarding Automatic Duplex Printing Is Displayed
Error Number: 300 Is Displayed
Error Number: 1700 Is Displayed
Ink Info Number: 1600 Is Displayed
Ink Info Number: 1683 Is Displayed
Ink Info Number: 1688 Is Displayed
Error Number: 2001 Is Displayed
Error Number: 2002 Is Displayed
Other Error Messages
The Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program
Screen Is Displayed
The Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program
Icon Appears
Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing
For Windows Users
Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed
Launching MP Navigator EX Whenever Pressing the
Color or Black Button on the Machine
Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device
Cannot Print Properly from a Wireless Communication Device
Cannot Print Properly from a Photo Index Sheet
Failed to scan Photo Index Sheet. Is Displayed
Cannot print the selected photo. Is Displayed/Differ Photo
or Blank Is Printed out/Paper Feeds Before Printing Is
Complete
Cannot Remove a Memory Card
Problems with Scanning
MP560 series Advanced Guide
Page 129 of 949 pages
Scanner Does Not Work
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner
Driver) Screen Does Not Appear
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas
Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time
Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode
Slow Scanning Speed
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning
Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows
Software Problems
E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not
Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software
Program
Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced)
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer
Monitor
Scanned Image Does Not Open
MP Navigator EX Problems
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected
Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is
Slanted
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation
Changes in the Scanned Image
If You Cannot Resolve the Problem
FAQs
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Using MP Navigator EX
About Solution Menu
How to Use This Manual
Page 130 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual
How to Use This Manual
Operating the Contents Pane
Operating the Explanation Window
Printing This Manual
Using Keywords to Find a Document
Registering Documents to My Manual
Symbols Used in This Document
Trademarks
Page top
Operating the Contents Pane
Page 131 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Operating the Contents Pane
Operating the Contents Pane
When you click a document title displayed in the contents pane found to the left of the on-screen manual,
the documents of that title are displayed in the explanation window on the right side.
When you click
found to the left of
, the document titles found in the lower hierarchies are displayed.
Note
Click
to close or display the contents pane.
Page top
Operating the Explanation Window
Page 132 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Operating the Explanation Window
Operating the Explanation Window
(1) Click the green characters to jump to the corresponding document.
(2) The cursor jumps to the top of this document.
Page top
Printing This Manual
Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Printing This Manual
Printing This Manual
Click
to display the print pane to the left of the on-screen manual.
Note
Click
to close or display the print pane.
When you click and then click Page Setup, the Page Setup dialog box appears. You can then
easily set up the paper to be used for printing.
Click , and then click Print Settings to display the Print dialog box. When the dialog box is
displayed, select the printer to be used for printing. The Print Setup tab also allows you to select the
printer to be used.
After selecting the printer to be used, click Properties... to specify the print settings.
Click , and then click Option Settings to display the Option Settings dialog box. You can then set up
the printing operation.
Print document title and page number
When this check box is checked, the manual name and the page number are printed in the
header (top of the document).
Print background color and images
When this check box is checked, the background color and the image are printed. Some
images are printed regardless of whether this check box is checked or not.
Check number of pages to be printed before printing
When this check box is checked, the Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box is displayed
before printing starts. This dialog box allows you to check how many pages will be printed.
On the Document Selection tab, select the method for printing the document. The following four methods
of printing are available:
Print Current Document
Print Selected Documents
Print My Manual
Page 133 of 949 pages
Printing This Manual
Print All Documents
Note
You can select the type to be printed, and then easily specify print settings on the Print Setup tab.
Print Current Document
You can print the currently displayed document.
1. From Select Target, select Current Document
The title of the currently displayed document is displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list.
Note
By selecting Print linked documents, you can also print documents that are linked to the current
document. The linked documents are added to the Documents to Be Printed list.
Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually
print the document.
2. Click Print Setup tab
On the Page Setup tab, select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings, as necessary.
3. Click Start Printing
A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed.
4. Execute print
Confirm the number of pages to be printed, and then click Yes.
The documents that are currently displayed are printed.
Print Selected Documents
You can select and print the documents that you want printed.
1. From Select Target, select Selected Documents
The titles of all documents are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list.
2. Select the documents to be printed
From the Documents to Be Printed list, select the title check boxes of the documents to be printed.
Note
When you select the Automatically select documents in lower hierarchies check box, the check
boxes of all document titles found in the lower hierarchies are selected.
Click Select All to select the check boxes of all document titles.
Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all document titles.
Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually
print the document.
3. Click Print Setup tab
On the Page Setup tab, select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings, as necessary.
4. Click Start Printing
A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed.
5. Execute print
Page 134 of 949 pages
Printing This Manual
Confirm the number of pages to be printed, and then click Yes.
All documents with selected check boxes are printed.
Print My Manual
You can select and print documents registered in My Manual.
For details about My Manual, see " Registering Documents to My Manual ."
1. From Select Target, select My Manual
The titles of the documents that have been registered to My Manual are displayed in the Documents
to Be Printed list.
2. Select the documents to be printed
From the Documents to Be Printed list, select the title check boxes of the documents to be printed.
Note
Click Select All to select the check boxes of all document titles.
Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all document titles.
Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually
print the document.
3. Click Print Setup tab
On the Page Setup tab, select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings, as necessary.
4. Click Start Printing
A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed.
5. Execute print
Confirm the number of pages to be printed, and then click Yes.
All documents with selected check boxes are printed.
Print All Documents
You can print all documents of the on-screen manual.
1. From Select Target, select All Documents
The titles of all documents are displayed in the Documents to Be Printed list, and the check boxes
are automatically selected.
Note
When you uncheck the check box of a document title, that document is not printed.
Click Select All to select the check boxes of all document titles.
Click Clear All to clear the check boxes of all document titles.
Click Print Preview to display and check what the print results will look like before you actually
print the document.
2. Click Print Setup tab
On the Page Setup tab, select the printer to be used and specify simple print settings, as necessary.
3. Click Start Printing
A message confirming the number of print pages is displayed.
4. Execute print
Page 135 of 949 pages
Printing This Manual
Page 136 of 949 pages
Confirm the number of pages to be printed, and then click Yes.
All documents are printed.
Important
A large amount of paper is necessary to print all documents. Before printing, be sure to check
the number of print pages displayed in the Print Page Count Confirmation dialog box.
The Print Preview dialog box allows you to scale the printing to the paper width or to set the
zoom rate. However, if the print data extends outside the paper because of the new zoom rate,
that portion of the document will not be printed on the paper.
Page top
Using Keywords to Find a Document
Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Using Keywords to Find a Document
Using Keywords to Find a Document
You can enter a keyword to search for a target document.
All documents in the currently displayed on-screen manual are searched.
1. Click
The search pane is displayed to the left of the on-screen manual.
Note
Click
to close or display the search pane.
2. Enter a keyword
In Keyword, enter a keyword for the item to be checked.
When you want to enter multiple keywords, insert a space between the keywords.
Note
You can enter up to 10 search keywords or up to 255 characters.
Uppercase and lowercase are not discriminated.
The program can also search for keywords that contain spaces.
A convenient way of quickly finding a document to be read is to enter keywords as described
below.
To learn how to operate a function you are using:
Enter the menu name displayed on the operation panel of this machine or on the computer
(for example, frame erase copy).
To find an explanation of the operation for a specific purpose:
Enter function + item to be printed (for example, print calendar).
3. Click Start Searching
Page 137 of 949 pages
Using Keywords to Find a Document
Page 138 of 949 pages
The search is started, and the titles of documents containing the keyword are displayed in the
search results list.
When you execute a search by entering multiple keywords, the search results are displayed as
shown below.
[Documents Containing Perfect Match]
Documents containing the entire search character string (including spaces) exactly as entered
(perfect match)
[Documents Containing All Keywords]
Documents containing all keywords that were entered
[Documents Containing Any Keyword]
Documents containing at least one of the keywords that were entered
4. Display the document that you want to read
From the search results list, double-click (or select and press Enter) the title of the document you
want to read.
When the documents of that title are displayed, the keywords found on those documents are
highlighted.
Note
If you modify the keyword entry and perform multiple searches, a search history remains. To delete
the search history, click
located to the right of Keyword, and select Clear History, which is
displayed.
Page top
Registering Documents to My Manual
Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Registering Documents to My Manual
Registering Documents to My Manual
Register frequently read documents as My Manual documents so that you can refer to those documents
easily at any time.
1. Display the document
Display the document to be added to My Manual.
2. Click
The My Manual pane is displayed to the left of the on-screen manual.
Note
Click
to close or display the My Manual pane.
3. Register the document to My Manual
Click Add.
The title of the currently displayed document is added to List of My Manual.
Note
You can also add documents to My Manual by the following methods. If you add a document to
My Manual, a
mark is displayed in the document icons in the contents pane.
From the Recently Displayed Documents list, double-click the document title that you want
to add to My Manual (or select the document and press Enter key) to display the title, and
then click Add.
Right-click the document title displayed in the contents pane or right-click the explanation
window, and then select Add to My Manual from the right-click menu.
In the contents pane, select the document title that you want to add to My Manual, and then
click Add to My Manual at the bottom right of the pane.
Page 139 of 949 pages
Registering Documents to My Manual
Page 140 of 949 pages
4. Display My Manual
When you double-click (or select and press Enter) a document title displayed in List of My Manual,
that document is displayed in the explanation window.
Note
To delete a document from List of My Manual, select that document title from the list, and then
click Delete (or press Delete).
Page top
Symbols Used in This Document
Page 141 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Symbols Used in This Document
Symbols Used in This Document
Warning
Instructions that, if ignored, could result in death or serious personal injury caused by incorrect operation
of the equipment. These must be observed for safe operation.
Caution
Instructions that, if ignored, could result in personal injury or material damage caused by incorrect
operation of the equipment. These must be observed for safe operation.
Important
Instructions including important information.
Be sure to read these indications.
Note
Instructions as notes for operation or additional explanations.
Indicates operations in Windows.
Indicates operations in Macintosh.
Page top
Trademarks
Page 142 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > How to Use This Manual > Trademarks
Trademarks
Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other
countries.
Windows Vista is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or
other countries.
Internet Explorer is a trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or
other countries.
Macintosh, Mac, and AirPort are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Bonjour is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Adobe, Adobe Photoshop, Adobe RGB and Adobe RGB (1998) are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,U.S.A. and licensed to Canon Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo is a certification
mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Exif Print
This machine supports Exif Print.
Exif Print is a standard for enhancing the communication between digital cameras and printers. By
connecting to an Exif Print-compliant digital camera, the camera's image data at the time of shooting is
used and optimized, yielding extremely high quality prints.
Page top
Printing from a Computer
Page 143 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer
Printing from a Computer
Printing with the Bundled Application Software
Printing with Other Application Software
Page top
Printing with the Bundled Application Software
Page 144 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software
Printing with the Bundled Application Software
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX?
Printing Photos
Creating an Album
Printing Calendars
Printing Stickers
Printing Layout
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Questions and Answers
Photo Print Settings
Other Settings
Page top
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX?
Page 145 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > What Is Easy-PhotoPrint
EX?
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX?
Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums, calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with
digital cameras.
You can also print borderless photos easily.
Important
Easy-PhotoPrint EX does not support Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, or Windows NT4.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX can only be used with Canon inkjet printers. It does not support some printers,
including Canon compact printers (SELPHY CP series).
If a printer that supports Easy-PhotoPrint EX is not installed, you cannot print items you create.
If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is installed on a computer that already has Easy-LayoutPrint installed, EasyLayoutPrint will be replaced by Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Note
Printing on paper larger than A4 is available with supported printers only. See your printer manual
for details.
See Help of Easy-PhotoPrint EX for descriptions of Easy-PhotoPrint EX screens.
Click Help in a screen or dialog box, or select Easy-PhotoPrint EX Help... from the Help menu. Help
appears.
About Exif Print
Easy-PhotoPrint EX supports "Exif Print." Exif Print is a standard for enhancing the communication
between digital cameras and printers.
By connecting to an Exif Print-compliant digital camera, the image data at the time of shooting is used
and optimized, yielding extremely high quality prints.
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX from Other Applications
What Is Easy-PhotoPrint EX?
Page 146 of 949 pages
Easy-PhotoPrint EX can be started from other applications.
See the application's manual for details on the procedure for starting.
The Photo Print function is available with the following applications:
MP Navigator EX Ver.1.00 or later
ZoomBrowser EX Ver.6.0 or later
Digital Photo Professional Ver.3.2 or later
Important
Easy-PhotoPrint EX is subject to the following restrictions when started from Digital Photo
Professional:
- Menu does not appear in the step button area on the left side of the screen.
- Images cannot be corrected/enhanced.
- Image display order cannot be changed.
- Edited images cannot be saved.
- Options other than Enable ICC Profile cannot be selected for Color correction for printing on
the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box. Therefore, you cannot use the Vivid Photo and
Photo Noise Reduction functions.
The Album function is available with the following applications:
MP Navigator EX Ver.1.00 or later
ZoomBrowser EX Ver.5.8 or later
Supported Image File Formats (Extensions)
BMP (.bmp)
JPEG (.jpg, .jpeg)
TIFF (.tif, .tiff)
PICT (.pict, .pct)
Easy-PhotoPrint image files (.epp)
Important
When selecting an image, if there is a TIFF file in the selected folder, the image may not be
displayed correctly or Easy-PhotoPrint EX may shut down depending on the TIFF format. In such
cases, move the TIFF file to another folder or recreate the file in a different file format, and then
select the folder again.
Note
(Question Mark).
The thumbnails of files in unsupported formats are displayed as
When Easy-PhotoPrint EX is started from Digital Photo Professional, all image files supported by
Digital Photo Professional will be displayed.
File Formats (Extensions) Supported by Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Easy-PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file (.el6)
Easy-PhotoPrint EX Album file (.el1)
Easy-PhotoPrint EX Stickers file (.el2)
Easy-PhotoPrint EX Calendar file (.el4)
Easy-PhotoPrint EX Layout file (.el5)
Page top
Printing Photos
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos
Printing Photos
Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to print your favorite photos in a variety of layouts.
You can also create borderless photos easily.
Corrections suitable for photos will be applied automatically when printing.
Steps
1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
2. Selecting a Photo
3. Selecting the Paper
4. Printing
Try This
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Printing Vivid Photos
Reducing Photo Noise
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page
Printing an Index
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
Printing Photo Information
Saving Photos
Opening Saved Files
Questions and Answers
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from?
How Do I Print with Even Margins?
Page 147 of 949 pages
Printing Photos
Page 148 of 949 pages
Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Page 149 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Starting
Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX
> Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Page top
Selecting a Photo
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos >
Selecting a Photo
Selecting a Photo
1. Click Photo Print from Menu.
The Select Images screen appears.
Important
The thumbnails (reduced images) displayed in the screen may appear as follows:
- A black line appears along an edge of the image.
- An edge of the image appears cropped.
However, such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed, and print
results will not be affected.
2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area.
The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
Important
If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is started from another application (MP Navigator EX, ZoomBrowser EX
or Digital Photo Professional), the folder tree area will not be displayed.
The images opened in the application will be displayed as thumbnails.
3. Click the image you want to print.
The number of copies appears as "1" below the clicked image, while the selected image itself will
appear in the selected image area.
Note
To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click
Page 150 of 949 pages
Selecting a Photo
Page 151 of 949 pages
(Delete Imported Image).
To delete all images from the selected image area, click
To print two or more copies of an image, click
(Delete All Imported Images).
(Up arrow) until the number of copies you
want is reached. To reduce the number of copies shown in the box, click
(Down arrow).
You can change the order of photos using the list located at the top right corner of the screen.
You can select the printing order from Sort by Date and Sort by Name.
Note
You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing.
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Page top
Selecting the Paper
Page 152 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos >
Selecting the Paper
Selecting the Paper
1. Click Select Paper.
The Select Paper screen appears.
2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used:
Printer
Paper Source
Paper Size
Media Type
Note
The paper sizes and media types may vary depending on the printer. See Help for details.
The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type.
Note
You can print photos with more vivid colors or you can reduce the photo noise.
Printing Vivid Photos
Reducing Photo Noise
See Help for details on the Select Paper screen.
Page top
Printing
Page 153 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Photos > Printing
Printing
1. Click Layout/Print.
The Layout/Print screen appears.
Important
The thumbnails (reduced images) displayed in the screen may appear as follows:
- A black line appears along an edge of the image.
- An edge of the image appears cropped.
However, such images will be displayed normally when enlarged or previewed, and print
results will not be affected.
2. Select a layout you want to use.
Click a borderless layout to print borderless photos.
Note
The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the printer, paper size, and media
type.
3. Click Print.
Important
When you print on large size paper such as A3/A3+, some computers cannot print properly if you
print more than one page or copy at a time. It is recommended that you print page by page when
you print on such paper.
While printing on paper larger than A4 or printing high-resolution images, data may be printed only
to the middle if many images are printed at one time. In such cases, select the Spool print job page
by page checkbox in the Preferences dialog box, and then print again.
Printing
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
Page 154 of 949 pages
(Settings) or select Preferences... from the File
menu.
The photo print settings will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the settings.
It is recommended that you save the printed image if you want to print it again.
Saving Photos
When you print on a bordered layout, the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may
become wider than the other.
How Do I Print with Even Margins?
Note
You can crop images or print dates on photos.
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
You can correct or enhance the selected image before printing.
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
You can specify advanced Photo Print settings (number of copies, print quality, etc.) in the
Preferences dialog box.
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
(Settings) or select Preferences... from the File
menu.
See Help for details on the Layout/Print screen.
Page top
Creating an Album
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album
Creating an Album
Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own personalized photo album.
Steps
1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
2. Selecting the Paper and Layout
3. Selecting a Photo
4. Editing
5. Printing
Try This
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Changing Layout
Changing Background
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Attaching Comments to Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Saving
Opening Saved Files
Questions and Answers
Page 155 of 949 pages
Creating an Album
Page 156 of 949 pages
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
What Is "C1" or "C4"?
Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Page 157 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album >
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX
> Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Page top
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album >
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Selecting the Paper and Layout
1. Click Album from Menu.
The Page Setup screen appears.
2. Set the following items in the General Settings section:
Paper Size
Orientation
Cover
Double page album
Page number
Note
See Help on the paper size that can be selected.
You can select whether to display images on the inside of the front and back covers in the
Cover Options dialog box. To display the Cover Options dialog box, select Front or Front & Back
for Cover and click Options....
Select the Double page album checkbox to enable the spread page layout (consisting of twopage master). In a double-page album, you can arrange an image across the left and right
pages.
You can customize the page numbers (position, font size, etc.) in the Page Number Settings
dialog box. To display the Page Number Settings dialog box, select the Page number checkbox
and click Settings....
You can customize the margins of the front cover, inside pages and back cover in the Margin
Settings dialog box. To display the Margin Settings dialog box, click Margins....
3. Select the theme you want to use from Theme in Sample Layout.
Page 158 of 949 pages
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Page 159 of 949 pages
4. If you want to change the layout, click Layout....
The Change Layout dialog box appears.
In the Change Layout dialog box, you can change the layout or select whether to print the date (on
which the picture was taken) on the photo.
Note
The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size, Orientation, Double
page album, or the type of page selected (front cover, inside pages or back cover).
You can customize the date (position, size, color, etc.) in the Date Settings dialog box. To
display the Date Settings dialog box, select the Print date checkbox in the Change Layout
dialog box and click Date Settings....
5. If you want to change the background, click Background....
The Change Background dialog box appears.
In the Change Background dialog box, you can paint the background in a single color or paste an
image file to it.
Note
See Help for details on the Page Setup screen.
Page top
Selecting a Photo
Page 160 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album >
Selecting a Photo
Selecting a Photo
1. Click Select Images.
The Select Images screen appears.
2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area.
The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
Important
If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is started from another application (MP Navigator EX or ZoomBrowser
EX), the folder tree area will not be displayed.
The images opened in the application will be displayed as thumbnails.
3. Select the image(s) you want to print, and click one of the buttons below.
To print on the front cover, click
To print on the inside pages, click
To print on the back cover, click
(Import to Front Cover).
(Import to Inside Pages).
(Import to Back Cover).
The selected image(s) are displayed in the selected image area.
You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area.
Note
To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click
(Delete Imported Image).
Selecting a Photo
To delete all images from the selected image area, click
Page 161 of 949 pages
(Delete All Imported Images).
Note
See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Page top
Editing
Page 162 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album >
Editing
Editing
1. Click Edit.
The Edit screen appears.
2. Edit your album if necessary.
Changing Layout
Changing Background
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Attaching Comments to Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Important
The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited
album. It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again.
The page numbers on the front and back covers of the album are displayed as follows:
C1: Front cover
C2: Inside the front cover
C3: Inside the back cover
Editing
Page 163 of 949 pages
C4: Back cover
Saving
Note
See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Page top
Printing
Page 164 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Creating an Album >
Printing
Printing
1. Click Print Settings.
The Print Settings screen appears.
2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used:
Printer
Media Type
Copies
Paper Source
Print Quality
Borderless Printing
Note
The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing. Select
this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper.
Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that
supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing. Select this
checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically.
The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type.
You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box. To display the
Print Quality Settings dialog box, select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings....
Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print borderless photos.
You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print
Settings dialog box. To display the Print Settings dialog box, click Advanced....
Printing
Page 165 of 949 pages
3. Click Print.
Note
See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Page top
Printing Calendars
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars
Printing Calendars
Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create your own calendar using your favorite photos.
Steps
1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
2. Selecting the Paper and Layout
3. Selecting a Photo
4. Editing
5. Printing
Try This
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Changing Layout
Changing Background
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Setting Calendar Display
Setting Holidays
Saving
Opening Saved Files
Page 166 of 949 pages
Printing Calendars
Page 167 of 949 pages
Questions and Answers
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Page 168 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars >
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX
> Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Page top
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars >
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Selecting the Paper and Layout
1. Click Calendar from Menu.
The Page Setup screen appears.
2. Set the following items in the General Settings section:
Paper Size
Orientation
Start from
Period
Note
See Help on the paper size that can be selected.
You can add holidays to your calendar.
Setting Holidays
3. Select a layout for Design.
If necessary, make advanced settings on the calendar and set the background.
Note
You can customize the calendar display (font colors of the dates and days of the week, position
and size of the calendar, etc.).
Setting Calendar Display
You can paint the background in a single color or paste an image file to it in the Change
Background dialog box. To display the Change Background dialog box, click Background....
Note
Page 169 of 949 pages
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Page 170 of 949 pages
See Help for details on the Page Setup screen.
Page top
Selecting a Photo
Page 171 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars >
Selecting a Photo
Selecting a Photo
1. Click Select Images.
The Select Images screen appears.
2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area.
The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
3. Select the image(s) you want to print and click
(Import to Inside Pages).
The selected image(s) are displayed in the selected image area.
You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area.
Note
To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click
(Delete Imported Image).
To delete all images from the selected image area, click
(Delete All Imported Images).
Note
See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Page top
Editing
Page 172 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars >
Editing
Editing
1. Click Edit.
The Edit screen appears.
2. Edit the calendar if necessary.
Changing Layout
Changing Background
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Setting Calendar Display
Setting Holidays
Important
The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited
calendar. It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again.
Saving
Note
Editing
Page 173 of 949 pages
See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Page top
Printing
Page 174 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Calendars >
Printing
Printing
1. Click Print Settings.
The Print Settings screen appears.
2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used:
Printer
Media Type
Copies
Paper Source
Print Quality
Borderless Printing
Note
The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing. Select
this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper.
Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that
supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing. Select this
checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically.
The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type.
You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box. To display the
Print Quality Settings dialog box, select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings....
You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print
Settings dialog box. To display the Print Settings dialog box, click Advanced....
3. Click Print.
Printing
Page 175 of 949 pages
Note
See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Page top
Printing Stickers
Page 176 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers
Printing Stickers
You can print your favorite photos on compatible sticker sheets.
Steps
1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
2. Selecting the Paper and Layout
3. Selecting a Photo
4. Editing
5. Printing
Try This
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Saving
Opening Saved Files
Questions and Answers
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Page 177 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers >
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX
> Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Page top
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Page 178 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers >
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Selecting the Paper and Layout
1. Click Stickers from Menu.
The Page Setup screen appears.
2. Set the following items in the General Settings section:
Paper Size
Orientation
Print date
Use the same image in all frames
Note
Paper sizes other than Photo Stickers cannot be selected.
Select the Use the same image in all frames checkbox to use the same image in all the
frames on the page.
You can customize the date (position, size, color, etc.) in the Date Settings dialog box. To
display the Date Settings dialog box, select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings....
Note
See Help for details on the Page Setup screen.
Page top
Selecting a Photo
Page 179 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers >
Selecting a Photo
Selecting a Photo
1. Click Select Images.
The Select Images screen appears.
2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area.
The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
3. Select the image(s) you want to print and click
(Import to Inside Pages).
The selected image(s) are displayed in the selected image area.
You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area.
Note
To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click
(Delete Imported Image).
To delete all images from the selected image area, click
(Delete All Imported Images).
Note
See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Page top
Editing
Page 180 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers > Editing
Editing
1. Click Edit.
The Edit screen appears.
2. Edit the stickers if necessary.
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Important
The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited
stickers. It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again.
Saving
Note
See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Page top
Printing
Page 181 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Stickers >
Printing
Printing
1. Click Print Settings.
The Print Settings screen appears.
2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used:
Printer
Media Type
Copies
Paper Source
Print Quality
Borderless Printing
Note
The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type.
You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box. To display the
Print Quality Settings dialog box, select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings....
You can adjust the printing position in the Adjust Print Position dialog box. To display the Adjust
Print Position dialog box, click Print Position....
You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print
Settings dialog box. To display the Print Settings dialog box, click Advanced....
3. Click Print.
Note
See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Printing
Page 182 of 949 pages
Page top
Printing Layout
Page 183 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout
Printing Layout
You can add text to your favorite photos and print them in a variety of layouts.
Steps
1. Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
2. Selecting the Paper and Layout
3. Selecting a Photo
4. Editing
5. Printing
Try This
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Changing Layout
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Saving
Opening Saved Files
Questions and Answers
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Page top
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Page 184 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Starting
Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Starting Easy-PhotoPrint EX
1. From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > Easy-PhotoPrint EX
> Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts and Menu appears.
Page top
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Page 185 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout >
Selecting the Paper and Layout
Selecting the Paper and Layout
1. Click Layout Print from Menu.
The Page Setup screen appears.
2. Set the following items in the General Settings section:
Paper Size
Orientation
Print date
Note
See Help on the paper size that can be selected.
You can customize the date (position, size, color, etc.) in the Date Settings dialog box. To
display the Date Settings dialog box, select the Print date checkbox and click Date Settings....
3. Select a layout from Layouts.
Note
The layouts may vary depending on the Orientation.
Note
See Help for details on the Page Setup screen.
Page top
Selecting a Photo
Page 186 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout >
Selecting a Photo
Selecting a Photo
1. Click Select Images.
The Select Images screen appears.
2. Select the folder that contains the image you want to print from the folder tree area.
The images in the folder will be displayed as thumbnails (miniatures).
3. Select the image(s) you want to print and click
(Import to Inside Pages).
The selected image(s) are displayed in the selected image area.
You can also select the image(s) you want to print by dragging them into the selected image area.
Note
To delete an image in the selected image area, select the image you want to delete and click
(Delete Imported Image).
To delete all images from the selected image area, click
(Delete All Imported Images).
Note
See Help for details on the Select Images screen.
Page top
Editing
Page 187 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Editing
Editing
1. Click Edit.
The Edit screen appears.
2. Edit the layout if necessary.
Changing Layout
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Important
The edit information will be discarded if you exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX without saving the edited layout.
It is recommended that you save the item if you want to edit it again.
Saving
Note
See Help for details on the Edit screen.
Page top
Printing
Page 188 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Printing Layout > Printing
Printing
1. Click Print Settings.
The Print Settings screen appears.
2. Set the following items according to the printer and paper to be used:
Printer
Media Type
Copies
Paper Source
Print Quality
Borderless Printing
Note
The media types may vary depending on the printer and the paper size.
Duplex Printing appears if the selected printer and media type support duplex printing. Select
this checkbox to print on both sides of the paper.
Automatic appears if you select the Duplex Printing checkbox after selecting a printer that
supports automatic duplex printing and media type that supports duplex printing. Select this
checkbox to print on both sides of the paper automatically.
The paper sources may vary depending on the printer and the media type.
You can set a custom print quality level in the Print Quality Settings dialog box. To display the
Print Quality Settings dialog box, select Custom for Print Quality and click Quality Settings....
Select the Borderless Printing checkbox to print borderless photos.
You can specify the print range and the amount of extension for borderless printing in the Print
Settings dialog box. To display the Print Settings dialog box, click Advanced....
3. Click Print.
Printing
Page 189 of 949 pages
Note
See Help for details on the Print Settings screen.
Page top
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
You can correct and enhance images.
Click
(Correct/Enhance Images) in the Select Images or Edit screen, or in the Layout/Print screen of
Photo Print. You can make the following corrections and enhancements in the Correct/Enhance Images
window.
Important
For Photo Print, if you select Enable ICC Profile in the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box,
you cannot correct/enhance images.
Note
See "Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Auto Photo Fix
This function will automatically analyze the captured scene and apply suitable corrections.
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
Red-Eye Correction Function
You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash.
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
Face Brightener Function
You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background.
Using the Face Brightener Function
Face Sharpener Function
You can sharpen out-of-focus faces in a photo.
Using the Face Sharpener Function
Digital Face Smoothing Function
You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles.
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
Blemish Remover Function
You can remove moles.
Using the Blemish Remover Function
Image Adjustment
You can adjust brightness and contrast or sharpen the entire image.
You can also blur the outline of the subjects or remove the base color.
Page 190 of 949 pages
Correcting and Enhancing Photos
Page 191 of 949 pages
Adjusting Images
Page top
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
Page 192 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
Apply optimum corrections automatically to the photos used for an album, calendar, etc.
Important
The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print. Photo Print allows you to automatically
apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing, by selecting Auto Photo Fix in Color correction
for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box. To display the Preferences dialog
box, click
(Settings) in the Layout/Print screen or select Preferences... from the File menu.
Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved, it cannot be corrected again with Auto
Photo Fix.
Also, Auto Photo Fix may not be available for images edited using an application, digital camera,
etc. manufactured by other companies.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
(Correct/Enhance
Images).
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the
Correct/Enhance Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
Page 193 of 949 pages
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview.
3. Make sure that Auto is selected.
4. Click Auto Photo Fix, then click OK.
The entire photo is corrected automatically and the
the upper left of the image.
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on
Note
(Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that
Click
you can compare and check the result.
Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation.
If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once, select the Apply to all
images checkbox.
Select the Prioritize Exif Info checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings
made at the time of shooting.
Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results. It is
recommended that you normally select this setting.
5. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for corrected images.
6. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images.
Page top
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
Page 194 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
You can correct red eyes caused by a camera flash.
You can perform the Red-Eye Correction function either automatically or manually.
Note
Photo Print allows you to automatically correct red eyes when printing. To correct automatically,
select Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences
dialog box and select the Enable Red-Eye Correction checkbox.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
(Correct/Enhance
Images).
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the
Correct/Enhance Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview.
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
Page 195 of 949 pages
Auto Correction
3. Make sure that Auto is selected.
4. Click Red-Eye Correction.
5. Click OK.
Red eyes are corrected and the
the image.
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of
Important
Areas other than the eyes may be corrected depending on the image.
Note
(Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that
Click
you can compare and check the result.
Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation.
If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once, select the Apply to all
images checkbox.
Manual Correction
3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
4. Click Red-Eye Correction.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Red-Eye Correction.
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Paintbrush).
5. Drag to select the red area you want to correct, then click OK that appears over the
image.
Using the Red-Eye Correction Function
Red eye is corrected and the
Page 196 of 949 pages
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the
image.
Note
Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for corrected images.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images.
Page top
Using the Face Brightener Function
Page 197 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Face Brightener Function
Using the Face Brightener Function
You can brighten dark faces caused by bright background.
Note
You can brighten dark photos caused by bright background automatically by selecting Auto Photo
Fix.
If the correction had not been made sufficiently, applying Face Brightener function is recommended.
Using the Auto Photo Fix Function
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
(Correct/Enhance
Images).
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the
Correct/Enhance Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview.
3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
Using the Face Brightener Function
Page 198 of 949 pages
4. Click Face Brightener.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Brightener.
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Cross).
5. Drag to select the area you want to correct, then click OK that appears over the
image.
The entire image is corrected so that the selected area containing the face becomes brighter, and
the
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the image.
Note
You can also drag to rotate the selected area.
Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for corrected images.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images.
Page top
Using the Face Sharpener Function
Page 199 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Face Sharpener Function
Using the Face Sharpener Function
You can sharpen out-of-focus faces in a photo.
You can perform the Face Sharpener function either automatically or manually.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
(Correct/Enhance
Images).
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to correct from the list displayed in the lower part of the
Correct/Enhance Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview.
Auto Correction
3. Make sure that Auto is selected.
Using the Face Sharpener Function
Page 200 of 949 pages
4. Click Face Sharpener.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener.
5. Click OK.
The face is sharpened and the
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the
image.
Note
(Compare) to display the images before and after the correction side by side so that
Click
you can compare and check the result.
Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction operation.
If you want to apply the correction to all the selected images at once, select the Apply to all
images checkbox.
Manual Correction
3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
4. Click Face Sharpener.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Face Sharpener.
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Cross).
5. Drag to select the area you want to correct, then click OK that appears over the
image.
Using the Face Sharpener Function
The facial area in and around the selected area is sharpened and the
Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left of the image.
Page 201 of 949 pages
(Correction/
Note
You can also drag to rotate the selected area.
Click Undo to undo the preceding correction operation.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for corrected images.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections will be lost if you exit before saving corrected images.
Page top
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
Page 202 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
You can enhance skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles.
You can perform the Digital Face Smoothing function either automatically or manually.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
(Correct/Enhance
Images).
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to enhance from the list displayed in the lower part of the
Correct/Enhance Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview.
Auto Enhancement
3. Make sure that Auto is selected.
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
Page 203 of 949 pages
4. Click Digital Face Smoothing.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing.
5. Click OK.
Skin is enhanced beautifully and the
of the image.
(Correction/Enhancement) mark appears on the upper left
Note
(Compare) to display the images before and after the enhancement side by side so
Click
that you can compare and check the result.
Click Reset Selected Image to undo the enhancement operation.
If you want to apply the enhancement to all the selected images at once, select the Apply to all
images checkbox.
Manual Enhancement
3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
4. Click Digital Face Smoothing.
Note
Effect levels can be changed using the slider below Digital Face Smoothing.
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Cross).
5. Drag to select the area you want to enhance, then click OK that appears over the
image.
Using the Digital Face Smoothing Function
Skin in and around the selected area is enhanced beautifully and the
mark appears on the upper left of the image.
Page 204 of 949 pages
(Correction/Enhancement)
Note
You can also drag to rotate the selected area.
Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save enhanced images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for enhanced images.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images.
Page top
Using the Blemish Remover Function
Page 205 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Using the Blemish Remover Function
Using the Blemish Remover Function
You can remove moles.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
(Correct/Enhance
Images).
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to enhance from the list displayed in the lower part of the
Correct/Enhance Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview.
3. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
4. Click Blemish Remover.
Using the Blemish Remover Function
Page 206 of 949 pages
Note
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Cross).
5. Drag to select the area you want to enhance, then click OK that appears over the
image.
Moles in and around the selected area are removed and the
appears on the upper left of the image.
(Correction/Enhancement) mark
Note
Click Undo to undo the preceding enhancement operation.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save enhanced images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for enhanced images.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving enhanced images.
Page top
Adjusting Images
Page 207 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Adjusting Images
Adjusting Images
You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness, contrast, etc. of images.
1. Select photos in the Select Images screen, then click
(Correct/Enhance
Images).
The Correct/Enhance Images window appears.
Note
You can also display the Correct/Enhance Images window by clicking
(Correct/Enhance
Images) in the Layout/Print or Edit screen. In that case, only the image displayed in Preview
can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
2. Select the image you want to adjust from the list displayed in the lower part of the
Correct/Enhance Images window.
The image appears in Preview.
Note
If only one image is selected, the thumbnail does not appear below Preview.
3. Click Manual, then click Adjust.
4. Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level.
The following adjustments are available:
Brightness
Contrast
Adjusting Images
Page 208 of 949 pages
Sharpness
Blur
Show-through Removal
Note
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments.
5. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save adjusted images as new files.
Note
To save only the image you like, click Save Selected Image. To save all images, click Save All
Corrected Images.
Only JPEG/Exif file format is available for adjusted images.
6. Click Exit.
Important
The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images.
Page top
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Correcting and
Enhancing Photos > Correct/Enhance Images Window
Correct/Enhance Images Window
You can correct/enhance images in this window.
To display the Correct/Enhance Images window, click
(Correct/Enhance Images) in the Select
Images or Edit screen, or in the Layout/Print screen of Photo Print.
(1)Toolbar
Toolbar
(Zoom In/Zoom Out)
Displays the enlarged or reduced preview of the page.
(Full Screen)
Displays the entire image in Preview.
(Compare)
Displays the Compare Images window. You can compare the images before and after the correction/
enhancement side by side.
The image before the correction/enhancement is displayed on the left, and the image after the
correction/enhancement is displayed on the right.
Page 209 of 949 pages
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Page 210 of 949 pages
(2)Task Area
Available tasks and settings may vary between the Auto and Manual tabs.
Click Auto or Manual to display the corresponding tab.
Auto Tab
Select to correct automatically.
Auto Photo Fix
Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos.
Important
The Auto Photo Fix function is not available for Photo Print. Photo Print allows you to
automatically apply suitable corrections to all photos when printing. Select this option in Color
correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box. To display the
Preferences dialog box, click
from the File menu.
(Settings) in the Layout/Print screen or select Preferences...
Prioritize Exif Info
Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of
Correct/Enhance Images Window
shooting.
Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results. It is
recommended that you normally select this setting.
Note
Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images
(JPEG).
For Photo Print, you can apply suitable corrections based on Exif information automatically
by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the
Preferences dialog box and selecting the Prioritize Exif Info checkbox.
Red-Eye Correction
Corrects red eyes.
Note
For Photo Print, you can also correct red eyes by selecting Enable Auto Photo Fix in Color
correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and selecting the
Enable Red-Eye Correction checkbox.
Face Sharpener
Sharpens out-of-focus faces.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Digital Face Smoothing
Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Apply to all images
Automatically corrects all the images displayed in the list.
OK
Applies the selected effect to the selected image or all images.
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the selected image in the list that applied corrections and enhancements.
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the images that applied corrections and enhancements displayed in the list.
Exit
Click to close the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Manual Tab
Select to correct manually.
Use Adjust to adjust brightness and contrast, or to sharpen the entire image.
Use Correct/Enhance to correct/enhance specific areas.
Adjust
Page 211 of 949 pages
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Brightness
Adjusts the overall image brightness.
Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image.
Contrast
Adjusts the contrast of the image. Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast.
Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image.
Sharpness
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image. Adjust the sharpness when the photo
is out of focus or text is blurred.
Move the slider to the right to sharpen the image.
Blur
Blurs the outline of the subjects to soften the image.
Move the slider to the right to soften the image.
Show-through Removal
Removes show-through of text from the reverse side or removes the base color. Adjust the showthrough level to prevent text on the reverse side of thin document or the base color of the document
from appearing on the image.
Move the slider to the right to increase the show-through removal effect.
Defaults
Resets each adjustment (brightness, contrast, sharpness, blur, and show-through removal).
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all adjustments applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the selected image in the list that applied adjustments.
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the images that applied adjustments displayed in the list.
Exit
Click to close the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Correct/Enhance
Page 212 of 949 pages
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Red-Eye Correction
Corrects red eyes.
You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to. You can adjust the effect level using the
slider.
Note
For Photo Print, red eyes are automatically corrected when Enable Auto Photo Fix is selected in
Color correction for printing on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box and the Enable
Red-Eye Correction checkbox is selected. To disable the automatic correction, deselect the
checkbox.
Face Brightener
Corrects the entire image so that the selected facial area is brightened.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Face Sharpener
Sharpens out-of-focus faces.
You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to. You can adjust the effect level using the
slider.
Digital Face Smoothing
Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles.
You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to. You can adjust the effect level using the
slider.
Blemish Remover
Removes moles.
You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to.
OK
Applies the selected effect to the specified area.
Undo
Cancels the latest correction/enhancement.
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the selected image in the list that applied corrections and enhancements.
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the images that applied corrections and enhancements displayed in the list.
Page 213 of 949 pages
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Page 214 of 949 pages
Exit
Click to close the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Page top
Questions and Answers
Page 215 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers
Questions and Answers
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from?
How Do I Print with Even Margins?
What Is "C1" or "C4"?
Page top
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
Page 216 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers
> How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
How Can I Move (or Copy) the Saved File?
If you want to move (or copy) a file created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX from one folder to another,
you need to move (or copy) the folder that was automatically created when originally saving that file as
well.
For example, when you save a file named "MyAlbum.el1," a folder named "MyAlbum.el1.Data" is
automatically created in the same folder that contains the "MyAlbum.el1" file. If you want to move (or copy)
the "MyAlbum.el1" file to another folder, move (or copy) the "MyAlbum.el1.Data" folder as well. The
"MyAlbum.el1.Data" folder contains the photos used in the album.
Note
The icons may vary depending on the items.
Important
Do not change the Data folder name; otherwise you will not be able to display the photos you edited
with Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Page top
Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from?
Page 217 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers
> Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start from?
Which Side of the Displayed Image Does the Printing Start
from?
As shown below, printing starts from the left side of the image displayed in the Layout/Print screen.
Outputs the paper in the direction as the arrow indicates.
See your printer manual for details on how to load paper (to print on the front/back, etc.).
Page top
How Do I Print with Even Margins?
Page 218 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers
> How Do I Print with Even Margins?
How Do I Print with Even Margins?
When you print on a bordered layout, the margins on the left and right or the top and bottom may become
wider than the other, depending on the image and printer.
To always print with even margins, select the Always crop images when selecting a layout with margins
checkbox on the Advanced tab of the Preferences dialog box.
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
Preferences... from the File menu.
(Settings) in the Layout/Print screen or select
Crop the photo to apply even margins individually.
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Note
This setting is available for Photo Print only.
Page top
What Is "C1" or "C4"?
Page 219 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Questions and Answers
> What Is "C1" or "C4"?
What Is "C1" or "C4"?
When an album is printed, labels such as "C1" and "C4" are printed as page numbers.
The "C1" and "C4" represent the front cover and back cover, respectively.
C1: Front cover
C2: Inside the front cover
C3: Inside the back cover
C4: Back cover
Page top
Photo Print Settings
Page 220 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings
Photo Print Settings
Printing Vivid Photos
Reducing Photo Noise
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page
Printing an Index
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
Printing Photo Information
Saving Photos
Opening Saved Files
Page top
Printing Vivid Photos
Page 221 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing Vivid Photos
Printing Vivid Photos
Select the Vivid Photo checkbox in the Select Paper screen to boost the colors in a photo before printing.
Important
This function is available only with a printer that supports Vivid Photo.
This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Note
Even if you select the Vivid Photo checkbox, this effect applies only to the print result. The original
image or preview image will not be affected.
Page top
Reducing Photo Noise
Page 222 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Reducing Photo Noise
Reducing Photo Noise
When a photo is taken in a dark location such as night scene using digital camera, noise may appear in
the image.
Select the Photo Noise Reduction checkbox in the Select Paper screen to reduce noise in the image and
make the printed photos more vivid.
Important
This function is not available when Enable ICC Profile is selected on the Advanced tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Note
When the noise is severe, change Normal to Strong.
The noise reduction effect applies only to the print result. The original image or preview image will
not be affected.
Page top
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Cropping a photo is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the photo by selecting the
necessary portions.
Click
(Crop Image) in the Layout/Print screen or double-click the preview image.
Move the white frame to the portion to print and click OK.
Note
To move the cropping area, place the cursor within the white frame and drag it. Drag the white lines
to enlarge/reduce the cropping area.
Select the The Rule of Thirds checkbox to display white broken lines. To create a balanced
composition, drag any of the intersecting points (white squares) or white broken lines over the main
subject of the photo.
Page 223 of 949 pages
Cropping Photos (Photo Print)
Page 224 of 949 pages
The cropping effect applies only to the print result. The original image will not be cropped.
See Help for details on the Crop window.
Page top
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
Page 225 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
Printing Dates on Photos (Photo Print)
To print the date the photo was taken on the photo, click
(Date Settings) in the Layout/Print screen,
then select the Print date checkbox in the Date Settings dialog box.
Note
The date is displayed in the short date format (mm/dd/yyyy, etc.) specified in your operating system.
See Help for details on setting dates.
Page top
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page
Page 226 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page
Printing Multiple Photos on One Page
You can print multiple photos on one page by selecting a multiple-photo layout in the Layout/Print screen.
Note
See the following section for details on how to select photos.
Selecting a Photo
The available number of photos and layout may vary depending on the media type.
Photos are arranged in the following order.
Example: Borderless (x4)
You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box.
You can select the printing order from By Date, By Name and By Selection.
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
(Settings) or select Preferences... from the File
menu.
Page top
Printing an Index
Page 227 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing an Index
Printing an Index
You can print an index of selected photos. An index print shows the thumbnails of the photos in one
page. It is convenient for managing your photos.
To print an index, select Index from the layouts in the Layout/Print screen.
Important
Index print will be disabled if you select any of the following paper sizes.
- Credit Card
You can print up to 80 images on one page.
Note
See the following section for details on how to select photos.
Selecting a Photo
Photos are arranged in the following order.
Example: Index (x20)
You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box.
You can select the printing order from By Date, By Name, and By Selection.
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
menu.
(Settings) or select Preferences... from the File
Printing an Index
Page 228 of 949 pages
Page top
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
Page 229 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
You can print a variety of ID photos.
Important
The photo may not qualify as an official ID photo depending on its use.
For details, contact the party to whom you will be submitting the photo.
To print ID photos, select 4"x6" 10x15cm for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen, and select a layout of
the ID photo from the layouts in the Layout/Print screen.
Note
See the following section for details on how to select photos.
Selecting a Photo
Photos are arranged in the following order.
Example: ID Photo 3.5x4.5cm
You can change the printing order in Printing Order on the Print tab of the Preferences dialog box.
You can select the printing order from By Date, By Name, and By Selection.
To display the Preferences dialog box, click
(Settings) or select Preferences... from the File
menu.
ID photos can only be printed on 4"x6" 10x15cm paper.
Printing ID Photos (ID Photo Print)
Page 230 of 949 pages
Page top
Printing Photo Information
Page 231 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Printing Photo Information
Printing Photo Information
You can print the photo and the Exif information side by side.
To print them, select Letter 8.5"x11" or A4 for Paper Size in the Select Paper screen, and select Captured
Info from the layouts in the Layout/Print screen.
Note
See the following section for details on how to select photos.
Selecting a Photo
This function is available only on paper sizes Letter 8.5"x11" and A4.
Page top
Saving Photos
Page 232 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Saving Photos
Saving Photos
You can save edited photos. The information of cropping and layout can be saved.
Click Save in the Layout/Print screen.
When the Save As dialog box appears, specify the save location and file name, then click Save.
Important
If you edit a saved file and save it again, the file will be overwritten.
To save a file again with a new name or to a different location, select Save As... from the File menu
and save.
Note
Save will not be displayed in the Select Images or Select Paper screen.
Page top
Opening Saved Files
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Photo Print Settings >
Opening Saved Files
Opening Saved Files
You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
1. Click Library from Menu.
The Open dialog box appears.
You can check files created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX by icon view (only for Windows Vista)
or thumbnail view.
Important
When using 64bit Edition of Windows Vista or Windows XP, the contents of files cannot be
displayed on Explorer.
2. Select the file you want to open and click Open.
The Layout/Print screen appears.
Note
Easy-PhotoPrint EX supports the following file format (extension).
- Easy-PhotoPrint EX Photo Print file (.el6)
3. Edit the file if necessary.
Note
You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX with the following methods, besides from
Library in Menu.
- Double-click or click the file.
- From the File menu, click Open..., then select the file you want to edit.
Page 233 of 949 pages
Opening Saved Files
Page 234 of 949 pages
You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu.
Page top
Other Settings
Page 235 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings
Other Settings
Changing Layout
Changing Background
Adding Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
Replacing Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Cropping Photos
Framing Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
Attaching Comments to Photos
Adding Text to Photos
Saving
Setting Holidays
Setting Calendar Display
Opening Saved Files
Page top
Changing Layout
Page 236 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Changing Layout
Changing Layout
You can change the layout of each page separately.
Select the page you want to change the layout of in the Edit screen, then click
(Change Layout).
Select the layout you want to use in the Change Layout dialog box and click OK.
Album
Important
If the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout, the following will
happen:
: Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames
If the number of layout
in the new layout.
frames is increased
: Pages with the new layout will be added until all the images on the
If the number of layout
pages with the current layout can be fitted.
frames is decreased
If you change the current layout for the front or back cover to one that has fewer layout frames, any
image that does not fit in the new layout will be deleted, starting with the last image that was added
to the former layout page.
Note
The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size, Orientation, or the type of
page selected (front cover, inside pages or back cover).
Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly
selected.
Calendar
Changing Layout
Page 237 of 949 pages
Important
The layouts of all pages are changed to the selected layout.
All images that do not fit in the new layout will be collected on the last page.
Note
The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation.
Layout Print
Important
If the new layout has a different number of frames per page from the current layout, the following will
happen:
: Images will move from the subsequent pages to fill all the frames
If the number of layout
in the new layout.
frames is increased
If the number of layout
frames is decreased
: Pages with the new layout will be added until all the images on the
pages with the current layout can be fitted.
Note
The layouts that can be selected may vary depending on the Paper Size and Orientation.
Select the Apply to all pages checkbox to change the layouts of all pages to the one you newly
selected.
Page top
Changing Background
Page 238 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Changing Background
Changing Background
You can change the background of each page.
Important
You cannot change the background of the Photo Print, Stickers, and Layout Print.
Click Background... in the Page Setup screen or select the page you want to change the background of in
the Edit screen, then click
(Change Background).
Note
The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens
may vary depending on what you create.
Select the type of background you want to use in the Change Background dialog box.
When Select from samples is Selected
Select the image you want to use from Samples and click OK.
Note
Select from samples will be displayed only if Album has been selected.
Various backgrounds are available on our website besides those saved in the application.
Changing Background
Click Search backgrounds... to access the Canon website from which you can download additional
materials for free.
Internet connection is required to access the website. Internet connection fees apply.
This function may not be available in some regions.
Exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX before installing backgrounds.
When Single color is Selected
Select the color you want to use from Standard color or Custom color and click OK.
When Image file is Selected
Set Image File Path and Image Layout, then click OK.
Page 239 of 949 pages
Changing Background
Page 240 of 949 pages
Note
See Help for details on how to set the background in the Change Background dialog box.
Page top
Adding Photos
Page 241 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Adding
Photos
Adding Photos
You can add images to pages.
Select the page you want to add photos in the Edit screen, then click
(Add Image).
Note
The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens
may vary depending on what you create.
Select the folder containing the image you want to add from the folder tree area on the left of the Add
Image dialog box, and select the image you want to add from the thumbnail window on the right.
Note
Click an image to select it (background turns blue) or deselect it (background turns white). You can
also select multiple images.
Select an option for Add to and click OK.
Important
You can add up to 20 images at one time to a single page.
Up to 99 of the same images can be added to all pages combined.
You cannot add two or more of the same image at one time. Add it one at a time.
When the number of pages increases due to added images, you cannot add images beyond page
400.
Note
In the Add Image dialog box, you can select all images at one time or change the display size and
order of the thumbnails. See Help for details.
Page top
Swapping Positions of Photos
Page 242 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Swapping Positions of Photos
Swapping Positions of Photos
You can swap the positions of images.
Click
(Swap Image Positions) in the Edit screen.
Note
The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens
may vary depending on what you create.
Select the target and source images you want to swap, then click Swap.
When you finish swapping all images you want to swap, click Back to Edit.
Page top
Replacing Photos
Page 243 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Replacing Photos
Replacing Photos
You can replace an image with another image.
Select the image you want to replace in the Edit screen, then click
(Replace Selected Image).
Select the folder containing the image you want to replace with from the folder tree area on the left of the
Replace Image dialog box.
Select the image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window on the right of the screen and click
OK.
If you want to select from the images already imported, click the Imported Images tab and select the
image you want to replace with from the thumbnail window and click OK.
Important
You cannot select multiple images in the Replace Image dialog box.
Note
If you select multiple images in the Edit screen and use the replacement function, all the images
selected in the Edit screen will be replaced with the image selected in the Replace Image dialog
box.
When images are replaced, the following settings of the old image are inherited to the new image.
- Position
- Size
- Frame
- Position and size of the date
The cropping information and image orientation are not inherited.
In the Replace Image dialog box, you can change the display size and order of the thumbnails. See
Help for details.
Page top
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Page 244 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
Changing Position, Angle and Size of Photos
You can adjust the position, angle and size of images.
Select the image of which you want to change the position or size in the Edit screen and click
Image) or double-click the image.
(Edit
Set the Center Position, Rotation and Size, then click OK.
Note
You can also change the position and size of an image by dragging it in the Edit screen.
Select an image in the Edit screen, then click
(Free Rotate) and drag a corner of the image to
rotate it.
See Help for details on the position and size of images.
Page top
Cropping Photos
Page 245 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Cropping Photos
Cropping Photos
Cropping an image is the act of removing the unnecessary portions of the image by selecting the
necessary portions.
Select the image you want to crop in the Edit screen and click
image.
(Edit Image) or double-click the
Click the Crop tab in the Edit Image dialog box.
Drag the white squares on the image to change the area to be cropped and click OK.
Note
See Help for details on cropping.
Page top
Framing Photos
Page 246 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Framing
Photos
Framing Photos
You can add frames to images.
Important
You cannot add frames to images in Photo Print, Stickers, and Layout Print.
Select the image you want to frame in the Edit screen and click
image.
(Edit Image) or double-click the
Click the Frame tab in the Edit Image dialog box.
Select the frame you want to use from Frames and click OK.
Important
You cannot print dates on framed photos.
Note
Select the Apply to all images in the page checkbox to add the same frame to all the images on a
Framing Photos
Page 247 of 949 pages
selected page at one time.
Various frames are available on our website besides those saved in the application.
Click Search frames... to access the Canon website from which you can download additional
materials for free.
Internet connection is required to access the website. Internet connection fees apply.
This function may not be available in some regions.
Exit Easy-PhotoPrint EX before installing frames.
Search frames... will be displayed only if Album has been selected.
See Help for details on frames.
Page top
Printing Dates on Photos
Page 248 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Printing
Dates on Photos
Printing Dates on Photos
You can print dates on images.
Select the image you want to print the date in the Edit screen and click
the image.
(Edit Image) or double-click
Click the Date tab in the Edit Image dialog box.
Select the Show date checkbox.
Set the Text Orientation, Position, Font Size and Color, then click OK.
Important
You cannot print dates on framed images.
Note
The date is displayed in the short date format (mm/dd/yyyy, etc.) specified in your operating system.
See Help for details on setting dates.
Printing Dates on Photos
Page 249 of 949 pages
Page top
Attaching Comments to Photos
Page 250 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings >
Attaching Comments to Photos
Attaching Comments to Photos
You can attach comments to images and display them in your album. The photo name, shooting date
and comments are displayed (from top to bottom) in a comment box.
Important
You cannot attach comments to Photo Print, Calendar, Stickers, and Layout Print.
Select the image you want to attach comments to in the Edit screen and click
double-click the image.
Click the Comments tab in the Edit Image dialog box.
(Edit Image) or
Attaching Comments to Photos
Page 251 of 949 pages
Select the Show comment box checkbox.
Select the checkboxes of the items you want to display, and enter comments.
Set the size and color of font, and position of the comments, etc., then click OK.
Note
See Help for details on comments.
Page top
Adding Text to Photos
Page 252 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Adding
Text to Photos
Adding Text to Photos
You can add text to photos.
Click
(Add Text) in the Edit screen and drag the mouse over the area in which you want to add text.
Note
The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens
may vary depending on what you create.
Select the Text tab in the Edit Text Box dialog box and enter text.
Note
In the Edit Text Box dialog box, you can change the position, angle and size of the text. You can also
set the color and line of the text box. See Help for details.
To change the entered text, select it and click
appears. You can change the text.
(Edit Text Box). The Edit Text Box dialog box
Page top
Saving
Page 253 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Saving
Saving
You can save edited items.
Click Save in the Edit or Print Settings screen.
Note
The screens for Album printing are used as examples in the following descriptions. The screens
may vary depending on what you create.
When the Save As dialog box appears, specify the save location and file name, then click Save.
Important
If you edit a saved file and save it again, the file will be overwritten.
To save a file again with a new name or to a different location, select Save As... from the File menu
and save.
Note
Save will not be displayed in the Page Setup or Select Images screen.
Page top
Setting Holidays
Page 254 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Setting
Holidays
Setting Holidays
You can add holidays to your calendar.
(Setup Period/Holiday) in the
Click Set Holidays... in the Page Setup screen of Calendar, or click
Edit screen and click Set Holidays... in the Calendar General Settings dialog box to display the Holiday
Settings dialog box.
To add a holiday, click Add.... The Add/Edit Holiday dialog box appears. To edit a saved holiday, select it
and click Edit....
To delete a holiday, select it and click Delete. To delete all the saved holidays within your calendar
period, click Clear.
Setting Holidays
Page 255 of 949 pages
Enter the name in Holiday Name and specify the date.
Select the Set as Holiday checkbox to display that day as a holiday in your calendar.
Note
See Help for details on each dialog box.
Page top
Setting Calendar Display
Page 256 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Setting
Calendar Display
Setting Calendar Display
You can customize the calendar display (fonts, lines, colors, position, size, etc.).
Click Settings... in the Page Setup screen of Calendar, or select a calendar in the Edit screen and click
(Setup Calendar) to display the Calendar Settings dialog box.
Important
The Position & Size tab is displayed only when the Calendar Settings dialog box is displayed from
the Edit screen.
Note
See Help for details on the Calendar Settings dialog box.
Page top
Opening Saved Files
Page 257 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with the Bundled Application Software > Other Settings > Opening
Saved Files
Opening Saved Files
You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
1. Click Library from Menu.
The Open dialog box appears.
You can check files created and saved with Easy-PhotoPrint EX by icon view (only for Windows Vista)
or thumbnail view.
Important
When using 64bit Edition of Windows Vista or Windows XP, the contents of files cannot be
displayed on Explorer.
2. Select the file you want to open and click Open.
The Edit screen appears.
Note
Easy-PhotoPrint EX supports the following file formats (extensions).
- Easy-PhotoPrint EX Album file (.el1)
- Easy-PhotoPrint EX Stickers file (.el2)
- Easy-PhotoPrint EX Calendar file (.el4)
- Easy-PhotoPrint EX Layout file (.el5)
3. Edit the file if necessary.
Note
See the following sections for details on the editing procedures.
Opening Saved Files
Page 258 of 949 pages
Editing Album
Editing Calendar
Editing Stickers
Editing Layout Print
Note
You can open files created with Easy-PhotoPrint EX with the following methods, besides from
Library in Menu.
- Double-click or click the file.
- From the File menu, click Open..., then select the file you want to edit.
You can also open a recently used file by clicking the file name shown in the File menu.
Page top
Printing with Other Application Software
Page 259 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software
Printing with Other Application Software
Various Printing Methods
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data
Overview of the Printer Driver
Page top
Various Printing Methods
Page 260 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods
Various Printing Methods
Printing with Easy Setup
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Setting the Stapling Margin
Borderless Printing
Fit-to-Page Printing
Scaled Printing
Page Layout Printing
Poster Printing
Booklet Printing
Duplex Printing
Stamp/Background Printing
Registering a Stamp
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
Printing an Envelope
Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
Page top
Printing with Easy Setup
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Printing with Easy Setup
Printing with Easy Setup
The simple setup procedure for carrying out appropriate printing on this machine, is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select a frequently used profile
In Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab, select a printing profile suited for the purpose.
When you select a printing profile, the Additional Features, Media Type, and Printer Paper Size
settings are automatically switched to the values that were preset.
3. Select the print quality
Select High, Standard, or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality.
4. Select the paper source
Select Automatically Select, Rear Tray, Cassette, Continuous Autofeed, or Paper Allocation that
matches your purpose for Paper Source.
Important
The paper source settings that can be selected may differ depending on the paper type and
size.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the document is printed with settings that matches your purpose.
Important
When you check the Always Print with Current Settings check box, all settings on the Quick Setup,
Main, Page Setup, and Effects tabs are saved, and you can print with the same settings from the
next time as well.
Page 261 of 949 pages
Printing with Easy Setup
Page 262 of 949 pages
Click Save... to register the specified settings. For instructions on registering settings, see "
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile."
Page top
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
Page 263 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
The paper size and orientation are essentially determined by the application. When the page size and
orientation set for Page Size and Orientation on the Page Setup tab are same as those set with the
application, you do not need to select them on the Page Setup tab.
When you are not able to specify them with the application, the procedure for selecting a page size and
orientation is as follows:
You can also set page size and Orientation on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the paper size
Select a page size from the Page Size list on the Page Setup tab.
3. Set Orientation
Select Portrait or Landscape for Orientation. Check Rotate 180 degrees check box when you want to
perform printing with the original being rotated 180 degrees.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the document will be printed with the selected page size and the orientation.
Page top
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Default Setting
Print from Last Page
Collate
Print from Last Page + Collate
The procedure for specifying the number of copies and printing order is as follows:
You can also set the number of copies on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Specify the number of copies to be printed
For Copies on the Page Setup tab, specify the number of copies to be printed.
3. Specify the print order
Check the Print from Last Page check box when you want to print from the last page in order. When
you do this, you do not need to sort pages into their correct order after printing.
4. Set up collated printing when you specify multiple copies in the Copies box
Check the Collate check box when you are specifying multiple copy together.
Page 264 of 949 pages
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing Order
Page 265 of 949 pages
Uncheck this check box to print all pages with the same page number together.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK.
The specified number of copies will be printed with the specified printing order.
Important
When the application software that you used to create the document has the same function, give
priority to the printer driver settings. However, if the print results are not acceptable, specify the
function settings on the application software. When you specify the number of copies and the
printing order with both the application and this printer driver, the number of copies may be
multiplied numbers of the two settings or the specified printing order may not be enabled.
Print from Last Page and Collate appear grayed out and are unavailable when Booklet is selected
for Page Layout.
Print from Last Page appears grayed out and is unavailable when Poster is selected for Page
Layout.
Note
By setting both Print from Last Page and Collate, you can perform printing so that papers are
collated one by one starting from the last page.
These settings can be used in combination with Borderless, Normal-size, Fit-to-Page, Scaled,
Page Layout, and Duplex Printing.
Page top
Setting the Stapling Margin
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Setting the Stapling Margin
Setting the Stapling Margin
The procedure for setting the staple side and the margin width is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Specify the side to be stapled
Check the position of the stapling margin from Staple Side on the Page Setup tab.
The printer analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best
staple position. When you want to change the setting, select from the list.
3. Set the margin width
If necessary, click Specify Margin... and set the margin width, and then click OK.
Page 266 of 949 pages
Setting the Stapling Margin
Page 267 of 949 pages
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified staple side and margin width.
Important
Staple Side and Specify Margin... appear grayed out and are unavailable when:
Borderless, Poster, or Booklet is selected for Page Layout.
Scaled is selected for Page Layout (When Duplex Printing is also selected, only Staple Side can
be specified).
Page top
Borderless Printing
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing
The borderless printing function allows you to print data without any margin by enlarging the data so that
it extends slightly off the paper. Without the borderless printing function, a margin is provided around the
printed data. When you want to print data such as a photo without providing any margin around it, select
borderless printing.
The procedure for performing borderless printing is as follows:
You can also set borderless printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.
Setting Borderless Printing
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set borderless printing
Select Borderless from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
When a message prompting you to change the media type appears, select a media type from the
list and click OK.
3. Check the paper size
Page 268 of 949 pages
Borderless Printing
Check the Page Size list. When you want to change, select another page size from the list. The list
displays only sizes that can be used for borderless printing.
4. Adjust the amount of extension from the paper
If necessary, adjust the amount of extension using the Amount of Extension slider.
Moving the slider to the right makes the amount larger and moving the slider to the left makes the
amount smaller.
It is recommended to set the slider at the second position from the right for most cases.
Important
When you set the slider at the rightmost position, the back side of the paper may become
smudged.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK.
The data will be printed without any margins on the paper.
Important
When a page size that cannot be used for borderless printing is selected, the size is automatically
changed to the valid page sizes for borderless printing.
When High Resolution Paper, T-Shirt Transfers, or Envelope is selected from the Media Type list on
the Main tab, you cannot perform borderless printing.
When Borderless is selected, the Printer Paper Size, Staple Side (when Duplex Printing is not
selected) settings, and the Stamp/Background... button on the Page Setup tab appear grayed out
and are unavailable.
Print quality may deteriorate or the sheet may be stained at the top and bottom depending on the
type of the media used.
When the ratio of the height to the width differs from the image data, a portion of the image may not
be printed depending on the size of the media used.
In this case, crop the image data with an application software according to the paper size.
Note
When Plain Paper is selected for Media Type on the Main tab, borderless printing is not
recommended, and therefore the dialog box for media selection appears.
When you are using plain paper for test printing, select Plain Paper, and click OK.
Expanding the Range of the Document to Print
Specifying a large amount of extension allows you to perform borderless printing with no problems.
However, the portion of the document that extends off the paper range will not be printed. Subjects
around the perimeter of a photo may not be printed.
Try borderless printing once. When you are not satisfied with the result of borderless printing, reduce the
amount of extension. The extension amount becomes shorter as the Amount of Extension slider is
moved to the left.
Important
When the amount of extension is shortened, an unexpected margin may be produced on the print,
depending on the size of the paper.
Note
When the Amount of Extension slider is set to the leftmost position, image data will be printed in the
full size.
When Preview before printing is checked on the Main tab, you can confirm before printing whether
there will be no border.
Page 269 of 949 pages
Borderless Printing
Page 270 of 949 pages
Page top
Fit-to-Page Printing
Page 271 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods > Fitto-Page Printing
Fit-to-Page Printing
The procedure for printing a document that is automatically enlarged or reduced to fit the page size to be
used is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set fit-to-page printing
Select Fit-to-Page from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
3. Select the paper size for the data
Using Page Size, select the page size that is set with your application.
4. Select the print paper size
Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list.
When the Printer Paper Size is smaller than the Page Size, the page image will be reduced. When
the Printer Paper Size is larger than the Page Size, the page image will be enlarged.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
Fit-to-Page Printing
Page 272 of 949 pages
5. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the document will be enlarged or reduced to fit to the page size.
Page top
Scaled Printing
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Scaled Printing
Scaled Printing
The procedure for printing a document with pages enlarged or reduced is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set scaled printing
Select Scaled from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
3. Select the paper size for the data
Using Page Size, select the page size that is set with your application.
4. Set the scaling rate by using one of the following methods:
Select a Printer Paper Size
When the printer paper size is smaller than the Page Size, the page image will be reduced.
When the printer paper size is larger than the Page Size, the page image will be enlarged.
Page 273 of 949 pages
Scaled Printing
Specify a scaling factor
Directly type in a value into the Scaling box.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the document will be printed with the specified scale.
Important
When the application software with which you created the original has the scaled printing function,
configure the settings on your application software. You do not need to configure the same setting
in the printer driver.
When Scaled is selected, the Staple Side list box appears grayed out and is unavailable (when
Duplex Printing is not selected).
Note
Page 274 of 949 pages
Scaled Printing
Page 275 of 949 pages
Selecting Scaled changes the printable area of the document.
Page top
Page Layout Printing
Page 276 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Page Layout Printing
Page Layout Printing
The page layout printing function allows you to print more than one page image on a single sheet of
paper.
The procedure for performing page layout printing is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set page layout printing
Select Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
3. Select the print paper size
Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list.
Setting the layout of two pages of the document from left to right is complete.
4. Set the number of pages to be printed on one sheet and the page order
If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Page Layout Printing dialog box, and
click OK.
Page Layout Printing
Page 277 of 949 pages
Pages
To increase the number of pages to be included on a single sheet of paper, select a desired
number of pages from the list.
You can also set 2-Page Print or 4-Page Print on the Quick Setup tab.
Page Order
To change the page arrangement order, select an icon from the list to change the page placement
order.
Page Border
To print a page border around each document page, check this check box.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the specified number of pages will be arranged on each sheet of paper in
the specified order.
Page top
Poster Printing
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Poster Printing
Poster Printing
The poster printing function allows you to enlarge image data, divide it into several pages, and print
these pages on separate sheets of paper. When the pages are pasted together, they form a large print
like a poster.
The procedure for performing poster printing is as follows:
Setting Poster Printing
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set poster printing
Select Poster from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
3. Select the print paper size
Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list.
Setting 2 by 2-page poster printing is complete.
Page 278 of 949 pages
Poster Printing
4. Set the number of image divisions and the pages to be printed
If necessary, click Specify..., specify the following settings in the Poster Printing dialog box, and then
click OK.
Image Divisions
Select the number of divisions (vertical x horizontal). As the number of divisions increases, the
number of sheets used for printing increases, allowing you to create a larger poster.
Print "Cut/Paste" in margins
To leave out words "Cut" and "Paste", uncheck this check box.
Important
This feature is unavailable when the 64-bit printer driver is used.
Print "Cut/Paste" lines in margins
To leave out cut lines, uncheck this check box.
Pages
To reprint only specific pages, enter the page number you want to print. To print multiple pages,
specify by separating the pages with commas or entering a hyphen between the page numbers.
Note
You can also specify the print range by clicking the pages in the settings preview.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the document will be divided into several pages during printing.
After all poster pages have been printed, paste the pages together to create a poster.
Printing Only Specific Pages
If ink becomes faint or runs out during printing, you can reprint specific pages by following the procedure
below:
1. Set the print range
In the settings preview on the left of the Page Setup tab, click the pages that do not need to be
printed.
The pages that were clicked are deleted, and only the pages to be printed are displayed.
Page 279 of 949 pages
Poster Printing
Page 280 of 949 pages
Note
Click the deleted pages to display them again.
Right-click the settings preview to select Print all pages or Delete all pages.
2. Complete the setup
After completing the page selection, click OK.
When you execute print, only specified pages will be printed.
Important
When Poster is selected, the Duplex Printing, Staple Side and Print from Last Page appear grayed
out and are unavailable.
Since poster printing enlarges the document when printing it, the print results may become coarse.
Page top
Booklet Printing
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Booklet Printing
Booklet Printing
The booklet printing function allows you to print data for a booklet. Data is printed on both sides of the
paper. This type of printing ensures that pages can be collated properly, in page number order, when the
printed sheets are folded and stapled at the center.
The procedure for performing booklet printing is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set booklet printing
Select Booklet from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup tab.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the window.
3. Select the print paper size
Select the size of the paper loaded in the machine from the Printer Paper Size list.
4. Set the margin for stapling and the margin width
Click Specify... and specify the following settings in the Booklet Printing dialog box, and then click
OK.
Page 281 of 949 pages
Booklet Printing
Page 282 of 949 pages
Margin for stapling
Select which side should the stapling margin be on when the booklet is completed.
Insert blank page
To leave one side of a sheet blank, check the check box, and select the page to be left blank.
Margin
Enter the margin width. The specified width from the center of the sheet becomes the margin width
for one page.
Page Border
To print a page border around each document page, check the check box.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the document is automatically printed first on one side of a sheet of paper
and then on the opposite side.
When the printing is complete, fold the paper at the center of the margin and make a booklet.
Important
Booklet cannot be selected when a media type other than Plain Paper, Hagaki A or Hagaki is
selected for Media Type.
When Booklet is selected, Duplex Printing, Staple Side, Print from Last Page, and Collate appear
grayed out and are unavailable.
Note
The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page
function of booklet printing.
Page top
Duplex Printing
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Duplex Printing
Duplex Printing
The procedure for printing data on both sides of a sheet of paper is as follows:
You can also set duplex printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.
Performing Automatic Duplex Printing
You can perform the duplex printing without having to turn over the paper.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set automatic duplex printing
Check the Duplex Printing check box on the Page Setup tab and confirm that Automatic is checked.
3. Select the layout
Select Normal-size (or Fit-to-Page, Scaled or Page Layout) from the Page Layout list.
4. Set the print area
When you perform duplex printing, the print area of the document becomes slightly narrower than
usual and the document may not fit on one page.
Click Print Area Setup..., and select one of the following processing methods.
Page 283 of 949 pages
Duplex Printing
Use normal-size printing
Print without reducing the page.
Use reduced printing
Reduce the page slightly during printing.
5. Specify the side to be stapled
The machine analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best
Staple Side. When you want to change the setting, select another value from the list.
6. Set the margin width
If necessary, click Specify Margin... and set the margin width, and then click OK.
7. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, duplex printing will be started.
Performing Duplex Printing Manually
You can perform the duplex printing manually.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set duplex printing
Check the Duplex Printing check box and uncheck the Automatic check box on the Page Setup tab.
3. Select the layout
Page 284 of 949 pages
Duplex Printing
Page 285 of 949 pages
Select Normal-size (or Fit-to-Page, Scaled or Page Layout) from the Page Layout list.
4. Specify the side to be stapled
The machine analyzes the Orientation and Page Layout settings, and automatically selects the best
Staple Side. When you want to change the setting, select another value from the list.
5. Set the margin width
If necessary, click Specify Margin... and set the margin width, and then click OK.
6. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the document will be printed on one side of a sheet of paper. When the
printing of one side is complete, load the paper correctly by following the message and click OK.
The document will be printed on the opposite side.
Important
Duplex Printing appears grayed out and is unavailable when:
A media type other than Plain Paper, Hagaki A or Hagaki is selected from the Media Type list.
Poster is selected from the Page Layout list.
When Booklet is selected from the Page Layout list, Duplex Printing and Staple Side appear grayed
out and are unavailable.
After printing the front page, there is an ink drying wait time before starting to print the back page
(Operation stops temporarily). Do not touch the paper during the time. You can change the ink
drying wait time at Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab.
When you perform the automatic duplex printing for Hagaki, print an address first and then print your
message.
Note
When you select borderless printing during duplex printing, a dialog box for media type selection
may appear. If that happens, select Plain Paper.
When performing the automatic duplex printing, do not use any plain paper smaller than A5. Also,
do not select any type of paper other than Plain Paper, Hagaki A or Hagaki at Media Type.
If the back side of the paper becomes smudged during duplex printing, perform Bottom Plate
Cleaning in the Maintenance tab.
Related Topic
Cleaning Inside the Machine
Page top
Stamp/Background Printing
Page 286 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Stamp/Background Printing
Stamp/Background Printing
This feature is unavailable when the 64-bit printer driver is used.
The Stamp function allows you to print a stamp text or a bitmap over or behind document data. It also
allows you to print date, time and user name. The Background function allows you to print a light
illustration behind the document data.
The procedure for performing stamp/background printing is as follows:
Printing a Stamp
"CONFIDENTIAL," "IMPORTANT," and other stamps that are used often in companies are pre-registered.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab
The Stamp/Background dialog box opens.
3. Select a stamp
Check the Stamp check box, and select a desired stamp from the list.
Stamp/Background Printing
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab.
4. Set the stamp details
If necessary, specify the following settings, and then click OK.
Place stamp over text
To print the stamp on the front of the document, check this check box.
Note
The stamp is given priority because the stamp is printed over the document data in the
sections where the stamp and the document data overlap. When this check box is unchecked,
the stamp is printed behind the document data and may be hidden in the overlapping sections
depending on the application used.
Stamp first page only
To print the stamp only on the first page, check this check box.
Define Stamp... button
To change the stamp text, bitmap, or position, click this (refer to " Registering a Stamp ").
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified stamp.
Printing a Background
Two bitmap files are pre-registered as samples.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab
The Stamp/Background dialog box opens.
3. Select the background
Check the Background check box, and select a desired background from the list.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the Page Setup tab.
4. Set the background details
If necessary, complete the following settings, and then click OK.
Background first page only
To print the background only on the first page, check this check box.
Select Background... button
To use another background or change the layout or density of a background, click this (refer to "
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background ").
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified background.
Important
When Borderless is selected, the Stamp/Background... button appears grayed out and is
unavailable.
Note
The stamp and background are not printed on blank sheets inserted with the Insert blank page
Page 287 of 949 pages
Stamp/Background Printing
Page 288 of 949 pages
function of booklet printing.
Related Topics
Registering a Stamp
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
Page top
Registering a Stamp
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Stamp/Background Printing > Registering a Stamp
Registering a Stamp
This feature is unavailable when the 64-bit printer driver is used.
You can create and register a new stamp. You can also change and register some of the settings of an
existing stamp. Unnecessary stamps can be deleted at any time.
The procedure for registering a new stamp is as follows:
Registering a New Stamp
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab
The Stamp/Background dialog box opens.
3. Click Define Stamp...
The Stamp Settings dialog box opens.
Page 289 of 949 pages
Registering a Stamp
4. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window
Stamp tab
Select Text, Bitmap, or Date/Time/User Name that matches your purpose for Stamp Type.
For Text registration, the characters must already be entered in Stamp Text. If necessary,
change the TrueType Font, Style, Size, and Outline settings. You can select the color of the
stamp by clicking Select Color....
For Bitmap, click Select File... and select the bitmap file (.bmp) to be used. If necessary,
change the settings of the Size and Transparent white area.
For Date/Time/User Name, the creation date/time and user name of the printed object are
displayed in Stamp Text. If necessary, change the settings of TrueType Font, Style, Size, and
Outline. You can select the color of the stamp by clicking Select Color....
Important
Stamp Text appears grayed out and is unavailable when Date/Time/User Name is selected.
Placement tab
Select the stamp position from the Position list. You can also select Custom from the Position
list and specify coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position.
You can also change the stamp position by dragging the stamp in the preview window.
To change the stamp position angle, type a value in the Orientation box directly.
5. Save the stamp
Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box, and then click Save.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
6. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again.
The registered title appears in the Stamp list.
Changing and Registering Some of Stamp Settings
1. Select the stamp for which the settings are to be changed
Check the Stamp check box in the Stamp/Background dialog box, and then select the title of the
stamp to be changed from the Stamp list.
Page 290 of 949 pages
Registering a Stamp
Page 291 of 949 pages
2. Click Define Stamp...
The Stamp Settings dialog box opens.
3. Configure the stamp while viewing the preview window
4. Overwrite save the stamp
Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab.
When you want to save the stamp with a different title, type a new title in the Title box and click Save.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again.
The registered title appears in the Stamp list.
Deleting an Unnecessary Stamp
1. Click Define Stamp... in the Stamp/Background dialog box
The Stamp Settings dialog box opens.
2. Select the stamp to be deleted
Select the title of the stamp you want to delete from the Stamps list on the Save settings tab. Then
click Delete.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again.
Page top
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Stamp/Background Printing > Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
This feature is unavailable when the 64-bit printer driver is used.
You can select a bitmap file (.bmp) and register it as a new background. You can also change and
register some of the settings of an existing background. An unnecessary background can be deleted at
any time.
The procedure for registering image data to be used as a background is as follows:
Registering New Background
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab
The Stamp/Background dialog box opens.
3. Click Select Background...
The Background Settings dialog box opens.
Page 292 of 949 pages
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
4. Select the image data to be registered to the background
Click Select File.... Select the target bitmap file (.bmp), and then click Open.
5. Specify the following settings while viewing the preview window
Layout Method
Select how the background image data is to be placed.
When Custom is selected, you can set coordinates for X-Position and Y-Position.
You can also change the background position by dragging the image in the preview window.
Intensity
Set the intensity of the background image data with the Intensity slider. To lighten the background,
move the slider to the left. To darken the background, move the slider to the right. To print the
background at the original bitmap intensity, move the slider to the rightmost position.
6. Save the background
Click the Save settings tab and enter a title in the Title box, and then click Save.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
7. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again.
The registered title appears in the Background list.
Changing and Registering Some Background Settings
1. Select the background for which the settings are to be changed
Check the Background check box in the Stamp/Background dialog box, and then select the title of
the background you want to change from the Background list.
2. Click Select Background...
The Background Settings dialog box opens.
3. Specify the items on the Background tab while viewing the preview window.
4. Save the background
Click Save overwrite on the Save settings tab. When you want to save the background with a different
title, enter a new title in the Title box and click Save.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
Page 293 of 949 pages
Registering Image Data to be Used as a Background
Page 294 of 949 pages
5. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again.
The registered title appears in the Background list.
Deleting an Unnecessary Background
1. Click Select Background... in the Stamp/Background dialog box
The Background Settings dialog box opens.
2. Select the background to be deleted
Select the title of the background you want to delete from the Backgrounds list on the Save settings
tab, and then click Delete.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK. The Stamp/Background dialog box opens again.
Page top
Printing an Envelope
Page 295 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Printing an Envelope
Printing an Envelope
For details on how to load an envelope into the machine, refer to "Loading Paper in the Rear Tray" in the
manual: Basic Guide.
The procedure for performing envelope printing is as follows:
1. Load an envelope into the machine
Fold down the envelope flap.
Orient the envelope so that the flap is on the left and the folded surface is facing down, and load in
the rear tray.
2. Open the printer driver setup window
3. Select the media type
Select Envelope from Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab.
4. Select the paper size
Select Comm.Env. #10, DL Env., Youkei 4 105x235mm, or Youkei 6 98x190mm in the Envelope Size
Setting dialog box, and then click OK.
5. Set the orientation
Printing an Envelope
Page 296 of 949 pages
To print the addressee horizontally, select Landscape for Orientation.
6. Select the print quality
Select High or Standard that matches your purpose for Print Quality.
7. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the information is printed on the envelope.
Important
When you execute envelope printing, guide messages are displayed.
To hide the guide messages, check the Do not show this message again. check box.
To show the guide again, click the View Printer Status... button on the Maintenance tab, and start the
Canon IJ Status Monitor.
Then click Envelope Printing from Display Guide Message of the Option menu, and change the
setting to on.
Page top
Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose
Page 297 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose
Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose
In this machine, there are two paper sources, a rear tray and a cassette.
You can facilitate printing by selecting a paper source setting that matches your print conditions or
purpose.
The procedure for setting paper source is as follows:
You can also set the paper source on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the paper source
From the Paper Source list on the Main tab, select the paper source that matches your purpose.
Automatically Select
Plain paper whose Page Size is Letter 8.5"x11", A5, A4, or B5 is fed from the cassette. Other sizes of
plain paper and paper types other than plain paper are fed from the rear tray.
Rear Tray
Paper is always fed from the rear tray.
Cassette
Paper is always fed from the cassette.
Important
Plain paper that is not Letter 8.5"x11", A5, A4, or B5 and paper types other than plain paper
cannot be fed from the cassette.
Continuous Autofeed
When plain paper runs out in the specified paper source, the printer automatically switches the
paper source.
When printing a large volume of data, load plain paper of the same size in both paper sources. You
can therefore reduce the trouble of having to load paper because the printer automatically switches
Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose
Page 298 of 949 pages
the paper source when paper runs out in one paper source.
Important
Continuous Autofeed is unavailable when paper other than Plain Paper is selected for Media
Type.
Since the printer feeds paper from the paper source that was being used the last time
Continuous Autofeed was selected and printing ended, load the same paper in both the rear
tray and the cassette.
Paper Allocation
When the media type for the print data is plain paper and the paper size matches the paper
allocation setting, the printer automatically feeds paper from the cassette. If not, the printer feeds
paper from the rear tray.
To change the paper allocation settings, click Paper Allocation..., specify the Paper Size to be loaded
in the cassette, and then click OK.
When you load frequently used plain paper in the cassette, the printer feeds paper from the rear tray
when the print data uses a different type of paper. You can therefore reduce the trouble of having to
load different paper.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the printer uses the specified paper source to print the data.
Page top
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Page 299 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
You can display and check the print result before printing.
The procedure for displaying the print result before printing is as follows:
You can also set the print results display on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set the preview
Check the Preview before printing check box on the Main tab.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
The Canon IJ Preview will start and the print result will be displayed before printing.
Related Topic
Canon IJ Preview
Page top
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Various Printing Methods >
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
You can specify the height and width of paper when its size cannot be selected from the Page Size. Such
a paper size is called a custom size.
The procedure for specifying a custom size is as follows:
You can also set a custom size in Printer Paper Size on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Set the custom size in the application software
On your application's paper size feature, specify the custom size.
Important
When the application software that created the document has a function for specifying the
height and width values, use the application software to set the values. When the application
software does not have such a function or if the document does not print correctly, use the
printer driver to set the values.
2. Open the printer driver setup window
3. Select the paper size
Select Custom... for Page Size on the Page Setup tab.
The Custom Paper Size dialog box opens.
Page 300 of 949 pages
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
Page 301 of 949 pages
4. Set the custom paper size
Specify Units, and enter the Width and Height of the paper to be used. Then click OK.
5. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Page Setup tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified paper size.
Page top
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data
Page 302 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting Image Data
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Specifying Color Correction
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Printing with ICC Profiles
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Simulating an Illustration
Representing Image Data with a Single Color
Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors
Smoothing Jagged Outlines
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration
Reducing Photo Noise
Page top
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Page 303 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a
Halftoning Method
You can individually set the combined representation method for the print quality level and the halftoning
method.
The procedure for setting the print quality level and the halftoning method is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the print quality
Select Custom for Print Quality on the Main tab, and click Set....
The Custom dialog box opens.
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Page 304 of 949 pages
3. Setting the print quality and halftone expression method
Move the Quality slider to select the quality level.
Select the expression method in Halftoning and click OK.
Note
Halftones refer to color shades between the darkest color and the brightest color.
The printer replaces the color shades with a collection of small dots to express the halftones.
Dither arranges the dots according to fixed rules to express the halftones. Diffusion places the
dots randomly to express the halftones. When you select Auto, the data is printed with the
optimal halftoning method for the selected print quality.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified quality level and halftoning method.
Important
Certain print quality levels and halftoning methods cannot be selected depending on the settings of
Media Type.
Note
When the part of the object is not printed, selecting Diffusion for Halftoning may solve the problem.
Related Topics
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Page 305 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
The procedure for printing a color document in monochrome is as follows:
You can also set a grayscale printing in Additional Features on the Quick Setup tab.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set grayscale printing
Check the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the document is converted to grayscale data. It allows you to print the color
document in monochrome.
Important
When the Grayscale Printing check box is checked, the printer driver processes image data as
sRGB data. In this case, actual colors printed may differ from those in the original image data.
When using the grayscale printing function to print Adobe RGB data, convert the data to sRGB data
using an application software.
Note
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Page 306 of 949 pages
During Grayscale Printing, color inks may be used as well as black ink.
Page top
Specifying Color Correction
Page 307 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction
Specifying Color Correction
You can specify the color correction method suited to the type of document to be printed.
Normally, the printer driver adjusts the colors by using Canon Digital Photo Color so that data is printed
with color tints that most people prefer. This method is suitable for printing sRGB data.
When you want to print by using the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data effectively,
select ICM. When you want to use an application software to specify a printing ICC profile, select None.
The procedure for specifying color correction is as follows:
You can also set color correction on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly
Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the manual color adjustment
On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
3. Select color correction
Click Matching tab, select Color Correction setting that matches your purpose from the following,
and click OK.
Specifying Color Correction
Page 308 of 949 pages
Driver Matching
By using Canon Digital Photo Color, you can print sRGB data with color tints that most people prefer.
Driver Matching is the default setting for color correction.
ICM
You can print by using the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data effectively.
None
The printer driver does not perform color correction. Select this value when you are specifying an
individually created printing ICC profile or a printing ICC profile for special Canon paper in an
application software to print data.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the specified color correction method.
Important
When ICM is disabled in the application software, ICM is unavailable for Color Correction and the
printer may not be able to print the image data properly.
When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Color Correction appears
grayed out and is unavailable.
Related Topics
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Printing with ICC Profiles
Page top
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
Page 309 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
Optimal Photo Printing of Image Data
When people print images taken with digital cameras, they sometimes feel that the printed color tones
differ from those of actual image or those displayed on the monitor.
To get the print results as close as possible to the desired color tones, you must select a printing
method that is best suited to the application software used or to your purpose.
Color Management
Devices such as digital cameras, scanners, monitors, and printers handle color differently. Color
management (color matching) is a method that manages device-dependent "colors" as a common color
space. For Windows, a color management system called "ICM" is built into the operating system.
Adobe RGB and sRGB are popularly used as common color spaces. Adobe RGB has a wider color
space than sRGB.
ICC profiles convert device-dependent "colors" into a common color space. By using an ICC profile and
carrying out color management, you can draw out the color space of the image data within the color
reproduction area that the printer can express.
Selecting a Printing Method Suited to the Image Data
The recommended printing method depends on the color space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image
data or the application software to be used. There are two typical printing methods. Check the color
space (Adobe RGB or sRGB) of the image data and the application software to be used, and then select
the printing method suited to your purpose.
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Describes the procedure for printing sRGB data by using the color correction function of the printer driver.
To print using Canon Digital Photo Color
The printer prints data with color tints that most people prefer, reproducing colors of the original image
data and producing three-dimensional effects and high, sharp contrasts.
To print by directly applying editing and touch-up results of an application software
When printing the data, the printer brings out subtle color difference between dark and light areas,
while leaving the darkest and lightest areas intact.
When printing the data, the printer applies fine adjustment results, such as brightness adjustments
made with an application software.
Printing with ICC Profiles
Describes the procedure for printing by using the color space of Adobe RGB or sRGB effectively.
You can print with a common color space by setting up the application software and the printer driver so
that the color management matches the input ICC profile of the image data.
The method for setting up the printer driver differs depending on the application software to be used.
Page top
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Page 310 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
You can specify the color correction function of the printer driver to print sRGB data with color tints that
most people prefer through the use of Canon Digital Photo Color.
When printing from an application software that can identify ICC profiles and allows you to specify them,
use a printing ICC profile in the application software, and select settings for color management.
The procedure for adjusting colors with the printer driver is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the media type
Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab.
3. Select the print quality
Select High, Standard, or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality.
4. Select the manual color adjustment
Select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
5. Select color correction
Click Matching tab, and select Driver Matching for Color Correction.
Adjusting Colors with the Printer Driver
Page 311 of 949 pages
6. Set the other items
If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK.
7. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the printer driver adjusts the colors when printing the data.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Printing with ICC Profiles
Page 312 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Specifying Color Correction > Printing with ICC Profiles
Printing with ICC Profiles
When the image data has a specified input ICC profile, you can print by using the color space (Adobe
RGB or sRGB) of the data effectively.
The printer driver setting procedure varies depending on the application software used to print.
Specify an ICC Profile from the Application Software and Print the Data
When you print the editing and touch-up results of Adobe Photoshop, Canon Digital Photo Professional,
or any application software that allows you to specify input and printing ICC profiles, you print by
effectively using the color space of the input ICC profile specified in the image data.
To use this printing method, use your application software to select color management items and
specify an input ICC profile and a printing ICC profile in the image data.
Even if you print using a printing ICC profile that you created yourself or one for special Canon paper from
your application software, be sure to select color management items from your application software.
For instructions, refer to the manual of the application software you are using.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the media type
Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab.
3. Select the print quality
Select High, Standard, or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality.
4. Select the manual color adjustment
Select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
5. Select color correction
Printing with ICC Profiles
Click Matching tab, and select None for Color Correction.
6. Set the other items
If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK.
7. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the printer uses the color space of the image data.
Specify an ICC Profile with the Printer Driver, and then Print
Print from a program that cannot identity input ICC profiles or does allow you to specify one by specifying
input ICC profiles from printer profiles of the printer driver. When printing Adobe RGB data, you can print
the data with the Adobe RGB color space even if the application software does not support Adobe RGB.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the media type
Select the type of paper loaded in the machine from the Media Type list on the Main tab.
Page 313 of 949 pages
Printing with ICC Profiles
3. Select the print quality
Select High, Standard, or Fast that matches your purpose for Print Quality.
4. Select the manual color adjustment
Select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
5. Select color correction
Click Matching tab, and select ICM for Color Correction.
6. Select the input profile
Select an Input Profile that matches the color space of the image data.
For sRGB data or data without an input ICC profile:
Select Standard.
For Adobe RGB data:
Page 314 of 949 pages
Printing with ICC Profiles
Page 315 of 949 pages
Select Adobe RGB (1998).
Important
When the application software specifies an input profile, the input profile setting of the printer
driver becomes invalid.
When no input ICC profiles are installed on your computer, Adobe RGB (1998) is not displayed.
You can install ICC profiles from the Setup CD-ROM that accompanies the machine.
7. Set the other items
If necessary, click Color Adjustment tab, and adjust the color balance of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
adjust Brightness, Intensity, and Contrast settings, and then click OK.
8. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed with the color space of the selected image data.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Adjusting Color Balance
Page 316 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Color Balance
You can adjust the color tints when printing.
Since this function adjusts color balance of the output by changing the ink ratios of each color, it changes
the total color balance of the document. Use the application software if you want to change the color
balance significantly. Use the printer driver only when you want to adjust the color balance slightly.
The following sample shows the case when color balance is used to intensify cyan and to diminish
yellow so that the overall colors are more uniform.
No adjustment
Adjust Color Balance
The procedure for adjusting color balance is as follows:
You can also set color balance on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly
Used Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the manual color adjustment
On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
3. Adjust color balance
There are individual sliders for Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow. Each color becomes stronger when the
corresponding slider is moved to the right, and becomes weaker when the corresponding slider is
Adjusting Color Balance
Page 317 of 949 pages
moved to the left. For example, when cyan becomes weaker, the color red becomes stronger.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.
After adjusting each color, click OK.
Important
Adjust the slider gradually.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the document is printed with the adjusted color balance.
Important
When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Cyan, Magenta, and Yellow
appear grayed out and are unavailable.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Adjusting Brightness
Page 318 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Brightness
You can change the brightness of the overall image data during printing.
This function does not change pure white or pure black but it changes the brightness of the intermediate
colors.
The following sample shows the print result when the brightness specification is changed.
Light is selected
Normal is selected
Dark is selected
The procedure for adjusting brightness is as follows:
You can also set brightness on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used
Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the manual color adjustment
On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
3. Specify the brightness
Select Light, Normal, or Dark for Brightness, and click OK.
Adjusting Brightness
Page 319 of 949 pages
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the data is printed at the specified brightness.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Adjusting Intensity
Page 320 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Intensity
You can dilute (brighten) or intensify (darken) the colors of the overall image data during printing.
When you want to sharpen the print results, you should intensify the colors.
The following sample shows the case when the intensity is increased so that all colors become more
intense when the image data is printed.
No adjustment
Higher Intensity
The procedure for adjusting intensity is as follows:
You can also set intensity on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used
Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the manual color adjustment
Select Manual for Color/Intensity on the Main tab, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
3. Adjust intensity
Moving the Intensity slider to the right intensifies (darkens) the colors. Moving the slider to the left
dilutes (brightens) the colors.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.
After adjusting each color, click OK.
Adjusting Intensity
Page 321 of 949 pages
Important
Adjust the slider gradually.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the image data is printed with the adjusted intensity.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Contrast
Page top
Adjusting Contrast
Page 322 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Adjusting Contrast
Adjusting Contrast
You can adjust the image contrast during printing.
To make the differences between the light and dark portions of images greater and more distinct,
increase the contrast. On the other hand, to make the differences between the light and dark portions of
images smaller and less distinct, reduce the contrast.
No adjustment
Adjust the contrast
The procedure for adjusting contrast is as follows:
You can also set contrast on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used
Settings, and then choosing Color/Intensity Manual Adjustment under Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Select the manual color adjustment
On the Main tab, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and click Set....
The Manual Color Adjustment dialog box opens.
3. Adjust the contrast
Moving the Contrast slider to the right increases the contrast, and moving it to the left decreases the
contrast.
You can also directly enter a value linked to the slider. Enter a value in the range from -50 to 50.
After adjusting each color, click OK.
Adjusting Contrast
Page 323 of 949 pages
Important
Adjust the slider gradually.
4. Complete the setup
Click OK on the Main tab.
When you execute print, the image is printed with the adjusted contrast.
Related Topics
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality Level and a Halftoning Method
Specifying Color Correction
Adjusting Color Balance
Adjusting Brightness
Adjusting Intensity
Page top
Simulating an Illustration
Page 324 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Simulating an Illustration
Simulating an Illustration
With the Simulate Illustration function, you can print full-color or 256-color image data so that it looks like
a hand-drawn illustration. This function adds different effects to the original profile and colors.
The procedure for performing Simulate Illustration is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set the Simulate Illustration
If necessary, check the Simulate Illustration check box on the Effects tab, and adjust the Contrast.
Moving the slider to the right lightens the image data and moving the slider to the left darkens the
image data.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the image will be printed so that it looks hand-drawn.
Page top
Representing Image Data with a Single Color
Page 325 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Representing Image Data with a Single Color
Representing Image Data with a Single Color
With the Monochrome Effects function, you can benefit from coloring effects such as changing a
photograph to a sepia tone image.
The procedure for performing Monochrome Effects is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set Monochrome Effects
Check the Monochrome Effects check box on the Effects tab and select your desired color.
When you use Select Color, move the Color slider to specify the color you want.
The current settings are displayed in the settings preview on the left side of the printer driver.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the image will be printed with a single color.
Important
When the Grayscale Printing check box on the Main tab is checked, Monochrome Effects appears
Representing Image Data with a Single Color
Page 326 of 949 pages
grayed out and is unavailable.
Page top
Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors
Page 327 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors
Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors
The Vivid Photo function allows you to print image data with vivid colors.
The vivid photo function emphasizes the colors in background sceneries while maintaining the human
skin color natural. By using this function, you can make vivid hues appear even more vivid.
The procedure for performing Vivid Photo is as follows:
You can also set vivid photos on the Quick Setup tab by choosing Photo Printing under Commonly Used
Settings, and then choosing Additional Features.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set Vivid Photo
Check the Vivid Photo check box on the Effects tab.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the image will be printed with vivid colors.
Page top
Smoothing Jagged Outlines
Page 328 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Smoothing Jagged Outlines
Smoothing Jagged Outlines
The Image Optimizer function allows you to smooth jagged outlines in photos and graphics that have
been enlarged with your application. This feature is especially useful when printing low-resolution
images from Web pages.
The procedure for performing Image Optimizer is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set image optimizer
Check the Image Optimizer check box on the Effects tab.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
The photos and graphics will be printed with jagged outlines smoothed.
Note
Depending on application software or resolution of image data, the image optimizer may have no
discernible effects.
It may take longer to complete printing when the image optimizer is used.
Smoothing Jagged Outlines
Page 329 of 949 pages
Page top
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration
Page 330 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration
The Photo Optimizer PRO function corrects colors of digital camera images or scanned images. It is
specially designed to compensate for color shift, overexposure, and underexposure.
The procedure for performing Photo Optimizer PRO is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set Photo Optimizer PRO
Check the Photo Optimizer PRO check box on the Effects tab.
Normally there is no need to check the Apply Throughout Page check box.
Images within each page are optimized on an image-by-image basis.
Note
Check the Apply Throughout Page check box when printing image data that has been
processed, such as being cropped or rotated. In this case the entire page will be treated as a
single image to be optimized.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the images will be printed with color compensation.
Changing Color Properties to Improve Coloration
Page 331 of 949 pages
Important
Photo Optimizer PRO does not function when:
Background is set in the Stamp/Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab.
Define Stamp... is selected in the Stamp/Background dialog box on the Page Setup tab, and the
bitmapped stamp is configured.
Note
Depending on images, the Photo Optimizer PRO may have no discernible effect.
Page top
Reducing Photo Noise
Page 332 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Changing the Print Quality and
Correcting Image Data > Reducing Photo Noise
Reducing Photo Noise
With the Photo Noise Reduction function, you can reduce the digital camera noise and improve the
image quality of the digital print.
The procedure for performing Photo Noise Reduction is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set Photo Noise Reduction
Check the Photo Noise Reduction check box on the Effects tab and select Normal or Strong for the
level.
3. Complete the setup
Click OK.
When you execute print, the image will be printed with the digital camera noise being reduced.
Note
It is recommended to select Normal for most cases. Select Strong if you have selected Normal and
the noise still bothers you.
Reducing Photo Noise
Page 333 of 949 pages
Depending on application software or resolution of image data, effects of digital camera noise
reduction may not be obvious.
When this function is used for other than photos taken by digital cameras, image may be distorted.
Page top
Overview of the Printer Driver
Page 334 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
Overview of the Printer Driver
Printer Driver Operations
Canon IJ Printer Driver
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
Maintenance Tab
Canon IJ Status Monitor
Canon IJ Preview
Page top
Printer Driver Operations
Page 335 of 949 pages
MA-5700-V1.00
| Instructions for Use (Printer Driver) | How to Use This Manual | Printing This Manual |
Various Printing Methods
Printing with Easy Setup
Setting a Page Size and Orientation
Setting the Number of Copies and Printing
Order
Changing Machine Settings from Your
Computer
Changing the Print Options
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper
Setting the Stapling Margin
Managing the Machine Power
Borderless Printing
Reducing the Machine Noise
Fit-to-Page Printing
Changing the Machine Operation Mode
Scaled Printing
Page Layout Printing
Poster Printing
Performing Maintenance from a Computer
Cleaning the Print Heads
Booklet Printing
Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
Duplex Printing
Aligning the Print Head Position
Stamp/Background Printing
Printing an Envelope
Switching the Paper Source to Match the
Purpose
Checking the Print Head Nozzles
Cleaning Inside the Machine
Overview of the Printer Driver
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Canon IJ Printer Driver
Setting Paper Dimensions (Custom Size)
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
Maintenance Tab
Changing the Print Quality and Correcting
Image Data
Selecting a Combination of the Print Quality
Level and a Halftoning Method
Printing a Color Document in Monochrome
Canon IJ Status Monitor
Canon IJ Preview
Updating the MP Drivers
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Specifying Color Correction
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Adjusting Color Balance
Before Installing the MP Drivers
Adjusting Brightness
Installing the MP Drivers
Adjusting Intensity
Adjusting Contrast
Appendix
Simulating an Illustration
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
Representing Image Data with a Single Color
Presenting Image Data with Vivid Colors
Smoothing Jagged Outlines
Changing Color Properties to Improve
Coloration
Reducing Photo Noise
Canon IJ Printer Driver
Page 336 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
> Canon IJ Printer Driver
Canon IJ Printer Driver
The Canon IJ printer driver is software that is installed on your computer for printing data on this
machine.
The Canon IJ printer driver converts the print data created by your Windows application into data that your
printer can understand and sends the converted data to the printer.
Because different models support different print data formats, you need a Canon IJ printer driver for the
specific model you are using.
How to Use Printer Driver Help
You can display the Help describing the driver setting items through the printing preferences screen of
the Canon IJ printer driver.
To view all descriptions of a tab...
Click the Help button on each tab. A dialog box opens, displaying a description of each item on the
tab.
You can also click the link found in the description of an item to display a description of the linked
dialog box.
To see a description for each item...
Right-click the item you want to learn about and then click What's This?.
Alternatively, when the
Help button is found at the right end of the title bar, click that button, and
then click the item you want to learn about.
A description of the item is displayed.
Related Topic
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
Page top
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
Page 337 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
> Canon IJ Printer Driver > How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
How to Open the Printer Driver Setup Window
The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start
menu of the Windows.
Note
This guide mainly describes operations on the Windows Vista. Operations may differ depending on
versions of the Windows.
Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Application Software
Follow the procedure below to configure printing profile when printing.
1. Select the command you perform printing on the application software in use
In general, select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box.
2. Select your model name and click Preferences (or Properties)
The printer driver setup window appears.
Note
Depending on application software you use, command names or menu names may vary and
there may be more steps. For details, refer to the user's manual of your application software.
Open the Printer Driver Setup Window through the Start Menu
Follow the procedure below to perform maintenance operations such as print head cleaning, or to
configure printing profile that are common for all application software.
1. Select items from the Start menu as shown below:
In Windows Vista, select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Printers.
In Windows XP, select the start menu -> Control Panel -> Printers and Other Hardware ->
Printers and Faxes.
In Windows 2000, select the Start menu -> Settings -> Printers.
2. Right-click your model name icon, and then select Printing Preferences... from the
displayed menu
The printer driver setup window appears.
Important
Opening the printer driver setup window through Properties displays such tabs regarding the
Windows functions as the Ports (or Advanced) tab. Those tabs do not appear when opening
through Printing Preferences... or application software. For tabs regarding Windows functions,
refer to the user's manual for the Windows.
Page top
Maintenance Tab
Page 338 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
> Canon IJ Printer Driver > Maintenance Tab
Maintenance Tab
The Maintenance tab allows you to perform machine maintenance or change the settings of the
machine.
Features
Cleaning the Print Heads
Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
Aligning the Print Head Position
Checking the Print Head Nozzles
Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper
Cleaning Inside the Machine
Managing the Machine Power
Related Features
Reducing the Machine Noise
Changing the Machine Operation Mode
Page top
Canon IJ Status Monitor
Page 339 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
> Canon IJ Status Monitor
Canon IJ Status Monitor
The Canon IJ Status Monitor is an application software that shows the status of the printer and the
progress of printing on the Windows screen. You will know the status of the printer with graphics, icons,
and messages.
Launching the Canon IJ Status Monitor
The Canon IJ Status Monitor launches automatically when data is sent to the printer. When launched, the
Canon IJ Status Monitor appears as a button on the task bar.
Click the status monitor button displayed on the task bar. The Canon IJ Status Monitor appears.
Note
To open the Canon IJ Status Monitor when the printer is not printing, open the printer driver setup
window and click View Printer Status... on the Maintenance tab.
When Errors Occur
The Canon IJ Status Monitor is automatically displayed if an error occurs (e.g., if the printer runs out of
paper or if the ink is low).
In such cases, take the appropriate action as described.
Page top
Canon IJ Preview
Page 340 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing from a Computer > Printing with Other Application Software > Overview of the Printer Driver
> Canon IJ Preview
Canon IJ Preview
The Canon IJ Preview is an application software that displays what the print result will look like before a
document is actually printed.
The preview reflects the information that is set within the printer driver and allows you to check the
document layout, print order, and number of pages. You can also change the media type and paper
source settings.
When you want to display a preview before printing, open the printer driver setup window , click the Quick
Setup tab or the Main tab, and check the Preview before printing check box.
When you do not want to display a preview before printing, uncheck the check box.
Related Topic
Displaying the Print Results before Printing
Page top
Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Page 341 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Printing Lined Paper or Graph Paper
Copying
Printing from a Memory Card
Printing from a USB Flash Drive
Photo Printing from Printed Photo
Page top
Printing Lined Paper or Graph Paper
Page 342 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Lined Paper or Graph Paper
Printing Lined Paper or Graph Paper
Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper
Page top
Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper
Page 343 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing Lined Paper or Graph Paper > Printing
Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper
Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper
You can print a template form such as lined paper, graph paper, or check list, etc. on A4, B5, or Lettersized plain paper.
Printing template forms
1.
Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2.
Load A4, B5, or Letter-sized plain paper in the Cassette.
3.
Select
4.
Use the Easy-Scroll Wheel or the
press the OK button.
button to select
5.
Use the Easy-Scroll Wheel or the
then press the OK button.
button to select the template you want to print,
Settings on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
The following templates are available:
Notebook paper
You can select three line spacing formats.
Notebook paper 1: 8 mm spacing
Notebook paper 2: 7 mm spacing
Notebook paper 3: 6 mm spacing
Graph paper
You can select two square sizes.
Template print, then
Printing Template Forms Such As Lined Paper or Graph Paper
Page 344 of 949 pages
Graph paper 1: Graph 5 mm
Graph paper 2: Graph 3 mm
Checklist
You can print a notepad with checkboxes.
Staff paper
You can print staff paper with 10 or 12 staves.
Staff paper 1: Staff paper 10 staves
Staff paper 2: Staff paper 12 staves
Handwriting paper
You can print handwriting paper.
Weekly schedule
You can print a weekly schedule form.
Monthly schedule
You can print a monthly schedule form.
Note
You cannot print Graph paper on B5 sized paper.
6.
Use the
button to specify the paper size, then press the OK button.
Note
Select Duplex printing for Duplex/simplex printing to print on both sides of paper.
7.
Use the + or - button to specify the number of copies.
8.
Press the OK button to start printing.
The machine starts template printing.
Page top
Copying
Page 345 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying
Copying
Making Copies
Using Useful Copy Functions
Page top
Making Copies
Page 346 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Making Copies
Making Copies
For the basic procedure to make copies, refer to Copying.
Setting Items
Reducing or Enlarging a Copy
Changing Intensity Setting
Displaying the Preview Screen
Using Useful Copy Functions
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Select
Copy on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
3. Load paper.
4. Load the original on the Platen Glass.
5. Confirm the page size and media type.
Note
To change the settings, select the item and press the OK button.
Setting Items
Page size and media type settings are saved in each mode.
When you make copies, you can specify various layouts on the screen that appears when you
press the left Function button.
Using Useful Copy Functions
6. Press the + or - button to specify the number of copies.
Making Copies
Page 347 of 949 pages
7. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white
copying.
The machine starts copying.
Remove the original on the Platen Glass after copying is complete.
Important
Do not open the Document Cover or remove the original from the Platen Glass until copying is
complete.
Note
When you press the right Function button while Preview is displayed on the screen, you can
preview an image of the printout on the preview screen.
Displaying the Preview Screen
To cancel copying, press the Stop button.
Page top
Setting Items
Page 348 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Making Copies > Setting Items
Setting Items
Copy on the HOME screen, then press the OK button to display the Copy screen.
Select
Note
Page size and media type settings are saved in each mode.
The settings of the page size, media type, etc. are retained even if the machine is turned off.
Depending on the functions, some setting items cannot be specified in combination.
1. Magnification
Specify the reduction/enlargement method.
Reducing or Enlarging a Copy
2. Intensity
Specify the intensity.
Changing Intensity Setting
3. Page size
Select the page size of the loaded paper.
4. Media type
Select the media type of the loaded paper.
5. Print quality
Adjust print quality according to the original.
Important
If you used Fast (speed-priority) with media type set to Plain paper and the quality is not as
good as expected, select Standard or High(quality-priority) and try copying again.
Select High(quality-priority) to copy in grayscale. Grayscale renders tones in a range of grays
instead of black or white.
Page top
Reducing or Enlarging a Copy
Page 349 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Making Copies > Reducing or Enlarging
a Copy
Reducing or Enlarging a Copy
You can select from the following reduction/enlargement methods according to your purpose.
Fit-to-page
The machine automatically reduces or enlarges the image to fit the page size.
Zoom (25 - 400%)
You can specify the copy ratio as a percentage to reduce or enlarge copies.
On the screen that appears when selecting Zoom (25 - 400%), change the ratio using the EasyScroll Wheel or the
button, then press the OK button to finalize the setting.
Preset ratio
You can select one of the preset ratios to reduce or enlarge copies.
On the screen that appears when selecting Preset ratio, select the ratio using the Easy-Scroll Wheel
or the
button, then press the OK button to finalize the setting.
Note
When you select Fit-to-page, the document size may not be detected correctly depending on the
original. In this case, select Preset ratio, Zoom (25 - 400%), or 100%.
When you want to copy at the same size as the original, select 100%.
Page top
Changing Intensity Setting
Page 350 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Making Copies > Changing Intensity
Setting
Changing Intensity Setting
Turn the Easy-Scroll Wheel clockwise to increase intensity or counterclockwise to decrease it.
You can also use the
button to perform settings.
Press the right Function button in the Intensity screen to automatically match the intensity to the original
on the Platen Glass and then print the image.
The slide bar for the intensity adjustment on the LCD changes to Auto when it is done.
Important
While Auto is selected, you cannot change the intensity by using the Easy-Scroll Wheel. Press the
right Function button to enable manual intensity settings again and then specify the intensity.
Page top
Displaying the Preview Screen
Page 351 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Making Copies > Displaying the
Preview Screen
Displaying the Preview Screen
When you press the right Function button while Preview is displayed on the screen, you can preview an
image of the printout on the preview screen.
Important
The original will be scanned to display the preview image. Therefore, do not open the Document
Cover until the preview screen appears.
Originals are rescanned after displaying the preview screen and before copying starts. Therefore,
do not open the Document Cover or remove the original from the Platen Glass until copying is
complete.
1. Preview of the original
The original that is set on the Platen Glass is displayed. If the displayed image is skewed, refer to
Loading Paper / Originals and reset the original properly, then display the preview screen again and
preview the original.
2. Page size
A frame showing the selected page size appears over the image. The inside of the frame will be
printed.
3. Magnification
The magnification setting, which was set when the preview screen was displayed, is displayed. If
Preset ratio, Zoom (25 - 400%), or 100% is selected, you can change the magnification setting on
the preview screen.
Page top
Using Useful Copy Functions
Page 352 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions
Using Useful Copy Functions
Special Copy
Choose the copy method according to your purpose.
Note
Refer to Settings for Special Copy for how to select the copy method.
Two-sided copy
You can copy two original pages onto the sides of a single sheet of paper.
Copying onto Both Sides of the Paper (Two-Sided Copy)
Borderless copy
You can copy images so that they fill the entire page without borders.
Copying without Borders (Borderless Copy)
2-on-1 copy
You can copy two original pages onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each image.
Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (2-on-1 Copy)
4-on-1 copy
You can copy four original pages onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each image. Four
different layouts are available.
Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (4-on-1 Copy)
Image repeat
You can copy an image multiple times onto a single page. You can set the machine to
automatically select the number of times it repeats the image, or you can specify the number.
Repeating an Image on a Page (Image Repeat)
Frame erase
When copying thick originals such as books, you can make a copy without black margins
around the image and gutter shadows.
Copying Thick Originals Such as Books (Frame Erase)
Trimming
You can clip (trim) a necessary part of the original to copy.
Copying a Specified Area (Trimming)
Masking
You can erase (mask) a specified part of the original to copy.
Copying Images with Erasing a Part (Masking)
Page top
Settings for Special Copy
Page 353 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions >
Settings for Special Copy
Settings for Special Copy
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Select
Copy on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
3. Load paper.
4. Load the original on the Platen Glass.
Note
For details on the types and conditions of originals which you can copy, refer to Loading Paper /
Originals .
5. Press the left Function button when the print settings confirmation screen is
displayed.
The Special copy screen is displayed.
Note
When you use these functions, you cannot select some of the options for the magnification/
page size/media type settings.
If you perform the Special copy setting first, any unavailable options will be disabled or hidden
in the basic copy settings screen.
If you perform the basic copy settings first, apply any Special copy setting, then return to the
basic copy settings screen, any items that require modification will be corrected automatically
.
or displayed with
To cancel Special copy settings, press the Stop button. If the number of copies or the intensity
has been set already, press the Stop button twice.
Page top
Copying onto Both Sides of the Paper (Two-Sided Copy)
Page 354 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions >
Copying onto Both Sides of the Paper (Two-Sided Copy)
Copying onto Both Sides of the Paper (Two-Sided Copy)
You can copy two original pages onto the sides of a single sheet of paper.
(A) Long-side stapling
(B) Short-side stapling
Settings for Special Copy
1. Select
Two-sided copy, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white
copying.
Note
You can skip scanning of the second page of originals and copy only the first page. After
scanning the first page of originals by pressing the Color or Black button, press the left
Function button to select Print front side on the screen that appears.
If you are copying in black & white, print intensity of a Two-sided copy may differ from that of a
single-sided copy.
Page top
Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (2-on-1 Copy)
Page 355 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions >
Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (2-on-1 Copy)
Copying Two Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (2-on-1 Copy)
You can copy two original pages (A) (B) onto a single sheet of paper (C) by reducing each image.
Settings for Special Copy
1. Select
2-on-1 copy, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white
copying.
Note
You can skip scanning of the second sheet of originals and copy only the first sheet. After scanning
the first sheet of originals by pressing the Color or Black button, press the left Function button to
select Print first sheet on the screen that appears.
If Device memory is full. appears on the LCD when scanning, set the print quality to Standard and
try copying. If the problem is not resolved, reduce the number of sheets of documents or set the
print quality to Fast (speed-priority) and try copying again.
Page top
Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (4-on-1 Copy)
Page 356 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions >
Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (4-on-1 Copy)
Copying Four Pages to Fit onto a Single Page (4-on-1 Copy)
You can copy four original pages onto a single sheet of paper by reducing each image. Four different
layouts are available.
Settings for Special Copy
1. Select
4-on-1 copy, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white
copying.
Note
If you want to copy only 1, 2, or 3 pages, press the left Function button to select Print now after
scanning the last page that you want to copy.
If Device memory is full. appears on the LCD when scanning, set the print quality to Standard and
try copying. If the problem is not resolved, reduce the number of sheets of documents or set the
print quality to Fast (speed-priority) and try copying again.
Page top
Copying without Borders (Borderless Copy)
Page 357 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions >
Copying without Borders (Borderless Copy)
Copying without Borders (Borderless Copy)
You can copy images so that they fill the entire page without borders.
Settings for Special Copy
1. Select
Borderless copy, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white
copying.
Note
Slight cropping may occur at the edges since the copied image is enlarged to fill the whole page.
You can change the width to be cropped from the borders of the original image as needed. For
details, see Extended copy amount .
For details on the paper size and the media type available for borderless copying, see Printing Area .
Page top
Repeating an Image on a Page (Image Repeat)
Page 358 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions >
Repeating an Image on a Page (Image Repeat)
Repeating an Image on a Page (Image Repeat)
You can copy an image multiple times onto a single page. You can set the machine to automatically
select the number of times it repeats the image, or you can specify the number.
Settings for Special Copy
1. Select
Image repeat, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white
copying.
Note
The area scanned from the original depends on the reduction/enlargement setting.
Page top
Copying Thick Originals Such as Books (Frame Erase)
Page 359 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions >
Copying Thick Originals Such as Books (Frame Erase)
Copying Thick Originals Such as Books (Frame Erase)
When copying thick originals such as books, you can make a copy without black margins around the
image and gutter shadows. Using this function, you can reduce unnecessary ink consumption.
Settings for Special Copy
1. Select
Frame erase, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white
copying.
Note
Close the Document Cover.
There may be a narrow black margin that appears around the image. This function removes the
dark margins only. If a scanned book is too thin or when the machine is used near a window or in a
bright environment, a faint black frame may remain. Also, if the color of an original is dark, the
machine cannot distinguish the document color from the shadow and this may cause slight
cropping or a shadow on the crease.
When you press the right Function button while Preview is displayed on the screen, you can preview
an image of the printout on the preview screen.
Displaying the Preview Screen
Page top
Copying a Specified Area (Trimming)
Page 360 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions >
Copying a Specified Area (Trimming)
Copying a Specified Area (Trimming)
You can clip (trim) a necessary part of the original to copy.
Settings for Special Copy
1. Select
area using
Trimming, then specify the top left and bottom right of the trimming
button by following instructions on the LCD.
2. After specifying the trimming area, press the OK button.
You can preview an image of the printout on the preview screen.
3. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white
copying.
Note
If you press the left Function button after pressing the OK button on the Trimming image screen to
display the print setting screen, you can redo the scanning of the original.
Page top
Copying Images with Erasing a Part (Masking)
Page 361 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Copying > Using Useful Copy Functions >
Copying Images with Erasing a Part (Masking)
Copying Images with Erasing a Part (Masking)
You can erase (mask) a specified part of the original to copy.
Settings for Special Copy
1. Select
using
Masking, then specify the top left and bottom right of the masking area
button by following instructions on the LCD.
2. After specifying the masking area, press the OK button.
You can preview an image of the printout on the preview screen.
3. Press the Color button for color copying, or the Black button for black & white
copying.
Note
If you press the left Function button after pressing the OK button on the Masking image screen to
display the print setting screen, you can redo the scanning of the original document.
Page top
Printing from a Memory Card
Page 362 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card
Printing from a Memory Card
Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card
Using Useful Printing Functions
Using Useful Display Functions
Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer
Page top
Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card
Page 363 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Printing
Photographs Saved on a Memory Card
Printing Photographs Saved on a Memory Card
For the basic procedure to print from a memory card, refer to Printing from a Memory Card .
Setting Items
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet
Using Useful Printing Functions
Page top
Setting Items
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Printing
Photographs Saved on a Memory Card > Setting Items
Setting Items
Print Settings Confirmation Screen
In the Memory card mode, select the photo to print using the Easy-Scroll Wheel or the
button, specify the number of copies using the + or - button, press the OK button, then the screen
is displayed.
Note
Depending on the functions, some setting items cannot be specified in combination.
1.
Page size
Select the page size of the loaded paper.
2.
Media type
Select the media type of the loaded paper.
3.
Print quality
Adjust print quality according to the original.
4.
Borderless print
Select bordered or borderless print.
Note
When you select Plain paper for the media type, the photo will be printed with bordered
even if you select Borderless.
Advanced Screen
When you press the left Function button in the print settings confirmation screen, the menu screen
to select Date setting, File no. setting, or Auto photo fix is displayed.
Page 364 of 949 pages
Setting Items
Use the Easy-Scroll Wheel or the
button to select the setting item, then press the OK button
to display the screen for the selected item.
1.
Date setting
Activates/deactivates to print the shooting date on a photo.
2.
File no. setting
Activates/deactivates to print the file number on a photo.
Note
It is not possible to print both the shooting date and the file number when Layout print is
selected as a print function in the memory card mode. Even if both Date ON and File no.
ON are selected, only the shooting date will be printed. If you want to print the file
number, select Date OFF.
3.
Auto photo fix
When Auto photo fix ON is selected, the scene or person's face of a shot photo is recognized
and the most suitable correction for each photo is made automatically. It makes a darkened
face by backlight brighter to print. It also analyzes a scene such as scenery, night scene,
person, etc. and corrects each scene with the most suitable color, brightness, or contrasts
automatically to print.
Page 365 of 949 pages
Setting Items
Note
As a default, Auto photo fix ON is applied when photos on a memory card are printed.
When Auto photo fix ON is applied, you can specify only (1) Red-Eye correction below.
If the print result with Auto photo fix ON selected is not satisfactory, select Manual
correction, then specify each advanced setting item below.
1.
Red-Eye correction
Corrects red eyes in portraits caused by flash photography.
Depending on the type of the photo, red eyes may not be corrected or parts other than the
eyes may be corrected.
Note
This setting is available even if Auto photo fix ON is selected.
Page 366 of 949 pages
Setting Items
2.
Page 367 of 949 pages
Vivid photo
Makes green and blue more lively.
3.
Photo optimizer pro
Automatically optimizes brightness and tone of a photo.
4.
Noise reduction
Reduces the noise on blue areas like the sky as well as on black areas.
5.
Face brightener
Brightens a darkened face on the photo taken against the light.
6.
Image optimizer
Corrects and smoothes the jagged contours for printing.
7.
Brightness
Adjust brightness.
8.
Contrast
Adjust contrast.
9.
Color hue
Adjust color hue.
For example, you can increase red or yellow to adjust the skin tone.
10.
Effects
Applies special effects to the photo, such as printing in sepia tones or with a sketch
illustration like effect.
Page top
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Printing
Photographs Saved on a Memory Card > Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet
Photo Index Sheet is an A4 or Letter-sized plain paper on which thumbnail images of photos saved on a
memory card or a USB flash drive are printed. Print out a Photo Index Sheet, mark the images that you
want to print, scan the sheet in, and the machine then prints the selected images. You can also specify
other settings, such as the paper size and the media type, by using this sheet; you do not have to
perform settings by using the Operation Panel on the machine.
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Load A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the Cassette.
Page 368 of 949 pages
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet
3. Select
Photo index sheet on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
4. Make sure that
Index sheet print is selected, then press the OK button.
5. Insert a memory card or a USB flash drive following the instruction on the LCD.
Important
You cannot insert both the memory card and the USB flash drive at the same time.
Do not remove the memory card/USB flash drive until printing the Photo Index Sheet(s) is
complete.
Note
For information on how to insert a memory card/USB flash drive, refer to Printing from a
Memory Card .
6. Select a range of images included in the Photo Index Sheet, then press the OK
button.
The following ranges can be selected.
Print all photos:
Prints all images.
Set no. of copies:
Prints the specified number of images from the newest one.
Search:
Prints images by specifying the shooting date range.
Note
It may take a while to display the Search screen depending on the number of photos saved on
the memory card/USB flash drive.
7. Press the Color button.
The Photo Index Sheet(s) will be printed.
Note
If 31 or more images are selected, two or more Photo Index Sheets will be printed.
8. Fill in the appropriate circles in the Photo Index Sheet.
Fill in the appropriate circles (
and their print options.
Good
Bad
(a) Check mark
(b) Line only
(c) Too light
) with a dark pencil or a black ink pen to select the photos to print
Page 369 of 949 pages
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet
A. Select the page size and other printing formats.
B. Select "Date"/"Auto Photo Fix OFF" as necessary.
C. Fill in this circle to print a copy of all photographs.
* If you fill in this circle, any other circles you filled in for the number of copies to print for each
photograph will be disregarded, and one copy each of all photographs will be printed.
D. Select the number of copies (fill in a circle under each photograph to print).
E. Confirm and follow the described printing procedure.
F. Fill in this circle to print the same Photo Index Sheet again.
* If you fill in this circle, all other filled settings will be disregarded.
G. Be careful not to make the bar code dirty.
If the bar code is dirty or has wrinkles, the machine may not scan the Photo Index Sheet
properly.
Important
Be sure to fill in a circle for every setting item except options.
If there are two or more Photo Index Sheets, fill in marks on each sheet.
If the filled circles on the Photo Index Sheet are not dark or vast enough, the machine may
not scan the Photo Index Sheet properly.
9. Load paper to print photos.
Make sure that the page size and media type of the loaded paper match those specified on the
Photo Index Sheet.
Note
When printing images using the Photo Index Sheet, you can select 4" x 6" (101.6 x 152.4 mm),
5" x 7" (127 x 177.8 mm), 8.5" x 11" (Letter), or A4 for the page size.
10. Make sure that
Scan sheet and print is selected, then press the OK button.
11. Place the Photo Index Sheet face-down on the Platen Glass, then press the OK
Page 370 of 949 pages
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet
Page 371 of 949 pages
button.
When placing the Photo Index Sheet, place the front side down, align the upper left corner of it with
the alignment mark as shown in the figure below, then close the Document Cover.
The Photo Index Sheet is scanned and the specified photos will be printed.
Remove the Photo Index Sheet on the Platen Glass after printing is complete.
Important
If Failed to scan Photo Index Sheet. is displayed on the LCD, press the OK button and confirm
the following:
The Platen Glass and the Photo Index Sheet are not dirty
The Photo Index Sheet is placed in the correct position with its front side facing down
You have filled in all the necessary circles on the sheet
Only one option is selected for items that do not accept two or more selections
Do not remove the memory card/USB flash drive while printing is in progress.
Note
To cancel printing, press the Stop button.
To continue to print photographs using subsequent Photo Index Sheets, repeat the procedure
from step 10.
If the memory card/USB flash drive has been removed and then reinserted before printing with
the Photo Index Sheet, it may take some time before printing starts.
Page top
Using Useful Printing Functions
Page 372 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions
Using Useful Printing Functions
Printing Memory Card Photos in Various Layouts
You can select from the following printing methods according to your purpose.
Note
For the procedure to select the printing method, see Settings for Printing a Photo on a
Memory Card.
Layout print
You can paste photos of your choice in the specified layout.
Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout Print)
Sticker print
You can print your favorite photo with a frame on Canon Photo Stickers.
Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print)
DPOF print
If you have specified Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) settings on your digital camera, you
can print photos according to these settings.
DPOF print
Captured info print
You can print shooting information (Exif info) on the margin of the index of photos or selected
individual photos.
Captured info print
Photo index print
You can print an index of all the photos saved on a memory card.
Photo index print
Print all photos
You can print all photos saved on the memory card.
Print all photos
ID photo size print
You can print a photo saved on a memory card in the ID photo size.
Printing ID Photo-ID photo size print
Calendar print
You can print a calendar using photos saved on a memory card.
Creating a Calendar-Calendar print
Page top
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Page 373 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Load paper.
3. Select
Memory card on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
4. Insert the memory card into the Card Slot.
The memory card menu is displayed.
Important
If the USB flash drive is inserted in the Direct Print Port, remove the USB flash drive, then insert
the memory card into the Card Slot.
Note
For information on how to insert a memory card, refer to Printing from a Memory Card .
Page top
Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout Print)
Page 374 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout Print)
Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout
Print)
You can paste photos of your choice in the specified layout.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Select
Layout print, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
If you skip a selected frame without pasting a photo on it when selecting Paste one by one,
press the left Function button on the photo layout screen.
When Borderless is selected, the media type cannot be set to Plain paper.
When Mixed 1, Mixed 2, or Mixed 3 is selected, you can select A4 or 8.5"x11"(LTR) for the page
size.
You cannot paste photos over multiple pages at one time. If you have photos for two or more
pages, print each page as you finish pasting photos for the page.
Even if both Date ON and File no. ON are selected, only the shooting date will be printed. If you
want to print the file number, select Date OFF.
Other Options
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming) (This function is available only when Paste one by one
is selected.)
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Page top
Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print)
Page 375 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print)
Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print)
You can print your favorite photo with a frame on Canon Photo Stickers.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Select
Sticker print, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
You cannot use the Cassette to print on stickers. Load stickers on the Rear Tray.
You can load only one sheet of stickers at a time on the Rear Tray.
button.
Select the frame to print using the Easy-Scroll Wheel or the
To print with no frame, press the left Function button when No frame is displayed on the
screen.
When the photo is upside down, use the
button to rotate the frame by 180 degrees to
orient it properly against the photo.
To rotate the photo by 90 degrees to fit it within the frame, use the cropping edit screen to rotate
the cropping area.
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
Other Options
Using Useful Display Functions
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Page top
Print all photos
Page 376 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Print all photos
Print all photos
You can print all photos saved on the memory card/USB flash drive.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Select
Print all photos, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
Other Options
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Page top
Photo index print
Page 377 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Photo index print
Photo index print
You can print an index of all the photos saved on a memory card/USB flash drive.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Select
Photo index print, then press the OK button.
2. Select All photos, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
The following print methods are available:
Contact print: 35 mm film images are printed in its negative size as in contact print.
Standard: The number of photos printed on a single sheet of paper depends on the size of the
paper.
A4/Letter: 80 photos, 8" x 10"/203.2 x 254.0 mm: 72 photos, 5" x 7"/127.0 x 177.8 mm: 35 photos, 4"
x 6"/101.6 x 152.4 mm: 24 photos, Wide/101.6 x 180.6 mm: 28 photos
4" x 6"/101.6 x 152.4 mm: 24 photos, Wide/101.6 x 180.6 mm: 28 photos
You can search for photos to print with the shooting date.
Search with the shooting date.
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Page top
DPOF print
Page 378 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > DPOF print
DPOF print
If you have specified Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) settings on your digital camera, you can print
photos according to these settings.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Select
DPOF print, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
The machine supports the following DPOF functions:
Version:
Based on ver. 1.00
Supported image types:
CIFF, Exif (TIFF), and JFIF
Print Style - Standard Print:
Prints photos that were specified as "Standard Print" with DPOF
Print Style - Index Print:
Prints an index of photos that were specified as "Index Print" with DPOF using the machine's
index printing layout
Print Style - Multi-Image Print:
Prints a photo that was specified as "Multi-Image Print" with DPOF (with the specified number
of copies and layout)
Print Photo Select:
Prints only photos specified with DPOF
Number of copies:
Prints the number of copies specified with DPOF
Prints are automatically enlarged or reduced to match the page size. Edges of the photo may
be clipped off depending on the page size.
The shooting date order setting by which photos are sorted follows that of DPOF.
DPOF is a standard format to record the specified information regarding images, such as
which image or number of copies to print.
Page top
Captured info print
Page 379 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Captured info print
Captured info print
You can print shooting information (Exif info) on the margin of the index of photos or selected individual
photos.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Select
Captured info print, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
The following print methods are available:
Single photo:
Prints the information in the margin of selected individual photos.
List:
Prints the information in the margin of the Photo index print of all photos or selected photos.
You can select photos to print by the shooting date.
Other Options
Using Useful Display Functions (This function can only be used when Single photo is
selected.)
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming) (This function is available only when Single photo is
selected.)
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Page top
Printing ID Photo-ID photo size print
Page 380 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Printing ID Photo-ID photo size print
Printing ID Photo-ID photo size print
You can print photos on a memory card/USB flash drive in a specified size such as an ID photo.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Select
ID photo size print, then press the OK button.
2. Select the photo to print using the Easy-Scroll Wheel or the
button, then press
the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
The following sizes are available.
Print on the paper larger than the size you specified.
1.18"x0.98"(3.0x2.5 cm)
1.57"x1.18"(4.0x3.0 cm)
1.57"x1.57"(4.0x4.0 cm)
1.57"x2.36"(4.0x6.0 cm)
1.77"x1.38"(4.5x3.5 cm)
1.77"x1.77"(4.5x4.5 cm)
1.97"x1.97"(5.0x5.0 cm)
2.17"x2.17"(5.5x5.5 cm)
2.36"x1.77"(6.0x4.5 cm)
4.72"x4.72"(12x12 cm)
1"x1.43"(2.5x3.6 cm)
1.43"x2"(3.6x5.1 cm)
1.77"x2.17"(4.5x5.5 cm)
Other Options
Using Useful Display Functions
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Page top
Creating a Calendar-Calendar print
Page 381 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Creating a Calendar-Calendar print
Creating a Calendar-Calendar print
You can create an original calendar using your favorite photos and a calendar.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Select
Calendar print, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Important
Be sure to load the paper in portrait orientation.
Note
The following layouts are available.
Paper: Portrait format Photo: Bottom (landscape)
Paper: Portrait format Photo: Top (landscape)
Paper: Landscape format Photo: Right (portrait)
Paper: Landscape format Photo: Left (portrait)
Select the landscape format for a landscape-oriented photo or the portrait format for a portraitoriented photo.
Use the Easy-Scroll Wheel or the
button to select the Photo. If the photo is upside-down, you
can use the
button to rotate the photo 180 degrees.
To change the start of the week on the printed calendar, press the left Function button on the print
settings confirmation screen, then select Start of the week.
To confirm or change the settings such as brightness, press the left Function button on the print
settings confirmation screen, then select Auto photo fix.
Even if both Date ON and File no. ON are selected, only the shooting date will be printed. If you want
to print the file number, select Date OFF.
Other Options
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Page top
Using Useful Display Functions
Page 382 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Display Functions
Using Useful Display Functions
Changing the Display
When you press the left Function button when Change display is displayed on the screen, you can
change the way photos are displayed.
* The display methods below are available both for printing photos on a memory card and for
printing photos on a USB flash drive.
Normal screen display:
Shows one photo.
Thumbnail display:
Shows nine photos at a time. Select the photo using the Easy-Scroll Wheel or the
button, then press the + or - button to specify the number of copies.
Full-screen display:
Shows one photo at full-screen.
Enlarged display:
Shows enlarged photo twice as much as the original. Move the area to show using the
button. Press the OK button to return to the previous display mode.
Slide show:
Shows next photos automatically. To stop the slide show, press the Stop button.
Page top
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Display Functions > Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
You can edit images displayed on the LCD by cropping them.
* This function is available both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a USB
flash drive.
Note
Crop images after specifying the page size, media type, and bordered or borderless printing in the
print settings screen. If you change the paper settings after cropping, the cropped area may be
adjusted to match the paper, or be disabled completely.
1. Select the photo to crop.
2. Press the right Function button when Edit is displayed on the screen.
3. Select Trimming, then press the OK button.
The cropping edit screen is displayed.
4. Choose the area to print.
,
,
, and
buttons:
Position the cropping frame.
Easy-Scroll Wheel:
Sets the cropping frame size.
Turn the Easy-Scroll Wheel clockwise to enlarge the size of the cropping frame or counterclockwise
to reduce it.
Left Function button:
Changes the aspect ratio of the cropping frame.
Right Function button:
Rotates the cropping frame.
To switch the cropping frame between portrait and landscape orientations, press this button.
5. Press the OK button to finalize your selection of cropping area.
The area to be cropped is specified, and the original photo is displayed.
Note
The cropped image cannot be newly saved on the memory card/USB flash drive.
The cropping area is displayed only for photos which have been cropped.
To change the cropped area once it has been set, press the right Function button when Edit is
displayed on the screen, select Trimming, then press the OK button.
To cancel cropping after cropping has been complete, press the right Function button again
Page 383 of 949 pages
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
when Edit is displayed on the screen, select Cancel trimming, then press the
Displayed images only or All images, then press the OK button.
Page 384 of 949 pages
OK button. Select
Page top
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Page 385 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Display Functions > Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
When there are a lot of photos saved on the memory card/USB flash drive, you can choose to display and
print only photos shot on the specified date or within the specified range of dates.
* This function is available both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a USB
flash drive.
Note
If the number of copies to print is already specified for some photos before searching with the
shooting date, or if some photos are already pasted on a layout, those photos will still be selected
for printing even if they were not shot on the specified date or within the specified date range.
1. Display the search method screen.
Setting in Edit:
1. Press the right Function button when Edit is displayed on the screen.
2. Select Search, then press the OK button.
The Search screen is displayed.
Setting in Search in the Specify print range screen:
1. Select Search, then press the OK button.
The Search screen is displayed.
2. Set the search method.
To specify only one date for search:
Select One date only.
To specify the date range for search:
Select Select date range.
3. Press the OK button.
The date input screen is displayed.
Note
It may take a while for the date input screen to be displayed depending on the number of
photos saved on the memory card/USB flash drive.
4. Specify the date range, then press the OK button.
If you selected One date only:
1. Specify the date to search, then press the OK button.
If you selected Select date range:
1. Specify the start date to search, then press the OK button.
2. Specify the end date to search, then press the OK button.
Note
The date to be specified is displayed according to the settings of Date display in Advanced
settings under Device settings.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
To cancel the selected date range, press the right Function button when Edit is displayed on
the screen, select Cancel selected date, then press the OK button.
Page top
Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Setting Up the
Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer
Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the
Computer
The Card Slot of the machine can also be used as the memory card drive of the computer.
Note
For details on using the Card Slot over a network, see Using the Card Slot over a Network .
In Macintosh, you cannot write data to a memory card in the Card Slot over a network.
Important
When Read/write attribute in Advanced settings under Device settings is set to Writable from USB
PC or Writable from LAN PC using the Operation Panel of the machine, you cannot print photos on
a memory card using the Operation Panel of the machine. After using the Card Slot as the memory
card drive of the computer, remove the memory card, then be sure to set Read/write attribute to Not
writable from PC. When you turned off the machine, Writable from USB PC or Writable from LAN PC
will be canceled and the setting is returned to Not writable from PC when you turn on the machine
next time.
1. Make sure that the memory card is not set.
If the memory card is set, remove it from the Card Slot. For details, refer to Printing from a Memory
Card.
2. Select
3. Select
Settings on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
Device settings, then press the OK button.
4. Select Advanced settings, then press the OK button.
5. Select Read/write attribute, then press the OK button.
6. Specify the read/write attribute.
Not writable from PC
The Card Slot is used only for reading. Be sure to select this mode when printing photos from a
memory card.
Writable from USB PC
The Card Slot is used as the memory card drive of a computer connected to the machine via USB.
Data can be written on the memory card from the computer.
Writable from LAN PC
The Card Slot is used as the memory card drive of a computer connected to the machine via a
network. Data can be written on the memory card from the computer.
7. Press the OK button.
Important
If you use the Card Slot as the memory card drive of the computer, you need to perform a "safe
removal" operation on your computer before physically removing the memory card from your
machine.
In Windows, right-click the
Removable Disk icon and click Eject. If Eject is not displayed on
Page 386 of 949 pages
Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer
Page 387 of 949 pages
the screen, confirm that the Access lamp is not flashing and remove the memory card.
Over a network, the removal operation is not needed.
On a Macintosh, drag the
Mount drive icon into the Trash.
Page top
Printing from a USB Flash Drive
Page 388 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive
Printing from a USB Flash Drive
Printing Photographs Saved on a USB Flash Drive
Using Useful Printing Functions
Using Useful Display Functions
Page top
Printing Photographs Saved on a USB Flash Drive
Page 389 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Printing
Photographs Saved on a USB Flash Drive
Printing Photographs Saved on a USB Flash Drive
For the basic procedure to print from a USB flash drive, refer to Printing from a Memory Card .
Setting Items
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet
Using Useful Printing Functions
Page top
Setting Items
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Printing
Photographs Saved on a USB Flash Drive > Setting Items
Setting Items
Print Settings Confirmation Screen
In the Memory card mode, select the photo to print using the Easy-Scroll Wheel or the
button, specify the number of copies using the + or - button, press the OK button, then the screen
is displayed.
Note
Depending on the functions, some setting items cannot be specified in combination.
1.
Page size
Select the page size of the loaded paper.
2.
Media type
Select the media type of the loaded paper.
3.
Print quality
Adjust print quality according to the original.
4.
Borderless print
Select bordered or borderless print.
Note
When you select Plain paper for the media type, the photo will be printed with bordered
even if you select Borderless.
Advanced Screen
When you press the left Function button in the print settings confirmation screen, the menu screen
to select Date setting, File no. setting, or Auto photo fix is displayed.
Page 390 of 949 pages
Setting Items
Use the Easy-Scroll Wheel or the
button to select the setting item, then press the OK button
to display the screen for the selected item.
1.
Date setting
Activates/deactivates to print the shooting date on a photo.
2.
File no. setting
Activates/deactivates to print the file number on a photo.
Note
It is not possible to print both the shooting date and the file number when Layout print is
selected as a print function in the memory card mode. Even if both Date ON and File no.
ON are selected, only the shooting date will be printed. If you want to print the file
number, select Date OFF.
3.
Auto photo fix
When Auto photo fix ON is selected, the scene or person's face of a shot photo is recognized
and the most suitable correction for each photo is made automatically. It makes a darkened
face by backlight brighter to print. It also analyzes a scene such as scenery, night scene,
person, etc. and corrects each scene with the most suitable color, brightness, or contrasts
automatically to print.
Page 391 of 949 pages
Setting Items
Note
As a default, Auto photo fix ON is applied when photos on a USB flash drive are printed.
When Auto photo fix ON is applied, you can specify only (1) Red-Eye correction below.
If the print result with Auto photo fix ON selected is not satisfactory, select Manual
correction, then specify each advanced setting item below.
1.
Red-Eye correction
Corrects red eyes in portraits caused by flash photography.
Depending on the type of the photo, red eyes may not be corrected or parts other than the
eyes may be corrected.
Note
This setting is available even if Auto photo fix ON is selected.
Page 392 of 949 pages
Setting Items
2.
Page 393 of 949 pages
Vivid photo
Makes green and blue more lively.
3.
Photo optimizer pro
Automatically optimizes brightness and tone of a photo.
4.
Noise reduction
Reduces the noise on blue areas like the sky as well as on black areas.
5.
Face brightener
Brightens a darkened face on the photo taken against the light.
6.
Image optimizer
Corrects and smoothes the jagged contours for printing.
7.
Brightness
Adjust brightness.
8.
Contrast
Adjust contrast.
9.
Color hue
Adjust color hue.
For example, you can increase red or yellow to adjust the skin tone.
10.
Effects
Applies special effects to the photo, such as printing in sepia tones or with a sketch
illustration like effect.
Page top
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Printing
Photographs Saved on a Memory Card > Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet
Photo Index Sheet is an A4 or Letter-sized plain paper on which thumbnail images of photos saved on a
memory card or a USB flash drive are printed. Print out a Photo Index Sheet, mark the images that you
want to print, scan the sheet in, and the machine then prints the selected images. You can also specify
other settings, such as the paper size and the media type, by using this sheet; you do not have to
perform settings by using the Operation Panel on the machine.
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Load A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the Cassette.
Page 394 of 949 pages
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet
3. Select
Photo index sheet on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
4. Make sure that
Index sheet print is selected, then press the OK button.
5. Insert a memory card or a USB flash drive following the instruction on the LCD.
Important
You cannot insert both the memory card and the USB flash drive at the same time.
Do not remove the memory card/USB flash drive until printing the Photo Index Sheet(s) is
complete.
Note
For information on how to insert a memory card/USB flash drive, refer to Printing from a
Memory Card .
6. Select a range of images included in the Photo Index Sheet, then press the OK
button.
The following ranges can be selected.
Print all photos:
Prints all images.
Set no. of copies:
Prints the specified number of images from the newest one.
Search:
Prints images by specifying the shooting date range.
Note
It may take a while to display the Search screen depending on the number of photos saved on
the memory card/USB flash drive.
7. Press the Color button.
The Photo Index Sheet(s) will be printed.
Note
If 31 or more images are selected, two or more Photo Index Sheets will be printed.
8. Fill in the appropriate circles in the Photo Index Sheet.
Fill in the appropriate circles (
and their print options.
Good
Bad
(a) Check mark
(b) Line only
(c) Too light
) with a dark pencil or a black ink pen to select the photos to print
Page 395 of 949 pages
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet
A. Select the page size and other printing formats.
B. Select "Date"/"Auto Photo Fix OFF" as necessary.
C. Fill in this circle to print a copy of all photographs.
* If you fill in this circle, any other circles you filled in for the number of copies to print for each
photograph will be disregarded, and one copy each of all photographs will be printed.
D. Select the number of copies (fill in a circle under each photograph to print).
E. Confirm and follow the described printing procedure.
F. Fill in this circle to print the same Photo Index Sheet again.
* If you fill in this circle, all other filled settings will be disregarded.
G. Be careful not to make the bar code dirty.
If the bar code is dirty or has wrinkles, the machine may not scan the Photo Index Sheet
properly.
Important
Be sure to fill in a circle for every setting item except options.
If there are two or more Photo Index Sheets, fill in marks on each sheet.
If the filled circles on the Photo Index Sheet are not dark or vast enough, the machine may
not scan the Photo Index Sheet properly.
9. Load paper to print photos.
Make sure that the page size and media type of the loaded paper match those specified on the
Photo Index Sheet.
Note
When printing images using the Photo Index Sheet, you can select 4" x 6" (101.6 x 152.4 mm),
5" x 7" (127 x 177.8 mm), 8.5" x 11" (Letter), or A4 for the page size.
10. Make sure that
Scan sheet and print is selected, then press the OK button.
11. Place the Photo Index Sheet face-down on the Platen Glass, then press the OK
Page 396 of 949 pages
Printing by Using the Photo Index Sheet
Page 397 of 949 pages
button.
When placing the Photo Index Sheet, place the front side down, align the upper left corner of it with
the alignment mark as shown in the figure below, then close the Document Cover.
The Photo Index Sheet is scanned and the specified photos will be printed.
Remove the Photo Index Sheet on the Platen Glass after printing is complete.
Important
If Failed to scan Photo Index Sheet. is displayed on the LCD, press the OK button and confirm
the following:
The Platen Glass and the Photo Index Sheet are not dirty
The Photo Index Sheet is placed in the correct position with its front side facing down
You have filled in all the necessary circles on the sheet
Only one option is selected for items that do not accept two or more selections
Do not remove the memory card/USB flash drive while printing is in progress.
Note
To cancel printing, press the Stop button.
To continue to print photographs using subsequent Photo Index Sheets, repeat the procedure
from step 10.
If the memory card/USB flash drive has been removed and then reinserted before printing with
the Photo Index Sheet, it may take some time before printing starts.
Page top
Using Useful Printing Functions
Page 398 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Using Useful
Printing Functions
Using Useful Printing Functions
Printing USB Flash Drive Photos in Various Layouts
You can select from the following printing methods according to your purpose.
Note
For the procedure to select the printing method, see Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB
Flash Drive .
Layout print
You can paste photos of your choice in the specified layout.
Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout Print)
Sticker print
You can print your favorite photo with a frame on Canon Photo Stickers.
Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print)
DPOF print
If you have specified Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) settings on your digital camera, you
can print photos according to these settings.
DPOF print
Captured info print
You can print shooting information (Exif info) on the margin of the index of photos or selected
individual photos.
Captured info print
Photo index print
You can print an index of all the photos saved on a USB flash drive.
Photo index print
Print all photos
You can print all photos saved on a USB flash drive.
Print all photos
ID photo size print
You can print a photo saved on a USB flash drive in the ID photo size.
Printing ID Photo-ID photo size print
Calendar print
You can print a calendar using photos saved on a USB flash drive.
Creating a Calendar-Calendar print
Page top
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
Page 399 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a USB Flash Drive > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Load paper.
3. Select
Memory card on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
4. Insert the USB flash drive into the Direct Print Port.
The memory card menu is displayed.
Important
If the memory card is inserted in the Card Slot, remove the memory card, then insert the USB
flash drive into the Direct Print Port.
Note
For information on how to insert a USB flash drive, refer to Printing from a Memory Card .
Page top
Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout Print)
Page 400 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout Print)
Printing Several Photos on a Single Sheet of Paper (Layout
Print)
You can paste photos of your choice in the specified layout.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Select
Layout print, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
If you skip a selected frame without pasting a photo on it when selecting Paste one by one,
press the left Function button on the photo layout screen.
When Borderless is selected, the media type cannot be set to Plain paper.
When Mixed 1, Mixed 2, or Mixed 3 is selected, you can select A4 or 8.5"x11"(LTR) for the page
size.
You cannot paste photos over multiple pages at one time. If you have photos for two or more
pages, print each page as you finish pasting photos for the page.
Even if both Date ON and File no. ON are selected, only the shooting date will be printed. If you
want to print the file number, select Date OFF.
Other Options
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming) (This function is available only when Paste one by one
is selected.)
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Page top
Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print)
Page 401 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print)
Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print)
You can print your favorite photo with a frame on Canon Photo Stickers.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Select
Sticker print, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
You cannot use the Cassette to print on stickers. Load stickers on the Rear Tray.
You can load only one sheet of stickers at a time on the Rear Tray.
button.
Select the frame to print using the Easy-Scroll Wheel or the
To print with no frame, press the left Function button when No frame is displayed on the
screen.
When the photo is upside down, use the
button to rotate the frame by 180 degrees to
orient it properly against the photo.
To rotate the photo by 90 degrees to fit it within the frame, use the cropping edit screen to rotate
the cropping area.
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
Other Options
Using Useful Display Functions
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Page top
Print all photos
Page 402 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Print all photos
Print all photos
You can print all photos saved on the memory card/USB flash drive.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Select
Print all photos, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
Other Options
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Page top
Photo index print
Page 403 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Photo index print
Photo index print
You can print an index of all the photos saved on a memory card/USB flash drive.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Select
Photo index print, then press the OK button.
2. Select All photos, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
The following print methods are available:
Contact print: 35 mm film images are printed in its negative size as in contact print.
Standard: The number of photos printed on a single sheet of paper depends on the size of the
paper.
A4/Letter: 80 photos, 8" x 10"/203.2 x 254.0 mm: 72 photos, 5" x 7"/127.0 x 177.8 mm: 35 photos, 4"
x 6"/101.6 x 152.4 mm: 24 photos, Wide/101.6 x 180.6 mm: 28 photos
4" x 6"/101.6 x 152.4 mm: 24 photos, Wide/101.6 x 180.6 mm: 28 photos
You can search for photos to print with the shooting date.
Search with the shooting date.
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Page top
DPOF print
Page 404 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > DPOF print
DPOF print
If you have specified Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) settings on your digital camera, you can print
photos according to these settings.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Select
DPOF print, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
The machine supports the following DPOF functions:
Version:
Based on ver. 1.00
Supported image types:
CIFF, Exif (TIFF), and JFIF
Print Style - Standard Print:
Prints photos that were specified as "Standard Print" with DPOF
Print Style - Index Print:
Prints an index of photos that were specified as "Index Print" with DPOF using the machine's
index printing layout
Print Style - Multi-Image Print:
Prints a photo that was specified as "Multi-Image Print" with DPOF (with the specified number
of copies and layout)
Print Photo Select:
Prints only photos specified with DPOF
Number of copies:
Prints the number of copies specified with DPOF
Prints are automatically enlarged or reduced to match the page size. Edges of the photo may
be clipped off depending on the page size.
The shooting date order setting by which photos are sorted follows that of DPOF.
DPOF is a standard format to record the specified information regarding images, such as
which image or number of copies to print.
Page top
Captured info print
Page 405 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Captured info print
Captured info print
You can print shooting information (Exif info) on the margin of the index of photos or selected individual
photos.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Select
Captured info print, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
The following print methods are available:
Single photo:
Prints the information in the margin of selected individual photos.
List:
Prints the information in the margin of the Photo index print of all photos or selected photos.
You can select photos to print by the shooting date.
Other Options
Using Useful Display Functions (This function can only be used when Single photo is
selected.)
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming) (This function is available only when Single photo is
selected.)
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Page top
Printing ID Photo-ID photo size print
Page 406 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Printing ID Photo-ID photo size print
Printing ID Photo-ID photo size print
You can print photos on a memory card/USB flash drive in a specified size such as an ID photo.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Select
ID photo size print, then press the OK button.
2. Select the photo to print using the Easy-Scroll Wheel or the
button, then press
the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
The following sizes are available.
Print on the paper larger than the size you specified.
1.18"x0.98"(3.0x2.5 cm)
1.57"x1.18"(4.0x3.0 cm)
1.57"x1.57"(4.0x4.0 cm)
1.57"x2.36"(4.0x6.0 cm)
1.77"x1.38"(4.5x3.5 cm)
1.77"x1.77"(4.5x4.5 cm)
1.97"x1.97"(5.0x5.0 cm)
2.17"x2.17"(5.5x5.5 cm)
2.36"x1.77"(6.0x4.5 cm)
4.72"x4.72"(12x12 cm)
1"x1.43"(2.5x3.6 cm)
1.43"x2"(3.6x5.1 cm)
1.77"x2.17"(4.5x5.5 cm)
Other Options
Using Useful Display Functions
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Page top
Creating a Calendar-Calendar print
Page 407 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Creating a Calendar-Calendar print
Creating a Calendar-Calendar print
You can create an original calendar using your favorite photos and a calendar.
Settings for Printing a Photo on a Memory Card
Settings for Printing a Photo on a USB Flash Drive
* The procedure below is applied both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a
USB flash drive.
1. Select
Calendar print, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Important
Be sure to load the paper in portrait orientation.
Note
The following layouts are available.
Paper: Portrait format Photo: Bottom (landscape)
Paper: Portrait format Photo: Top (landscape)
Paper: Landscape format Photo: Right (portrait)
Paper: Landscape format Photo: Left (portrait)
Select the landscape format for a landscape-oriented photo or the portrait format for a portraitoriented photo.
Use the Easy-Scroll Wheel or the
button to select the Photo. If the photo is upside-down, you
can use the
button to rotate the photo 180 degrees.
To change the start of the week on the printed calendar, press the left Function button on the print
settings confirmation screen, then select Start of the week.
To confirm or change the settings such as brightness, press the left Function button on the print
settings confirmation screen, then select Auto photo fix.
Even if both Date ON and File no. ON are selected, only the shooting date will be printed. If you want
to print the file number, select Date OFF.
Other Options
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Page top
Using Useful Display Functions
Page 408 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Display Functions
Using Useful Display Functions
Changing the Display
When you press the left Function button when Change display is displayed on the screen, you can
change the way photos are displayed.
* The display methods below are available both for printing photos on a memory card and for
printing photos on a USB flash drive.
Normal screen display:
Shows one photo.
Thumbnail display:
Shows nine photos at a time. Select the photo using the Easy-Scroll Wheel or the
button, then press the + or - button to specify the number of copies.
Full-screen display:
Shows one photo at full-screen.
Enlarged display:
Shows enlarged photo twice as much as the original. Move the area to show using the
button. Press the OK button to return to the previous display mode.
Slide show:
Shows next photos automatically. To stop the slide show, press the Stop button.
Page top
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Display Functions > Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
You can edit images displayed on the LCD by cropping them.
* This function is available both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a USB
flash drive.
Note
Crop images after specifying the page size, media type, and bordered or borderless printing in the
print settings screen. If you change the paper settings after cropping, the cropped area may be
adjusted to match the paper, or be disabled completely.
1. Select the photo to crop.
2. Press the right Function button when Edit is displayed on the screen.
3. Select Trimming, then press the OK button.
The cropping edit screen is displayed.
4. Choose the area to print.
,
,
, and
buttons:
Position the cropping frame.
Easy-Scroll Wheel:
Sets the cropping frame size.
Turn the Easy-Scroll Wheel clockwise to enlarge the size of the cropping frame or counterclockwise
to reduce it.
Left Function button:
Changes the aspect ratio of the cropping frame.
Right Function button:
Rotates the cropping frame.
To switch the cropping frame between portrait and landscape orientations, press this button.
5. Press the OK button to finalize your selection of cropping area.
The area to be cropped is specified, and the original photo is displayed.
Note
The cropped image cannot be newly saved on the memory card/USB flash drive.
The cropping area is displayed only for photos which have been cropped.
To change the cropped area once it has been set, press the right Function button when Edit is
displayed on the screen, select Trimming, then press the OK button.
To cancel cropping after cropping has been complete, press the right Function button again
Page 409 of 949 pages
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
when Edit is displayed on the screen, select Cancel trimming, then press the
Displayed images only or All images, then press the OK button.
Page 410 of 949 pages
OK button. Select
Page top
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Page 411 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Printing from a Memory Card > Using Useful
Display Functions > Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
Searching for Photos with the Shooting Date (Search)
When there are a lot of photos saved on the memory card/USB flash drive, you can choose to display and
print only photos shot on the specified date or within the specified range of dates.
* This function is available both for printing photos on a memory card and for printing photos on a USB
flash drive.
Note
If the number of copies to print is already specified for some photos before searching with the
shooting date, or if some photos are already pasted on a layout, those photos will still be selected
for printing even if they were not shot on the specified date or within the specified date range.
1. Display the search method screen.
Setting in Edit:
1. Press the right Function button when Edit is displayed on the screen.
2. Select Search, then press the OK button.
The Search screen is displayed.
Setting in Search in the Specify print range screen:
1. Select Search, then press the OK button.
The Search screen is displayed.
2. Set the search method.
To specify only one date for search:
Select One date only.
To specify the date range for search:
Select Select date range.
3. Press the OK button.
The date input screen is displayed.
Note
It may take a while for the date input screen to be displayed depending on the number of
photos saved on the memory card/USB flash drive.
4. Specify the date range, then press the OK button.
If you selected One date only:
1. Specify the date to search, then press the OK button.
If you selected Select date range:
1. Specify the start date to search, then press the OK button.
2. Specify the end date to search, then press the OK button.
Note
The date to be specified is displayed according to the settings of Date display in Advanced
settings under Device settings.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
To cancel the selected date range, press the right Function button when Edit is displayed on
the screen, select Cancel selected date, then press the OK button.
Page top
Photo Printing from Printed Photo
Page 412 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Photo Printing from Printed Photo
Photo Printing from Printed Photo
Printing from Printed Photo
Using Useful Printing Functions
Using Useful Display Functions
Page top
Printing from Printed Photo
Page 413 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Photo Printing from Printed Photo > Printing from
Printed Photo
Printing from Printed Photo
For the basic procedure for printing from a printed photo, refer to Printing Photos from Printed Photos.
Setting Items
Page top
Setting Items
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Photo Printing from Printed Photo > Printing from
Printed Photo > Setting Items
Setting Items
Print Settings Confirmation Screen
In the Easy photo reprint mode, select the photo to print using the Easy-Scroll Wheel or the
button, specify the number of copies using the + or - button, press the OK button, then the screen
is displayed.
Note
Depending on the functions, some setting items cannot be specified in combination.
1.
Page size
Select the page size of the loaded paper.
2.
Media type
Select the photo paper type to use.
3.
Print quality
Adjust print quality according to the original.
4.
Borderless print
Select bordered or borderless print.
Advanced Print Settings Screen
When you press the left Function button in the print settings confirmation screen, the Advanced
screen is displayed.
When Auto photo fix ON is selected, the scene or person's face of a shot photo is recognized and
the most suitable correction for each photo is made automatically. It makes a darkened face by
Page 414 of 949 pages
Setting Items
Page 415 of 949 pages
backlight brighter to print. It also analyzes a scene such as scenery, night scene, person, etc. and
corrects each scene with the most suitable color, brightness, or contrasts automatically to print.
Note
If the print result with Auto photo fix ON selected is not satisfactory, select Manual correction,
then specify each advanced setting item below.
1.
Face brightener
Brightens a darkened face on the photo taken against the light.
2.
Fade restoration
Corrects the color when printing photos that have faded or color cast over time.
3.
Brightness
Adjust brightness.
4.
Contrast
Adjust contrast.
5.
Color hue
Adjust color hue.
For example, you can increase red or yellow to adjust the skin tone.
Page top
Using Useful Printing Functions
Page 416 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Photo Printing from Printed Photo > Using Useful
Printing Functions
Using Useful Printing Functions
Special Printing of Photo
Choose the printing method according to your purpose.
Note
Refer to Settings for Printing a Scanned Photo for how to select the copy method.
Sticker print
You can print your favorite photo on Canon Photo Stickers to create your own stickers.
Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print)
Print all photos
You can print all scanned photos.
Printing All Photos (Print All Photos)
Page top
Settings for Printing a Scanned Photo
Page 417 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Photo Printing from Printed Photo > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Settings for Printing a Scanned Photo
Settings for Printing a Scanned Photo
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Select
Easy photo reprint on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions, then press the OK button to start scanning a
printed photo.
The Easy photo reprint screen is displayed.
4. Load paper on the Rear Tray.
Note
For the basic procedure for printing from a printed photo, refer to Printing Photos from Printed
Photos .
Page top
Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print)
Page 418 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Photo Printing from Printed Photo > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print)
Printing on Stickers (Sticker Print)
You can create your own stickers from a scanned photo using Canon Photo Stickers.
Settings for Printing a Scanned Photo
1. Select
Sticker print, then press the OK button.
2. Select the layout, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Note
You cannot use the Cassette to print on stickers. Load stickers on the Rear Tray.
You can only load one sheet of stickers at a time on the Rear Tray.
Other Options
Changing the Display
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
Page top
Printing All Photos (Print All Photos)
Page 419 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Photo Printing from Printed Photo > Using Useful
Printing Functions > Printing All Photos (Print All Photos)
Printing All Photos (Print All Photos)
You can print all scanned photos.
Settings for Printing a Scanned Photo
1. Select
Print all photos, then press the OK button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Page top
Using Useful Display Functions
Page 420 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Photo Printing from Printed Photo > Using Useful
Display Functions
Using Useful Display Functions
Changing the Display
When you press the left Function button when Change display is displayed on the screen, you can
change the way photos are displayed.
Normal screen display
Shows one photo.
Full-screen display
Shows one photo at full-screen.
Enlarged display
Shows enlarged photo twice as much as the original. Move the area to show using the
button. Press the OK button to return to the previous display mode.
Printing a Specified Area (Trimming)
You can edit images displayed on the LCD by cropping them.
1. Select the photo to crop.
2. Press the right Function button when Edit is displayed on the screen.
3. Select Trimming, then press the OK button.
The cropping edit screen is displayed.
4. Choose the area to print.
,
,
, and
buttons:
Position the cropping frame.
Easy-Scroll Wheel:
Sets the cropping frame size.
Turn the Easy-Scroll Wheel clockwise to enlarge the size of the cropping frame or
counterclockwise to reduce it.
Left Function button:
Changes the aspect ratio of the cropping frame.
Right Function button:
Rotates the cropping frame.
To switch the cropping frame between portrait and landscape orientations, press this button.
Using Useful Display Functions
Page 421 of 949 pages
5. Press the OK button to finalize your selection of cropping area.
The area to be cropped is specified, and the original photo is displayed.
Note
The cropping area is displayed only for photos which have been cropped.
To change the cropped area once it has been set, press the right Function button again
when Edit is displayed on the screen, select Trimming, then press the OK button.
To cancel cropping after cropping has been set, press the right Function button again
when Edit is displayed on the screen, select Cancel trimming, then press the OK button.
Select Displayed images only or All images, then press the OK button.
Page top
Scanning
Page 422 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning
Scanning
Scanning Images
Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Scanning with the Bundled Application Software
Scanning with Other Application Software
Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Screens
Other Scanning Methods
Page top
Scanning Images
Page 423 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning Images
Scanning Images
Scanning Images
Before Scanning
Placing Documents
Page top
Scanning Images
Page 424 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning Images > Scanning Images
Scanning Images
You can scan images from the machine to a computer without printing them and save them in popular
image data, such as JPEG, TIFF, bitmaps, or PDF. You can also save scanned images in a PDF or
JPEG data format on the memory card or USB flash drive.
Select the scanning method according to your purpose.
Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Scanning with the Bundled Application Software
Scanning with Other Application Software
Page top
Before Scanning
Page 425 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning Images > Before Scanning
Before Scanning
Before scanning images, confirm the following:
Does the original to be scanned meet the requirements for an original to
be set on the Platen Glass?
If you save the data to PC, refer to Placing Documents for details.
If you save the data to the USB flash drive/memory card, refer to Loading Paper / Originals for details.
Page top
Placing Documents
Page 426 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning Images > Placing Documents
Placing Documents
Learn how to place documents on the machine's Platen. Place documents correctly according to the type
of document to be scanned. Otherwise, documents may not be scanned correctly.
Important
Do not place objects on the Document Cover. The objects may fall into the machine when the
Document Cover is opened. This may damage the machine.
Placing Documents
Place documents as described below to allow the machine to detect the document type or size
automatically.
Important
When scanning by specifying the document type or size in MP Navigator EX or ScanGear (scanner
driver), align an upper corner of the document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the
Platen.
Photos that have been cut to various shapes and documents smaller than 1.18 inches (3 cm)
square cannot be cropped accurately when scanning.
Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly.
Close the Document Cover when scanning.
When Scanning Photos, Postcards, Business
Cards or CD/DVD
When Scanning Magazines, Newspapers or Text
Documents
Placing a Single Document
Place the document face-down on the Platen and
align an upper corner of the document with the
corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Portions placed on the diagonally striped area
cannot be scanned.
Place the document face-down on the Platen, with
3/8 inches (1 cm) or more space between the
edges of the Platen and the document. Portions
placed on the diagonally striped area cannot be
scanned.
Important
Large documents (such as A4 size photos)
Placing Documents
Page 427 of 949 pages
that cannot be placed away from the edges/
arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen may be
saved as PDF files. To save in a format other
than PDF, scan by specifying the file format.
Placing Multiple Documents
Allow 3/8 inches (1 cm) or more space between
the edges of the Platen and documents, and
between documents. Portions placed on the
diagonally striped area cannot be scanned.
Note
You can place up to 12 documents.
You can place up to 4 documents when the
Compress scanned images when
transferring checkbox is selected on the
General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Positions of slanted documents (10 degrees
or less) are corrected automatically.
Page top
Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operati...
Page 428 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operation Panel of
the Machine
Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card
Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Page top
Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operati...
Page 429 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operation Panel of
the Machine > Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card
Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
You can save scanned data on the USB flash drive or memory card using the Operation Panel.
Important
Do not remove the USB flash drive or memory card from the machine under the following
conditions:
While scanning is in progress
Before saving the scanned data
You cannot use the USB flash drive and memory card at the same time. Be sure to use either of
them as a media for saving scanned data.
Scanned data saved on the USB flash drive or memory card cannot be printed in the memory card
mode.
For safety reasons, we recommend storing the scanned data saved on a USB flash drive or
memory card to another media periodically to avoid unexpected accidents.
We assume no responsibility for damage or loss of data for whatever reasons even within the
warranty period.
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Select
Scan on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
The screen for selecting to which you save the data is displayed.
3. Insert the USB flash drive into the Direct Print Port or the memory card into the Card
Slot.
See Inserting the USB Flash Drive for how to insert the USB flash drive into the Direct Print Port.
For how to insert the memory card into the Card Slot or information on the types of the memory card
compatible with the machine, refer to Printing from a Memory Card .
4. Select
USB flash drive or
5. Select
Save to USB flash if you selected
Memory card, then press the OK button.
or
Save to memory card if you selected
button.
OK
The Scan document screen is displayed.
USB flash drive in step 4,
Memory card, then press the
Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operati...
6. Specify the necessary settings, then press the OK button.
Setting Items
7. Load the original on the Platen Glass following the instruction on the LCD.
Note
Refer to Loading Paper / Originals for how to load the original on the Platen Glass.
8. Press the Color button for color scanning, or the Black button for black & white
scanning.
When Preview ON is selected, press the OK button after the preview screen is displayed on the
LCD.
The machine starts scanning and scanned data is saved either on the USB flash drive or the
memory card, which you select as the media for saving scanned data.
Remove the original on the Platen Glass after scanning is complete.
To remove the USB flash drive after scanning is complete, see Removing the USB Flash Drive .
To remove the memory card after scanning is complete, refer to Printing from a Memory Card .
Note
You can scan images continuously only when selecting PDF. Continue scanning following the
confirmation screen. You can save up to 100 pages of images in one PDF file.
If the USB flash drive or the memory card becomes full while scanning images is in progress,
only the images already scanned can be saved.
You can save up to 2000 files of scanned data in both PDF and JPEG data format.
The folder and file name of scanned data saved on the USB flash drive or the memory card is
as follows:
Folder name: (file extension: PDF): CANON_SC\DOCUMENT\0001
Folder name: (file extension: JPG): CANON_SC\IMAGE\0001
File name: Running numbers, starting from SCN_0001
File date: 01/01/2009
Importing the Scanned Data Saved on the Memory Card to the Computer
When you import the scanned data saved on the memory card to the computer, import the data after
performing either of the operations below:
-Turning the machine off, then turn it back on.
-Removing the memory card, then reinsert it into the Card Slot.
You can optimize or print the scanned data saved on the memory card using MP Navigator EX. For
details, refer to Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card .
Importing the Scanned Data Saved on the USB Flash Drive to the Computer
You can import the scanned data saved on the USB flash drive to the computer.
After scanning the data, connect the USB flash drive to the computer, then import the data using
Windows Explorer.
You can import the scanned data saved on the USB flash drive to the computer.
After scanning the data, connect the USB flash drive to the computer, then import the data.
Inserting the USB Flash Drive
Important
Before inserting the USB flash drive:
You may need an extension cable if the USB flash drive cannot be inserted into the
Direct Print Port of the machine. For details, ask an electronics store.
Depending on the type of USB flash drive, the operation may not be guaranteed.
Some USB flash drives with security settings may not be used.
1.
Insert the USB flash drive into the Direct Print Port.
Make sure that the USB flash drive is correctly oriented before inserting it straightforward into
Page 430 of 949 pages
Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operati...
the Direct Print Port.
Removing the USB Flash Drive
1.
Make sure that the machine is not writing data to the USB flash drive.
Check if the writing operation is complete on the LCD.
Important
Do not remove the USB flash drive or turn off the power while the machine is operating.
Note
If you use the USB flash drive with the access lamp, refer to the instruction manual
supplied with the USB flash drive to check if the writing operation is complete on the
USB flash drive.
2.
Remove the USB flash drive.
Hold the USB flash drive and remove it from the machine straightforward.
Page top
Page 431 of 949 pages
Setting Items
Page 432 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operation Panel of
the Machine > Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operation Panel of the Machine >
Setting Items
Setting Items
Scan setting screen
Perform settings in saving scanned data on the USB flash drive or memory card.
1.
Document type
Select the type of the original on the Platen Glass.
2.
Scan size
Select the size of the original on the Platen Glass.
3.
Scan resolution
Select the resolution for scanning.
4.
Data format
Select the data format of the scanned data.
Advanced screen
When you press the left Function button in the scan setting screen, the Advanced screen is
displayed.
1.
Preview
Select to preview the scanned data or not.
2.
Unsharp mask
The outline of small characters or thin objects can be accentuated. Select Unsharp mask ON
Setting Items
Page 433 of 949 pages
if you want to accentuate the outline of the scanned data.
3.
Descreen*
A printout consists of minute dots to make characters or graphs. Interfering with each dot may
result in uneven shades or a striped pattern. Select Descreen ON if you notice any uneven
shades or a striped pattern on the scanned image.
Note
Some moire effects may remain if Unsharp mask ON and Descreen ON are selected at
the same time. In that case, change Unsharp mask ON to Unsharp mask OFF.
4.
Show-through*
Characters on the back may show through when scanning a thin document such as a
newspaper. Select Show-through ON if characters seem to show through on the scanned
document.
* Not available when scanning a photo.
Page top
Deleting Scanned Data on USB Flash Drive/Memory Card
Page 434 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operation Panel of
the Machine > Saving Scanned Data on the USB Flash Drive/Memory Card Using the Operation Panel of the Machine >
Deleting Scanned Data on USB Flash Drive/Memory Card
Deleting Scanned Data on USB Flash Drive/Memory Card
You can delete scanned data on the USB flash drive or memory card using the Operation Panel.
1. Select
Scan on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
2. Insert the USB flash drive into the Direct Print Port or the memory card into the Card
Slot.
Important
You cannot use the USB flash drive and memory card at the same time.
3. Select
USB flash drive or
4. Select
Memory card, then press the OK button.
Delete scanned data, then press the OK button.
The file list is displayed.
5. Select the file to delete, then press the OK button.
Note
You can preview the file to delete or switch the file list between PDF and JPEG.
Only the first page of the image is displayed on the LCD.
1. Change display
Switches the display between the list and the preview.
2. Switch data list
Switches the display between the PDF data list and the JPEG data list.
6. Select Yes on the confirmation screen, then press the OK button.
7. Select Yes, then press the OK button again.
The machine starts deleting the file.
Page top
Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Page 435 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of
the Machine
Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Appendix: Various Scan Settings
Page top
Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Page 436 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Forwarding
Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of
the Machine
You can forward scanned data to PC using the Operation Panel of the machine.
Before forwarding scanned data to PC, confirm the following:
The necessary application software (MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX)
are installed.
If the application software (MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX) are not yet installed, insert the Setup
CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then perform Custom Install and select MP Drivers and MP
Navigator EX.
The machine is connected to a computer correctly.
Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer correctly.
Do not plug or unplug the USB or LAN cable when scanning images with the machine, or when the
computer is in sleep or standby mode.
If you perform scanning via the LAN connection, make sure that all the required settings have been
specified. For details, refer to Network Scan Settings .
The operation after scanning the original is specified in MP Navigator
EX.
MP Navigator EX enables you to specify the response resulting from pressing the Color or Black
button on the machine. You can specify the response individually for each event. For details, refer to
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX .
1.
Set the starting application.
If you are using Mac OS X v.10.5.x or Mac OS X v.10.4.x:
This operation is not necessary.
If you are using Mac OS X v.10.3.9:
You need to set MP Navigator EX as the starting application software in Image Capture under
Applications of Mac OS X.
Select Applications on the Go menu, then double-click the Image Capture icon. Click Options at the
lower left of the scanner window, select MP Navigator EX 3 in Application to launch when the
scanner button is pressed:, then click OK. To quit Image Capture, select Quit Image Capture on the
Image Capture menu.
Important
If Options is not displayed, select Preferences on the Image Capture menu, click Scanner, and
click Use TWAIN software whenever possible to clear the option. Then quit Image Capture and
restart it.
2. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
3. Load the original on the Platen Glass.
Note
Refer to Placing Documents for how to load the original on the Platen Glass.
Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
4. Select
Scan on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
The screen for selecting to which you forward the data is displayed.
5. Select
6. Use the
PC, then press the OK button.
button to select the PC to forward the scanned data, then press the
OK button.
Select USB for a USB connected computer, or select the PC to forward the scanned data for a LAN
connected computer.
The document type selection screen is displayed.
Note
The LAN connected PCs are displayed as "User's name PCs name".
7. Select the document type, then press the OK button.
Auto scan
This item is available only when the machine is connected to the computer using a USB cable.
The machine detects the type of the original automatically and the image is forwarded in the
optimized data.
Proceed to step 9.
Document
Scans the original on the Platen Glass applying the optimized settings for scanning a document.
Photo
Scans the original on the Platen Glass applying the optimized settings for scanning a photo.
Important
Make sure that the document has been loaded correctly according to the document type that
you have selected. Refer to Placing Documents for how to load the original on the Platen
Glass.
8. If you selected Document or Photo in step 7, select the operation, then press the
OK button.
Save to PC
The original is scanned and saved.
Save as PDF file
The original is scanned and saved as a PDF file. This item can be selected only when Document
has been selected on the Scan screen.
Attach to E-mail
The original is scanned, and the image is attached to an e-mail using the e-mail application
software.
Open with application
The original is scanned and displayed on the registered application software.
Page 437 of 949 pages
Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Page 438 of 949 pages
Note
Options for scan operations can be specified in MP Navigator EX. For details, refer to Selecting
a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX .
9. Press the Color or Black button.
The settings configured by MP Navigator EX are applied when scanning.
Remove the original on the Platen Glass after scanning is complete.
Note
When you select Save as PDF file as the operation, you can scan documents from the Platen
Glass continuously. After scanning is complete, select Continue on the confirmation screen.
Load the next document on the Platen Glass, then press the Color button for color scanning, or
the Black button for black & white scanning. You can save up to 100 pages of images in one
PDF file.
10.
To specify MP Navigator EX 3.0
If you are using Windows Vista:
The program selection screen may be displayed after pressing the Color or Black button. In this
case, select MP Navigator EX Ver3.0 and click OK.
You can set MP Navigator EX to launch whenever pressing the Color or Black button. For details,
see For Windows Users .
If you are using Windows XP:
The program selection screen may be displayed after pressing the Color or Black button for the first
time. In this case, specify MP Navigator EX Ver3.0 as the application software to use, select Always
use this program for this action, then click OK. From the next time, MP Navigator EX is automatically
started.
Important
If the position or size of an image is not scanned correctly depending on the type of the original,
refer to Scanning Photos and Documents and change Document Type and Document Size
settings of MP Navigator EX to match the original being scanned.
Note
The operation to be performed after scanning the original depends on the scan operation
setting you have selected in step 8. For details on how to modify the operation settings, refer to
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX .
If You Want to Edit or Print the Scanned Images
MP Navigator EX enables you to edit the scanned images, such as optimizing or trimming.
You can also start application software from MP Navigator EX to edit or print the scanned images.
Let's Try Scanning
If You Want to Scan Originals with Advanced Settings
ScanGear enables you to scan originals with advanced settings such as the resolution.
Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Forwarding Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Page 439 of 949 pages
Note
You can use a TWAIN- or WIA- (Windows Vista and Windows XP only) compliant application
software and the Control Panel (Windows Vista and Windows XP only) to scan originals with
this machine.
For details, refer to Other Scanning Methods .
Page top
Appendix: Various Scan Settings
Page 440 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Appendix:
Various Scan Settings
Appendix: Various Scan Settings
Enabling network scanning
Network Scan Settings
Specifying how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX
Page top
Network Scan Settings
Page 441 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Appendix:
Various Scan Settings > Network Scan Settings
Network Scan Settings
You can connect the machine to a network to share it among multiple computers or scan images into a
specified computer.
Important
Multiple users cannot scan at the same time.
Note
Complete the network settings of the machine beforehand. (Refer to the printed manual:
Started .)
Getting
Complete the following settings to enable scanning over a network.
Setting for Scanning with MP Navigator EX
To scan over a network using MP Navigator EX, follow the steps below and change the connection status
between the computer and the machine.
1. Start MP Navigator EX.
Starting MP Navigator EX
2. Click Preferences.
3. For network connection, select (model name) series (Network: XXXXXXXXXXXX) for
Product Name.
(Where XXXXXXXXXXXX is the MAC address.)
Note
Network Scan Settings
Page 442 of 949 pages
For USB connection, select (model name) series for Product Name.
4. Click OK.
The Preferences dialog box closes. You can now scan via a network connection.
Go to the Main Menu to check whether network scanning is enabled.
Setting for Scanning Using the Operation Panel
You can make settings for scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine.
1. Check that Canon IJ Network Scan Utility is running.
If Canon IJ Network Scan Utility is running, its icon appears in the notification area of the taskbar.
If Canon IJ Network Scan Utility is not running, from the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon IJ
Network Utilities > Canon IJ Network Scan Utility > Canon IJ Network Scan Utility to start it.
2. In the notification area of the taskbar, right-click the Canon IJ Network Scan Utility
icon and select Settings....
The Canon IJ Network Scan Utility dialog box opens.
3. Select Canon (model name) ser_XXXXXXXXXXXX and click OK.
Note
Network Scan Settings
Page 443 of 949 pages
When multiple scanners are connected via a network, you can select up to three scanners.
See " Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen " for details on Canon IJ Network
Scan Utility.
Page top
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navig... Page 444 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Saving Scanned Data to PC Using the Operation Panel of the Machine > Appendix:
Various Scan Settings > Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navigator EX
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel
Using MP Navigator EX
MP Navigator EX enables you to specify the response resulting from pressing a button for scanning on
the Operation Panel of the machine. You can specify the response individually for each event.
1. Start MP Navigator EX.
Starting MP Navigator EX
2. Click Preferences.
The Preferences dialog box opens.
Note
The Preferences dialog box can also be opened by clicking Preferences in the One-click Mode
screen.
3. On the Scanner Button Settings tab, specify Event and Actions.
Selecting a Response to Commands from the Operation Panel Using MP Navig... Page 445 of 949 pages
Note
See the section below for details.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail)
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Open with Application)
4. Click OK.
The operation will be performed according to the settings when you press the Color Start or Black
Start button on the machine.
Page top
Scanning with the Bundled Application Software
Page 446 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software
Scanning with the Bundled Application Software
What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)?
Let's Try Scanning
Useful MP Navigator EX Functions
Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX
MP Navigator EX Screens
Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images
Page top
What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)?
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied
Scanner Software)?
What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)?
MP Navigator EX is an application that enables you to easily scan photos and documents. It is suitable
even for beginners.
Important
MP Navigator EX may not start from the Operation Panel of the machine. In that case, restart the
computer.
Use the default display font size of the OS. Otherwise, software screens may not appear correctly.
What You Can Do with This Software
This software allows you to scan multiple documents at one time, or scan images larger than the Platen.
You can also save scanned images, attach them to e-mail or print them using the supplied applications.
Screens
Main Menus
There are two types of MP Navigator EX Main Menu: Navigation Mode screen and One-click Mode screen.
Navigation Mode Screen
You can start various tasks from the Navigation Mode screen, including simple scanning, scanning
using ScanGear (scanner driver), and enhancing/correcting images.
One-click Mode Screen
You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon in
the One-click Mode screen.
Page 447 of 949 pages
What Is MP Navigator EX (Supplied Scanner Software)?
Page 448 of 949 pages
Scan/Import Window
Use the Scan/Import window to scan photos and documents, or import images saved on memory cards.
View & Use Window
Use the View & Use window to select what you want to do with the scanned images.
Page top
Let's Try Scanning
Page 449 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning
Let's Try Scanning
Try scanning using MP Navigator EX.
Starting MP Navigator EX
Starting MP Navigator EX
Scanning documents, photos, magazines, etc. from the Platen
Scanning Photos and Documents
Scanning two or more photos (small documents) at one time
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
Scanning images larger than the Platen
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Scanning easily according to purpose (scan and save, attach to e-mail, etc.)
Easy Scanning with One-click
Page top
Starting MP Navigator EX
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Starting MP
Navigator EX
Starting MP Navigator EX
Note
To scan via a network connection, start MP Navigator EX and set up the network environment before
scanning.
Network Scan Settings
Starting MP Navigator EX
1. Double-click
Canon MP Navigator EX 3.0 icon on the desktop.
MP Navigator EX starts.
Note
Alternatively, from the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > MP Navigator EX 3.0
> MP Navigator EX 3.0.
Starting One-click Mode
1. Click
(Switch Mode) at the bottom left of the screen.
Page 450 of 949 pages
Starting MP Navigator EX
Page 451 of 949 pages
The One-click Mode screen appears.
Note
Select the Show this window at startup checkbox in the Navigation Mode screen to always open
the Navigation Mode screen at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used screen
appears at startup.
Page top
Scanning Photos and Documents
Page 452 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning Photos
and Documents
Scanning Photos and Documents
Scan photos and documents placed on the Platen.
1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
2. Point to Scan/Import and click Photos/Documents (Platen).
3. Place the document on the Platen, then select Document Type.
Placing Documents
Note
When you select Magazine(Color), the Descreen function will be enabled and scanning takes
longer than usual. To disable the Descreen function, deselect the Descreen checkbox in the
Scanning Photos and Documents
Scan Settings dialog box.
Select Text(OCR) to extract the text in the image and convert to editable text data using MP
Navigator EX.
Color scanning is not available for Text(OCR). To scan in color, use OCR in One-click and scan
with Color Mode set to Color.
4. Click Specify... to set the document size and scanning resolution as required.
When setting is completed, click OK.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Important
When scanning a large document (such as an A4 size photo), align its corner with the corner at
the arrow (alignment mark) of the platen and specify the document size in the Scan Settings
dialog box.
5. Click Scan.
Scanning starts.
When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select
Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end.
The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window.
Page 453 of 949 pages
Scanning Photos and Documents
Page 454 of 949 pages
6. Edit the scanned images as required.
Use Edit Tools to rotate images, select a part of an image, etc.
See the Edit Tools in "Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) " for details.
Note
First select images to edit. (Selected images are outlined in orange.) Drag the mouse or use
Shift + arrow keys to select multiple images.
7. Save the scanned images.
Saving
Saving as PDF Files
Page top
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning
Multiple Documents at One Time
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
You can scan two or more photos (small documents) at one time by setting Document Size to Auto
Detect (Multiple Documents) in the Scan Settings dialog box of MP Navigator EX.
Important
The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, start ScanGear
(scanner driver), then adjust the cropping frames (scan areas) in whole image view and scan
again.
- Photos that have a whitish border
- Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc.
- Thin documents
- Thick documents
Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View
1. Place the document on the Platen.
Placing Documents
2. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
3. Point to Scan/Import and click Photos/Documents (Platen).
4. Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned.
Page 455 of 949 pages
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
5. Click Specify....
Select Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) for Document Size.
When setting is completed, click OK.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
6. Click Scan.
Page 456 of 949 pages
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time
Page 457 of 949 pages
Multiple documents are scanned at one time.
When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select
Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end.
The scanned images appear in the Thumbnail window.
7. Edit the scanned images as required.
Use Edit Tools to rotate images, select a part of an image, etc.
See the Edit Tools in "Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) " for details.
Note
First select images to edit. (Selected images are outlined in orange.) Drag the mouse or use
Shift + arrow keys to select multiple images.
8. Save the scanned images.
Saving
Saving as PDF Files
Note
If you want to preview the images before scanning, use ScanGear (scanner driver).
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Page top
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Page 458 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Scanning Images
Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Stitch Assist allows you to scan the left and right halves of a large document separately and combine the
scanned images back into one image. You can scan documents that are up to twice as large as the
Platen.
1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
Note
You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the
corresponding icon in the One-click Mode screen. Stitch Assist is available from the One-click
Mode screen as well, by changing the document size. Click the corresponding icon and select
Stitch Assist for Document Size. Then skip ahead to Step 5.
2. Point to Scan/Import and click Photos/Documents (Platen).
3. Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned.
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
4. Click Specify....
Select Stitch Assist for Document Size, then specify the scanning resolution as required.
When setting is completed, click OK.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
5. Click Scan.
Page 459 of 949 pages
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
The Stitch-assist window opens.
6. Place the left half of the document face-down on the Platen.
7. Click Scan.
The left half of the document is scanned and appears in the Stitch-assist window.
8. Place the right half of the document face-down on the Platen.
9. Click Scan.
The right half of the document is scanned.
10. Adjust the scanned image as required.
Use the icons to swap the left and right halves, rotate the image 180 degrees or enlarge/reduce the
image.
Page 460 of 949 pages
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
(Swap Left & Right)
Swaps the left and right halves.
Important
This function is not available while the image is enlarged/reduced.
Rotate 180°
Rotates right half of the image 180 degrees.
Important
This function is not available while the image is enlarged/reduced.
(Enlarge)
Enlarges the displayed image.
(Reduce)
Reduces the displayed image.
(Full-screen)
Enlarges/reduces the image to display it full-screen.
Note
Enlarge/Reduce does not affect the actual size of the scanned image.
When the document is scanned upside down, the image displayed in the Stitch-assist window
will also be upside down. Click Rotate 180° to rotate the image to the correct orientation.
You can drag the right half of the image from right to left or up and down to adjust the position.
If the left and right halves do not match due to a slanted document, place the document
correctly and click Back, then scan again.
11. Click Next.
12. Drag the mouse to specify the area to be saved, then click OK.
Page 461 of 949 pages
Scanning Images Larger than the Platen (Stitch Assist)
Page 462 of 949 pages
The combined image appears in the Thumbnail window.
When scanning is completed, the Scan Complete dialog box opens. Select Scan or Exit. Select
Scan to scan the next document, or select Exit to end.
13. Save the scanned images.
Saving
Saving as PDF Files
Page top
Easy Scanning with One-click
Page 463 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Let's Try Scanning > Easy Scanning
with One-click
Easy Scanning with One-click
You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
1. Place the document on the Platen.
Placing Documents
2. Start MP Navigator EX.
Starting MP Navigator EX
The MP Navigator EX Navigation Mode screen or One-click Mode screen appears.
Navigation Mode Screen
One-click Mode Screen
Note
Skip ahead to Step 4 if One-click Mode screen is open.
3. Point to One-click.
Easy Scanning with One-click
Page 464 of 949 pages
4. Click the corresponding icon.
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
One-click Mode Screen
5. Select Document Type according to the document to be scanned.
6. Set the document size and scanning resolution as required.
7. Start scanning.
Scanning starts.
Page top
Useful MP Navigator EX Functions
Page 465 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions
Useful MP Navigator EX Functions
With MP Navigator EX, you can correct/enhance scanned images beautifully, and search saved images
quickly.
Correcting/enhancing images automatically
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Correcting/enhancing images manually
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
Adjusting color characteristics such as brightness and contrast
Adjusting Images
Searching for lost images
Searching Images
Classifying and sorting images
Classifying Images into Categories
Page top
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions >
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
MP Navigator EX will analyze and correct/enhance scanned images automatically.
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to correct/
enhance.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a memory card or computer.
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2. Click Edit/Convert, then click Fix photo images on the list.
The Correct/Enhance Images window opens.
Note
The Correct/Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking
(Image Correction/
Enhancement) on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box. In that case, only the target image
(outlined in orange) can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
3. Select the image you want to correct/enhance from the thumbnail list.
The selected image appears in Preview.
Page 466 of 949 pages
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Note
If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear
and only the preview image appears.
4. Make sure that Auto is selected.
5. Click Auto Photo Fix, Face Sharpener or Digital Face Smoothing.
Important
Once image is corrected with Auto Photo Fix and saved, it cannot be corrected again with Auto
Photo Fix. Auto Photo Fix may not be available for images edited using an application, digital
camera, etc. manufactured by other companies.
Note
The Face Sharpener and Digital Face Smoothing effect levels can be changed using the slider
that appears by clicking the corresponding buttons.
When you apply Auto Photo Fix, dark backlit photos will be corrected automatically. If the image
is not corrected enough using Auto Photo Fix, it is recommended that you apply Face
Brightener on the Manual tab.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
Page 467 of 949 pages
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Page 468 of 949 pages
6. Click OK.
The entire image is corrected/enhanced automatically and
upper left of the thumbnail and preview image.
(Correct/Enhance) appears on the
Note
Click Reset Selected Image to undo the correction/enhancement.
Select the Apply to all images checkbox to correct/enhance all selected images.
7. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected/enhanced images as new files.
Note
To save only the images you like, select them and click Save Selected Image. To save all
images, click Save All Corrected Images.
The file format of corrected/enhanced images is JPEG/Exif.
Adobe RGB images are saved as sRGB images.
8. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections/enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving corrected/enhanced
images.
Page top
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions >
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
You can correct/enhance scanned images manually.
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to correct/
enhance.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a memory card or computer.
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2. Click Edit/Convert, then click Fix photo images on the list.
The Correct/Enhance Images window opens.
Note
The Correct/Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking
(Image Correction/
Enhancement) on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box. In that case, only the target image
(outlined in orange) can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
3. Select the image you want to correct/enhance from the thumbnail list.
The selected image appears in Preview.
Page 469 of 949 pages
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
Note
If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear
and only the preview image appears.
4. Click Manual, then click Correct/Enhance.
5. Click Face Brightener, Face Sharpener, Digital Face Smoothing or Blemish
Remover.
Note
The Face Brightener, Face Sharpener and Digital Face Smoothing effect levels can be
changed using the slider that appears by clicking the corresponding buttons.
Move the cursor over the image. The shape of the cursor changes to
(Cross).
6. Drag to select the area you want to correct/enhance, then click OK that appears
over the image.
Page 470 of 949 pages
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
The portion in and around the selected area is corrected/enhanced and
appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and preview image.
Page 471 of 949 pages
(Correct/Enhance)
Note
You can also drag to rotate the rectangle.
Click Undo to undo the latest correction/enhancement.
Click Reset Selected Image to cancel all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied
to the selected image.
7. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save corrected/enhanced images as new files.
Note
To save only the images you like, select them and click Save Selected Image. To save all
images, click Save All Corrected Images.
The file format of corrected/enhanced images is JPEG/Exif.
8. Click Exit.
Important
The corrections/enhancements will be lost if you exit before saving corrected/enhanced
images.
Page top
Adjusting Images
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions >
Adjusting Images
Adjusting Images
You can make fine adjustments to the overall brightness, contrast, etc. of images.
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen and select the photos you want to adjust.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a memory card or computer.
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2. Click Edit/Convert, then click Fix photo images on the list.
The Correct/Enhance Images window opens.
Note
The Correct/Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking
(Image Correction/
Enhancement) on the Toolbar or in the Zoom in dialog box. In that case, only the target image
(outlined in orange) can be corrected/enhanced.
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
3. Select the image you want to adjust from the thumbnail list.
The selected image appears in Preview.
Page 472 of 949 pages
Adjusting Images
Page 473 of 949 pages
Note
If you selected only one image in the View & Use window, the thumbnail list does not appear
and only the preview image appears.
4. Click Manual, then click Adjust.
5. Move the slider of the item you want to adjust and set the effect level.
When you move a slider,
preview image.
(Correct/Enhance) appears on the upper left of the thumbnail and
Note
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments.
Click Reset Selected Image to cancel all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied
to the selected image.
6. Click Save Selected Image or Save All Corrected Images.
You can save adjusted images as new files.
Note
To save only the images you like, select them and click Save Selected Image. To save all
images, click Save All Corrected Images.
Adjusting Images
Page 474 of 949 pages
The file format of adjusted images is JPEG/Exif.
7. Click Exit.
Important
The adjustments will be lost if you exit before saving adjusted images.
Page top
Searching Images
Page 475 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions >
Searching Images
Searching Images
In the View & Use window of the Navigation Mode screen, you can search images saved on your
computer and open them in MP Navigator EX. Opened images can be printed, edited, etc.
Note
Search images in My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), Recently Saved Images or a selected folder
and its subfolders. You can also specify folder and search in Specify Folder.
See "Starting MP Navigator EX" to start MP Navigator EX.
Quick Search
In
(Text box) on the Toolbar, enter a word or phrase included in the file
name, Exif information or PDF text of the image you want to search for, then click
(Search button).
For Exif information, text in Maker, Model, Description and User Comment is searched.
Advanced Search
Click Search on the left of the screen to open search options. Enter information of the image you want to
search for, then click Start Search.
Searching Images
Search in
If you know where to look for, select the drive, folder or network from Specify Folder.
File Name
If you know the file name, enter it.
A word or phrase in the file
Enter a word or phrase included in the items selected in More Advanced Options.
Important
For PDF files, you can only search for those created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot search
PDF files created or edited in other applications. Also, searching PDF files is available only
when keyword search is set.
For details of creating PDF files that enables keyword search, see " PDF Settings Dialog Box ."
Password-protected PDF files cannot be searched.
Category
You can search for images by category.
Modified Date
To search for images that have been updated in a specific time period, enter the first and last dates
of the period.
Shooting Date
To search for images captured in a specific time period, enter the first and last dates of the period.
Note
Captured date is the date and time of data creation, which are included in the document's Exif
information.
More Advanced Options
A word or phrase in the file
In A word or phrase in the file, select the items to search. If you select the Exif information
Page 476 of 949 pages
Searching Images
Page 477 of 949 pages
checkbox, text in Maker, Model, Description and User Comment is searched. If you select the
PDF text checkbox, text in PDF files is searched.
Important
Text in password-protected PDF files cannot be searched.
Search subfolders
Select this checkbox to search subfolders.
Case sensitive
Select this checkbox to match case.
Match all criteria
Searches for files that meet all the specified criteria.
Match any criteria
Searches for files that meet any of the specified criteria.
Start Search
Starts search.
Related Topic
View & Use Window
Page top
Classifying Images into Categories
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Useful MP Navigator EX Functions >
Classifying Images into Categories
Classifying Images into Categories
Display images scanned with MP Navigator EX by category. You can classify unclassified images
automatically, and also create custom categories. You can drag and drop an image to move it from one
category to another.
Note
If you have classified the images in MP Navigator EX 2.0 or later and then upgrade MP Navigator EX
to the latest version, the classification information on the second latest version is transferred upon
initial startup. After the initial startup, the classification information cannot be transferred.
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a memory card or computer.
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2.
In
(Sort by), select Categories.
Images are automatically sorted by category and appear in the Thumbnail window.
Page 478 of 949 pages
Classifying Images into Categories
Images are sorted into the following categories.
Photos: Portrait, Others
Documents: Business Card, Postcard, Standard Size, PDF File, Others
Custom categories: Displays your custom categories.
To create custom categories, see " Creating Custom Categories ."
Unclassified: Displays images that have not yet been classified.
Note
Click Classify Images to classify images displayed in Unclassified automatically. Click Cancel
to stop.
Classification may take time if there are many images to classify.
Important
Even if you classify images saved in removable media such as USB flash drive and external hard
disk, the classification information will be deleted once you remove the media. From the next time,
the images are classified to Unclassified.
Images cannot be classified when Recently Saved Images is selected in the View & Use window.
Note
Some images may not be detected correctly and thus may be classified into wrong categories. In
that case, drag and drop the image to the correct category.
Images saved in network folders may not be classified.
You can search for images by category. See " Searching Images " for details.
Creating Custom Categories
1. In the View & Use window, sort images by category and click Edit Custom
Page 479 of 949 pages
Classifying Images into Categories
Page 480 of 949 pages
Categories.
The Edit Custom Categories dialog box opens.
2. Click Add to List.
The Add Category dialog box opens.
3. Enter Category name and click OK.
Note
You can create up to 20 custom categories.
Up to 50 single-byte characters can be used for a category name.
Double-click a created category to open the Change Category Name dialog box in which you
can change the category name.
Select a custom category and click Delete to delete it.
Related Topic
View & Use Window
Page top
Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX
Page 481 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX
Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX
You can scan images using MP Navigator EX and edit or print the saved images.
See the corresponding sections below for details on saving scanned images.
Saving scanned images to computer
Saving
Saving scanned image as PDF Files
Saving as PDF Files
See the corresponding sections below for details on using images/files.
Creating/editing PDF files from scanned images
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing multiple scanned images at one time or printing at specific size, quality, etc.
Printing Documents
Printing scanned photos
Printing Photos
Sending scanned images via e-mail
Sending via E-mail
Correcting/enhancing scanned images or converting them to text
Editing Files
Setting passwords for created PDF files
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
Page top
Saving
Page 482 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Saving
Saving
Save images scanned with MP Navigator EX to a computer.
1. Select the checkboxes of the images you want to save, then click Save.
2. In the Save dialog box, specify the save settings.
Specify the destination folder, file name and file type.
Save Dialog Box
Important
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is Text(OCR).
Note
By default, the following folders are specified as the destination folders.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Saving
Page 483 of 949 pages
3. Click Save.
Scanned images are saved according to the settings.
To further use/edit the scanned images on MP Navigator EX, click Open saved location in the Save
Complete dialog box.
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing Documents
Printing Photos
Sending via E-mail
Editing Files
Page top
Saving as PDF Files
Page 484 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Saving as PDF Files
Saving as PDF Files
Save images scanned with MP Navigator EX as PDF files.
1. Select the checkboxes of the images you want to save, then click Save as PDF file.
2. In the Save as PDF file dialog box, specify the save settings.
Specify the file type, file name and destination folder.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Select from the following PDF file types:
PDF
Saving as PDF Files
Page 485 of 949 pages
Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file.
PDF(Multiple Pages)
Save multiple images in one PDF file.
Note
PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are selected.
PDF(Add Page)
Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You
cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify
PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be
specified as well.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords.
Note
By default, the following folders are specified as the destination folders.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
You can set passwords for PDF files.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
3. Click Save.
Scanned images are saved according to the settings.
To further use/edit the scanned images on MP Navigator EX, click Open saved location in the Save
Complete dialog box.
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing Documents
Printing Photos
Sending via E-mail
Editing Files
Page top
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Page 486 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Create/edit PDF files using MP Navigator EX. After scanning documents and saving them, open the View
& Use window to create PDF files and add/delete pages, rearrange the page order, etc.
Important
You can create or edit up to 99 pages using MP Navigator EX.
Note
See "Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a memory card or computer.
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Creating/Editing PDF Files with MP Navigator EX
1. Select images and click PDF.
Note
You can select PDF, JPEG, TIFF and BMP files.
2. Click Create/Edit PDF file on the list.
Important
For PDF files, you can only edit those created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot edit PDF files
created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be edited as well.
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Page 487 of 949 pages
Note
If a password-protected PDF file is selected, you will be prompted to enter the password.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
3. Add/delete pages as required.
To add an existing file, click Add Page and select the file. To delete a page, select it and click Delete
Selected Pages.
Note
You can add PDF, JPEG, TIFF and BMP files.
When adding a password-protected PDF file, you will be prompted to enter the password.
4. Rearrange the page order as required.
Use the icons to rearrange the order. Alternatively, drag and drop the thumbnail to the target location.
Note
See "Create/Edit PDF file Window " for details on the Create/Edit PDF file window.
5. Click Save Selected Pages or Save All Pages.
The Save as PDF file dialog box opens.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Important
You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal
directions.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords in the Save as PDF file dialog box.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
6. Specify the save settings in the Save as PDF file dialog box, then click Save.
Images are saved according to the settings.
Opening PDF Files in an Application
You can open PDF files created with MP Navigator EX in an associated application and edit or print them.
1. Select PDF files and click PDF.
Important
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Page 488 of 949 pages
For PDF files, you can only select those created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot select PDF
files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be selected
as well.
2. Click Open PDF file on the list.
The application associated with the .pdf file extension by the operating system starts.
Important
Password-protected PDF files cannot be opened in applications not supporting PDF security.
Files may not open if an application that can be associated with PDF files is not installed.
3. Use the application to edit/print the file.
For details, refer to the application's manual.
Important
In some applications, the commands (print, edit, etc.) restricted by Permissions Password
may differ from those in MP Navigator EX.
Page top
Printing Documents
Page 489 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Printing Documents
Printing Documents
You can print multiple scanned images at one time, print at specific quality, etc. using MP Navigator EX.
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen and select images.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a memory card or computer.
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2. Click Print, then click Print Document on the list.
Important
If a password-protected PDF file is selected, you will be prompted to enter the password.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
3. Specify print settings as required.
In the displayed dialog box, specify print count, quality, scale, etc.
Print Document Dialog Box
Printing Documents
Page 490 of 949 pages
Important
At normal-size (100%), some images may be printed small or with some portions cropped. In
that case, select Auto to resize the print in proportion to the paper size.
4. Click Print.
Printing starts.
Note
When printing a multiple-page PDF file via Print Document, printing may take time depending
on your computer. In that case, follow these steps and change settings.
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel.
2. Click Printers.
3. Right-click the icon of your printer and click Properties.
The printer properties dialog box opens.
4. Click the Advanced tab.
5. Select Spool print documents so program finishes printing faster.
6. Select Start printing after last page is spooled.
7. After printing, return the setting on the Advanced tab to Start printing immediately.
To cancel while spooling, click Cancel. To cancel while printing, click Cancel Printing in the
confirmation window for the printer status. To open a confirmation window for the printer status,
click printer icon on the taskbar.
Page top
Printing Photos
Page 491 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Printing Photos
Printing Photos
You can print photos using MP Navigator EX or an application that accompanies the machine. After
scanning documents and saving them, open the View & Use window to select how you want to print the
photos.
Note
See "Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a memory card or computer.
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
When Printing Photos Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
You can use Easy-PhotoPrint EX to print scanned photos at high quality or to layout and print images.
1. Select images and click Print.
2. Click Print Photo or Print Album on the list.
Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts. See " Printing Photos " for details.
Note
If Easy-PhotoPrint EX is not installed, print with MP Navigator EX.
When Printing Photos Using MP Navigator EX
1. Select images and click Print.
Printing Photos
Page 492 of 949 pages
2. Click Print Photo on the list.
3. Specify print settings as required.
In the displayed dialog box, specify paper size, print count, etc.
Print Photo Dialog Box
4. Click Print.
Printing starts.
Note
To cancel while spooling, click Cancel. To cancel while printing, click Cancel Printing in the
confirmation window for the printer status. To open a confirmation window for the printer status,
click printer icon on the taskbar.
Page top
Sending via E-mail
Page 493 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Sending via E-mail
Sending via E-mail
Send scanned images via e-mail.
Important
MP Navigator EX is compatible with the following e-mail software programs:
- Windows Mail (Windows Vista)
- Outlook Express (Windows XP/Windows 2000)
- Microsoft Outlook
(If an e-mail software program does not operate properly, check that the program's MAPI is enabled.
To enable MAPI, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program.)
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX and save them, then open the View & Use
window from the Navigation Mode screen and select images.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a memory card or computer.
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
2. Click Send, then click Attach to E-mail on the list.
3. Set save options as required.
Specify the destination folder and file name.
Send via E-mail Dialog Box
Sending via E-mail
Page 494 of 949 pages
Note
You can select a compression type when sending JPEG images via e-mail. Click Set... to open
a dialog box and select a compression type from High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
4. Click OK.
Files are saved according to the settings, and the e-mail software program starts.
5. Specify the recipient, enter the subject and message, then send e-mail.
For details, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program.
Page top
Editing Files
Page 495 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Editing Files
Editing Files
You can edit images or convert them to text using MP Navigator EX or an application that accompanies
the machine. After scanning documents and saving them, open the View & Use window to select what
you want to do with the images.
Note
See "Let's Try Scanning" to scan images into MP Navigator EX.
You can also select images saved on a memory card or computer.
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Correcting Photo Images
You can correct/enhance images in the Correct/Enhance Images window.
1. Select images and click Edit/Convert.
2. Click Fix photo images on the list.
The Correct/Enhance Images window opens.
3. Correct/enhance images in the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Note
See " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details on the Correct/Enhance Images window.
See the corresponding sections below for correcting/enhancing images.
Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically
Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually
Editing Files
Page 496 of 949 pages
Converting Documents to Text
Scan text in scanned magazines and newspapers and display it in Notepad (included with Windows).
Important
PDF files cannot be converted to text.
1. Select images and click Edit/Convert.
2. Click Convert to text file on the list.
Notepad (included with Windows) starts and editable text appears.
Note
Only text written in languages that can be selected on the General tab can be extracted to
Notepad (included with Windows). Click Set... on the General tab and specify the language
according to the language of the document to be scanned.
When scanning multiple documents, you can collect the extracted text into one file.
General Tab
Text displayed in Notepad (included with Windows) is for guidance only. Text in the image of
the following types of documents may not be detected correctly.
- Documents containing text with font size outside the range of 8 points to 40 points (at 300 dpi)
- Slanted documents
- Documents placed upside down or documents with text in the wrong orientation (rotated
characters)
- Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
- Documents with narrow line spacing
- Documents with colors in the background of text
- Documents containing multiple languages
Page top
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Page 497 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Set passwords for opening, editing and printing PDF files.
You can set two passwords: one for opening the file and one for editing/printing it.
Important
In Windows 2000, Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 2 or later is required to use this function.
You will not be able to open/edit the file if you forget the password. Record your passwords in a safe
place for future reference.
Password-protected PDF files cannot be opened in applications not supporting PDF security.
In some applications, the commands (print, edit, etc.) restricted by Permissions Password may
differ from those in MP Navigator EX.
Password-protected PDF files cannot be searched by text from the View & Use Window .
1. Scan documents into MP Navigator EX, then click Save as PDF file.
Alternatively, edit existing files in the Create/Edit PDF file window, then click Save
Selected Pages or Save All Pages.
The Save as PDF file dialog box opens.
Important
Passwords cannot be set when images are automatically saved after scanning, such as when
scanning from the One-click Mode screen or scanning using the Operation Panel of the
machine.
Note
See " Let's Try Scanning" to scan images.
See " Creating/Editing PDF Files " to create PDF files from existing images or to edit files.
2. Select the Password security settings checkbox.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
The Password Security -Settings dialog box opens.
Note
You can also open the Password Security -Settings dialog box by clicking Set..., then selecting
Password Security for Security in the PDF Settings dialog box.
3. Select the Require a password to open the document or Use a password to restrict
printing and editing of the document and its security settings checkbox, then enter a
password.
Important
Up to 32 single-byte alphanumeric characters can be used for the password. Passwords are
case sensitive.
Select both checkboxes to set both Document Open Password and Permissions Password.
You cannot use the same password for both.
4. Click OK.
The Confirm Document Open Password or Confirm Permissions Password dialog box opens.
Page 498 of 949 pages
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Page 499 of 949 pages
Document Open Password
Permissions Password
5. Re-enter the password and click OK.
The Save as PDF file dialog box returns.
Important
If you close the Save as PDF file dialog box without clicking Save, the settings in the Password
Security -Settings dialog box will be deleted.
Passwords are deleted once the file is edited. Reset the passwords when saving edited files.
Note
If you set the passwords via the PDF Settings dialog box, the PDF Settings dialog box returns.
Click OK. The Save as PDF file dialog box returns.
6. Click Save.
Files are saved according to the settings.
Related Topic
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
Page top
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
Page 500 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Utilizing Images in MP Navigator EX >
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
Enter a password to open or edit/print password-protected PDF files.
Password entry method varies by operation. The following procedures are examples only.
Important
You can open, edit or print only PDF files whose passwords were set with MP Navigator EX. You
cannot edit PDF files edited in other applications or whose passwords were set with other
applications. Only MP Navigator EX version 1.1 and 2.0 or later supports opening, editing and
printing password-protected PDF files.
In Windows 2000, Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 2 or later is required to open, edit or print
password-protected PDF files.
Passwords are case sensitive.
You can create or edit up to 99 pages using MP Navigator EX.
Entering a Password to Open a File
1. In the View & Use window, select the PDF file you want to open and click
Zoom
in.
Alternatively, double-click the PDF file.
Note
Only the Document Open Password will be required. The Permissions Password will not be
required.
If the Zoom in dialog box with a lock icon opens, click Enter Password.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
2. The Password dialog box opens. Enter the password and click OK.
The PDF file opens in the Zoom in dialog box.
Note
To reopen the file after closing the Zoom in dialog box, re-enter the password.
Entering a Password (Permissions Password) to Edit or Print a File
1. In the View & Use window, select PDF files and click PDF or Print.
Page 501 of 949 pages
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
Page 502 of 949 pages
2. To create a PDF file or edit the file, select Create/Edit PDF file on the list. To print
the file, click Print Document.
In the Password dialog box, you will be prompted to enter a password.
Note
If the Document Open Password is set as well, the Document Open Password will be
required, then the Permissions Password will be required.
3. Enter the password and click OK.
The corresponding dialog box opens.
Important
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Related Topic
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Page top
MP Navigator EX Screens
Page 503 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens
MP Navigator EX Screens
Learn about the screens and functions of MP Navigator EX.
Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Save Dialog Box
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window)
View & Use Images on your Computer Tab
View & Use Window
Create/Edit PDF file Window
Print Document Dialog Box
Print Photo Dialog Box
Send via E-mail Dialog Box
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Custom Scan with One-click Tab / One-click Mode Screen
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
PDF Dialog Box
Mail Dialog Box
OCR Dialog Box
Custom Dialog Box
Preferences Dialog Box
General Tab
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail)
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Open with Application)
Page top
Navigation Mode Screen
Page 504 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens >
Navigation Mode Screen
Navigation Mode Screen
This is one of the startup screens of MP Navigator EX.
Point to the icon at the top of the screen to display each tab. Use each tab depending on what you want to
do.
Scan/Import
You can scan photos and documents, or import images saved on memory cards.
Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab
View & Use
You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e-mail. You can also edit
them using an application that accompanies the machine.
View & Use Images on your Computer Tab
One-click
You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
(Switch Mode)
Switches to One-click Mode screen. In the One-click Mode screen, you can complete from scanning to
saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
One-click Mode Screen
Show this window at startup
Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used
screen appears.
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to
MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Page top
Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab
Page 505 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan/
Import Documents or Images Tab
Scan/Import Documents or Images Tab
Point to Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen to display the Scan/Import Documents or Images
tab.
You can scan photos and documents, or import images saved on memory cards.
Photos/Documents (Platen)
Opens the Scan/Import window. Scan photos and documents placed on the Platen.
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Memory Card
Opens the Scan/Import window with Memory Card selected. Import images saved on memory cards.
Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window)
(Switch Mode)
Switches to One-click Mode screen. In the One-click Mode screen, you can complete from scanning to
saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
One-click Mode Screen
Show this window at startup
Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used
screen appears.
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to
MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Page top
View Use Images on your Computer Tab
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > View &
Use Images on your Computer Tab
View & Use Images on your Computer Tab
Point to View & Use in the Navigation Mode screen to display the View & Use Images on your Computer
tab.
You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e-mail. You can also edit
them using an application that accompanies the machine.
My Box (Scanned/Imported Images)
Opens the View & Use window with My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) selected.
You can open and use images saved in My Box.
My Box is a specific folder for saving images scanned with MP Navigator EX.
Note
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Specify Folder
Opens the View & Use window with Specify Folder selected.
You can open and use images saved in specific folders.
Recently Saved Images
Opens the View & Use window with Recently Saved Images selected.
You can open and use "Scanned/Imported Images" and images that have been "Attached to E-mail" or
"Sent to Application" recently.
View & Use Window
(Switch Mode)
Switches to One-click Mode screen. In the One-click Mode screen, you can complete from scanning to
saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
One-click Mode Screen
Show this window at startup
Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used
screen appears.
Preferences
Page 506 of 949 pages
View Use Images on your Computer Tab
Page 507 of 949 pages
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to
MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Related Topic
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Page top
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Custom
Scan with One-click Tab
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
Point to One-click in the Navigation Mode screen to display the Custom Scan with One-click tab.
You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
Auto Scan
Scan documents by automatically detecting the document type. File format is automatically set. Files
are saved to a computer. You can apply Auto Photo Fix as required.
When you click this icon, the Auto Scan dialog box opens and you can specify the save settings.
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Save to PC
Scan documents or photos and save them to a computer. The document type can be detected
automatically.
When you click this icon, the Save dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save settings.
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Save as PDF file
Scan documents and save them as PDF files.
When you click this icon, the PDF dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and application
settings.
PDF Dialog Box
Attach to E-mail
Scan documents or photos and attach them to e-mail.
When you click this icon, the Mail dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and e-mail
software program settings.
Mail Dialog Box
OCR
Scan text documents then extract text in the image and display it in Notepad (included with Windows).
When you click this icon, the OCR dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save settings.
OCR Dialog Box
Note
For further procedures, refer to the application's manual.
Custom
Scan documents and open them in a specified application. Document type is automatically detected.
Page 508 of 949 pages
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
Page 509 of 949 pages
When you click this icon, the Custom dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and
application settings.
Custom Dialog Box
Note
For further procedures, refer to the application's manual.
Start scanning by clicking the button
Select this checkbox and click an icon to start scanning immediately.
(Switch Mode)
Switches to One-click Mode. The One-click Mode screen appears.
One-click Mode Screen
Show this window at startup
Select this checkbox to open the Main Menu at startup. If this checkbox is not selected, the last used
screen appears.
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to
MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Important
The following restrictions apply when you scan with Document Type set to Auto Mode in the Save or
Custom dialog box.
When you want to convert text in the scanned image to text data, specify Document Type (do not
select Auto Mode).
Related Topic
Easy Scanning with One-click
Page top
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Photos/
Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Point to Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen and click Photos/Documents (Platen) to open the
Photos/Documents (Platen) screen (Scan/Import window).
Open this window to scan documents from the Platen.
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
(2) Toolbar
(3) Thumbnail Window
(4) Selected Images Area
Settings and Operation Buttons
(View & Use)
Click this when you want to open images and PDF files saved on your computer. The View & Use
window opens.
View & Use Window
Photos/Documents (Platen)
Displays the screen for scanning photos, documents, magazines and other printed materials.
Memory Card
Click this when you want to import images saved on a memory card. The screen for importing
images from a memory card appears.
Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Scanning photos: Color Photo or Black and White Photo
Scanning text documents: Color Document, Black and White Document or Text(OCR)
Scanning magazines: Magazine(Color)
Important
Page 510 of 949 pages
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Page 511 of 949 pages
You cannot select Document Type if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected.
Specify...
Specify the document size, resolution, and other advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Important
Specify... is not available if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected.
Use the scanner driver
Select this checkbox when you want to scan with ScanGear (scanner driver). Use ScanGear
(scanner driver) to correct images and adjust colors when scanning.
Scan
Scanning starts.
Note
This button changes to Open Scanner Driver when you select the Use the scanner driver
checkbox.
Open Scanner Driver
ScanGear (scanner driver) starts.
See "ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens " for details on ScanGear (scanner driver) screens.
Note
This button changes to Scan when you deselect the Use the scanner driver checkbox.
Clear
Delete all images in the Thumbnail window.
Note
Images not saved on a computer will be deleted. To keep important images, use Save or other
methods to save them to a computer before clicking Clear.
Save
Save the selected images. Click to open the Save dialog box and specify the save settings.
Save Dialog Box
Save as PDF file
Save the selected images as PDF files. Click to open the Save as PDF file dialog box and specify the
save settings.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Jump to Main Menu
Jumps to the Main Menu.
Toolbar
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings
to MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Edit Tools
(Select All)
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Selects all images in the Thumbnail window.
(Cancel All)
Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window.
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the target image (outlined in orange) 90 degrees clockwise.
(Invert)
Inverts the target image (outlined in orange) horizontally.
(Trimming)
Trims the target image (outlined in orange) in the Thumbnail window. Trimming is the act of
selecting the area you want to keep in a photo and discarding the rest. Click this button to open
the Crop window and specify the trimming frame.
Zoom in
Enlarges the target image (outlined in orange). You can also enlarge the image by doubleclicking it.
(Display Size)
Changes the size of images in the Thumbnail window.
(Sort by)
Sorts the images in the Thumbnail window by category or by date (ascending or descending).
Thumbnail Window
Thumbnail Window
Scanned images are displayed.
When you select the checkbox of an image, the image appears in the Selected Images area.
Note
Thumbnails may appear as "?" when there is not enough memory to display the images.
When Images are Sorted by Categories
Close All / Open All
Close All
Hides all images.
Open All
Displays all images.
Note
Click Close All to change to Open All.
Selected Images Area
(Cancel All)
Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area.
Page 512 of 949 pages
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Page 513 of 949 pages
(Cancel Selection)
Cancels the selection of the target image (outlined in orange) in the Selected Images area.
Selected Images Area
Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed.
Related Topic
Scanning Photos and Documents
Page top
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan
Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... in the Scan/Import window.
In the Scan Settings dialog box, you can make advanced scan settings.
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Scanning photos: Color Photo or Black and White Photo
Scanning text documents: Color Document, Black and White Document or Text(OCR)
Scanning magazines: Magazine(Color)
Important
To scan correctly, select a document type that matches the document to be scanned.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
You cannot select Auto Detect (Multiple Documents) or Auto Detect when Document Type is
Text(OCR).
Scanning Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Note
Page 514 of 949 pages
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Page 515 of 949 pages
The following scanning resolutions can be specified when Document Type is Text(OCR).
300 dpi / 400 dpi
Descreen
Select this checkbox to reduce moire patterns.
Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are
scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo, Black and White Photo or
Text(OCR).
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Descreen.
Reduce Show-through
Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo, Black and White Photo or
Text(OCR).
Note
Select this checkbox when Document Type is text document and show-through is apparent in the
scanned image.
Unsharp Mask
Select this checkbox to emphasize the outline of the subjects and sharpen the image.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Text(OCR).
Remove gutter shadow
Select this checkbox to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Auto Detect, Auto Detect (Multiple
Documents) or Stitch Assist.
Align the document correctly with the alignment mark on the Platen.
Note
Use ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when scanning non-standard size
documents or when custom cropping frames are set.
For details, see Gutter Shadow Correction in " Image Settings " (ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab).
Correct slanted document
Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1
to +10 degrees) of the document.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo.
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly.
- Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text
- Documents with extremely large or small fonts
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Page 516 of 949 pages
- Documents with small amount of text
- Documents containing figures/images or hand-written text
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted document.
Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images
Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the
scanned image to the correct orientation. Select the language of the document to be scanned in
Document Language.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo.
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
This function may not work properly depending on the document language. Only text documents
written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported.
The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly. In that case, select the scanned image in the Thumbnail window of the "
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window) " and rotate it with Edit Tools.
- Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi
- Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
- Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
- Documents with patterned backgrounds
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Detect the orientation of text documents and
rotate images.
Document Language
Select the language of the document to be scanned.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Type is Color Photo or Black and White Photo.
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
Defaults
Restores the default settings.
Page top
Save Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save
Dialog Box
Save Dialog Box
The Save dialog box opens when you click Save in the Scan/Import window.
In the Save dialog box, you can make settings for saving images to a computer.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Important
When saving to a memory card, enable writing on the Card Slot of the machine. For details on
how to enable writing, refer to " Setting Up the Card Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the
Computer ." With network connection, map the Card Slot as a network drive. See " Using the Card
Slot over a Network " for details.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits
are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP.
Important
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is Text(OCR).
Set...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Important
This setting is not available when the Compress scanned images when transferring checkbox is
selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Page 517 of 949 pages
Save Dialog Box
Page 518 of 949 pages
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Page top
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Page 519 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save as
PDF file Dialog Box
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
In the Save as PDF file dialog box, you can make advanced settings for saving scanned images as PDF
files. You can save multiple documents as one PDF file or add pages to a PDF file created with MP
Navigator EX.
Important
You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions.
Dialog box that opens when Save as PDF file in the Scan/Import window is clicked
Dialog box that opens when Save Selected Pages or Save All Pages is clicked in the
Create/Edit PDF file window
Save as type
Select a PDF file type to save the scanned images.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Page 520 of 949 pages
PDF
Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file.
PDF(Multiple Pages)
Save multiple images in one PDF file.
Note
PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are selected.
PDF(Add Page)
Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You
cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify
PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be
specified as well.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Set...
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Password security settings
Select this checkbox to open the Password Security -Settings dialog box in which you can set
passwords for opening, editing and printing created PDF files.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Add to
This is displayed when you select PDF(Add Page) for Save as type and specify the PDF file to which
images are added. To change the file, click Browse... to specify another one.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify PDF
files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified
as well.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the PDF files. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify
another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Page top
PDF Settings Dialog Box
Page 521 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > PDF
Settings Dialog Box
PDF Settings Dialog Box
In the PDF Settings dialog box, you can specify the PDF compression type and other advanced settings
for creating PDF files.
Enable keyword search
Select this checkbox to convert characters in a document to text data. This will enable an easy search
by keyword.
Document Language
Select the language of the document to be scanned.
Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images
Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the
scanned image to the correct orientation.
Important
This function may not work properly depending on the document language. Only text documents
written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported.
The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly.
- Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi
- Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
- Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
- Documents with patterned backgrounds
Correct slanted document
Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1
to +10 degrees) of the document.
Important
The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly.
- Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text
- Documents with extremely large or small fonts
- Documents with small amount of text
- Documents containing figures/images or hand-written text
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)
PDF Compression
Select a compression type for saving.
PDF Settings Dialog Box
Page 522 of 949 pages
Standard
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Compresses the file size when saving, allowing you to reduce the load on your network/server.
Important
Highly compressed PDF images may degrade if you repeatedly save them with high
compression.
Note
The following images can be compressed with high efficiency.
- Images with resolutions within the range of 75 dpi to 600 dpi.
Security
Set passwords for opening, editing and printing the created PDF files.
Important
In Windows 2000, Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 2 or later is required to use this function.
This function is not available when images are automatically saved after scanning, such as when
scanning from the One-click Mode screen or scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine.
Note
Select Password Security and set passwords in the Password Security -Settings dialog box.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Page top
Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Page 523 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Memory
Card Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Point to Scan/Import in the Navigation Mode screen and click Memory Card, or click Memory Card in the
Scan/Import window to open the Memory Card screen (Scan/Import window).
Open this window to import images (including PDF files created via scanning using the Operation Panel)
saved on a memory card.
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
(2) Toolbar
(3) Thumbnail Window
(4) Selected Images Area
Settings and Operation Buttons
(View & Use)
Click this when you want to open images and PDF files saved on your computer. The View & Use
window opens.
View & Use Window
Photos/Documents (Platen)
Click this when you want to scan photos, documents, magazines and other printed materials. The
screen for scanning photos and documents appears.
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Memory Card
Displays folders of images and PDF files (grouped by year, month/year and month/date/year) on a
memory card in tree view. Select a folder to display its contents in the Thumbnail window to the right.
File date is the captured or updated date.
Import
Imports the selected images and open them in the View & Use window.
View & Use Window
Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Jump to Main Menu
Jumps to the Main Menu.
Toolbar
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings
to MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Edit Tools
(Select All)
Selects all images in the Thumbnail window.
(Cancel All)
Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window.
Zoom in
Enlarges the target image (outlined in orange). You can also enlarge the image by doubleclicking it. You can check all pages when you select a PDF file.
(Refresh)
Refreshes the Thumbnail window contents.
(Display Size)
Changes the size of images in the Thumbnail window.
(Sort by)
Sorts the images in the Thumbnail window by date (ascending or descending).
Thumbnail Window
Thumbnail Window
Images saved on the memory card are displayed by year or month/year.
When you select the checkbox of an image, the image appears in the Selected Images area.
Selected Images Area
(Cancel All)
Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area.
(Cancel Selection)
Cancels the selection of the target image (outlined in orange) in the Selected Images area.
Selected Images Area
Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed.
Related Topic
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Page 524 of 949 pages
Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window)
Page 525 of 949 pages
Page top
View Use Window
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > View &
Use Window
View & Use Window
Point to View & Use in the Navigation Mode screen and click My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), Specify
Folder or Recently Saved Images to open the View & Use window.
Open this window to display or use scanned images or images saved on a computer.
Important
For PDF files, only those created with MP Navigator EX are displayed. You cannot display PDF files
created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be displayed as well.
(1) Display Setting Items
(2) Image Handling Buttons
(3) Toolbar
(4) Thumbnail Window
(5) Selected Images Area
Display Setting Items
(Scan/Import)
Click this when you want to scan photos, documents, magazines and other printed materials. The
Page 526 of 949 pages
View Use Window
Page 527 of 949 pages
Scan/Import window opens.
Photos/Documents (Platen) Screen (Scan/Import Window)
My Box (Scanned/Imported Images)
Displays folders of images (grouped by year, year/month and year/month/date) in My Box in tree
view. Select a folder to display its contents in the Thumbnail window to the right.
Image date is the scanned, captured or updated date.
Specify Folder
Displays all hard disks and folders in tree view. Select a folder to display images in the Thumbnail
window to the right.
Selecting a folder and clicking it highlights the folder name, allowing you to rename it.
Recently Saved Images
"Scanned/Imported Images" and images that have been "Attached to E-mail" or "Sent to Application"
recently are displayed in tree view by date. For "Scanned/Imported Images", "From Scanner" and
"From Memory Card" are displayed separately. Select a Month/Date/Year folder to display images by
date in the Thumbnail window to the right.
Image date is the scanned or sent date.
Search
The advanced search options opens.
Searching Images
Jump to Main Menu
Jumps to the Main Menu.
Image Handling Buttons
Image Handling Buttons
Specify what to do with the selected images. See the corresponding sections below for details on
each button.
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing Documents
Printing Photos
Sending via E-mail
Editing Files
Note
The buttons in Image Handling Buttons are displayed when the corresponding applications are
installed.
Toolbar
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings
to MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Edit Tools
(Select All)
Selects all images in the Thumbnail window.
(Cancel All)
Cancels all image selections in the Thumbnail window.
View Use Window
Page 528 of 949 pages
(Image Correction/Enhancement)
Allows you to correct the target image (outlined in orange). Click this button to open the Correct/
Enhance Images window in which you can correct/enhance images and also adjust the
brightness, contrast, etc.
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Important
Image correction/enhancement cannot be applied to PDF files or black and white binary
files.
Zoom in
Enlarges the target image (outlined in orange). You can also enlarge the image by doubleclicking it. You can check all pages when you select a PDF file.
You can also check file information such as file name, date, size and security setting. A lock icon
appears for PDF files with Document Open Password set.
Opening/Editing Password-protected PDF Files
(Search)
Enter a word or phrase included in the file name, Exif information or PDF text of the image you
(Search button). For Exif information, text in Maker, Model,
want to search for, then click
Description and User Comment is searched.
Note
Search images in My Box (Scanned/Imported Images), Recently Saved Images or a
selected folder and its subfolders.
(Refresh)
Refreshes the Thumbnail window contents.
(Display Size)
Changes the size of images in the Thumbnail window.
(Sort by)
Sorts the images in the Thumbnail window by category, date (ascending or descending) or
name (ascending or descending).
Images can be sorted by category only when My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify
Folder is displayed.
Thumbnail Window
Thumbnail Window
Scanned images are displayed.
When you select the checkbox of an image, the image appears in the Selected Images area.
Selecting an image and clicking the file name highlights the file name, allowing you to rename it.
Drag and drop an image to do the following things.
- Move from one category to another within the Thumbnail window
- Move to a category folder displayed in My Box (Scanned/Imported Images)
- Copy to a folder displayed in Specify Folder
Important
In Windows 2000, Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 2 or later is required to open passwordprotected PDF files.
You cannot change the extension (.jpg, .pdf, etc.) when renaming a file.
You cannot move or copy images to the date folders displayed in tree view in My Box (Scanned/
Imported Images) or Recently Saved Images.
View Use Window
Page 529 of 949 pages
Note
A lock icon appears for PDF files with Document Open Password set.
Thumbnails may appear as "?" in the following cases.
- Opening unsupported images
- File size is too large and there is not enough memory to display the image
- The file is corrupted
When Images are Sorted by Categories
Scanned images are displayed by category.
Note
Some images may not be detected correctly and thus may be classified into wrong categories.
In that case, drag and drop an image and move it from one category to another.
Category name Images: N (Selected: n)
Category name
The following categories are provided.
Photos: Portrait, Others
Documents: Business Card, Postcard, Standard Size, PDF File, Others
Custom categories: Displays your custom categories.
Unclassified: Displays images that have not yet been classified.
Images: N
The number of images classified into the category is displayed.
(Selected: n)
The number of images with the checkbox selected is displayed.
Note
This portion is displayed only when one or more images are selected.
Close All / Open All
Close All
Hides all images.
Open All
Displays all images.
Note
Immediately after opening the View & Use window or sorting images, all images appear
and Close All is displayed.
Click Close All to change to Open All.
Specific Categories / All Categories
You can narrow down the categories to display only those containing images. If you narrow
down the categories, more images are displayed in the Thumbnail List area, allowing you to
find or move images easily.
This button is displayed only when My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify Folder is
displayed.
Specific Categories
Displays categories containing images, along with the contained images.
View Use Window
Page 530 of 949 pages
All Categories
Displays all categories and images.
Note
Click Specific Categories to change to All Categories.
Edit Custom Categories
When My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify Folder is displayed, the Edit Custom
Categories dialog box opens.
In the Edit Custom Categories dialog box, you can add/delete categories displayed in Custom
Categories.
See "Classifying Images into Categories " for details.
Classify Images
Images imported from hard disks or memory cards appear in Unclassified. Click Classify
Images to classify them automatically.
This button is displayed only when My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) or Specify Folder is
displayed.
Note
Classification may take time if there are many images to classify.
Selected Images Area
(Cancel All)
Cancels the selection of all images in the Selected Images area.
(Cancel Selection)
Cancels the selection of the target image (outlined in orange) in the Selected Images area.
Selected Images Area
Images selected in the Thumbnail window are displayed.
Related Topic
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Page top
Create/Edit PDF file Window
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Create/
Edit PDF file Window
Create/Edit PDF file Window
Click PDF in the View & Use window, then click Create/Edit PDF file on the list to open the Create/Edit
PDF file window.
In the Create/Edit PDF file window, you can add/delete pages and rearrange the page order of PDF files
created with MP Navigator EX.
Important
You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the passwords.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
You can create or edit up to 99 pages using MP Navigator EX.
Rearrange Pages
You can move the selected image (outlined in orange).
Moves the selected image to the top.
Moves the selected image up one page.
Moves the selected image down one page.
Moves the selected image to the end.
Note
You can also drag and drop the image to rearrange the order.
Delete Selected Pages
Deletes the selected image.
Page 531 of 949 pages
Create/Edit PDF file Window
Add Page
Allows you to select and add an existing PDF file.
Note
A password will be required to add a password-protected PDF file.
Undo
Cancels the latest change made.
Reset
Cancels all the changes made.
Save Selected Pages
Opens the Save as PDF file dialog box. Specify the save settings. Only the selected page is saved.
Note
When multiple pages are selected, a multiple-page PDF file is created.
See "Save as PDF file Dialog Box " for details on the Save as PDF file dialog box.
Save All Pages
Opens the Save as PDF file dialog box. Specify the save settings. All PDF files in the list will be saved
as one PDF file.
Finish
Closes the Create/Edit PDF file window.
Toolbar
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the page 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the page 90 degrees clockwise.
(Preview Mode)
Switches to Preview Mode.
The selected file appears in Preview.
(Enlarge)
Enlarges the image displayed in Preview.
(Reduce)
Reduces the image displayed in Preview.
Page 532 of 949 pages
Create/Edit PDF file Window
Page 533 of 949 pages
(Full-screen)
Enlarges/reduces the image to display it fully in Preview.
(Thumbnail Mode)
Switches to Thumbnail Mode. Thumbnails of files are displayed.
Page top
Print Document Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Print
Document Dialog Box
Print Document Dialog Box
Click Print in the View & Use window, then click Print Document on the list to open the Print Document
dialog box.
In the Print Document dialog box, you can make advanced settings for printing multiple scanned images
at one time.
Note
The setting items in the Print Document dialog box vary by printer.
Printer
Select the printer to use.
Paper Source
Select paper source.
Page Layout
Select a print type.
Normal-size Printing
Print one image per sheet.
Scaled Printing
Print images at the selected scale (enlarged or reduced).
Fit-to-Page Printing
Print an image at the paper size (enlarged or reduced).
Borderless Printing
Print the image on an entire sheet of paper without margins.
Page Layout Printing (2 on 1)
Layout and print two images on a sheet of paper.
Page Layout Printing (4 on 1)
Layout and print four images on a sheet of paper.
Auto Duplex
Print on both sides of a sheet of paper automatically.
Page 534 of 949 pages
Print Document Dialog Box
Page 535 of 949 pages
Note
Auto Duplex is displayed when Page Layout is Normal-size Printing or Scaled Printing, and
available when Media Type is Plain Paper.
Staple Side
Select a stapling side from the list.
Note
Staple Side is available when Auto Duplex On is set.
Specify Margin...
Specify the width of the margin (0 mm to 30 mm).
Note
Specify Margin... is available when Auto Duplex On is set.
If a page does not fit in one page due to the Specify Margin... setting, the document will be
reduced for printing.
Enlarge/Reduce
Enlarge or reduce images to print.
(Enlarge/Reduce)
Print a reduced or enlarged image by specifying a scale in increments of 1%.
Auto
Scale is adjusted automatically according to the detected paper width and the selected paper size.
Image may be printed rotated 90 degrees depending on its size.
Scale
Select a scale from the list.
Important
At normal-size (100%), some images may be printed small or with some portions cropped. In
that case, select Auto to resize the print in proportion to the paper size.
Paper Size
Select the size of paper for printing. Match the size to the size of the paper set in the machine.
Note
Selectable paper sizes depend on the selected printer.
Media Type
Select the type of paper for printing. Print quality may be fixed depending on the paper type.
Note
Selectable paper types depend on the selected printer.
Print Quality
Select the print quality.
Density
Click
(Density adjustment) to select the print density.
Copies
Click
(Copy setting) to select the number of copies to be printed.
Grayscale Printing
Select this checkbox to print the document in black and white.
Preview before printing
Print Document Dialog Box
Page 536 of 949 pages
Select this checkbox to display the print result before printing.
Defaults
Restores the default settings.
Print
Start printing with the specified settings.
Note
To cancel while spooling, click Cancel. To cancel while printing, click Cancel Printing in the
confirmation window for the printer status. To open a confirmation window for the printer status,
click printer icon on the taskbar.
Page top
Print Photo Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Print
Photo Dialog Box
Print Photo Dialog Box
Click Print in the View & Use window, then click Print Photo on the list to open the Print Photo dialog box.
Important
The Print Photo dialog box will not open if Easy-PhotoPrint EX is installed. Easy-PhotoPrint EX starts
instead.
PDF files cannot be printed.
Note
Double-click an image to display it in a different window.
Printer
Select the printer to use.
Properties...
Displays the selected printer's advanced setting screen.
Paper Size
Select the size of paper for printing. Match the size to the size of the paper set in the machine.
Media Type
Select the type of paper for printing. Print quality may be fixed depending on the paper type.
Page Layout
Select a print type.
Normal-size Printing
Print one image per sheet.
Fit-to-Page Printing
Print an image at the paper size (enlarged or reduced).
Borderless Printing
Page 537 of 949 pages
Print Photo Dialog Box
Page 538 of 949 pages
Select this checkbox to print the image on an entire sheet of paper without margins.
Important
Page Layout setting will be disabled when you select Borderless Printing.
This setting is only available with printers that support borderless printing.
Orientation
Specify the print orientation.
Important
This setting is available only when Page Layout is Normal-size Printing. For others, the image is
automatically rotated according to the aspect ratio of the paper.
Copies
Specify the number of copies to print.
Vivid Photo
Select this checkbox to print the image in vivid colors.
Preview before printing
Select this checkbox to display the print result before printing.
Print
Starts printing.
Note
Only the images in the Thumbnail window with the checkbox selected are printed.
Close
Closes the dialog box without printing the photo.
Page top
Send via E-mail Dialog Box
Page 539 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Send via
E-mail Dialog Box
Send via E-mail Dialog Box
Click Send in the View & Use window, then click Attach to E-mail on the list to open the Send via E-mail
dialog box.
In the Send via E-mail dialog box, you can make advanced settings for attaching images to e-mail.
Important
MP Navigator EX is compatible with the following e-mail software programs:
- Windows Mail (Windows Vista)
- Outlook Express (Windows XP/Windows 2000)
- Microsoft Outlook
(If an e-mail software program does not operate properly, check that the program's MAPI is enabled.
To enable MAPI, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program.)
Mail Program
The e-mail software program set up via Preferences in the Navigation Mode screen is displayed.
Select the e-mail software program you want to use.
Adjust attachment file size
When Save as type is JPEG, selecting this checkbox allows you to resize the images. Select a size
from Size.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the images. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify another
one. If resized, the resized images are saved.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be attached (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Set...
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files.
Select High(Low Compression), Standard or Low(High Compression).
Page top
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Page 540 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Correct/
Enhance Images Window
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Click
(Image Correction/Enhancement) in the View & Use window or click Fix photo images in the
Task Button area to open the Correct/Enhance Images window.
In the Correct/Enhance Images window, you can make advanced settings including image correction/
enhancement and brightness/contrast adjustment.
You can also display the source image and corrected image side by side for comparison.
Important
Image correction/enhancement cannot be applied to PDF files or black and white binary files.
Note
The Correct/Enhance Images window can also be opened by clicking
Enhancement) in the Zoom in dialog box.
It may take a while to correct large images.
See "View & Use Window" for details on the View & Use window.
(Image Correction/
(1) Task Area
(2) Toolbar
Task Area
Available tasks and settings vary between the Auto and Manual tabs.
Click Auto or Manual to open the corresponding tab.
Auto Tab
Use the functions in the Auto tab to apply corrections and enhancements to the entire image.
See "Correcting/Enhancing Images Automatically " for details.
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Auto Photo Fix
Applies automatic corrections suitable for photos.
Prioritize Exif Info
Select this checkbox to apply corrections primarily based on the settings made at the time of
shooting.
Deselect this checkbox to apply corrections based on the image analysis results. It is
recommended that you normally select this setting.
Note
Exif is a standard format for embedding various shooting data in digital camera images
(JPEG).
Face Sharpener
Sharpens out-of-focus faces.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Digital Face Smoothing
Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Apply to all images
Applies the correction to all images displayed in the thumbnail list.
OK
Applies the selected effect to the selected image or all images.
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all corrections and enhancements applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the corrected images selected.
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the corrected images displayed in the thumbnail list.
Exit
Closes the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Manual Tab
Use Adjust to adjust brightness and contrast, or to sharpen the entire image.
Use Correct/Enhance to correct/enhance specific areas.
See "Correcting/Enhancing Images Manually " for details.
Page 541 of 949 pages
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Adjustment
Brightness
Adjusts the overall image brightness.
Move the slider to the left to darken and right to brighten the image.
Contrast
Adjusts the contrast of the image. Adjust the contrast when the image is flat due to lack of contrast.
Move the slider to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image.
Sharpness
Emphasizes the outline of the subjects to sharpen the image. Adjust the sharpness when the
photo is out of focus or text is blurred.
Move the slider to the right to sharpen the image.
Blur
Blurs the outline of the subjects to soften the image.
Move the slider to the right to soften the image.
Show-through Removal
Removes show-through of text from the reverse side or removes the base color. Adjust the showthrough level to prevent text on the reverse side of thin document or the base color of the document
from appearing on the image.
Move the slider to the right to increase the show-through removal effect.
Defaults
Resets all adjustments (brightness, contrast, sharpness, blur, and show-through removal).
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the corrected images selected.
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the corrected images displayed in the thumbnail list.
Exit
Closes the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Correction/Enhancement
Page 542 of 949 pages
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Face Brightener
Corrects the entire image so that the selected facial area is brightened.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Face Sharpener
Corrects the entire image to sharpen the face. You can specify the area you want to apply the effect
to.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Digital Face Smoothing
Enhances skin beautifully by removing blemishes and wrinkles. You can specify the area you want
to apply the effect to.
You can adjust the effect level using the slider.
Blemish Remover
Removes moles. You can specify the area you want to apply the effect to.
OK
Applies the selected effect to the specified area.
Undo
Cancels the latest correction.
Reset Selected Image
Cancels all corrections, enhancements and adjustments applied to the selected image.
Save Selected Image
Saves the corrected images selected.
Save All Corrected Images
Saves all the corrected images displayed in the thumbnail list.
Exit
Closes the Correct/Enhance Images window.
Toolbar
Toolbar
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the image 90 degrees clockwise.
Page 543 of 949 pages
Correct/Enhance Images Window
Page 544 of 949 pages
(Invert)
Inverts the image horizontally.
(Trimming)
Trimming is the act of selecting the area you want to keep in a photo and discarding the rest. In
the displayed window, drag the white frame to specify the trimming area. Move the cursor inside
the white frame and drag to move the trimming area.
Note
Place the main subjects along the broken white lines or at the intersections to create a
balanced image.
(Enlarge)
Enlarges the displayed image.
(Reduce)
Reduces the displayed image.
(Full-screen)
Enlarges/reduces the image to display it full-screen.
(Compare)
Opens the source image for comparison.
The source image appears on the left and the corrected image appears on the right.
Page top
One-click Mode Screen
Page 545 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > One-click
Mode Screen
One-click Mode Screen
Click
(Switch Mode) at the bottom left of the Navigation Mode screen to display the One-click
Mode screen.
You can complete from scanning to saving, etc. at one time by simply clicking the corresponding icon.
Auto
Scan documents by automatically detecting the document type. File format is automatically set. Files
are saved to a computer. You can apply Auto Photo Fix as required.
When you click this icon, the Auto Scan dialog box opens and you can specify the save settings.
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Save
Scan documents or photos and save them to a computer. The document type can be detected
automatically.
When you click this icon, the Save dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save settings.
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
PDF
Scan documents and save them as PDF files.
When you click this icon, the PDF dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and application
settings.
PDF Dialog Box
Mail
Scan documents or photos and attach them to e-mail.
When you click this icon, the Mail dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and e-mail
software program settings.
Mail Dialog Box
OCR
Scan text documents then extract text in the image and display it in Notepad (included with Windows).
When you click this icon, the OCR dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save settings.
OCR Dialog Box
Note
For further procedures, refer to the application's manual.
Custom
Scan documents and open them in a specified application. Document type is automatically detected.
When you click this icon, the Custom dialog box opens and you can specify the scan/save and
application settings.
Custom Dialog Box
Note
For further procedures, refer to the application's manual.
(Switch Mode)
One-click Mode Screen
Page 546 of 949 pages
Switches to Navigation Mode. The Navigation Mode screen appears.
Custom Scan with One-click Tab
Preferences
The Preferences dialog box opens. In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to
MP Navigator EX functions.
Preferences Dialog Box
(Guide)
Opens this guide.
Important
The following restrictions apply when you scan with Document Type set to Auto Mode in the Save or
Custom dialog box.
When you want to convert text in the scanned image to text data, specify Document Type (do not
select Auto Mode).
Related Topic
Easy Scanning with One-click
Page top
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Auto
Scan Dialog Box
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Click Auto Scan on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Auto in the One-click Mode screen to
open the Auto Scan dialog box.
Important
The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly. In that case, click another icon in
One-click Mode or on the Custom Scan with One-click tab and specify the document type or size.
- Documents other than photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text
documents and CD/DVD
- A4 size photos
- Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback
pages with the spine cut off
- Documents printed on thin white paper
- Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos
Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly.
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise, documents
may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Note
To reduce moire, click another icon in One-click Mode or on the Custom Scan with One-click tab
and set Document Type to Magazine.
Scan Settings
Enable Auto Photo Fix
Select this checkbox to analyze the photo image and apply suitable corrections automatically.
This function is available when Auto or JPEG/Exif is selected for Save as type in Save Settings.
Important
When Save as type is Auto, the base color tone of the following types of documents may
change from the source since they are corrected as photos. In that case, deselect the checkbox
and scan.
- Postcards and business cards
Page 547 of 949 pages
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Text documents may not be scanned correctly since they may be corrected as photos
depending on how you place the document. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan.
Note
If you select a format other than JPEG/Exif for Save as type and then select this checkbox, a
message appears and Save as type will be set to Auto.
Save Settings
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select Auto, JPEG/Exif, TIFF, BMP or PDF.
Important
When Save as type is Auto, the file format may differ depending on how you place the
document.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Large documents (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/arrow
(alignment mark) of the Platen may not be saved in the correct file format when Save as type is
Auto. In that case, select a file format suitable for the document to be scanned.
Images cannot be added to password-protected PDF files.
Note
When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type.
Photos, postcards, CD/DVD and business cards: JPEG
Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF
You can change the file format from Set....
Set...
When Save as type is Auto
You can specify the file format in which to save images. Select a file format for Document and Photo
each.
Important
You cannot select a compression type for JPEG files when the Compress scanned images
when transferring checkbox is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Important
This setting is not available when the Compress scanned images when transferring checkbox
is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
When Save as type is PDF
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Page 548 of 949 pages
Auto Scan Dialog Box
Page 549 of 949 pages
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans and saves documents with the specified settings.
When Save as type is Auto, a confirmation appears. Click Open Manual to open this guide (if it is
installed).
Page top
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save
Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Click Save to PC on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Save in the One-click Mode screen to
open the Save dialog box.
Scan Settings
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned. When Auto Mode is selected, the document type is
automatically detected. In that case, Color Mode, Document Size and Resolution are automatically
set as well.
Important
The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly with Auto Mode. In that case,
specify the document type or size.
- Documents other than photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text
documents and CD/DVD
- A4 size photos
- Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as
paperback pages with the spine cut off
- Documents printed on thin white paper
- Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos
Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly.
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise,
documents may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Note
Page 550 of 949 pages
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
To reduce moire, set Document Type to Magazine.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Use the scanner driver
Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan
settings.
Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the Save dialog box will be disabled.
Specify these settings in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen.
Specify...
Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Save Settings
Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it
Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them.
The File name, Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed.
Important
If you select this function, you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select Auto, JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP. Auto is displayed when Document Type is Auto Mode. When
saving as PDF files, select PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page).
Important
When Document Type is Auto Mode and Save as type is Auto, the file format may differ
depending on how you place the document.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Large documents (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/arrow
(alignment mark) of the Platen may not be saved in the correct file format when Save as type is
Page 551 of 949 pages
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Auto. In that case, select a file format suitable for the document to be scanned.
Images cannot be added to password-protected PDF files.
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Note
When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type.
Photos, postcards, CD/DVD and business cards: JPEG
Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF
You can change the file format from Set....
Images saved as PDF files may not open depending on the application. In that case, select an
option other than Auto in Save as type.
If you select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is not Auto Mode , the Save the JPEG/Exif file in
AdobeRGB checkbox will be selectable.
Set...
When Save as type is Auto
You can specify the file format in which to save images. Select a file format for Document and Photo
each.
Important
You cannot select a compression type for JPEG files when the Compress scanned images
when transferring checkbox is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Important
This setting is not available when the Compress scanned images when transferring checkbox
is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
When Save as type is PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page)
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB
Select this checkbox to save the images in colors that correspond to Adobe RGB.
Important
This function is available only when Save as type is JPEG/Exif and Document Type is not Auto
Mode.
This function is not available if the Adobe RGB profile is not installed.
Note
You cannot select this setting if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected.
When you save an image with the Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox selected, an
Page 552 of 949 pages
Save Dialog Box (One-click Mode Screen)
Page 553 of 949 pages
underscore is added to the beginning of the file name. (Example: _Image0001.jpg)
Open the save dialog box after scanning the image (Input Exif information)
Select this to open the Save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings
such as destination folder, file name and Exif information.
Save Dialog Box
Note
To set passwords for PDF files, select Open the save dialog box after scanning the image
(Input Exif information). After scanning, you can set the passwords in the Save dialog box.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Application Settings
Open with
You can select whether to open the View & Use window or Explorer after saving the images.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans and saves documents with the specified settings.
When Save as type is Auto, a confirmation appears. Click Open Manual to open this guide (if it is
installed).
Page top
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scan
Settings Dialog Box
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Make advanced settings for scanning with one-click or scanning using the Operation Panel of the
machine.
The Scan Settings dialog box opens when you click Specify... in a dialog box for making scan settings.
Note
The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened.
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned. When Auto Mode or Auto Scan is selected, the document
type is automatically detected.
In that case, Color Mode, Document Size, etc. are automatically set as well.
Important
To scan correctly, select a document type that matches the document to be scanned.
When opened from the Scanner Button Settings tab in the Preferences dialog box, the Document
Type specified in the Scanner Button Settings tab is displayed and cannot be changed in this
dialog box.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Color
This mode renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen), and B(lue).
Grayscale
This mode renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of black and white.
Black and White
This mode renders the image in black and white. The contrast in the image is divided at certain
levels (threshold level) into black and white and is rendered in two colors.
Note
Color Mode is not displayed in the Scan Settings dialog box opened from the Scanner Button
Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Document Size
Page 554 of 949 pages
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Page 555 of 949 pages
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Scanning Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Descreen
Select this checkbox to reduce moire patterns.
Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are
scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Descreen.
Reduce Show-through
Select this checkbox to sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers.
Note
Select this checkbox when Document Type is text document and show-through is apparent in the
scanned image.
Unsharp Mask
Select this checkbox to emphasize the outline of the subjects and sharpen the image.
Remove gutter shadow
Select this checkbox to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Auto Detect, Auto Detect (Multiple
Documents) or Stitch Assist.
Align the document correctly with the alignment mark on the Platen.
Note
Use ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab to correct gutter shadows when scanning non-standard size
documents or when custom cropping frames are set.
For details, see Gutter Shadow Correction in " Image Settings " (ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab).
Correct slanted document
Select this checkbox to detect the scanned text and correct the angle (within -0.1 to -10 degrees or +0.1
to +10 degrees) of the document.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
The inclination of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Page 556 of 949 pages
- Documents in which the text lines are inclined more than 10 degrees or the angles vary by line
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal text
- Documents with extremely large or small fonts
- Documents with small amount of text
- Documents containing figures/images or hand-written text
- Documents containing both vertical and horizontal lines (tables)
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Correct slanted document.
Enable Auto Photo Fix (When scanning with Auto Scan using the Operation Panel)
Select this checkbox to analyze the photo image and apply suitable corrections automatically.
This function is available when Auto or JPEG/Exif is selected for Save as type in Save Settings on the
Scanner Button Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Important
When Save as type is Auto, the base color tone of the following types of documents may change
from the source since they are corrected as photos. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan.
- Postcards and business cards
Text documents may not be scanned correctly since they may be corrected as photos depending
on how you place the document. In that case, deselect the checkbox and scan.
Note
If you select a format other than JPEG/Exif for Save as type and then select this checkbox, a
message appears and Save as type will be set to Auto.
Detect the orientation of text documents and rotate images
Select this checkbox to detect the orientation of the document from the scanned text and rotate the
scanned image to the correct orientation. Select the language of the document to be scanned in
Document Language.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
This function may not work properly depending on the document language. Only text documents
written in languages that can be selected from Document Language are supported.
The orientation of the following types of documents may not be corrected, as the text cannot be
detected correctly.
- Resolution is outside the range of 300 dpi to 600 dpi
- Font size is outside the range of 8 points to 48 points
- Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
- Documents with patterned backgrounds
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable Detect the orientation of text documents and
rotate images.
Document Language
Select the language of the document to be scanned.
Important
You cannot select this checkbox when Document Size is Stitch Assist.
Defaults
Restores the default settings.
Page top
Save Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save
Dialog Box
Save Dialog Box
The Save dialog box opens when you scan from Save to PC on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or
from Save in the One-click Mode screen after selecting Open the save dialog box after scanning the
image (Input Exif information).
You can specify the file type and destination while viewing the thumbnails.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select JPEG/Exif, TIFF, BMP, PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page).
PDF
Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file.
PDF(Multiple Pages)
Save multiple images in one PDF file.
Note
PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are scanned.
PDF(Add Page)
Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You
cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify
PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be
specified as well.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Page 557 of 949 pages
Save Dialog Box
Page 558 of 949 pages
Important
PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) and PDF(Add Page) cannot be selected for images scanned using the
Operation Panel of the machine.
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Set...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Important
This setting is not available when the Compress scanned images when transferring checkbox is
selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
When Save as type is PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page)
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Exif Settings...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif, you can input Exif information into the file to be saved.
Exif Settings Dialog Box
Password security settings
Select this checkbox to open the Password Security -Settings dialog box in which you can set
passwords for opening, editing and printing created PDF files.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Note
This function is available only when Save as type is PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page).
Add to
This is displayed when you select PDF(Add Page) for Save as type and specify the PDF file to which
images are added. To change the file, click Browse... to specify another one.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify PDF
files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be specified as
well.
Rotate Left 90°/Rotate Right 90°
Rotates scanned images 90 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise.
Select the image you want to rotate and click Rotate Left 90° or Rotate Right 90°.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits
are appended to each file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Page top
Exif Settings Dialog Box
Page 559 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Exif
Settings Dialog Box
Exif Settings Dialog Box
You can input Exif information into a file to be saved. Exif is a standard format for embedding various
shooting data in digital camera images (JPEG). Embedding Exif information into scanned images
allows you to organize and print them along with digital camera images.
The Exif Settings dialog box can be opened when Save as type is JPEG/Exif.
Basic Information
Displays the information obtained automatically from the machine or software.
Advanced Information
Displays the information specified on the right side of the screen.
Advanced Information Settings Area
You can input Exif information such as the title and shooting data. Select the checkbox of the items you
want to specify, and select or enter information.
Apply the Same Setting of Input Items Automatically
Select this checkbox to automatically display the information you specified for the previous image.
Apply
After specifying all the information you need, click Apply to embed it into the image. The information
appears in Advanced Information.
OK
Embeds the specified information into the image and closes the screen. The specified information is
saved.
Cancel
Cancels the settings and closes the screen.
Information is embedded when Cancel is clicked after clicking Apply.
Page top
PDF Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > PDF
Dialog Box
PDF Dialog Box
Click Save as PDF file on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click PDF in the One-click Mode screen
to open the PDF dialog box.
Scan Settings
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
Page 560 of 949 pages
PDF Dialog Box
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Specify...
Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Save Settings
Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it
Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them.
The File name, Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed.
Important
If you select this function, you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select PDF, PDF(Multiple Pages) or PDF(Add Page).
PDF
Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file.
PDF(Multiple Pages)
Save multiple images in one PDF file.
PDF(Add Page)
Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You
cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added.
Important
Images cannot be added to password-protected PDF files.
Note
Click Set... to open the PDF Settings dialog box in which you can specify the PDF compression
type and other advanced settings for creating PDF files.
PDF Settings Dialog Box
See "Creating/Editing PDF Files " to delete or rearrange the pages of saved PDF files.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Open the save dialog box after scanning the image
Select this to open the Save as PDF file dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save
Page 561 of 949 pages
PDF Dialog Box
Page 562 of 949 pages
settings such as destination folder and file name.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Note
To set passwords for PDF files, select Open the save dialog box after scanning the image. After
scanning, you can set the passwords in the Save as PDF file dialog box.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Application Settings
Open with
Specify an application with which to open scanned images. Drag and drop the icon of an application
that supports the file format displayed in Save as type. The specified application starts after images
are scanned.
Important
Depending on the specified application, the images may not appear correctly or the application
may not start.
Reset
Cancels the application setting.
Set...
Allows you to select an application to start.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans and saves documents as PDF files with the specified settings.
Page top
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Page 563 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Save as
PDF file Dialog Box
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
The Save as PDF file dialog box opens when you scan from Save as PDF file on the Custom Scan with
One-click tab or from PDF in the One-click Mode screen after selecting Open the save dialog box after
scanning the image.
In the Save as PDF file dialog box, you can make settings for saving images to a computer.
Important
You cannot save images scanned at 10501 pixels or more in the vertical and horizontal directions.
Save as type
Select a PDF file type to save the scanned images.
PDF
Save each of the selected images as a separate PDF file.
PDF(Multiple Pages)
Save multiple images in one PDF file.
Note
PDF(Multiple Pages) is displayed when multiple images are scanned.
PDF(Add Page)
Add the scanned images to a PDF file. The images are added to the end of the PDF file. You
cannot rearrange the pages of the PDF file to which the images are added.
Important
Images can only be added to PDF files created with MP Navigator EX. You cannot specify
PDF files created with other applications. PDF files edited in other applications cannot be
specified as well.
Save as PDF file Dialog Box
Page 564 of 949 pages
PDF(Add Page) cannot be selected for images scanned using the Operation Panel of the
machine.
If a password-protected PDF file is edited, the passwords will be deleted. Reset the
passwords.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Set...
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Password security settings
Select this checkbox to open the Password Security -Settings dialog box in which you can set
passwords for opening, editing and printing created PDF files.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Rotate Left 90°/Rotate Right 90°
Rotates scanned images 90 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise.
Select the image you want to rotate and click Rotate Left 90° or Rotate Right 90°.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4 digits
are appended to each file name.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the PDF files. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify
another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Page top
Mail Dialog Box
Page 565 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Mail
Dialog Box
Mail Dialog Box
Click Attach to E-mail on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or click Mail in the One-click Mode screen to
open the Mail dialog box.
Scan Settings
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Mail Dialog Box
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Use the scanner driver
Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan
settings.
Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the Mail dialog box will be disabled.
Specify these settings in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen.
Specify...
Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Save Settings
File Size
Select a size from Small (fits in a 640 by 480 window), Medium (fits in a 800 by 600 window), Large
(fits in a 1024 by 768 window) and Original.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select JPEG/Exif, PDF or PDF(Multiple Pages).
Important
You cannot set passwords for PDF files.
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Set...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Important
This setting is not available when the Compress scanned images when transferring checkbox
is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
When Save as type is PDF or PDF(Multiple Pages)
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Attachment Settings
Page 566 of 949 pages
Mail Dialog Box
Page 567 of 949 pages
Mail Program
Specify an e-mail software program.
Note
Select Add... to open the Select Mail Program dialog box in which you can select an e-mail
software program. If the e-mail software program you want to use is not listed, click Add to List
and select it.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans documents with the specified settings.
When scanning is completed, the e-mail software program starts automatically and a new message
screen appears with the image attached.
Page top
OCR Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > OCR
Dialog Box
OCR Dialog Box
Click OCR on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or in the One-click Mode screen to open the OCR
dialog box.
Scan Settings
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Use the scanner driver
Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan
Page 568 of 949 pages
OCR Dialog Box
settings.
Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the OCR dialog box will be disabled.
Specify these settings in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen.
Specify...
Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Note
When scanning slanted documents, select the Correct slanted document checkbox to improve
the text recognition accuracy.
Save Settings
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP.
Important
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Set...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Important
This setting is not available when the Compress scanned images when transferring checkbox
is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Application Settings
OCR with
Specify an OCR application.
When MP Navigator EX is specified, after the image is scanned, the text in the image is extracted
and appears in Notepad (included with Windows).
Note
Only text written in languages that can be selected on the General tab can be extracted to
Notepad (included with Windows). Click Set... on the General tab and specify the language
according to the language of the document to be scanned.
Page 569 of 949 pages
OCR Dialog Box
Page 570 of 949 pages
When scanning multiple documents, you can collect the extracted text into one file.
General Tab
Text displayed in Notepad (included with Windows) is for guidance only. Text in the image of
the following types of documents may not be detected correctly.
- Documents containing text with font size outside the range of 8 points to 40 points (at 300 dpi)
- Slanted documents
- Documents placed upside down or documents with text in the wrong orientation (rotated
characters)
- Documents containing special fonts, effects, italics, or hand-written text
- Documents with narrow line spacing
- Documents with colors in the background of text
- Documents containing multiple languages
Reset
Cancels the application setting.
Set...
Allows you to select an application.
Important
Depending on the specified application, the text may not be extracted correctly or the application
may not start.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans documents with the specified settings.
Page top
Custom Dialog Box
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Custom
Dialog Box
Custom Dialog Box
Click Custom on the Custom Scan with One-click tab or in the One-click Mode screen to open the
Custom dialog box.
Scan Settings
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned. When Auto Mode is selected, the document type is
automatically detected. In that case, Color Mode, Document Size and Resolution are automatically
set as well.
Important
The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly with Auto Mode. In that case,
specify the document type or size.
- Documents other than photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text
documents and CD/DVD
- A4 size photos
- Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as
paperback pages with the spine cut off
- Documents printed on thin white paper
- Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos
Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly.
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise,
documents may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Note
Page 571 of 949 pages
Custom Dialog Box
To reduce moire, set Document Type to Magazine.
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Use the scanner driver
Select this checkbox to display the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen and make advanced scan
settings.
Color Mode, Document Size, Resolution and other settings in the Custom dialog box will be
disabled. Specify these settings in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen.
Specify...
Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Save Settings
Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it
Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them.
The File name, Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed.
Important
If you select this function, you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files.
Note
If an application to start is specified in Application Settings, the scanned image opens in the
specified application.
File name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters). When saving multiple files, 4
digits are appended to each file name.
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select Auto, JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP. Auto is displayed and selected by default when Document Type
is Auto Mode.
Important
When Document Type is Auto Mode and Save as type is Auto, the file format may differ
Page 572 of 949 pages
Custom Dialog Box
depending on how you place the document.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Large documents (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/arrow
(alignment mark) of the Platen may not be saved in the correct file format when Save as type is
Auto. In that case, select a file format suitable for the document to be scanned.
You cannot select JPEG/Exif when Color Mode is Black and White.
Note
When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document type.
Photos, postcards, CD/DVD and business cards: JPEG
Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF
You can change the file format from Set....
Images saved as PDF files may not open depending on the application. In that case, select an
option other than Auto in Save as type.
If you select JPEG/Exif when Document Type is not Auto Mode , the Save the JPEG/Exif file in
AdobeRGB checkbox will be selectable.
Set...
When Save as type is Auto
You can specify the file format in which to save images. Select a file format for Document and Photo
each.
Important
You cannot select a compression type for JPEG files when the Compress scanned images
when transferring checkbox is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Important
This setting is not available when the Compress scanned images when transferring checkbox
is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB
Select this checkbox to save the images in colors that correspond to Adobe RGB.
Important
This function is available only when Save as type is JPEG/Exif and Document Type is not Auto
Mode.
This function is not available if the Adobe RGB profile is not installed.
Note
You cannot select this setting if the Use the scanner driver checkbox is selected.
When you save an image with the Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB checkbox selected, an
Page 573 of 949 pages
Custom Dialog Box
Page 574 of 949 pages
underscore is added to the beginning of the file name. (Example: _Image0001.jpg)
Open the save dialog box after scanning the image (Input Exif information)
Select this to open the Save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings
such as destination folder, file name and Exif information.
Save Dialog Box
Application Settings
Open with
Specify an application with which to open scanned images. Drag and drop the icon of an application
that supports the file format displayed in Save as type. The specified application starts after images
are scanned.
Important
Depending on the specified application, the images may not appear correctly or the application
may not start.
Reset
Cancels the application setting.
Set...
Allows you to select an application to start.
Start scanning by clicking the one-click button
Select this checkbox to start scanning when you click an icon.
Apply
Saves and applies the specified settings.
Click Cancel instead of Apply to cancel the specified settings.
Cancel
Cancels the specified settings. The current screen closes.
Defaults
Returns all settings in the screen to their defaults.
Scan
Scans and saves documents with the specified settings.
When Save as type is Auto, a confirmation appears. Click Open Manual to open this guide (if it is
installed).
Page top
Preferences Dialog Box
Page 575 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens >
Preferences Dialog Box
Preferences Dialog Box
Click Preferences to open the Preferences dialog box.
In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to MP Navigator EX functions via the
General and Scanner Button Settings tabs.
Note
See the corresponding sections below for details on each tab.
General Tab
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail)
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Open with Application)
Page top
General Tab
Page 576 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > General
Tab
General Tab
On the General tab, you can specify general MP Navigator EX settings.
Product Name
Displays the product name of the machine that MP Navigator EX is currently configured to use.
If the displayed product is not the one you want to use, select the desired product from the list.
For network connection, select one with (Network: XXXXXXXXXXXX) after the product name. (Where
XXXXXXXXXXXX is the MAC address.)
Use network connection to share the machine among multiple computers.
Note
To set up a network environment, see " Network Scan Settings ."
Compress scanned images when transferring
Compress and transfer images scanned using MP Navigator EX or the Operation Panel of the
machine. This is useful when the machine is connected via a slow interface such as USB 1.1 or a
network. By default, this checkbox is selected when using a network connection. It is not selected
when using a USB connection.
Important
When Photo is selected for Document Type on the Scanner Button Settings tab, allow 3/8 inches
(1 cm) or more space between the edges of the Platen and the document. If not, some images
may not be scanned at the correct positions and sizes.
Business cards, panorama photos and bordered photos may not be cropped accurately when
scanned. In that case, deselect the Compress scanned images when transferring checkbox and
scan again.
The following restrictions apply when the Compress scanned images when transferring
checkbox is selected.
- Text(OCR) cannot be selected for Document Type in the Scan/Import window.
General Tab
- Black and White cannot be selected in the color mode settings for One-click Mode.
- Remove gutter shadow is not available.
- Save the JPEG/Exif file in AdobeRGB for One-click Mode is not available.
- Available resolutions: 75 dpi / 150 dpi / 300 dpi / 600 dpi
- Maximum number of documents that can be scanned at one time: 4
- A compression type (image quality) cannot be selected when saving scanned images in JPEG.
The following images are not compressed even when scanned with the Compress scanned
images when transferring checkbox selected.
- Images scanned using the Operation Panel of the machine by automatically detecting the
document type
- Images scanned in One-click Mode by automatically detecting the document type
- Images scanned using ScanGear (scanner driver)
Note
It is recommended that you scan at 300 dpi or higher resolution when scanning multiple photos
using this function.
When the Compress scanned images when transferring checkbox is selected, Unsharp Mask is
always applied.
Save in (My Box)
Displays the folder in which to save scanned documents. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Location of Temporary Files
Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify
another one.
Important
An error may occur if you set the destination to the root directory of the drive on which the
operating system is installed. Be sure to specify a folder.
An error may occur if you set the destination to a network folder. Be sure to specify a local folder.
Application to run
Displays the applications that can be started via MP Navigator EX. Install the applications from the
Setup CD-ROM that accompanies the machine.
For Attach to E-mail, you can select an e-mail software program to start.
For Open PDF file, the application associated with the .pdf file extension by the operating system is
displayed.
Important
You can change which items are installed during installation from the Setup CD-ROM by
selecting Custom Install. If you choose not to install some applications with Custom Install, the
corresponding MP Navigator EX functions will be unavailable. To use those functions, install the
corresponding applications.
Note
For Convert to text file, Notepad (included with Windows) is displayed. Click Set... to open a dialog
box, then specify Document Language and how to scan multiple documents.
Document Language
Specify the language according to the language of the document to be scanned. Only text
written in languages that can be selected in the Document Language can be extracted to
Page 577 of 949 pages
General Tab
Page 578 of 949 pages
Notepad.
Combine multiple text conversion results
When scanning multiple documents, select the checkbox to collect the conversion results (text)
into one file. This checkbox is selected by default.
When the checkbox is selected, you can scan up to 99 pages at one time.
Deselect the checkbox to display each conversion result (text) in a separate file.
When the checkbox is not selected, you can scan up to 10 pages at one time.
Page top
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
Page 579 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scanner
Button Settings Tab (Save)
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
On the Scanner Button Settings tab, you can specify the following settings.
This section describes the settings available when Select Event is Save to PC or Save as PDF file.
You can specify how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine with the scan
mode set to Save to PC or Save as PDF file.
Event
Select Event
Displays the scan modes that can be selected on the Operation Panel of the machine.
Save to PC
Select this to specify the details for the scan mode Save to PC.
Save as PDF file
Select this to specify the details for the scan mode Save as PDF file.
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Note
Auto Scan can be selected only when the machine is connected via USB and Save to PC is
selected for Select Event. When Auto Scan is selected, the document type is automatically
detected. In that case, Document Size and Resolution are automatically set as well.
Important
To scan correctly, select a document type that matches the document to be scanned.
The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly with Auto Scan. In that case,
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
specify the document type or size.
- Documents other than photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text
documents and CD/DVD
- A4 size photos
- Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as
paperback pages with the spine cut off
- Documents printed on thin white paper
- Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos
Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly.
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise,
documents may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Actions
Scan Settings
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
This setting is not available when Select Event is Save to PC with Document Type set to Auto
Scan.
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Important
This setting is not available when Select Event is Save to PC with Document Type set to Auto
Scan.
Specify...
Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Save Settings
Automatically save the image to your computer after scanning it
Select this to save the images to your computer as specified after scanning them.
The File Name, Save as type and Save in settings will be displayed.
Important
If you select this function, you will not be able to set passwords for PDF files.
File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters).
Save as type
Page 580 of 949 pages
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
When saving to a computer, select Auto, JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP. Auto is displayed and selected
by default when Document Type is Auto Scan. When saving as PDF files, PDF(Multiple Pages)
is set.
Important
When Document Type is Auto Scan and Save as type is Auto, the file format may differ
depending on how you place the document.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Large documents (such as A4 size photos) that cannot be placed away from the edges/
arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen may not be saved in the correct file format when Save
as type is Auto. In that case, select a file format suitable for the document to be scanned.
Note
If you select the Enable Auto Photo Fix checkbox in the Scan Settings dialog box and then
select a format other than JPEG/Exif for Save as type, a message appears and the Enable
Auto Photo Fix checkbox will be deselected.
When Auto is selected, files are saved in the following formats according to the document
type.
Photos, postcards, CD/DVD and business cards: JPEG
Magazines, newspapers and text documents: PDF
You can change the file format from Set....
Set...
When Save as type is Auto
You can specify the file format in which to save images. Select a file format for saving Document
and Photo each.
Important
You cannot select a compression type for JPEG files when the Compress scanned
images when transferring checkbox is selected on the General tab of the Preferences
dialog box.
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Important
This setting is not available when the Compress scanned images when transferring
checkbox is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
When Save as type is PDF(Multiple Pages)
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse...
to specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date
and save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01"
(Year_Month_Date) will be created.
Page 581 of 949 pages
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
Page 582 of 949 pages
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Open the save dialog box after scanning the image
Select this to open the save dialog box after scanning the images and specify the save settings such
as destination folder, file name and Exif information.
Note
See "Save Dialog Box " (when Select Event is Save to PC) or " Save as PDF file Dialog Box
" (when Select Event is Save as PDF file) for details on each dialog box.
To set passwords for PDF files, select Open the save dialog box after scanning the image. After
scanning, you can set the passwords in the Save as PDF file dialog box.
Setting Passwords for PDF Files
Related Topic
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail)
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Open with Application)
Page top
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail)
Page 583 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scanner
Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail)
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail)
On the Scanner Button Settings tab, you can specify the following settings.
This section describes the settings available when Select Event is Attach to E-mail.
You can specify how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine with the scan
mode set to Attach to E-mail.
Event
Select Event
Displays the scan modes that can be selected on the Operation Panel of the machine. Select Attach
to E-mail.
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Important
To scan correctly, select a document type that matches the document to be scanned.
Actions
Scan Settings
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail)
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Specify...
Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Save Settings
File Size
Specify a size from Small (fits in a 640 by 480 window), Medium (fits in a 800 by 600 window), Large
(fits in a 1024 by 768 window) and Original.
File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters).
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select JPEG/Exif or PDF.
Set...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Important
This setting is not available when the Compress scanned images when transferring checkbox
is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
When Save as type is PDF
Make advanced settings for creating PDF files. See " PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Attachment Settings
Page 584 of 949 pages
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail)
Page 585 of 949 pages
Mail Program
Specify an e-mail software program.
Related Topic
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Open with Application)
Page top
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Open with Application)
Page 586 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > MP Navigator EX Screens > Scanner
Button Settings Tab (Open with Application)
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Open with Application)
On the Scanner Button Settings tab, you can specify the following settings.
This section describes the settings available when Select Event is Open with application.
You can specify how to respond when scanning using the Operation Panel of the machine with the scan
mode set to Open with application.
Event
Select Event
Displays the scan modes that can be selected on the Operation Panel of the machine. Select Open
with application.
Document Type
Select the type of document to be scanned.
Important
To scan correctly, select a document type that matches the document to be scanned.
Actions
Scan Settings
Document Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned.
When you select Custom, a screen in which you can specify the document size appears. Select a
Units, then enter the Width and Height and click OK.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Open with Application)
Important
When you select Auto Detect, the image may not be scanned at the correct position and size. In
that case, change the size to the actual document size (A4, Letter, etc.) and align a corner of the
document with the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
Resolution
Select the resolution at which to scan documents.
Resolution
Specify...
Click to open the Scan Settings dialog box in which you can make advanced scan settings.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Save Settings
File Name
Enter the file name of the image to be saved (up to 64 characters).
Save as type
Select a file type to save the scanned images.
Select JPEG/Exif, TIFF or BMP.
Set...
When Save as type is JPEG/Exif
You can specify a compression type for JPEG files. Select High(Low Compression), Standard or
Low(High Compression).
Important
This setting is not available when the Compress scanned images when transferring checkbox
is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the scanned images. To change the folder, click Browse... to
specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date and
save scanned files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date) will be
created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Application Settings
Open with
Specify an application with which to open scanned images. The specified application starts after
images are scanned.
Related Topic
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
Page 587 of 949 pages
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Open with Application)
Page 588 of 949 pages
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Attach to E-mail)
Page top
Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images
Page 589 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Appendix: Opening Files Other than
Scanned Images
Appendix: Opening Files Other than Scanned Images
You can save or print data other than scanned images using MP Navigator EX.
Using images saved on a memory card
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Using images saved on a computer
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Page top
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Appendix: Opening Files Other than
Scanned Images > Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
You can import images (including PDF files created via scanning using the Operation Panel) saved on a
memory card, and save them to a computer or print them using MP Navigator EX. You can also attach
them to e-mail, or edit them using an application that accompanies the machine.
When saving PDF files, you can select whether to enable keyword search, and also specify the
compression type and other advanced settings.
Important
Do not remove or insert memory cards while they are being accessed or the Access Lamp of the
machine is flashing.
The machine can only detect one memory card at a time. Do not simultaneously insert multiple
memory cards.
When switching to another memory card of the same type or inserting another memory card in a
different Card Slot, make sure that the Access Lamp of the machine is not flashing, then remove the
memory card. Then, insert another memory card.
The machine's Card Slot (memory card) may become inaccessible. In that case, restart the
machine or turn it off and reconnect the USB cable.
With network connection, check that the Card Slot is mapped as a network drive. See " Using the
Card Slot over a Network " for details.
1. Insert a memory card containing images/PDF files into the machine's Card Slot.
For details on how to insert a memory card into the machine, refer to the on-screen manual: Basic
Guide .
2. Start MP Navigator EX as follows.
Windows Vista/Windows XP
Windows 2000
Windows Vista/Windows XP
The program selection screen appears. Click MP Navigator EX Ver3.0.
Note
If you want to start MP Navigator EX every time a memory card is inserted into the machine,
follow these steps.
Page 590 of 949 pages
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Page 591 of 949 pages
Windows Vista:
Select the Always do this for pictures checkbox and click MP Navigator EX Ver3.0.
Windows XP:
Select MP Navigator EX Ver3.0, then select the Always do the selected action. checkbox and
click OK.
The Memory Card screen of the Scan/Import window appears, and the images and PDF files
saved on the memory card appear in the Thumbnail window.
Note
See " Memory Card Screen (Scan/Import Window) " for details on the Memory Card screen
(Scan/Import window).
Windows 2000
Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
Point to Scan/Import and click Memory Card. The Memory Card screen of the Scan/Import window
appears, and the images and PDF files saved on the memory card appear in the Thumbnail
window.
Important
If you cannot import images from memory cards via a network connection, see " Using the
Card Slot over a Network ."
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Note
With network connection, the Map Network Drive dialog box may open when a memory card
is inserted into the machine for the first time. Specify a drive letter to map.
3. Select the checkboxes of the images and PDF files you want to import, then click
Import.
The Import dialog box opens. Specify the folder in which to save the imported files.
Save in
Displays the folder in which to save the imported images and PDF files. To change the folder,
click Browse... to specify another one.
The following folders are specified by default.
Windows Vista: MP Navigator EX folder in Pictures folder
Windows XP: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Windows 2000: MP Navigator EX folder in My Pictures folder
Save to a Subfolder with Current Date
Select this checkbox to create a subfolder in the folder specified in Save in with the current date
and save imported files in it. A subfolder with a name such as "2009_01_01" (Year_Month_Date)
will be created.
If this checkbox is not selected, files are saved directly in the folder specified in Save in.
Change the PDF file properties
This option is displayed when the memory card contains a PDF file.
Select this checkbox to change the PDF file settings. You can also change the settings of PDF
files created via scanning using the Operation Panel. Click Set... to open a dialog box in which
you can specify advanced settings. See "PDF Settings Dialog Box " for details.
4. Click Save.
The imported images and PDF files appear in the View & Use window.
Page 592 of 949 pages
Importing Images Saved on a Memory Card
Page 593 of 949 pages
See the corresponding sections below for details on using the imported images and PDF files.
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing Documents
Printing Photos
Sending via E-mail
Editing Files
Page top
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with the Bundled Application Software > Appendix: Opening Files Other than
Scanned Images > Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
You can open images saved on a computer and print them or attach them to e-mail using MP Navigator
EX. You can also edit them using an application that accompanies the machine.
1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
2. In the Navigation Mode screen, point to View & Use and click My Box (Scanned/
Imported Images), Specify Folder or Recently Saved Images.
Click My Box (Scanned/Imported Images) to open images saved in My Box (Scanned/Imported
Images), click Specify Folder to open images saved in a specific folder, or click Recently Saved
Images to open recently saved images.
Note
If the Show this window at startup checkbox is not selected, the last used screen appears. If
the Scan/Import window is displayed, click
(View & Use) on the upper left of the screen.
The View & Use window opens.
See " View & Use Images on your Computer Tab " for details on the View & Use Images on your
Computer tab.
3. Click the folder containing the images you want to open.
Images saved in the folder appear in the Thumbnail window.
Page 594 of 949 pages
Opening Images Saved on a Computer
Page 595 of 949 pages
4. Select the images you want to use, then select what you want to do with them.
See the corresponding sections below for details on using images.
Creating/Editing PDF Files
Printing Documents
Printing Photos
Sending via E-mail
Editing Files
Page top
Scanning with Other Application Software
Page 596 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software
Scanning with Other Application Software
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning
Page top
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
Page 597 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
ScanGear (scanner driver) is software required for scanning documents. It enables you to specify the
output size and make image corrections when scanning.
ScanGear (scanner driver) can be started from MP Navigator EX or from other applications that are
compatible with a standard interface called TWAIN. (ScanGear (scanner driver) is a TWAIN-compatible
driver.)
What You Can Do with This Software
This software enables you to preview scan results or set document type and output size, etc. when
scanning documents. It is useful when you want to scan in a specific color tone, as it allows you to make
various corrections and adjust brightness, contrast, etc.
Screens
There are three modes: Basic Mode, Advanced Mode and Auto Scan Mode.
Switch modes by clicking a tab on the upper right of the screen.
Note
ScanGear (scanner driver) starts in the last used mode.
Settings are not retained when you switch between modes.
Basic Mode
Use Basic Mode to scan easily by following three simple on-screen steps (
,
and
).
Advanced Mode
Use Advanced Mode to specify color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, etc. when
scanning.
What Is ScanGear (Scanner Driver)?
Page 598 of 949 pages
Auto Scan Mode
Use Auto Scan Mode to scan easily by simply placing the document on the Platen and clicking Scan.
Page top
Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Page 599 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Scanning with Advanced Settings Using ScanGear (Scanner
Driver)
Starting ScanGear (scanner driver)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Scanning documents after making simple image corrections
Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning documents after making advanced image corrections and brightness/color adjustments
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Scanning with a simple operation
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
Scanning multiple documents at one time after making image corrections and color adjustments
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Page top
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Use ScanGear (scanner driver) to make image corrections and color adjustments when scanning.
ScanGear (scanner driver) can be started from MP Navigator EX or an application.
Note
To scan via a network connection, start ScanGear and set up the network environment before
scanning.
Network Scan Settings
Starting from MP Navigator EX
Navigation Mode Screen
Follow these steps to start ScanGear (scanner driver) from the Navigation Mode screen of MP Navigator
EX.
1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the Navigation Mode screen.
Starting MP Navigator EX
2. Point to Scan/Import and click Photos/Documents (Platen).
The Scan/Import window opens.
3. Select the Use the scanner driver checkbox, then click Open Scanner Driver.
The ScanGear (scanner driver) screen appears.
One-click Mode Screen
Follow these steps to start ScanGear (scanner driver) from the One-click Mode screen of MP Navigator
EX.
1. Start MP Navigator EX and open the One-click Mode screen.
Page 600 of 949 pages
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Page 601 of 949 pages
Starting MP Navigator EX
2. Click the corresponding icon.
The corresponding dialog box opens.
3. Select the Use the scanner driver checkbox in Scan Settings, then click Scan.
The ScanGear (scanner driver) screen appears.
Important
Use the scanner driver is not displayed in the PDF dialog box or Auto Scan dialog box.
Starting from an Application
Follow these steps (example) to start ScanGear (scanner driver) from an application.
The procedure varies depending on the application. For details, refer to the application's manual.
1. Start the application.
2. On the File menu of the application, select Select Source and select the machine.
Important
The scanner name to be selected in the application depends on whether you are scanning via
a network connection or USB connection.
3. Select the command to scan a document (Scan/Import, Acquire image, etc.).
The ScanGear (scanner driver) screen appears.
Page top
Scanning in Basic Mode
Page 602 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning in Basic Mode
In Basic Mode, you can scan easily by following the on-screen steps.
This section explains how to scan a single document.
See "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) " to scan multiple
documents at one time.
Important
The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, click
on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan.
- Photos that have a whitish border
- Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc.
- Thin documents
- Thick documents
The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly.
- Documents smaller than 1.18 inches (3 cm) square
- Photos that have been cut to various shapes
(Thumbnail)
1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Important
Place the document face-down on the Platen and align an upper corner of the document with
the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
2. Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen.
Note
To scan magazines containing many color photos, select Magazine(Color).
Scanning in Basic Mode
Page 603 of 949 pages
3. Click Preview.
Preview image appears in the Preview area.
Note
Colors are adjusted based on the document type selected in Select Source.
4. Set Destination.
5. Set Output Size.
Output size options vary by the items selected in Destination.
6. Adjust the scan area (cropping frame) as required.
Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame (scan area) on the preview image.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
7. Set Image corrections as required.
8. Click Scan.
Scanning starts.
Note
Click
(Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings
(document type, etc.).
ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scan Tab
Related Topic
Basic Mode Tab
Page top
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Page 604 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Advanced Mode
Scanning in Advanced Mode
In Advanced Mode, you can specify the color mode, output resolution, image brightness, color tone, etc.
when scanning.
This section explains how to scan a single document.
See "Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver) " to scan multiple
documents at one time.
Important
The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, click
on the Toolbar to switch to whole image view and scan.
- Photos that have a whitish border
- Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc.
- Thin documents
- Thick documents
The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly.
- Documents smaller than 1.18 inches (3 cm) square
- Photos that have been cut to various shapes
(Thumbnail)
1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Important
Place the document face-down on the Platen and align an upper corner of the document with
the corner at the arrow (alignment mark) of the Platen.
2. Click Advanced Mode.
The Advanced Mode tab appears.
Note
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Settings are not retained when you switch between modes.
3. Set Color Mode.
Input Settings
4. Click Preview.
Preview image appears in the Preview area.
Note
If you scan without preview, the show-through reduction function will be active. This function is
useful when scanning magazines. However, when scanning photos, the color tone of the
scanned image may differ from the source due to the show-through reduction function. In that
case, use preview first.
5. Set Output Settings.
Output Settings
6. Adjust the cropping frame (scan area), correct image and adjust colors as required.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Buttons
7. Click Scan.
Scanning starts.
Note
Click
(Information) to open a dialog box in which you can check the current scan settings
(document type, etc.).
ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scan Tab
Related Topic
Advanced Mode Tab
Page 605 of 949 pages
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Page 606 of 949 pages
Page top
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
Page 607 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
You can scan easily in Auto Scan Mode of ScanGear (scanner driver) by letting it automatically determine
the type of document placed on the Platen.
Note
Supported document types are photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text
documents and CD/DVD. To scan other documents, specify the document type on the Basic Mode
tab or the Advanced Mode tab.
Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning in Advanced Mode
1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Placing Documents
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
2. Click Auto Scan Mode.
The Auto Scan Mode tab appears.
3. Click Scan.
Scanning starts.
Note
ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scan Tab
Related Topic
Auto Scan Mode Tab
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
Page 608 of 949 pages
Page top
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Scanning with Advanced Settings Using
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear
(Scanner Driver)
You can scan two or more photos (small documents) on the Platen at one time in Basic Mode and
Advanced Mode of ScanGear (scanner driver).
This section explains how to scan multiple documents from the Basic Mode tab.
Important
To scan multiple documents as a single image, scan in whole image view.
The following types of documents may not be cropped correctly. In that case, adjust the cropping
frames (scan areas) in whole image view and scan.
- Photos that have a whitish border
- Documents printed on white paper, hand-written text, business cards, etc.
- Thin documents
- Thick documents
Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View
The following types of documents cannot be cropped correctly.
- Documents smaller than 1.18 inches (3 cm) square
- Photos that have been cut to various shapes
Note
See "Scanning in Auto Scan Mode " to scan easily by automatically detecting the document type.
You can also scan multiple documents at one time from the Advanced Mode tab. Use the Advanced
Mode tab to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution, image
brightness and color tone.
See the corresponding sections below for details on the Basic Mode tab and Advanced Mode tab.
Basic Mode Tab
Advanced Mode Tab
1. Place the document on the Platen, then start ScanGear (scanner driver).
Placing Documents
Starting ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
2. Set Select Source according to the document placed on the Platen.
Page 609 of 949 pages
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
3. Click Preview.
Thumbnails of the preview images appear in the Preview area. Images are cropped (scan areas are
specified) automatically according to the document size.
4. Set Destination.
5. Set Output Size.
6. Adjust the scan areas (cropping frames) and set Image corrections as required.
Note
You can correct each image separately. Select the frame you want to correct.
In thumbnail view, you can only create one cropping frame (scan area) per image.
To create multiple cropping frames in an image, scan in whole image view.
Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View
7. Select the images you want to scan.
Select the checkboxes of the images you want to scan.
Page 610 of 949 pages
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Page 611 of 949 pages
8. Click Scan.
Scanning Multiple Documents in Whole Image View
Follow these steps if thumbnails are not displayed correctly when previewed or if you want to scan
multiple documents as a single image.
Note
Positions of slanted documents are not corrected in whole image view.
1. After previewing images, click
(Thumbnail) on the Toolbar.
Switch to whole image view.
Note
When the whole image is displayed, the icon changes to
(Whole Image).
2. Adjust the scan areas (cropping frames).
Adjust the size and position of the cropping frame (scan area) on the preview image. You can also
create two or more cropping frames.
If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area
is specified, only the portion in the specified area will be scanned.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
3. Set Destination.
4. Set Output Size.
5. Set Image corrections as required.
6. Click Scan.
Areas framed by broken lines are scanned.
Scanning Multiple Documents at One Time with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Note
ScanGear's response after scanning can be specified in Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
on the Scan tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scan Tab
Page top
Page 612 of 949 pages
Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Page 613 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with ScanGear
(Scanner Driver)
The following sections provide you with tips and know-how on advanced scanning techniques involving
color/brightness adjustment, etc.
Sharpening out-of-focus photos, reducing dust and scratches, and correcting faded colors
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.)
Previewing and changing the color tone of the entire image to scan
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Brightening colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
Adjusting images that are too dark or bright, or too flat due to lack of contrast
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
Adjusting the color tone using histogram (a graph showing brightness distribution)
Adjusting Histogram
Adjusting the image brightness using tone curve (a graph of brightness balance)
Adjusting Tone Curve
Sharpening characters in text documents or reducing show-through effects
Setting Threshold
Page top
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correc... Page 614 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.)
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and
Scratches, Fading Correction, etc.)
The Image Settings functions in Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver) allow you to enhance
the outline of the subjects, reduce dust/scratches and correct faded colors when scanning images.
Setting Items
Click
(Arrow) of a function and select an item from the pull-down menu.
Important
Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches or faded colors. The color
tone may be adversely affected.
See "Image Settings " for details and precautions on each function.
Note
See "Scanning in Advanced Mode " to start ScanGear (scanner driver) in Advanced Mode tab and
scan.
Adjusting the image brightness and color tone
Set Image Adjustment to Auto, Photo, Magazine, Newspaper or Document according to the document
type.
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correc... Page 615 of 949 pages
None
Auto
Sharpening slightly out-of-focus images
Set Unsharp Mask to ON.
ON
OFF
Reducing gradations and stripe patterns
Set Descreen to ON.
ON
OFF
Note
"Moire" is a phenomenon where uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or
pictures printed with fine dots are scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect.
Reducing dust and scratches
Set Reduce Dust and Scratches to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of dust and scratches.
Medium
None
Correcting photos that have faded with time or due to colorcast
Set Fading Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of fading or colorcast.
None
Medium
Correcting Images (Unsharp Mask, Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correc... Page 616 of 949 pages
Reducing graininess
Set Grain Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of graininess.
None
Medium
Correcting backlit images
Set Backlight Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of backlight.
None
Medium
Correcting shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets
Set Gutter Shadow Correction to Low, Medium or High according to the degree of shadows.
None
Medium
Page top
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Page 617 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
You can preview color changes and reproduce natural colors by using the Color Pattern function in
ScanGear's Basic Mode tab.
Color Adjustment
Correct colors that have faded with time or due to colorcast. Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific
color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.
Click an arrow in Color Adjustment to emphasize the corresponding color.
Cyan & red, magenta & green and yellow & blue are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a
shade of gray when mixed). You can reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color
and increasing the complementary color.
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Page 618 of 949 pages
It is recommended that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust the colors so
that the portion turns white.
Preview image appears in the center. Preview image colors change as you adjust them.
Below is an example of correcting a bluish image.
Since Blue and Green are too strong, click the Yellow and Magenta arrows to correct.
Before
After
Note
Color adjustments are applied only to the scan area (cropping frame) or the frame selected in
thumbnail view.
You can select multiple frames or cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.
You can also select a color tone from the color pattern displayed on the left of the Color Pattern
screen.
You can also use this function to add a specific tint to an image. Increase the magenta to add a
warm tint, and increase the blue to add a cool tint.
Page top
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
Page 619 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
In ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab, click
(Saturation/Color Balance).
Note
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Saturation
Adjust the image's saturation (vividness). You can brighten colors that have faded with time, etc.
Move
(slider) under Saturation to the left to decrease the saturation (darken the image), and to the
right to increase the saturation (brighten the image). You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Saturation decreased
Original image
Saturation increased
Note
The natural color tone of the original image may be lost if you increase saturation too much.
Color Balance
Adjust images that have a colorcast. Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire
picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
Move
Page 620 of 949 pages
(slider) under Color Balance to the left or right to emphasize the corresponding color.
Cyan & Red
Magenta & Green
Yellow & Blue
These are complementary color pairs (each pair produces a shade of gray when mixed). You can
reproduce the natural colors of the scene by reducing the cast color and increasing the complementary
color.
It is usually difficult to correct the image completely by adjusting only one color pair. It is recommended
that you find a portion in the image where it should be white, and adjust all three color pairs so that the
portion turns white.
You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Below is an example of an image in which the "Cyan & Red" pair has been adjusted.
Cyan is increased
Red is increased
Page top
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
Page 621 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
In ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab, click
(Brightness/Contrast).
Note
Click
(Down arrow) to switch to detailed view. Click
(Up arrow) to return to the previous view.
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Channel
Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These
colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel."
Master
Adjust the Red, Green and Blue combined.
Red
Adjust the Red channel.
Green
Adjust the Green channel.
Blue
Adjust the Blue channel.
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
Page 622 of 949 pages
Note
Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale.
Brightness
Adjust the image brightness. Move
(slider) under Brightness to the left to darken and right to brighten
the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Darkened
Original image
Brightened
Note
Highlights may be lost if you brighten the image too much, and shadows may be lost if you darken
the image too much.
Contrast
"Contrast" is the degree of difference between the brighter and darker parts of an image. Increasing
contrast will increase the difference, thus sharpening the image. Decreasing contrast will decrease the
difference, thus softening the image.
Move
(slider) under Contrast to the left to decrease and right to increase the contrast of the image.
You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Decreased contrast
Original image
Increased contrast
Note
Increasing the contrast is effective in adding a three-dimensional feel to soft images. However,
shadows and highlights may be lost if you increase the contrast too much.
Page top
Adjusting Histogram
Page 623 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Histogram
Adjusting Histogram
In ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab, click
(Histogram).
Note
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Channel
Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These
colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel."
Master
Adjust the Red, Green and Blue combined.
Red
Adjust the Red channel.
Green
Adjust the Green channel.
Blue
Adjust the Blue channel.
Note
Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale.
Reading Histograms
You can open Histogram of a specified area for each Channel. The higher the Histogram peak, the more
data is distributed to that level.
Adjusting Histogram
Page 624 of 949 pages
(1) Bright area
(2) Dark area
(3) Whole image
More data is distributed to the
highlight side.
More data is distributed to the
Data is widely distributed between the
highlight and shadow.
shadow side.
Adjusting Histograms (Using the Slider)
Select a Channel, then move
set as the shadow or highlight.
- All parts to the left of
- The parts at
(Black-point Slider) or
(White-point Slider) to specify the level to be
(Black-point Slider) will be black (level 0).
(Mid-point Slider) will turn to the color exactly between the black-point and white-point.
- All parts to the right of
(White-point Slider) will turn white (level 255).
Image Adjustment is Auto by default. Adjustments shown below are automatically performed.
Moving the Black-point and White-point Sliders
Move the Black-point Slider or White-point Slider to adjust brightness.
Images with more data distributed to the highlight side
Move the Black-point Slider toward the highlight side.
Images with more data distributed to the shadow side
Move the White-point Slider toward the shadow side.
Images with widely distributed data
Move the Black-point Slider toward the highlight side, and White-point Slider toward the shadow side.
Adjusting Histogram
Page 625 of 949 pages
Moving the Mid-point Slider
Move the Mid-point Slider to specify the level to be set as the middle of the tonal range.
Images with more data distributed to the highlight side
Move the Mid-point Slider toward the highlight side.
Images with more data distributed to the shadow side
Move the Mid-point Slider toward the shadow side.
Adjusting Histograms (Using the Droppers)
When you select a Channel and click the Black-point, Mid-point or White-point Dropper, the mouse
pointer on the preview image changes to a dropper. Click a Dropper displayed below the histogram to
change the setting.
- The point clicked with
to 245).
(Black-point Dropper) will be the darkest point. You can also enter a value (0
- The point clicked with
a value (5 to 250).
(Mid-point Dropper) will be the middle of the tonal range. You can also enter
- The point clicked with
(10 to 255).
(White-point Dropper) will be the brightest point. You can also enter a value
- Click
(Dropper) for Gray Balance and click the area you want to adjust the color in the preview
image.
The clicked point will be set as the achromatic color reference, and the rest of the image is adjusted
accordingly. For instance, if snow in a photo appears bluish, click the bluish part to adjust the whole
image and reproduce natural colors.
Page top
Adjusting Tone Curve
Page 626 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Adjusting Tone Curve
Adjusting Tone Curve
In ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab, click
(Tone Curve Settings).
Note
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Channel
Each dot of an image is a mixture of Red, Green and Blue in various proportions (gradation). These
colors can be adjusted individually as a "channel."
Master
Adjust the Red, Green and Blue combined.
Red
Adjust the Red channel.
Green
Adjust the Green channel.
Blue
Adjust the Blue channel.
Note
Only Grayscale will be displayed in Channel when Color Mode is Grayscale.
Reading Tone Curves
With ScanGear (scanner driver), scanning images via a scanner is the input, and displaying to a monitor
is the output. "Tone Curve" shows the balance of tone input and output for each Channel.
Adjusting Tone Curve
Adjusting Tone Curve
In Select Tone Curve, select a tone curve from No correction, Overexposure, Underexposure, High
contrast, Reverse the negative/positive image and Edit custom curve.
No correction (No adjustment)
Overexposure (Convex curve)
The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the highlight of the output side, resulting in a
bright-toned image when viewed on a monitor.
Underexposure (Concave curve)
The midtone data of the input side is stretched toward the shadow of the output side, resulting in a darktoned image when viewed on a monitor.
High contrast (S curve)
The highlight and shadow of the input side are enhanced, resulting in a high-contrast image.
Reverse the negative/positive image (Downward-sloping line)
The input and output sides are reversed, resulting in a negative-positive inverted image.
Page 627 of 949 pages
Adjusting Tone Curve
Page 628 of 949 pages
Edit custom curve
You can drag specific points on the Tone Curve to freely adjust the brightness of the corresponding
areas.
Page top
Setting Threshold
Page 629 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Correcting Images and Adjusting Colors with
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) > Setting Threshold
Setting Threshold
The brightness of color and grayscale images is expressed in a value between 0 and 255. However, in
creating black and white images, all colors are mapped to either black (0) or white (255). "Threshold" is
the borderline value that determines a color as black or white. By adjusting the threshold level, you can
sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers.
This function is available when Color Mode is Black and White.
In ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab, click
(Threshold).
Note
Click Defaults to reset all adjustments in the current window.
Adjusting Threshold
Move
(slider) to the right to increase the threshold value and thus increase the black areas. Move the
slider to the left to decrease the value and thus increase the white areas. You can also enter a value (0 to
255).
Page top
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
Page 630 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens
The following sections describe ScanGear's screens and functions, and how to use ScanGear (scanner
driver).
Basic Mode Tab
Advanced Mode Tab
Input Settings
Output Settings
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Buttons
Auto Scan Mode Tab
Preferences Dialog Box
Scanner Tab
Preview Tab
Scan Tab
Color Settings Tab
Page top
Basic Mode Tab
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Basic Mode Tab
Basic Mode Tab
This mode allows you to scan easily by following the on-screen steps.
This section describes the settings and functions available in Basic Mode.
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
(2) Toolbar
(3) Preview Area
Note
The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened.
Settings and Operation Buttons
Select Source
Photo(Color)
Scan color photos.
Magazine(Color)
Scan color magazines.
Newspaper(Grayscale)
Scan text and line drawings in black and white.
Document(Grayscale)
Scan documents and photos in black and white.
Select this mode to create high-resolution black and white images.
Note
When you select a document type, colors are adjusted based on the Unsharp Mask function or
document type.
If you select Magazine(Color), the Descreen function will be active.
Display Preview Image
Page 631 of 949 pages
Basic Mode Tab
Preview
Performs a trial scan.
Note
When using the machine for the first time, scanner calibration starts automatically. Wait a while
until the preview image appears.
Destination
Select what you want to do with the scanned image.
Print
Select this to print the scanned image on a printer.
Image display
Select this to view the scanned image on a monitor.
OCR
Select this to use the scanned image with OCR software.
OCR software is software that converts text scanned as an image into text data that can be
edited in word processors and other programs.
Output Size
Select an output size.
Output size options vary by the item selected in Destination.
Flexible
Allows you to freely adjust the cropping frames.
In thumbnail view
Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is
displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is
displayed, each frame is scanned individually.
In whole image view
When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a
cropping frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned.
Paper Size (L, A4, etc.)
Select an output paper size. The portion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the size of
the selected paper size. You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge/reduce it while maintaining
the aspect ratio.
Monitor Size (1024 x 768 pixels, etc.)
Select an output size in pixels.
Page 632 of 949 pages
Basic Mode Tab
A cropping frame of the selected monitor size will be displayed and the portion within the
cropping frame will be scanned. You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge/reduce it while
maintaining the aspect ratio.
Add/Delete...
Opens the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, in which you can specify custom output sizes.
You can select this option when Destination is Print or Image display.
In the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, you can specify multiple output sizes and save
them at one time. Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected,
along with the predefined items.
Add
To add a size, enter Output Size Name, Width and Height, then click Add. For Unit, you can
select mm or inches when Destination is Print but you can only select pixels when Destination
is Image display. The name of the added size appears in Output Size List. Click Save to save
the items listed in Output Size List.
Delete
To delete an item, select it in Output Size List and click Delete. Click Save to save the items
listed in Output Size List.
Important
You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels.
Note
Save up to 10 items.
An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value
within the setting range.
Note
Whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image can be specified
on the Preview tab of the Preferences dialog box. See Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in
"Preview Tab ."
Invert aspect ratio
This button is available when Output Size is set to anything but Flexible.
Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.
Adjust cropping frames
You can adjust the scan area within the Preview area.
If an area is not specified, the document will be scanned at the document size (Auto Crop). If an area
is specified, only the portion in the cropping frame will be scanned.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Page 633 of 949 pages
Basic Mode Tab
Image corrections
Fading correction
Corrects and scans photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast.
Backlight correction
Corrects photos that have been shot against light.
Gutter shadow correction
Corrects shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.
Important
For precautions on using this function, see Gutter Shadow Correction in " Image Settings
" (Advanced Mode tab).
Color Pattern...
Allows you to adjust the image's overall color. You can correct colors that have faded due to
colorcast, etc. and reproduce natural colors while previewing color changes.
Adjusting Colors Using a Color Pattern
Perform Scan
Scan
Scanning starts.
Note
When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
Preferences...
The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan/preview settings.
Preferences Dialog Box
Close
Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).
Toolbar
Toolbar
You can adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.
In thumbnail view
In whole image view
Page 634 of 949 pages
Basic Mode Tab
Page 635 of 949 pages
(Thumbnail)/
(Whole image view)
Switches the view in the Preview area.
Preview Area
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
- The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
- The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.
- The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
- The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Auto Crop)
Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in
the Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are cropping
area within the cropping frame.
(Check All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view.
(Uncheck All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Deselects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view.
(Select All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the image in thumbnail view and the image will be outlined in blue.
(Select All Cropping Frames)
This button is available when there are two or more cropping frames.
All cropping frames will be displayed in thick broken lines. The settings will be applied to all the
cropping frames.
(Remove Cropping Frame)
Removes the selected cropping frame.
(Information)
Displays the version of ScanGear (scanner driver) and the current scan settings (document
type, etc.).
(Open Guide)
This page appears.
Preview Area
Preview Area
This is where a trial image is displayed after you click Preview. You can also check the results of the
settings (image corrections, color adjustments, etc.) made in " Settings and Operation Buttons ."
When
(Thumbnail) is displayed on the Toolbar
Thumbnails of images cropped to the document size are displayed. Only the images with the
Basic Mode Tab
Page 636 of 949 pages
checkbox selected will be scanned.
Note
When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status.
- Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied.
- Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and
Selected Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while
pressing the Ctrl key.
- Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.
(Frame Advance) at the bottom of
Double-click a frame to zoom in on the image. Click
the screen to display the previous or next frame. Double-click the frame again to return the
display to its non-magnified state.
When
(Whole Image) is displayed on the Toolbar
Items on the Platen are displayed as a single image. All portions in the cropping frames will be
scanned.
Note
You can specify the scan area (cropping frame) on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, you can
only create one cropping frame per image. In whole image view, you can create multiple cropping
frames.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Related Topic
Basic Mode Tab
Page 637 of 949 pages
Scanning in Basic Mode
Page top
Advanced Mode Tab
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Advanced Mode Tab
Advanced Mode Tab
This mode allows you to make advanced scan settings such as the color mode, output resolution,
image brightness and color tone.
This section describes the settings and functions available in Advanced Mode.
(1) Settings and Operation Buttons
(2) Toolbar
(3) Preview Area
Note
The displayed items vary by document type and how the screen was opened.
Settings and Operation Buttons
Favorite Settings
You can name and save a group of settings (Input Settings, Output Settings, Image Settings and
Color Adjustment Buttons) on Advanced Mode tab, and load it as required. It is convenient to save a
group of settings if you will be using it repeatedly. You can also use this to reload the default
settings.
Select Add/Delete... from the pull-down menu and the Add/Delete Favorite Settings dialog box
opens.
Page 638 of 949 pages
Advanced Mode Tab
Page 639 of 949 pages
Enter Setting Name and click Add. The name appears in Favorite Settings List.
When you click Save, the item appears in the Favorite Settings list and can be selected, along with
the predefined items.
To delete an item, select it in Favorite Settings List and click Delete. Click Save to save settings
displayed in Favorite Settings List.
Note
You can set Add/Delete... in Favorite Settings after preview.
Save up to 10 items.
Input Settings
Specify the input settings such as the document type and size.
Input Settings
Output Settings
Specify the output settings such as the output resolution and size.
Output Settings
Image Settings
Enable/disable various image correction functions.
Image Settings
Color Adjustment Buttons
These buttons can be used to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color tones. You
can adjust the image's overall brightness or contrast, and adjust its highlight and shadow values
(histogram) or balance (tone curve).
Color Adjustment Buttons
Zoom
Zooms in on an image or the portion within the cropping frame. When the image is zoomed in,
Zoom changes to Undo. Click Undo to return the display to its non-magnified state.
In thumbnail view
Zooms in on the selected image. Click
display the previous or next frame.
(Frame Advance) at the bottom of the screen to
Note
You can also zoom in on an image by double-clicking the frame. Double-click the frame again
to return the display to its non-magnified state.
In whole image view
Rescans the portion within the cropping frame at higher magnification.
Note
Zoom rescans the image and displays high-resolution image in Preview.
(Enlarge/Reduce) on the Toolbar zooms in on the preview image quickly. However, the
resolution of the displayed image will be low.
Preview
Advanced Mode Tab
Page 640 of 949 pages
Performs a trial scan.
Scan
Starts scanning.
Note
When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
When scanning is completed, a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may open.
Follow the prompt to complete. For details, see Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in "
Scan Tab" (Preferences dialog box).
It will take time to process the images if the total size of the scanned images exceeds a certain
size. In that case, a warning message appears. It is recommended that you reduce the total
size. To continue, scan in whole image view.
Preferences...
The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan/preview settings.
Preferences Dialog Box
Close
Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).
Toolbar
Toolbar
You can adjust or rotate preview images. The buttons displayed on the Toolbar vary by view.
In thumbnail view
In whole image view
(Thumbnail)/
(Whole image view)
Advanced Mode Tab
Switches the view in the Preview area.
Preview Area
(Clear)
Click this button to delete the preview image.
It also resets the Toolbar and color adjustment settings.
(Crop)
Allows you to specify the scan area by dragging the mouse.
(Move Image)
If an enlarged image is too large to fit in the Preview area, you can click this button and drag the
image across the screen until the part you want to see is displayed. You can also move the
image using the scroll bars.
(Enlarge/Reduce)
Click this button then click on the image to enlarge it (zoom in). Right-click on the image to
reduce it (zoom out).
(Rotate Left)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
- The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
- The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Rotate Right)
Rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise.
- The result will be reflected in the scanned image.
- The image returns to its original state when you preview again.
(Auto Crop)
Displays and adjusts the cropping frame automatically to the size of the document displayed in
the Preview area. The scan area is reduced every time you click this button if there are cropping
area within the cropping frame.
(Check All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view.
(Uncheck All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Deselects the checkbox of the image in thumbnail view.
(Select All Frames)
This button is available when two or more frames are displayed.
Selects the image in thumbnail view and the image will be outlined in blue.
(Select All Cropping Frames)
This button is available when there are two or more cropping frames.
All cropping frames will be displayed in thick broken lines. The settings will be applied to all the
cropping frames.
(Remove Cropping Frame)
Removes the selected cropping frame.
(Information)
Page 641 of 949 pages
Advanced Mode Tab
Displays the version of ScanGear (scanner driver) and the current scan settings (document
type, etc.).
(Open Guide)
This page appears.
Preview Area
Preview Area
This is where a trial image is displayed after you click Preview. You can also check the results of the
settings (image corrections, color adjustments, etc.) made in " Settings and Operation Buttons ."
When
(Thumbnail) is displayed on the Toolbar
Thumbnails of images cropped to the document size are displayed. Only the images with the
checkbox selected will be scanned.
Note
When multiple images are previewed, different outlines indicate different selection status.
- Focus Frame (thick blue outline): The displayed settings will be applied.
- Selected Frame (thin blue outline): The settings will be applied to the Focus Frame and
Selected Frames simultaneously. You can select multiple images by clicking them while
pressing the Ctrl key.
- Unselected (no outline): The settings will not be applied.
When
(Whole Image) is displayed on the Toolbar
Items on the Platen are displayed as a single image. All portions in the cropping frames will be
scanned.
Page 642 of 949 pages
Advanced Mode Tab
Page 643 of 949 pages
Note
You can specify the scan area (cropping frame) on the displayed image. In thumbnail view, you can
only create one cropping frame per image. In whole image view, you can create multiple cropping
frames.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Related Topic
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Page top
Input Settings
Page 644 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Input
Settings
Input Settings
Input Settings allows you to set the following items:
Select Source
The type of document to be scanned is displayed.
Paper Size
Select the size of the document to be scanned. This setting is available in whole film image view only.
When you select a size, the Preview area size changes accordingly.
Important
Some applications have a limit to the amount of scan data they can receive. ScanGear (scanner
driver) can scan data that is of:
- 21000 pixels x 30000 pixels or less
If you change Paper Size after previewing, the preview image will be deleted.
Note
If you are not sure which size you should select for Paper Size, set Paper Size to Full Platen, then
measure the size of the document and enter the values into
(Width) and
(Height).
Color Mode
Select how to scan the document.
Color
Select this mode to scan color documents or to create color images. This mode renders the
image in 256 levels (8 bit) of R(ed), G(reen), and B(lue).
Grayscale
Select this mode to scan black and white photos, or to create black and white images. This mode
Input Settings
Page 645 of 949 pages
renders the image in 256 levels (8 bit) of black and white.
Black and White
Select this mode to scan photos and documents in black and white. This mode renders the
image in black and white. The contrast in the image is divided at certain levels (threshold level)
into black and white and is rendered in two colors. The threshold level can be set with
(Threshold).
Input Size
In thumbnail view, the cropped document size is displayed after preview.
In whole image view, the Paper Size is displayed before preview, and the cropping frame (scan area)
size is displayed after preview.
You can adjust the cropping frame size by entering the values into
Click
(Keep Aspect Ratio) and change it to
specify the cropping frame size.
(Width) and
(Height).
(Locked) to maintain the aspect ratio when you
Important
Input size settings are available only when Output Size in Output Settings is Flexible. If you select
a size other than Flexible, a cropping frame calculated from Output Size and Output Resolution is
displayed, and its aspect ratio is fixed.
Note
The values you can enter will be within the range of the selected document size. The minimum
size is 96 pixels x 96 pixels when Output Resolution is 600 dpi, scaled at 100%.
When Auto Crop is performed in whole image view, the aspect ratio will not be maintained since
the size will be prioritized.
See "Adjusting Cropping Frames" for details on cropping frames.
Page top
Output Settings
Page 646 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Output Settings
Output Settings
Output Settings allows you to set the following items:
Output Resolution
Select the resolution to scan at.
The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image.
Select a resolution from the options displayed by clicking the button, or enter a value within the range
of 25 dpi to 19200 dpi (in 1 dpi increments).
Resolution
Output Size
Select an output size.
Select Flexible to set custom sizes or select a size for printing or displaying. Select Add/Delete... to set
custom size and save it as a new output size option.
Flexible
You can specify the output resolution and scale, and adjust the cropping frame.
In thumbnail view
Drag the mouse over a thumbnail to display a cropping frame. When a cropping frame is
displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned. When no cropping frame is
displayed, each frame is scanned individually.
In whole image view
When no cropping frame is displayed, the entire Preview area will be scanned. When a cropping
frame is displayed, the portion within the cropping frame will be scanned.
Note
To enlarge/reduce the scanned image, enter values into
(Width) and
(Height) in
Output Settings
Output Settings or specify a value (by 1%) for %. The maximum value available for %
depends on the Output Resolution. % can be specified for up to 19200 dpi (the maximum
available output resolution).
Paper Size (L, etc.) & Monitor Size (1024 x 768 pixels, etc.)
Width, height and scale cannot be specified. The preview image will be cropped according to the
selected output size and resolution. The portion within the cropping frame will be scanned at the
size of the selected paper/monitor size. You can drag the cropping frame to enlarge, reduce or
move it while maintaining the aspect ratio.
Add/Delete...
Opens the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, in which you can specify custom output sizes.
In the Add/Delete the Output Size dialog box, you can specify multiple output sizes and save them
at one time. Saved items will be registered to the Output Size list and can be selected, along with
the predefined items.
Add
To add a size, select Print or Image display for Destination, then enter Output Size Name, Width,
and Height then click Add. The name of the added size appears in Output Size List.
Click Save to save the items listed in Output Size List.
Delete
To delete an item, select it in Output Size List and click Delete. Click Save to save the items listed
in Output Size List.
Important
You cannot delete predefined output sizes such as A4 and 1024 x 768 pixels.
Note
Save up to 10 items for each destination.
An error message appears when you enter a value outside the setting range. Enter a value
within the range displayed in the message.
Unit varies by Destination. For Print, select mm or inches. For Image display, the unit is
pixels.
Note
See "Adjusting Cropping Frames" for details on cropping frames.
Whether or how the cropping frame is initially displayed on a preview image can be specified on
the Preview tab of the Preferences dialog box. See Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in "
Preview Tab ."
(Switch Aspect Ratio)
Click this button to rotate the cropping frame. Click again to return it to the original orientation.
Data Size
An image file is created when the preview image is scanned. Its size when saved in BMP format is
displayed.
Note
When the file size exceeds a certain size, the value appears in red. In that case, a warning
Page 647 of 949 pages
Output Settings
Page 648 of 949 pages
message appears when you click Scan. It is recommended that you adjust the settings to reduce
Data Size. To continue, scan in whole image view.
Page top
Image Settings
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Image Settings
Image Settings
Important
Do not apply these functions to images without moire, dust/scratches or faded colors. The color
tone may be adversely affected.
Image correction results may not be reflected in the preview image.
Note
Selectable settings depend on color mode settings.
Scanning may take longer when you use Image Settings.
Image Settings allows you to set the following items:
Image Adjustment
When Image Adjustment is set, the brightness of the specified portion of the image is optimized.
Images can be adjusted according to the automatically detected document type or the specified
document type. The result of the adjustment will be reflected in the entire image. This setting is Auto by
default.
None
Image Adjustment will not be applied.
Auto
Applies Image Adjustment by automatically detecting the document type. It is recommended that
you normally select this setting.
Photo
Select this to apply Image Adjustment to photos.
Magazine
Page 649 of 949 pages
Image Settings
Select this to apply Image Adjustment to magazines.
Newspaper
Select this to apply Image Adjustment to newspapers.
Document
Select this to apply Image Adjustment to text documents.
Important
You can set Image Adjustment after preview.
You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Note
If the image is not adjusted properly with Auto, specify the document type.
The color tone may change from the source image due to the Image Adjustment. In that case, set
Image Adjustment to None.
Unsharp Mask
When this is set to ON, the outline of the subjects is emphasized to sharpen the image. This setting is
ON by default.
Descreen
Printed photos and pictures are displayed as a collection of fine dots. "Moire" is a phenomenon where
uneven gradation or a stripe pattern appears when such photos or pictures printed with fine dots are
scanned. Descreen is the function for reducing this moire effect. This setting is OFF by default.
Note
Even if Descreen is set to ON, some moire effects may remain if Unsharp Mask is set to ON. In
that case, set Unsharp Mask to OFF.
Selecting Magazine(Color) in Select Source in Basic Mode tab has the same effect as setting
Descreen to ON in Advanced Mode tab.
Reduce Dust and Scratches
Scanned photos may contain white dots caused by dust or scratches. Use this function to reduce such
noise. This setting is None by default.
None
Dust and scratches will not be reduced.
Low
Select this to reduce small dust particles and scratches. Large ones may remain.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this to reduce small/large dust particles and scratches. Evidence of the reduction process
may remain and may also remove delicate parts of the image.
Important
This function may not be effective for some types of photos.
Note
It is recommended that you select None when scanning printed materials.
Fading Correction
Use this function to correct photos that have faded with time or have a colorcast. Colorcast is a
phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire picture due to the weather or ambient strong
colors. This setting is None by default.
None
Page 650 of 949 pages
Image Settings
Page 651 of 949 pages
Fading correction will not be applied.
Low
Select this to correct a small amount of fading and colorcast.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this to correct a large amount of fading and colorcast. This can affect the tone of the image.
Important
You can set Fading Correction after preview.
Fading Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small.
You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Grain Correction
Use this function to reduce graininess (roughness) in photos taken with high-speed or sensitized film.
This setting is None by default.
None
Graininess will not be reduced.
Low
Select this when the photo is slightly grainy.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this when the photo is very grainy. This can affect the gradation and sharpness of the
image.
Important
Grain Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small.
Backlight Correction
Use this function to correct photos that have been shot against light.
When you change the Backlight Correction setting, the result will be reflected in the preview image.
This setting is None by default.
None
Backlight correction will not be applied.
Low
Select this to correct slightly backlit photos. This will not affect the image contrast.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this to correct strongly backlit photos. This can affect the image contrast.
Important
You can set Backlight Correction after preview.
You can set this setting when Recommended is selected on the Color Settings tab of the
Preferences dialog box.
Backlight Correction may not be effective if the scan area is too small.
Note
Noise patterns may appear when Backlight Correction is applied. Applying Grain Correction and
Image Settings
Page 652 of 949 pages
setting Unsharp Mask to OFF may reduce the noise patterns.
Gutter Shadow Correction
Use this function to correct shadows that appear between pages when scanning open booklets.
When you set the Gutter Shadow Correction setting in the preview image, the result will be reflected.
Preview the effects before scanning, as results vary depending on the type of document and how it is
pressed.
Unclear or blurred text/lines caused by curved pages are not corrected. This setting is None by default.
None
Gutter shadow will not be corrected.
Low
Select this when the effect level is too strong with the medium setting.
Medium
It is recommended that you normally select this setting.
High
Select this when the effect level is too weak with the medium setting.
Important
Do not place items that weigh 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg) or more on the Platen. Also, do not press on the
document with a force exceeding 4.4 lbs (2.0 kg). If you press heavily, the scanner may not work
correctly or you might break the glass.
Align the document with the edge of the Platen. If not, the shadow will not be corrected properly.
Shadows may not be corrected properly depending on the document. If the page background is
not white, shadows may not be detected correctly or may not be detected at all.
While scanning, press down on the spine with the same amount of pressure you used to preview
the scan. If the binding part is not even, the shadow will not be corrected properly.
How to place the document depends on your model and the document to be scanned.
Note
Cover the document with black cloth if white spots, streaks, or colored patterns appear in scan
results due to ambient light entering between the document and the Platen.
If the shadow is not corrected properly, adjust the cropping frame on the preview image.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Page top
Color Adjustment Buttons
Page 653 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Color
Adjustment Buttons
Color Adjustment Buttons
The Color Adjustment Buttons allow you to make fine corrections to the image brightness and color
tones. You can adjust the image's overall brightness or contrast, and adjust its highlight and shadow
values (histogram) or balance (tone curve).
Important
The Color Adjustment Buttons are not available when you select Color Matching on the Color
Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Note
Selectable settings depend on color mode settings.
When you adjust the image via the Color Adjustment Buttons, the results will be reflected in the
preview image.
Click a Color Adjustment Button to set the following items:
(Saturation/Color Balance)
Adjust the vividness and color tone of the image. Use this function to brighten colors that have faded
with time or due to colorcast. Colorcast is a phenomenon where a specific color affects the entire
picture due to the weather or ambient strong colors.
Adjusting Saturation and Color Balance
(Brightness/Contrast)
Adjust the brightness and contrast of the image. If the image is too dark or too bright, or if the image
quality is flat due to lack of contrast, you can adjust the levels of brightness and contrast.
Adjusting Brightness and Contrast
Color Adjustment Buttons
Page 654 of 949 pages
(Histogram)
A histogram allows you to see the data concentration at each brightness level of an image. You can
specify the darkest level (shadow) and brightest level (highlight) within an image, cut the levels and
expand the middle of the tonal range of the image.
Adjusting Histogram
(Tone Curve Settings)
Adjust the brightness of an image by selecting the type of graph (tone curve) showing the balance of
tone input and output. You can make fine adjustments to the brightness of a specific area.
Adjusting Tone Curve
(Final Review)
Make a final check of color adjustments. The final synthesized tone curve and the histogram derived
from the subsequent image processing will be displayed. There are no settings to make in this
screen.
For a color image, select a color in Channel to check either Red, Green or Blue, or select Master to
check three colors together.
If you place the cursor on the preview image, the portion will be enlarged and its RGB values (only
L when Color Mode is Grayscale) before and after the adjustments will be displayed.
(Threshold)
Set the boundary (threshold) at which black and white are divided. By adjusting the threshold level, you
can sharpen text in a document or reduce show-through in newspapers.
Setting Threshold
Custom
You can name and save a set of tone curve and threshold settings of the Color Adjustment Buttons.
Select Add/Delete... from the pull-down menu. When Color Mode is set to anything but Black and
White, the Add/Delete Tone Curve Settings dialog box opens. When Color Mode is Black and White,
the Add/Delete Threshold Settings dialog box opens.
Color Adjustment Buttons
Page 655 of 949 pages
Enter Setting Name and click Add. The name appears in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold
Settings List.
Click Save to save.
You can load and apply the saved tone curve/threshold settings to a preview image. To load the
settings, select the saved item from the pull-down menu.
To delete an item, select it in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List and click Delete.
Click Save to save settings displayed in Tone Curve Settings List or Threshold Settings List.
Note
Save up to 20 items.
Defaults
Reset all adjustments (saturation/color balance, brightness/contrast, histogram and tone curve).
Page top
Auto Scan Mode Tab
Page 656 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Auto
Scan Mode Tab
Auto Scan Mode Tab
This mode allows you to scan easily by simply placing documents on the Platen and clicking a button.
In Auto Scan Mode, documents are automatically detected. You do not need to specify cropping frames
or make image corrections.
Supported Documents
Photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text documents and CD/DVD.
Important
The following types of documents cannot be scanned correctly. In that case, specify the document
type or size on the Basic Mode tab or the Advanced Mode tab and scan again.
- Documents other than photos, postcards, business cards, magazines, newspapers, text
documents and CD/DVD
- Text documents smaller than 2L (5 inches x 7 inches) (127 mm x 178 mm), such as paperback
pages with the spine cut off
- Documents printed on thin white paper
- Long narrow documents such as panoramic photos
Scanning in Basic Mode
Scanning in Advanced Mode
Reflective CD/DVD labels may not be scanned properly.
Place documents correctly according to the type of document to be scanned. Otherwise,
documents may not be scanned correctly.
See "Placing Documents " for details on how to place documents.
Note
Scan from the " Basic Mode Tab " or "Advanced Mode Tab " to reduce moire.
Placing Documents
"Placing Documents " appears.
View scanned images
Select this checkbox to display the thumbnails of scanned images in a different window.
Auto Scan Mode Tab
Page 657 of 949 pages
Scan
Scanning starts.
Note
When scanning starts, the progress will be displayed. Click Cancel to cancel the scan.
When scanning is completed, a dialog box prompting you to select the next action may open.
Follow the prompt to complete. For details, see Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning in "
Scan Tab" (Preferences dialog box).
Instructions
This page appears.
Preferences...
The Preferences dialog box opens and you can make scan/preview settings.
Preferences Dialog Box
Close
Closes ScanGear (scanner driver).
Related Topic
Scanning in Auto Scan Mode
Page top
Preferences Dialog Box
Page 658 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Preferences Dialog Box
Preferences Dialog Box
Click Preferences... in the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen to open Preferences dialog box.
In the Preferences dialog box, you can make advanced settings to ScanGear (scanner driver) functions
via the Scanner, Preview, Scan and Color Settings tabs.
Scanner Tab
Allows you to specify a folder to save images temporarily and a music file to play during or at the end of a
scan.
Scanner Tab
Preview Tab
Allows you to select what to do with Preview when ScanGear (scanner driver) is started and how to
display cropping frames after previewing images. You can also select the cropping size for thumbnails of
scanned documents.
Preview Tab
Scan Tab
Allows you to select what to do with ScanGear (scanner driver) after scanning images.
Scan Tab
Color Settings Tab
Allows you to select how to adjust color, and specify the monitor gamma value.
Color Settings Tab
Page top
Scanner Tab
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Scanner Tab
Scanner Tab
On the Scanner tab, you can specify the following settings.
Quiet Mode
Select this checkbox to reduce scanner sound by slowing down the scanner head when previewing or
scanning documents. This checkbox is not selected by default.
Note
Scanning takes longer than usual when you enable this function.
Select Folder Where Temporary Files are Saved
Displays the folder in which to save images temporarily. To change the folder, click Browse... to specify
another one.
Sound Settings
You can set the machine to play music during/at the end of a scan.
Select the Play Music During Scanning or Play Sound When Scanning is Completed checkbox, then
click Browse... and specify a sound file.
You can specify the following files.
- MIDI file (*.mid, *.rmi, *.midi)
- Audio file (*.wav, *.aif, *.aiff)
- MP3 file (*.mp3)
Calibration Settings
When you set Execute at Every Scan to ON, the scanner will be calibrated every time before previewing
and scanning, to reproduce correct color tones in scanned images.
Note
Even when Execute at Every Scan is set to OFF, the scanner may be calibrated automatically in
some cases (such as immediately after you turn the machine on).
Calibration may take time depending on your computer.
Page 659 of 949 pages
Scanner Tab
Page 660 of 949 pages
Page top
Preview Tab
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens >
Preview Tab
Preview Tab
On the Preview tab, you can specify the following settings.
Preview at Start of ScanGear
Select what to do with Preview when ScanGear (scanner driver) is started. Display Saved Preview
Image is selected by default.
Automatically Execute Preview
ScanGear (scanner driver) will automatically start previewing at startup.
Display Saved Preview Image
The previously previewed image will be displayed.
The Color Adjustment Button settings, the Toolbar settings, and the Advanced Mode tab settings
are also saved.
None
No preview image will be displayed at startup.
Note
Select None if you do not want to save the preview image.
Cropping Frame on Previewed Images
Select how to display cropping frames after previewing images. Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed
Images is selected by default.
Execute Auto Cropping on Previewed Images
The cropping frame will automatically be displayed in the document size after previewing.
Display the Last Frame on Previewed Images
A cropping frame of the same size as the last used cropping frame will be displayed after
previewing.
None
Page 661 of 949 pages
Preview Tab
Page 662 of 949 pages
No cropping frame will be displayed after previewing.
Cropping Size for Thumbnail View
Select the cropping size for thumbnails of scanned documents. Standard is selected by default.
Larger
Displays 105% (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size.
Standard
The standard size.
Smaller
Displays 95% (in width and height) of the area displayed for the standard size.
Note
When you change the Cropping Size for Thumbnail View setting, the preview images will be
refreshed and cropped to the new size. As the preview images are refreshed, the color
adjustments and other settings applied to them are reset.
Page top
Scan Tab
Page 663 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Scan
Tab
Scan Tab
On the Scan tab, you can specify the following settings.
Status of ScanGear dialog after scanning
Select what to do with ScanGear (scanner driver) after scanning images. Close ScanGear
automatically is selected by default.
Close ScanGear automatically
Select this to return to the original application when scanning is completed.
Do not close ScanGear automatically
Select this to return to the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen for another scan when scanning is
completed.
Display the dialog to select next action
Select this to open a screen and select what to do when scanning is completed.
Note
Even if Do not close ScanGear automatically or Display the dialog to select next action is set,
some applications may not support it.
Page top
Color Settings Tab
Page 664 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screens > Color
Settings Tab
Color Settings Tab
On the Color Settings tab, you can specify the following settings.
Color Adjustment
Select either of the following. Recommended is selected by default.
This function is available when Color Mode is Color or Grayscale.
Recommended
Select this to vividly reproduce the tone of a document on the screen. It is recommended that you
normally select this setting.
Color Matching
Select this to automatically match the scanner, monitor and color printer colors, thus reducing
time and trouble to manually match the monitor and printer colors.
Color Adjustment Buttons will be disabled.
This function is available when Color Mode is Color.
- Source(Scanner): Select scanner profile.
- Target: Select target profile.
- Monitor: Select this to display preview image with optimum correction for monitor.
- Defaults: Returns to the default Color Matching settings.
None
Select this to disable color correction provided by ScanGear (scanner driver).
Note
Color Matching is available when ScanGear (scanner driver), monitor, color managementcompliant application (such as Adobe Photoshop) and printer are set up correctly.
Refer to the corresponding manual for the monitor, printer and application settings.
Monitor Gamma
By setting the gamma value of a monitor, you can adjust the input data to the brightness
characteristics of the monitor. Adjust the value if your monitor's gamma value does not match the
Color Settings Tab
Page 665 of 949 pages
default value set in ScanGear (scanner driver), and the colors of the original image are not accurately
reflected in the monitor.
Click Defaults to return to the default Monitor Gamma value (2.20).
Note
Refer to the manual of your monitor to check its gamma value. If it is not written in the manual,
contact the manufacturer.
Page top
Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning
Page 666 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning
Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning
Adjusting the cropping frame (scan area)
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Selecting the best resolution
Resolution
Learning about file formats
File Formats
Learning about Color Matching
Color Matching
Matching the colors between the document and monitor
See Monitor Gamma in the following section.
Color Settings Tab
Page top
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Page 667 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning >
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Adjusting Cropping Frames
You can specify the scan area by creating a cropping frame on the image displayed in the Preview area
of the ScanGear (scanner driver) screen. When you click Scan, only the portion within the cropping frame
will be scanned and passed to the application.
Cropping Frame Types
(1) Focus Cropping Frame (rotating thick broken lines)
The settings in Basic Mode or Advanced Mode will be applied.
(2) Selected Cropping Frame (stationary thick broken lines)
The settings will be applied to the Focus Cropping Frame and Selected Cropping Frames
simultaneously. You can select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.
(3) Unselected Cropping Frame (stationary thin broken lines)
The settings will not be applied.
Note
Focus Cropping Frame and Selected Cropping Frames are displayed in whole image view.
Initial Cropping Frame
In thumbnail view
Cropping frame is not displayed initially. Drag the mouse over a frame to create a cropping frame.
In whole image view
A cropping frame (Focus Cropping Frame) is displayed automatically around the preview image
according to the document size. You can also create a cropping frame by dragging the mouse in the
Preview area.
Note
Cropping frames are set according to the document size (Auto Crop) by default. For details, see
Cropping Frame on Previewed Images in " Preview Tab " (Preferences dialog box).
Adjusting a Cropping Frame
(Arrow) when it is positioned over a cropping frame. If you
The cursor will change into
click and drag the mouse in the direction of the arrow, the cropping frame will expand or contract
accordingly.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Page 668 of 949 pages
(Crosshair arrow) when it is positioned within a cropping frame. Click
The cursor will change into
and drag the mouse to move the entire cropping frame.
Note
In Advanced Mode, you can specify the cropping frame size by entering the values into
(Width)
(Height) in Input Settings.
and
Input Settings
(Switch Aspect Ratio). However,
You can rotate a cropping frame 90 degrees by clicking
(Switch Aspect Ratio) is not available when Output Size is Flexible.
Creating Multiple Cropping Frames
In thumbnail view
You can only create one cropping frame per image.
In whole image view
Click and drag the mouse in a space outside the existing cropping frame to create a new cropping frame
in the Preview area. The new cropping frame will be the Focus Cropping Frame, and the old cropping
frame will be the Unselected Cropping Frame.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Page 669 of 949 pages
You can create multiple cropping frames and apply different scan settings to each cropping frame.
You can also select multiple cropping frames by clicking them while pressing the Ctrl key.
If you select multiple cropping frames and change the settings on a tab at the right of ScanGear (scanner
driver), the settings will be applied to all the selected cropping frames.
When you create a new cropping frame, it retains the settings of the latest cropping frame.
Note
Create up to 12 cropping frames.
Scanning takes longer than usual when multiple cropping frames are selected.
Deleting Cropping Frames
In thumbnail view
To delete a cropping frame, click an area outside the cropping frame on an image.
In whole image view
To delete a cropping frame, select it and click
Alternatively, press the Delete key.
(Remove Cropping Frame) on the Toolbar.
When there are multiple cropping frames, all the selected cropping frames (Focus Cropping Frame and
Selected Cropping Frames) are deleted simultaneously.
Page top
Resolution
Page 670 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning >
Resolution
Resolution
What is Resolution?
The data in the image you have scanned is a collection of dots carrying information about brightness and
color. The density of these dots is called "resolution", and resolution will determine the amount of detail
your image contains. The unit of resolution is dots per inch (dpi). Dpi is the number of dots per square
inch (2.54 cm square).
The higher the resolution (value), the more detail in your image; the lower the resolution (value), the less
detail.
Setting the Resolution in MP Navigator EX
In MP Navigator EX, you can specify the resolution with Scanning Resolution in the Scan Settings dialog
box.
Images for Printing
Images to be printed should be scanned at a resolution that corresponds to the resolution of the printer.
For example, if you want to print using a 600 dpi black and white printer, you should set the resolution to
600 dpi.
With a color printer, specifying the resolution at half the resolution of the printer should be fine. For
example, if you want to print scanned paper/photos using a 600 dpi color printer, you should set the
resolution to 300 dpi. However, with a high-resolution printer, printing takes longer than usual if you set
the resolution to half the resolution of the printer.
Example of Appropriate Resolution when Printing to Scale
If you print a document at twice the size both vertically and horizontally, the resolution of the document will
be reduced by half. If the resolution of the original document is 300 dpi, the resolution of the enlarged
document will be 150 dpi. If you print the document with a 600 dpi color printer, the lack of detail in the
image may be obvious. In that case, if you scan at the Scanning Resolution of 600 dpi, the resolution will
be 300 dpi even if you double the size of document and you can print the document with sufficient quality.
Conversely, if you print a document at half scale, it should be sufficient to scan at half the resolution.
When Printing Color Photos at Twice the Size
Document resolution: 300
dpi
Scanning resolution: 600
dpi
Scale: 200%
Print at twice the size
Scanning resolution/actual scanning
resolution: 600 dpi
Printing resolution: 300
dpi
Setting the Resolution in ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
In ScanGear (scanner driver), you can specify the resolution with Output Resolution in Output Settings on
Resolution
Page 671 of 949 pages
the Advanced Mode tab.
Example of Appropriate Resolution when Printing to Scale
The scanning resolution is automatically set so that the value set in Output Resolution will be the
resolution of the scanned image. If you set Output Resolution to 300 dpi and scan at twice the size, the
document will be automatically scanned at 600 dpi, and the resolution of the scanned image will be 300
dpi. You can print the document with sufficient quality using a 600 dpi color printer.
When Printing L Size (8.9 cm x 12.7 cm) Photos at Twice the Size
Document resolution: 300
dpi
Output resolution: 300 dpi
Scale: 200%
Scan at twice the size
Actual scanning resolution: 600
Image resolution/printing resolution:
300 dpi
dpi
Appropriate Resolution Settings
Set the resolution according to the use of the scanned image.
For displaying on a monitor: 150 dpi
For printing: 300 dpi
When Output Size is set to Flexible in ScanGear's Advanced Mode tab (Select Source is Platen and the
scale is 100%):
Document
Use
Color Mode
Output
Resolution
Copying
(Printing)
Color
300 dpi
Creating a postcard
Color
300 dpi
Saving to a computer
Color
75 dpi - 300 dpi
Using on a website or attaching
to e-mail
Color
75 dpi - 150 dpi
Black and white
photo
Saving to a computer
Grayscale
75 dpi - 300 dpi
Using on a website or attaching
to e-mail
Grayscale
75 dpi - 300 dpi
Text document
Copying
Color, Grayscale or Black
and White
300 dpi
Attaching to e-mail
Color, Grayscale or Black
and White
300 dpi
Color photo
Important
If you double the resolution, the file size quadruples. If the file is too large, the processing speed will
slow down significantly, and you will experience inconvenience such as lack of memory. Set the
minimum required resolution according to the use of the image.
Note
Although you can change Output Resolution in ScanGear (scanner driver), it is recommended that
you scan at the default value.
Page top
File Formats
Page 672 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning >
File Formats
File Formats
You can select a file format when saving scanned images. You should specify the most suitable format
according to how you want to use the image on which application.
Available file formats vary by application and computer (Windows or Macintosh).
See below for the characteristics of each image file format.
BMP (Standard File Extension: .bmp)
A standard file format for Windows.
BMP is often selected for images that are used only on Windows.
JPEG (Standard File Extension: .jpg)
A file format often used on websites and for digital camera images.
JPEG features high compression rates. JPEG images slightly degrade every time they are saved, and
cannot be returned to their original state.
JPEG is not available for black and white images.
Exif (Standard File Extension: .jpg)
A file format supported by many digital cameras.
It adds information such as the date of image capture, camera model, shutter speed, shooting mode
and comments to JPEG files.
The file format version must be Exif 2.2 or later in order to print on a Direct Print compatible printer.
TIFF (Standard File Extension: .tif)
A file format featuring a relatively high compatibility between various computers and applications. (Some
TIFF files are incompatible.) TIFF is suitable for editing saved images.
Note
MP Navigator EX supports the following TIFF file formats.
- Uncompressed, black and white binary
- Uncompressed, RGB (8 bits per channel)
- Uncompressed, YCC (8 bits per component)
- Uncompressed, RGB (16 bits per channel)
- Uncompressed, YCC (16 bits per component)
- Uncompressed, Grayscale
PDF (Standard File Extension: .pdf)
A file format developed by Adobe Systems. It can be used on various computers and operating systems.
Therefore, PDF files can be exchanged between people who use different operating systems, fonts, etc.
regardless of the differences.
Important
Only PDF files created with MP Navigator EX are supported. PDF files created or edited in other
applications are not supported.
Page top
Color Matching
Page 673 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Scanning with Other Application Software > Appendix: Useful Information on Scanning >
Color Matching
Color Matching
Color Matching adjusts devices as shown below to match the colors of an image displayed on a monitor
or a printed image with the colors of the original document.
Example: When sRGB is selected as the output profile (target)
Input Profile (Source)
Scanner
ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Output Profile (Target)
sRGB
OS
Application
Application
Printer Driver
Monitor
Printer
ScanGear (scanner driver) converts the image's color space from the scanner's color space to sRGB.
When displaying on a monitor, the image's color space is converted from sRGB to the monitor's color
space based on the operating system's monitor settings and the application's working space settings.
When printing, the image's color space is converted from sRGB to the printer's color space based on the
application's print settings and the printer driver's settings.
Page top
Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Screens
Page 674 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Screens
Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Screens
Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen
Page top
Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen
Page 675 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Screens > Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting
Screen
Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen
Set up Canon IJ Network Scan Utility to scan images into a computer over a network using the Operation
Panel of the machine.
After installation, Canon IJ Network Scan Utility appears in the notification area of the taskbar.
Note
If
(Enabled) is not displayed in the notification area of the taskbar, from the Start menu, select
(All) Programs > Canon IJ Network Utilities > Canon IJ Network Scan Utility > Canon IJ Network
Scan Utility to start it.
Menu
Disable Canon IJ Network Scan Utility or Enable Canon IJ Network Scan Utility
Enables or disables Canon IJ Network Scan Utility.
When you select Disable Canon IJ Network Scan Utility, you will not be able to scan over a network
using the Operation Panel.
Enabled:
, Disabled:
Settings...
The Canon IJ Network Scan Utility dialog box opens. You can select the product you want to use.
About
Displays the version information.
Exit
Exits Canon IJ Network Scan Utility.
taskbar.
(Enabled) disappears from the notification area of the
Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Dialog Box
The machine must be selected with Canon IJ Network Scan Utility before scanning over a network.
In the notification area of the taskbar, right-click the icon and select Settings... to open the Canon IJ
Network Scan Utility dialog box.
Normally, the machine is already selected. In that case, you do not need to select it again.
Canon IJ Network Scan Utility Menu and Setting Screen
Page 676 of 949 pages
Select the product you want to use.
Scanners that are registered to the system are displayed. Select the checkbox of the product you want to
use.
You can select up to three scanners.
Click Instructions to open this page.
Note
If the scanner you want to use is not displayed, check the following conditions and click OK to close
the dialog box, then reopen it and select the scanner.
- The MP Drivers are installed
- Network setup is completed after installing the MP Drivers
- Network communication between the product and computer is enabled
If the scanner is still not displayed, see " Troubleshooting ."
You do not need to use this software when scanning via USB or from a computer. See " Uninstalling
the Canon IJ Network Tool/Canon IJ Network Scan Utility " to delete it. You can scan via USB or from
a computer even if it is not deleted.
Page top
Other Scanning Methods
Page 677 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Other Scanning Methods
Other Scanning Methods
Scanning with WIA Driver
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
Page top
Scanning with WIA Driver
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Other Scanning Methods > Scanning with WIA Driver
Scanning with WIA Driver
You can scan an image from a WIA-compliant application and use the image in that application.
The procedure varies depending on the application. The following procedures are examples only.
For details, refer to the application's manual.
Important
In Windows 2000, you cannot scan using the WIA driver.
In Windows XP, you cannot scan using the WIA driver via a network connection.
Complete the following settings to enable scanning over a network.
1. From the Start menu, select Network.
2. Right-click (model name) _MAC address in the displayed screen, then select Install.
Scanning with WIA Driver 2.0
The following is an example of scanning using Windows Photo Gallery.
1. Place the document on the Platen.
Placing Documents
2. In File, click Import from Camera or Scanner..., then double-click WIA Canon (model
name).
For network connection, double-click (model name) _MAC address from the list.
The scan setting screen appears.
3. Specify the settings.
Scanner
The currently set product name is displayed. To change the scanner, click Change... and select
the product you want to use.
Profile
Select Photo (Default) or Documents according to the document to be scanned. To save a new
Profile, select Add profile.... You can specify the details in the Add New Profile dialog box.
Source
Select a scanner type.
Page 678 of 949 pages
Scanning with WIA Driver
Paper size
This setting is not available for this machine.
Color format
Select how to scan the document.
File type
Select a file format from JPEG, BMP, PNG and TIFF.
Resolution (DPI)
Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi. 300 dpi is set by default.
Resolution
Brightness
Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the
image. You can also enter a value (-100 to 100).
Contrast
Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image,
thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus
sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-100 to 100).
Preview or scan images as separate files
Select this checkbox to preview or scan multiple images as separate files.
See how to scan a picture
Click to open Windows Help and Support.
Note
With network connection, you cannot specify Brightness and Contrast.
4. Click Preview to preview the image.
The preview image appears on the right.
5. Click Scan.
When scanning is completed, the scanned image appears in the application.
Scanning with WIA Driver 1.0
The following is an example of scanning using Paint.
1. Place the document on the Platen.
Placing Documents
2. In File, click From Scanner or Camera.... (Select the command to scan a document
in the application.)
3. Select an image type according to the document to be scanned.
Page 679 of 949 pages
Scanning with WIA Driver
Page 680 of 949 pages
Note
To scan with the values previously set in Adjust the quality of the scanned picture, select
Custom Settings.
4. Click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture and set the preferences as required.
Brightness
Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the
image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Contrast
Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image,
thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus
sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Resolution (DPI)
Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi.
Resolution
Picture type
Select the type of scan you want for your document.
Reset
Click to restore the original settings.
Note
With network connection, you cannot specify Brightness and Contrast.
5. Click Preview to preview the image.
The preview image appears on the right. Drag
to specify the scan area.
6. Click Scan.
When scanning is completed, the scanned image appears in the application.
Page top
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
Page 681 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Scanning > Other Scanning Methods > Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
You can scan images via the Control Panel of Windows XP using the WIA driver.
Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) is a driver model implemented in Windows XP. It allows you to scan
documents without using an application. Scan documents from a TWAIN-compliant application to specify
advanced settings for scanning.
Important
With network connection, you cannot scan using the WIA driver.
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel.
2. Click Printers and Other Hardware > Scanners and Cameras, then double-click WIA
Canon (model name).
The Scanner and Camera Wizard dialog box opens.
3. Click Next.
4. Select Picture type according to the document to be scanned.
Note
To scan with the values previously set in Custom Settings, select Custom.
5. Click Custom Settings to set the preferences as required.
Scanning Using the Control Panel (Windows XP Only)
Page 682 of 949 pages
Brightness
Move the slider to adjust the brightness. Move it to the left to darken and right to brighten the
image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Contrast
Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Moving it to the left will decrease the contrast of the image,
thus softening the image. Moving it to the right will increase the contrast of the image, thus
sharpening the image. You can also enter a value (-127 to 127).
Resolution (DPI)
Enter the resolution. Specify a value between 50 dpi and 600 dpi.
Resolution
Picture type
Select the type of scan you want for your document.
Reset
Click to restore the original settings.
6. Click Preview to preview the image.
The preview image appears on the right. Drag
to specify the scan area.
7. Click Next and follow the instructions.
Page top
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a Wireless Commun... Page 683 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a Wireless Communication Device
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a
Wireless Communication Device
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device
Printing Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device
Page top
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device
Page 684 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a Wireless Communication Device > Printing
Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device
About PictBridge Print Settings
Page top
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device
Page 685 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a Wireless Communication Device > Printing
Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device
You can connect a PictBridge compliant device such as a digital camera, camcorder, or mobile phone
connect to the machine using a USB cable recommended by the device's manufacturer, and print
recorded images directly without using a computer.
Note
When printing photos with the PictBridge compliant device connected to the machine, we
recommend the use of the AC adapter supplied with the device. If you are using the device battery,
be sure to charge it fully.
Depending on the model or brand of your device, you may have to select a print mode compliant
with PictBridge before connecting the device. You may also have to turn on the device or select Play
mode manually after connecting the device to the machine.
Perform necessary operations on the PictBridge compliant device before connecting it to this
machine according to instructions given in the device's instruction manual.
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Load paper.
3. Make sure that the proper paper source is selected.
4. Make sure that the PictBridge compliant device is turned off.
5. Connect the PictBridge compliant device to the machine using a USB cable (A)
recommended by the device's manufacturer.
The PictBridge compliant device turns on automatically.
If your device does not turn on automatically, turn it on manually.
When machine is correctly connected to the device, the message that the machine is connected will
be displayed on the LCD of the device. Refer to the device's instruction manual.
Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device
Page 686 of 949 pages
6. Specify the print settings such as the paper type and layout.
You can perform settings using the menu on the LCD of your PictBridge compliant device. Select the
size and type of paper that you loaded in the machine.
Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device
If your PictBridge compliant device does not have a setting menu, change the setting from the
machine.
Settings on the Machine
7. Start printing from your PictBridge compliant device.
Important
Never disconnect the USB cable during printing unless when explicitly allowed to by the
PictBridge compliant device. When disconnecting the USB cable between the PictBridge
compliant device and machine, follow the instructions given in the device's instruction manual.
Page top
About PictBridge Print Settings
Page 687 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a Wireless Communication Device > Printing
Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device > About PictBridge Print Settings
About PictBridge Print Settings
Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device
Settings on the Machine
Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device
This section describes the PictBridge function of the machine. For the print settings on a
PictBridge compliant device, refer to the instructions given in the device's instruction manual.
Note
In the following description, names of setting items are given according to those used in
Canon-brand PictBridge compliant devices. Setting item names may be different depending
on the brand or model of your device.
Some setting items explained below may not be available on some devices. In this case, the
settings made on the machine are applied. Also, when some items are set to Default on a
PictBridge compliant device, the machine settings for these items are applied.
Settings on the Machine
The following settings can be used when printing from a PictBridge compliant device.
Paper size
4" x 6"/10 x 15 cm, 5" x 7"*1, 8" x 10"/ 20 x 25 cm, A4, 8.5" x 11"(Letter), 4" x 7.1"/ 10.1
x 18 cm*2
*1 10x15 may appear on some PictBridge compliant device.
*2 Hi Vision may appear on a non-Canon brand PictBridge compliant device.
Paper type
Default (Selections based on the machine setting)
Photo:
Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP-201/Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use" GP-501
/Photo Paper Glossy GP-502/Photo Paper Plus Semi-gloss SG-201/Photo
Stickers*
* When printing on sticker paper, select 10 x 15 cm/4" x 6" in Paper size. Do not
set Layout to Borderless.
Fast Photo:
Photo Paper Pro II PR-201
Plain:
A4/Letter
When Paper type is set to Plain, borderless printing will be disabled even when
Layout is set to Borderless.
Layout
Default (Selections based on the machine setting), Index, Bordered, Borderless, Nup (2, 4, 9, 16)*1, 20-up*2, 35-up*3
*1 Layout compatible with A4 or Letter-sized paper and Canon-brand sticker above.
A4/Letter: 4-up
Photo Stickers: 2-up, 4-up, 9-up, 16-up.
*2 With a Canon brand PictBridge compliant device, selecting items with "i" mark
allows you to print shooting info (Exif Data) in list format (20-up) or on the margins
of the specified data (1-up). (May not be available with some Canon-brand
PictBridge compliant devices.)
*3 Printed in 35 mm Film Style Layout (Contact Printing Layout). Available only with
a Canon-brand PictBridge compliant device. (May not be available with some
Canon-brand PictBridge compliant devices.)
Print date & Default (Off: No printing), Date, File No., Both, Off
file no.
Image
optimize
Default (Selections based on the machine setting), On*1 (Exif Print), Off, NR (Noise
Reduction)*2, VIVID*2, Face*2, Red-Eye*2
*1 Photos are optimized for printing using the Photo optimizer pro function.
*2 Can be selected only on certain Canon-brand PictBridge compliant devices.
(May not be selected depending on the device.)
About PictBridge Print Settings
Trimming
Page 688 of 949 pages
Default (Off: No trimming), On (follow the camera's setting), Off
Settings on the Machine
You can change the PictBridge print settings from the PictBridge print settings screen. Set the print
settings to Default on the PictBridge compliant device when you want to print according to the
settings on the machine.
This section describes the procedure to display the PictBridge print settings screen. For setting
items, see PictBridge print settings .
1.
Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2.
Select
3.
Select
4.
Select PictBridge print settings, then press the OK button.
Settings on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
Device settings, then press the OK button.
The PictBridge print settings screen is displayed.
Page top
Printing Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device
Page 689 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a Wireless Communication Device > Printing
Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device
Printing Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device
Printing via Bluetooth Communication
Setting the Page Size, Media Type, and Layout When Printing from a Mobile Phone
Page top
Printing via Bluetooth Communication
Page 690 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a Wireless Communication Device > Printing
Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device > Printing via Bluetooth Communication
Printing via Bluetooth Communication
This section describes the procedure to print photos through Bluetooth communication from a mobile
phone with the optional Bluetooth Unit BU-30.
When printing from a mobile phone through Bluetooth communication, refer also to your product's
instruction manual.
For the procedure to print through Bluetooth communication from the computer, refer to About Bluetooth
Communication .
Note
Mobile phones supporting OPP (Object Push Profile) or BIP (Basic Imaging Profile) can be used to
print photos.
Depending on your mobile phone, you may not perform printing even if your mobile phone supports
the profiles above. For information on the profiles your mobile phone supports, refer to your
product's instruction manual.
Printing through Bluetooth Communication
1.
Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2.
Load paper.
3.
Attach the optional Bluetooth Unit BU-30.
Insert the Bluetooth Unit BU-30 to the Direct Print Port.
4.
Set the page size and layout.
Setting the Page Size, Media Type, and Layout When Printing from a Mobile Phone
Printing via Bluetooth Communication
5.
Page 691 of 949 pages
Start printing from a mobile phone.
For the device name, select the default value Canon XXX-1 (where "XXX"
is your machine's name).
If you are required to input a passkey, input the default value "0000".
You can change the device name of the machine, passkey, and so on from the
Bluetooth settings screen.
Changing the Bluetooth Settings
Note
Communication is possible in a range of up to about 33 ft. / 10 m depending on
the conditions below. Printing speed may vary depending on the following
conditions:
Presence of obstacles between the communication equipment, and radio
conditions.
Presence of magnetic fields, static electricity, or electromagnetic interference.
Receiver sensitivity and antenna performance of the communication equipment.
Video files cannot be printed.
Depending on your device, data saved on a memory card may not be printed.
About transmittable data
Due to security settings on the mobile phone, downloaded content or
photos downloaded from a URL attached to an E-mail cannot be printed.
Depending on the size of a photo, it may take a while for this machine to
start printing after starting wireless communication.
Printed quality and orientation (portrait or landscape) is determined
automatically according to the shot photo size.
Depending on the photo size shot on the mobile phone, the edges of the
image may be cut off when performing borderless printing; the margin size
may change when printing with borders.
If the photo file is over 1.8 MB in size, it may not be possible to send the
file.
Page top
Changing the Bluetooth Settings
Page 692 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a Wireless Communication Device > Printing
Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device > Printing via Bluetooth Communication > Changing the Bluetooth
Settings
Changing the Bluetooth Settings
As preparation for printing through Bluetooth communication, you can change the settings such as the
device name and passkey from the Bluetooth settings screen.
This section describes how to display the Bluetooth settings screen. For each setting item, see
Bluetooth settings .
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Attach the optional Bluetooth Unit BU-30.
Insert the Bluetooth Unit BU-30 to the Direct Print Port.
3. Select
4. Select
Settings on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
Device settings, then press the OK button.
5. Select Bluetooth settings, then press the OK button.
The Bluetooth settings screen is displayed.
Bluetooth Settings Screen
Page top
Setting the Page Size, Media Type, and Layout When Printing from a Mobile P... Page 693 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Printing Photographs Directly from a Compliant Device or a Wireless Communication Device > Printing
Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device > Setting the Page Size, Media Type, and Layout When Printing from
a Mobile Phone
Setting the Page Size, Media Type, and Layout When Printing
from a Mobile Phone
When printing from a mobile phone through Bluetooth communication, select the page size, media type,
layout, and borderless print setting on the Mobile phone print setting screen. For details on how to print
from a computer through Bluetooth communication, refer to About Bluetooth Communication.
* The default is borderless printing on 4" x 6" Photo Paper Plus Glossy II.
Displaying the Mobile phone print setting screen
This section describes how to display the Mobile phone print setting screen. For setting items,
see Mobile phone print setting .
1.
Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2.
Attach the optional Bluetooth Unit BU-30.
Insert the Bluetooth Unit BU-30 to the Direct Print Port.
3. Select
4. Select
Settings on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
Device settings, then press the OK button.
5. Select Mobile phone print setting, then press the OK button.
The Mobile phone print setting screen is displayed. For the setting items, see Mobile phone
Setting the Page Size, Media Type, and Layout When Printing from a Mobile P... Page 694 of 949 pages
print setting .
Page top
Maintenance
Page 695 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Maintenance
Maintenance
Cleaning Your Machine
Aligning the Print Head
Performing Maintenance from a Computer
Page top
Cleaning Your Machine
Page 696 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine
Cleaning Your Machine
Cleaning
Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover
Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
Cleaning the Protrusions Inside the Machine
Page top
Cleaning
Page 697 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine > Cleaning
Cleaning
This section describes the cleaning procedure that is needed to maintain your machine.
Important
Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, rough-textured cloth, or similar materials for cleaning so as
not to scratch the surface. Paper tissue powder or fine threads may remain inside the machine and
cause problems such as print head blockage and poor printing results. Be sure to use a soft cloth.
Never use volatile liquids such as thinners, benzene, acetone, or any other chemical cleaner to
clean the machine, as this may cause a malfunction or damage the machine's surface.
Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover
Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
Cleaning the Protrusions Inside the Machine
Page top
Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine
Page 698 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine > Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine
Cleaning the Exterior of the Machine
Be sure to use a soft cloth such as eyeglasses cleaning cloth and wipe off dirt on the surface gently.
Smooth out wrinkles on the cloth if necessary before cleaning.
Important
Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the machine.
Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, rough-textured cloth, or similar materials, as this may
scratch the surface.
Page top
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover
Page 699 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine > Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover
Important
Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the machine.
With a clean, soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the Platen Glass (A) and the inner side of the Document Cover
(white sheet) (B) gently. Be sure not to leave any residue, especially on the Platen Glass.
Important
The inner side of the Document Cover (white sheet) (B) is easily damaged, so wipe it gently.
Page top
Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
Page 700 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine > Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
This section explains how to clean the inside of the machine. If the inside of the machine becomes dirty,
printed paper may get dirty, so we recommend performing cleaning regularly.
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Open the Paper Output Tray.
Open the Paper Output Tray gently.
3. Open the Output Tray Extension.
4. Select
Settings on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
The Settings screen is displayed.
5. Select
Maintenance, then press the OK button.
The Maintenance screen is displayed.
6. Select Bottom plate cleaning, then press the OK button.
The confirmation screen is displayed.
7. Select Yes, then press the OK button.
8. Remove any paper from the Rear Tray, follow the on-screen instructions.
9. Fold a single sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in half widthwise, then unfold the
paper, follow the on-screen instructions.
10. Load this and only this sheet of paper on the Rear Tray with the open side facing to
the front, follow the on-screen instructions.
Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
Page 701 of 949 pages
(A) Load the paper after unfolding it.
The paper cleans the inside of the machine as it feeds through the machine.
Check the folded part of the ejected paper. If it is smudged with ink, perform Bottom Plate Cleaning
again.
If the problem is not resolved after performing cleaning again, the protrusions inside the machine
may be stained. Clean them according to instructions.
Cleaning the Protrusions Inside the Machine
Note
When performing Bottom Plate Cleaning again, be sure to use a new sheet of paper.
Page top
Cleaning the Protrusions Inside the Machine
Page 702 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Cleaning Your Machine > Cleaning the Protrusions Inside the Machine
Cleaning the Protrusions Inside the Machine
If protrusions inside the machine are stained, wipe off any ink from the protrusions using a cotton swab
or the like.
Important
Be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug before cleaning the machine.
Page top
Aligning the Print Head
Page 703 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Aligning the Print Head
Aligning the Print Head
Aligning the Print Head
Page top
Aligning the Print Head
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Aligning the Print Head > Aligning the Print Head
Aligning the Print Head
If printed ruled lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, adjust the print head
position.
Note
If the remaining ink level is low, the print head alignment sheet will not be printed correctly. Replace
the ink tank whose ink is low.
Routine Maintenance
The print head alignment pattern is printed in black and blue only.
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Load a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the Cassette.
3. Open the Paper Output Tray gently, and open the Output Tray Extension.
4. Print the print head alignment sheet.
1. Select
Settings on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
The Settings screen is displayed.
2. Select
Maintenance, then press the OK button.
The Maintenance screen is displayed.
3. Select Auto head align, then press the OK button.
The confirmation screen is displayed.
4. Select Yes, then press the OK button.
The print head alignment sheet will be printed.
Page 704 of 949 pages
Aligning the Print Head
Important
Do not touch any printed part on the print head alignment sheet.
Do not dirty the print head alignment sheet. If the sheet is stained or wrinkled, the pattern
may not be scanned correctly.
5. When Did the patterns print correctly? is displayed, confirm that the pattern is printed correctly,
select Yes, then press the OK button.
5. Scan the print head alignment sheet to adjust the print head position.
1. Place the print head alignment sheet on the Platen Glass, then close the Document Cover
gently.
Place the print head alignment sheet with the printed side FACING DOWN and align the
mark on the upper left corner of the sheet with the alignment mark (
).
2. Press the OK button.
The print head alignment sheet is scanned and the print head position is adjusted
automatically.
Remove the print head alignment sheet on the Platen Glass after the adjusting is complete.
Page 705 of 949 pages
Aligning the Print Head
Page 706 of 949 pages
Important
Do not open the Document Cover or move the loaded print head alignment sheet until
scanning is complete.
If adjusting the auto print head position has failed, Failed to scan. appears on the LCD.
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD
Note
Press the HOME button to exit Settings menu and display the HOME screen.
If the print results are still not satisfactory after adjusting the print head position as
described above, adjust the print head position manually from the computer.
Aligning the Print Head Position
Select Head alignment print to confirm the current head position adjustment values.
Page top
Performing Maintenance from a Computer
Page 707 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer
Performing Maintenance from a Computer
Cleaning the Print Heads
Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
Aligning the Print Head Position
Checking the Print Head Nozzles
Cleaning Inside the Machine
Page top
Cleaning the Print Heads
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning the Print Heads
Cleaning the Print Heads
The print head cleaning function allows you to unclog clogged nozzles in the print head. Perform print
head cleaning if printing is faint or a specific color fails to print, even though there is enough ink.
The procedure for cleaning the print heads is as follows:
Cleaning
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Cleaning on the Maintenance tab
The Print Head Cleaning dialog box opens. Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box.
Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Cleaning.
3. Execute cleaning
Make sure that the machine is on and then click Execute.
Print head cleaning starts.
4. Complete cleaning
The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message.
5. Check the results
To check whether the print quality has improved, click Print Check Pattern. To cancel the check
process, click Cancel.
If cleaning the head once does not resolve the print head problem, clean it once more.
Deep Cleaning
Deep Cleaning is more thorough than cleaning. Perform deep cleaning when two Cleaning attempts do
not resolve the print head problem.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Deep Cleaning on the Maintenance tab
The Deep Cleaning dialog box opens. Follow the instruction shown in the dialog box.
Click Initial Check Items to display the items you need to check before performing Deep Cleaning.
3. Execute deep cleaning
Make sure that the machine is on and then click Execute.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
Print head deep cleaning starts.
4. Complete deep cleaning
The Nozzle Check dialog box opens after the confirmation message.
Page 708 of 949 pages
Cleaning the Print Heads
Page 709 of 949 pages
5. Check the results
To check whether the print quality has improved, click Print Check Pattern. To cancel the check
process, click Cancel.
Important
Cleaning consumes a small amount of ink. Deep Cleaning consumes a larger amount of ink than
Cleaning.
Cleaning the print heads frequently will rapidly deplete your printer's ink supply. Consequently,
perform cleaning only when necessary.
Note
If there is no sign of improvement after Deep Cleaning, switch off the machine, wait 24 hours, and
then perform Deep Cleaning again. If there is still no sign of improvement, the ink may have run out
or the print head may be worn. For details on the remedial action to be taken, see " Machine Moves
But Ink Is Not Ejected ."
Related Topic
Checking the Print Head Nozzles
Page top
Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
Page 710 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
Cleaning the Paper Feed Rollers
Cleans the paper feed roller. Perform feed roller cleaning when there are paper particles sticking to the
paper feed roller and paper is not fed properly.
The procedure for performing the feed roller cleaning is as follows:
Roller Cleaning
1. Prepare the machine
Remove all sheets of paper from the paper source from which paper could not be properly fed.
2. Open the printer driver setup window
3. Click Roller Cleaning on the Maintenance tab
The Roller Cleaning dialog box opens.
4. Select Rear Tray or Cassette, and click OK
The confirmation message appears.
5. Execute paper feed roller cleaning
Make sure that the machine is on and click OK.
Paper feed roller cleaning starts.
6. Complete paper feed roller cleaning
After the rollers have stopped, follow the instruction in the message, load three sheets of plain
paper into the selected paper source of the machine, and click OK.
Paper will be ejected and feed roller cleaning will be completed.
Page top
Aligning the Print Head Position
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Aligning the Print Head Position
Aligning the Print Head Position
Print head alignment corrects the installation positions of the print head and improves deviated colors
and lines.
This machine supports two head alignment methods: automatic head alignment and manual head
alignment.
To perform automatic head alignment, refer to "Aligning the Print Head" in the manual: Basic Guide and
then execute the function from the operation panel of the machine.
The procedure for performing manual print head alignment is as follows:
Print Head Alignment
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Custom Settings on the Maintenance tab
The Custom Settings dialog box opens.
3. Switch head alignment to manual
Check the Align heads manually check box.
4. Transmit the settings
Click Send, and click OK when the confirmation message appears.
5. Click Print Head Alignment on the Maintenance tab
The Start Print Head Alignment dialog box opens.
6. Load paper in the machine
Load three sheets of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the cassette.
7. Execute head alignment
Make sure that the machine is on and click Align Print Head.
Follow the instruction in the message.
8. Check the printed pattern
Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the associated boxes.
Clicking the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the preview window, will automatically set
their numbers in the associated boxes.
Page 711 of 949 pages
Aligning the Print Head Position
When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK.
Note
If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical
white streaks.
(A) Less noticeable vertical white streaks
(B) More noticeable vertical white streaks
If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable
horizontal white streaks.
(A) Less noticeable horizontal white streaks
(B) More noticeable horizontal white streaks
9. Confirm the displayed message and click OK
The second pattern is printed.
Important
Do not open the Scanning Unit (Cover) while printing is in progress.
10. Check the printed pattern
Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the associated boxes.
Clicking the patterns with the least amount of streaks in the preview window, will automatically set
their numbers in the associated boxes.
Page 712 of 949 pages
Aligning the Print Head Position
When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK.
Note
If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable vertical
white streaks.
(A) Less noticeable vertical white streaks
(B) More noticeable vertical white streaks
11. Confirm the displayed message and click OK
The third pattern is printed.
Important
Do not open the Scanning Unit (Cover) while printing is in progress.
12. Check the printed pattern
Enter the numbers of the patterns with the least noticeable horizontal stripes in the associated
boxes.
Clicking the patterns with the least noticeable horizontal stripes in the preview window, will
automatically set their numbers in the associated boxes.
Page 713 of 949 pages
Aligning the Print Head Position
Page 714 of 949 pages
When you have entered all the necessary values, click OK.
Note
If it is difficult to pick the best pattern, pick the setting that produces the least noticeable
horizontal white stripes.
(A) Less noticeable horizontal white stripes
(B) More noticeable horizontal white stripes
Note
To print and check the current setting, open the Start Print Head Alignment dialog box, and click
Print Alignment Value.
Page top
Checking the Print Head Nozzles
Page 715 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Checking the Print Head Nozzles
Checking the Print Head Nozzles
The nozzle check function allows you to check whether the print heads are working properly by printing a
nozzle check pattern. Print the pattern if printing becomes faint, or if a specific color fails to print.
The procedure for printing a nozzle check pattern is as follows:
Nozzle Check
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Nozzle Check on the Maintenance tab
The Nozzle Check dialog box opens.
To display a list of items that you should check before printing the check pattern, click Initial Check
Items.
3. Load paper in the machine
Load a sheet of A4 size or Letter size plain paper into the cassette.
4. Print a nozzle check pattern
Make sure that the machine is on and click Print Check Pattern.
The nozzle check pattern is printed.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
The Pattern Check dialog box opens.
5. Check the print result
Check the print result. When the print result is normal, click Exit.
If the print result is smudged or if there are any unprinted sections, click Cleaning to clean the print
head.
Related Topic
Cleaning the Print Heads
Page top
Cleaning Inside the Machine
Page 716 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Maintenance > Performing Maintenance from a Computer > Cleaning Inside the Machine
Cleaning Inside the Machine
Perform bottom plate cleaning before you execute duplex printing to prevent smudges on the back side
of the paper.
Also perform bottom plate cleaning if ink smudges caused by something other than print data appear on
the printed page.
For details on how to load paper into the machine, see " Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate
Cleaning) ."
The procedure for performing bottom plate cleaning is as follows:
Bottom Plate Cleaning
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Bottom Plate Cleaning on the Maintenance tab
The Bottom Plate Cleaning dialog box opens.
3. Load paper in the machine
As instructed in the dialog box, fold the A4 size or Letter size plain paper in half horizontally, and then
unfold the sheet.
Load the paper into the rear tray in the portrait orientation with the crest of the crease facing down.
4. Perform the bottom plate cleaning
Make sure that the machine is on and click Execute.
Bottom plate cleaning starts.
Page top
About Bluetooth Communication
Page 717 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication
About Bluetooth Communication
Handling Precautions
Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit
Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication
Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication
Bluetooth Settings
Troubleshooting
Specifications
Page top
Handling Precautions
Page 718 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Handling Precautions
Handling Precautions
Shipping the Product
Page top
Shipping the Product
Page 719 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Handling Precautions > Shipping the Product
Shipping the Product
This product may not be used in countries or regions other than the country or region where it was
purchased due to local laws and regulations. Please note that the use of this product in such countries
or regions may lead to penalties and that Canon should not be liable for such punishment.
Page top
Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit
Page 720 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit
Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit
Bluetooth Unit
Attaching to and Removing from the Printer
Page top
Bluetooth Unit
Page 721 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit > Bluetooth Unit
Bluetooth Unit
The Bluetooth Unit BU-30 (hereafter referred to as the Bluetooth unit) is an adaptor which can be used
with a Canon IJ printer with Bluetooth interface.
By attaching the Bluetooth unit to a Canon IJ printer with Bluetooth interface, wireless printing from a
Bluetooth enabled device, such as a computer or mobile phone, is possible.
Note
Communication is possible in a range of up to about 33 ft. / 10 m depending on the conditions
below. Printing speed may vary depending on the following conditions:
-Presence of obstacles between the communication equipment and radio wave conditions.
-Presence of magnetic fields, static electricity or electromagnetic interference.
-Software and operating system to be used.
-Receiver sensitivity and antenna performance of the communication equipment.
Page top
Attaching to and Removing from the Printer
Page 722 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Preparation to Use the Bluetooth Unit > Attaching to and Removing
from the Printer
Attaching to and Removing from the Printer
Attaching the Bluetooth Unit to the Printer
Removing the Bluetooth Unit from the Printer
Attaching the Bluetooth Unit to the Printer
Attach the Bluetooth unit to the Direct Print Port (A) of the printer in accordance with the following
procedure.
The external appearance may differ depending on the printer you are using.
1.
Make sure that the printer is turned on.
Make sure that the Power lamp is lit.
2.
Insert the Bluetooth unit to the Direct Print Port of the printer.
Detach the cap from the Bluetooth unit. Store the cap in a safe location.
Attaching to and Removing from the Printer
Page 723 of 949 pages
Note
When the Bluetooth unit is properly attached to the printer, the Power lamp on the printer
flashes twice.
Removing the Bluetooth Unit from the Printer
Remove the Bluetooth unit from the Direct Print Port of the printer in accordance with the following
procedure.
1.
Remove the Bluetooth unit from the Direct Print Port of the printer.
Important
Make sure that the lamp on the Bluetooth unit is neither lit nor flashing before you
remove the Bluetooth unit.
Important
Store the Bluetooth unit with the cap attached.
Page top
Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication
Page 724 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication
Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication
Preparation
Installing the MP Drivers
Setting the Printer
Registering the Printer
Deleting the Printer
Page top
Preparation
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication > Preparation
Preparation
In order to print via Bluetooth communication with Windows, the following system requirements must be
satisfied.
Computer
A computer in which an internal Bluetooth module is installed or a computer to which an optional
Bluetooth adapter (available from various manufacturers) is attached.
OS
Microsoft Windows Vista (Satisfying any one of the following conditions is needed)
Bluetooth Devices is displayed in Hardware and Sound under Control Panel
Bluetooth Stack for Windows by Toshiba Version 5.10.04 or later is installed
Microsoft Windows XP (Satisfying any one of the following conditions is needed)
Windows XP SP2 or later is installed, and Bluetooth Devices is displayed in
Printers and Other Hardware under Control Panel
Bluetooth Stack for Windows by Toshiba Version 3.00.10 or later is installed
For more information about how to confirm the version of Bluetooth Stack for Windows by
Toshiba, see Check 2: Is unsupported Bluetooth driver used? .
In order to connect the Bluetooth unit and print via Bluetooth communication, the following steps are
required.
1. Check that the Bluetooth unit is properly attached to the printer.
See Attaching to and Removing from the Printer .
2. Install the MP Drivers.
See Installing the MP Drivers .
3. Check the device name of the printer using the LCD.
See Setting the Printer.
4. Register the printer as a Bluetooth device using Bluetooth Devices.
When using Windows Vista, and when Bluetooth Devices is displayed in Hardware and
Sound under Control Panel
Authenticate the printer as a Bluetooth device on Bluetooth Devices in Hardware and Sound
under Control Panel.
See Registering the Printer .
When using Windows XP SP2 or later, and when Bluetooth Devices is displayed in Printers
and Other Hardware under Control Panel
Authenticate the printer as a Bluetooth device on Bluetooth Devices in Printers and Other
Hardware under Control Panel.
See Registering the Printer .
When using a Toshiba Windows Vista or Windows XP computer
Authenticate the printer as a Bluetooth device using Bluetooth Settings*.
* When the computer which has Bluetooth Stack for Windows by Toshiba or the program
attached to the Bluetooth adapter of the option manufactured by Toshiba is used, the
computer can register a printer easily.
Page 725 of 949 pages
Preparation
Page 726 of 949 pages
Bluetooth Settings can be started by clicking Start and selecting All Programs, TOSHIBA,
Bluetooth, and Bluetooth Settings.
For details on Bluetooth Settings, refer to the software application's instruction manual.
The operations may vary depending on your operating program. In this case, refer to your
computer's operation manual.
Page top
Installing the MP Drivers
Page 727 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication > Installing the MP
Drivers
Installing the MP Drivers
Note
If you use the printer connecting with a computer, the MP Drivers have already been installed. In this
case, move to the next step.
Setting the Printer
Before connecting the Bluetooth unit to the printer for wireless printing, first the USB cable must be
connected between the printer and computer, and the MP Drivers must be installed.
If you reinstall the MP Drivers, perform Custom Install on the Setup CD-ROM, then select MP Drivers.
Page top
Setting the Printer
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication > Setting the Printer
Setting the Printer
This section describes the procedures for checking the settings of the Bluetooth unit on the LCD of the
printer in preparation for Bluetooth printing.
The screens may differ depending on the printer you are using.
If you need more information about the Bluetooth settings, see Setting Bluetooth Printing .
1. Make sure that the Bluetooth unit is attached and the printer is turned on.
For information about how to attach the Bluetooth unit, see Attaching to and Removing from the
Printer .
2. Display the Bluetooth settings screen on the LCD.
For information about how to display the Bluetooth settings screen, refer to Changing the Machine
Settings on the LCD .
Note
If the Bluetooth settings screen is not displayed on the LCD, the Bluetooth unit may not be
attached correctly. Remove the Bluetooth unit from the printer and attach it once again.
For details, see Attaching to and Removing from the Printer .
If the Bluetooth settings screen still is not displayed, the Bluetooth unit may be faulty. In this
case, contact the service center.
3. Select Device name.
The Device name screen is displayed.
4. Check the device name.
The device name is necessary to register the printer as a Bluetooth device. Be sure to note the
device name.
Note
If multiple printer units with the same model name are connected to the system, assigning a
Page 728 of 949 pages
Setting the Printer
Page 729 of 949 pages
different device name to each printer is recommended for easy identification of the printer you
will use. See Bluetooth Settings Screen .
After checking the device name, press the OK button on the printer.
After checking the Bluetooth settings using the LCD, register the printer on your computer.
Registering the Printer
Page top
Registering the Printer
Page 730 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication > Registering the Printer
Registering the Printer
Register the printer as a Bluetooth device using Bluetooth Devices under Control Panel.
Note
The following procedure is described assuming that Windows Vista has been installed in your
computer.
Before registering the printer on Bluetooth Devices under Control Panel, enable the Bluetooth
function of your computer.
For more information, refer to your computer's operation manual.
If you want to re-register the printer as a Bluetooth device, first delete the registered printer, and then
re-register it.
See Deleting the Printer .
1. Log into a user account with the administrator privilege.
2. Click Control Panel, then Bluetooth Devices under Hardware and Sound.
In non-Vista Windows, click Control Panel, Printers and Other Hardware, then Bluetooth Devices.
3. Click Add on the Devices sheet.
Add Bluetooth Device Wizard will start.
4. Make sure that the printer is turned on, check the My device is set up and ready to
be found check box and then click Next.
Registering the Printer
5. Select the device name of the printer and click Next.
Select the same device name as that checked under Setting the Printer.
Note
If the device name is not displayed, see Check 3: Is the printer name which you want to register
displayed in Printer List? .
6. Select Don't use a passkey, and then Next.
Page 731 of 949 pages
Registering the Printer
Note
If you set a passkey on the printer, select Use the passkey found in the documentation and
input the passkey then click Next.
For more information about a passkey, see Bluetooth Settings Screen .
7. Click Finish.
8. Check that the device name selected at step 5 is registered on the Devices sheet,
and click OK.
Page 732 of 949 pages
Registering the Printer
Page 733 of 949 pages
Now, the settings for printing via Bluetooth communication are ready.
Note
In Windows Vista, the Windows needs to install driver software for your Bluetooth Peripheral
Device screen may be displayed automatically. In this case, click Don't show this message
again for this device.
Page top
Deleting the Printer
Page 734 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Printing Data via Bluetooth Communication > Deleting the Printer
Deleting the Printer
This section describes the procedure to delete the registered printer.
If you want to re-register the printer as a Bluetooth device, first follow the procedure below to delete the
printer, and then re-register it.
For the procedure to re-register the printer, see Registering the Printer .
1. Log into a user account with the administrator privilege.
2. Click Control Panel, then Printers under Hardware and Sound.
When using non-Vista Windows, click Control Panel, then Printers and Faxes under Printers and
Other Hardware.
3. Click the icon of the printer used for printing via Bluetooth communication.
4. Select Delete from the Organize menu.
When using non-Vista Windows, select Delete from the File menu.
Page top
Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication
Page 735 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication
Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication
Printing with Computers
Printing with Bluetooth Compliant Devices other than a Computer
Page top
Printing with Computers
Page 736 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication > Printing
with Computers
Printing with Computers
When using Bluetooth communication, also refer to the computer's instruction manual.
When printing from a Bluetooth compliant device other than a computer, see Printing with Bluetooth
Compliant Devices other than a Computer.
Note
Depending on your application program, operations may differ. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your software application.
The steps described in this section are for printing in Windows Vista.
Bluetooth communication distance: Approx. 33 ft./10 m in normal environment.
The distance may vary depending on the radio conditions or the communication equipment.
1. Turn on the printer and load paper.
2. Create a document or open a file to print using an appropriate application software.
3. Open the printer properties dialog box.
1. Select Print on the application software's File menu.
The Print dialog box opens.
2. Select the printer to which you attached the Bluetooth unit such as Canon XXX Printer (Copy X)
from Select Printer.
3. Click Preferences (or Properties).
The Quick Setup sheet of the Printing Preferences dialog box is displayed.
Note
The printer registered on Bluetooth Devices is displayed as Canon XXX Printer (Copy X).
"X" is a device name or a digit. The number of digits may differ depending on the printer.
4. Specify the required settings.
Printing with Computers
1. Select the print setting in Commonly Used Settings.
2. Confirm the required print settings in Media Type, Printer Paper Size, and so on.
Note
You can specify the advanced print settings on Main sheet and Page Setup sheet. For
details on the print settings, refer to Various Printing Methods .
3. Click OK.
The Print dialog box is displayed.
5. Click Print (or OK) to print the document.
Printing begins.
Note
Page 737 of 949 pages
Printing with Computers
Page 738 of 949 pages
When you use a USB cable for printing, select Canon XXX Printer from Select Printer.
To cancel a print job in progress, press the Stop button on the printer or click Cancel Printing
on the printer status monitor. After printing is canceled, a sheet of paper may be ejected with no
printing results.
To display the printer status monitor, click Canon XXX Printer (Copy X) on the taskbar.
"X" is a device name or a digit. The number of digits may differ depending on the printer.
Page top
Printing with Bluetooth Compliant Devices other than a Computer
Page 739 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Basic Procedure for Printing via Bluetooth Communication > Printing
with Bluetooth Compliant Devices other than a Computer
Printing with Bluetooth Compliant Devices other than a
Computer
The LCD of the printer allows you to perform settings for printing using Bluetooth compliant devices other
than a computer.
When you print with one of these devices, also refer to your product's instruction manual.
When printing from a computer, see Printing with Computers .
Note
Mobile phones, PDAs and digital cameras supporting OPP (Object Push Profile) or BIP (Basic
Imaging Profile) can print photos.
Depending on your product, you may not perform printing even if your product supports the profiles
above. For details of profiles, refer to your product's instruction manual.
1. Turn on the printer and load paper.
2. Display the Mobile phone print settings screen on the LCD and set the media type
and the paper size.
For information about how to display the Mobile phone print settings screen, refer to Changing the
Machine Settings on the LCD .
3. Start printing from the Bluetooth compliant device.
When you select the device name, select the initial value of the printer "Canon XXX-1" (where "XXX"
is your printer's name).
If you are required to input the passkey, input the initial value "0000".
You can change the device name of the printer or passkey on the Bluetooth settings screen on the
LCD.
Setting Bluetooth Printing
Page top
Bluetooth Settings
Page 740 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Bluetooth Settings
Bluetooth Settings
Setting Bluetooth Printing
Bluetooth Settings Screen
Page top
Setting Bluetooth Printing
Page 741 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Bluetooth Settings > Setting Bluetooth Printing
Setting Bluetooth Printing
1. Make sure that the printer is turned on, and attach the Bluetooth unit.
Note
When the Bluetooth unit is properly attached to the printer, the Power lamp on the printer
flashes twice.
2. Display the Bluetooth settings screen on the LCD.
For information about how to display the Bluetooth settings screen, refer to Changing the Machine
Settings on the LCD .
3. Select the contents which you want to set on the LCD.
Bluetooth Settings Screen
Note
For information about how to set a media type and a paper size when printing from a mobile
phone, refer to Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD .
Page top
Bluetooth Settings Screen
Page 742 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Bluetooth Settings > Bluetooth Settings Screen
Bluetooth Settings Screen
The screens may differ depending on the printer you are using.
1. Device name
Displays the device name of the printer to which the Bluetooth unit is attached.
Device name Screen
2. Access refusal
Selecting ON will disable searching of this printer by a Bluetooth-compatible device.
Access refusal Screen
3. Security
Select Enable and then specify the security mode to activate the passkey set on the Passkey screen.
Security Screen
4. Passkey
You can change the passkey. The passkey refers to an identification number to be determined. It is
used to prevent unwanted access from other Bluetooth devices. The initial value is set to 0000.
Passkey Screen
Device name Screen
Allows you to set the device name of the printer on a Bluetooth device.
Ex:
When you select MP990 series-2, the printer name displayed on the Bluetooth device is Canon
MP990 series-2.
The initial value is set to MP990 series-1.
Access refusal Screen
Bluetooth Settings Screen
Page 743 of 949 pages
When you search from a Bluetooth device, you can enable or disable the display of the printer
name.
ON
Disables searching from a Bluetooth device.
OFF (Default setting)
Enables searching and printing from a Bluetooth device.
Security Screen
Enable
Selecting Enable allows you to choose either of the security modes below.
Mode 3(recommended)
This mode is activated on link level enforced security.
The passkey will be required when a Bluetooth device communicates with the printer.
Normally select this mode.
Mode 2
This mode is activated on service level enforced security.
The passkey will be required when printing through the Bluetooth communication.
After setting the security mode, we recommend making a trial print through Bluetooth
communication. If printing does not start, change the security mode and try again.
Setting a passkey will prevent unwanted access from other Bluetooth devices. You can
change the passkey on the Passkey screen.
Disable (Default setting)
When you register the printer, you are not required to input a passkey.
Passkey Screen
When you select Enable on the Security screen, you are required to set a passkey to register the
printer on other Bluetooth devices.
After you change the passkey, you may be asked to input the passkey on the Bluetooth devices you
were able to print from before the passkey was changed. In this case, input the new passkey.
Page top
Troubleshooting
Page 744 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Printer Cannot be Registered
Printing Does Not Start
Page top
Troubleshooting
Page 745 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section describes how to solve the problems occurred during the use of the Bluetooth unit.
Problems related to the printer's hardware, MP Drivers installation, and so on, are also described in
Troubleshooting .
Page top
Printer Cannot be Registered
Page 746 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Troubleshooting > Printer Cannot be Registered
Printer Cannot be Registered
Check 1: Have MP Drivers been installed?
If MP Drivers are not yet installed, insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then
perform Custom Install and select MP Drivers.
Check 2: Is unsupported Bluetooth driver used?
Confirm that the Bluetooth driver installed on your computer is supported.
Toshiba Windows Vista or Windows XP computer
In Windows Vista, click Start, and select All Programs, TOSHIBA, Bluetooth, then Bluetooth
Settings.
On the Bluetooth Settings dialog, click the help button, the version number, then make sure that
the version number is 5.10.04 or later.
In Windows XP, click Start, and select All Programs, TOSHIBA, Bluetooth, then Bluetooth
Settings.
On the Bluetooth Settings dialog, click the help button, the version number, then make sure that
the version number is 3.00.10 or later.
Windows Vista (except for Toshiba Windows Vista computers)
Log into a user account with the administrator privilege, and click Control Panel, then Hardware
and Sound.
Make sure that the
Bluetooth Devices icon is displayed in the dialog.
Windows XP SP2 or later (except for Toshiba Windows XP computers)
Log into a user account with the administrator privilege, click Control Panel, then Printers and
Other Hardware.
Make sure that the
Bluetooth Devices icon is displayed in the dialog.
The operations may vary depending on your operating program. In this case, refer to your computer's
operation manual.
Check 3: Is the printer name which you want to register displayed in
Printer List?
Make sure that the printer is turned on.
Make sure that the Power lamp is lit.
Make sure that the printer is not operating.
Check whether the Bluetooth unit is usable.
Make sure that the Bluetooth settings screen can be displayed on the LCD of the printer. If the
screen cannot be displayed, Bluetooth communication is disabled. Remove the Bluetooth unit
from the printer and attach it again.
Attaching to and Removing from the Printer
Make sure that the Bluetooth settings screen can be displayed on the LCD of the printer, and try
to register again.
Check whether access from a Bluetooth-compatible device is refused.
Check the printer access setting displaying the Bluetooth settings screen on the LCD of the
printer.
1. Display the Bluetooth settings screen on the LCD of the printer.
For information about how to display the Bluetooth settings screen, refer to Changing the
Machine Settings on the LCD .
2. Select Access refusal.
3. Select OFF and press the OK button on the printer.
Printer Cannot be Registered
Page 747 of 949 pages
Page top
Printing Does Not Start
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Troubleshooting > Printing Does Not Start
Printing Does Not Start
Check 1: Is Bluetooth unit ready for use?
Make sure that the Bluetooth settings screen can be displayed on the LCD of the printer. If the
screen cannot be displayed, Bluetooth communication is disabled. Remove the Bluetooth unit from
the printer and attach it once again.
Attaching to and Removing from the Printer
Make sure that the Bluetooth settings screen can be displayed on the LCD of the printer, and try to
print again.
If the Bluetooth settings screen still is not displayed after you remove the Bluetooth unit from the
printer and attach it again, the Bluetooth unit may be faulty. In this case, contact the service center.
Check 2: Is there a problem with the location of the printer or is the
distance between the printer and computer too great?
The maximum communication distance between the printer and a computer is about 33 ft./10 m, but
it varies depending on the following conditions:
Presence of obstacles between the communication equipment and radio wave conditions
Location where magnetic fields, static electricity, or radio interference occurs
Type of software and operating system used
Receiver sensitivity and antenna performance of the communication equipment
Change the printer installation place or move the printer closer to the computer.
Check 3: Is the printer to be used selected correctly?
Follow the procedure described below to select the printer to which the Bluetooth unit is attached.
1. Log into a user account with the administrator privilege.
2. Click Control Panel, then Printers under Hardware and Sound.
When using non-Vista Windows, click Control Panel, then Printers and Faxes under Printers
and Other Hardware.
3. Click the
icon of the printer to be used for printing via Bluetooth
communication.
By default, the icon name is Canon XXX Printer (Copy X).
Note
"X" is a device name or a digit. The number of digits may differ depending on the printer.
4. Select Properties from the Organize (File in non-Vista Windows) menu.
5. Click the Ports tab and select an applicable printer from Port.
It may vary depending on how you authenticate the printer.
When authenticating the printer as a Bluetooth device in Control Panel
BTHnnn (Canon XXX Printer (Copy X)) ("n" is a digit).
When authenticating the printer as a Bluetooth device using Bluetooth Settings built in the
computer
TBPnnn (Canon XXX Printer (Copy X)) ("n" is a digit)
For more information about how to register the printer, see Register the printer as a Bluetooth
device using Bluetooth Devices. in Preparation .
Page 748 of 949 pages
Printing Does Not Start
Page 749 of 949 pages
6. Click OK.
Check 4: Is the message "This document failed to print" displayed?
Do not retry printing. Check the error message on the LCD.
Clear the error according to An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD .
When you use a Microsoft Bluetooth driver, make sure that the Printing (HCRP) service is
effective on your computer.
Click Control Panel, Bluetooth Devices under Hardware and Sound (Printers and Other
Hardware in non-Vista Windows), then select the printer to be used for Bluetooth
communication and click Properties.
Make sure that Printing (HCRP) on the Services sheet is checked.
If Printing (HCRP) is not checked or the Printing (HCRP) service is not detected, follow the
procedure below and register the printer again.
1. Click Control Panel, then Printers under Hardware and Sound.
When using non-Vista Windows, click Control Panel, then Printers and Faxes under Printers
and Other Hardware.
2. Click the
icon of the printer for printing via Bluetooth communication.
3. Select Delete from the Organize (File in non-Vista Windows) menu.
4. Authenticate the printer as a Bluetooth device on Bluetooth Devices in Control
Panel.
For more information about the procedure, see Registering the Printer .
This message is displayed when the print job is sent from the Bluetooth device while another
print job through the USB port is being printed out.
Printing will begin automatically when the print queue is finished.
Printing cannot be carried out with Bluetooth communication from more than one computer at
the same time. In this case, this message is displayed on the computer during standing by.
Printing will begin automatically when the print queue is finished.
Check 5: Were the MP Drivers installed after printer registration on
Bluetooth Devices?
If you have installed the MP Drivers after registering the printer as a Bluetooth device on Bluetooth
Devices, delete the printer and then register it again.
For more information about the procedure, see Preparation .
Page top
Specifications
Page 750 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Bluetooth Communication > Specifications
Specifications
Communication
method
Bluetooth v2.0
Maximum Speed
1.44 Mbps
Output
Bluetooth Power Class 2
Communication
distance
Line-of-sight distance: approx. 33 ft./10 m *
* It may vary depending on factors including the presence of obstacles between
communication equipment, radio wave conditions, the presence of magnetic
fields around microwave ovens and locations where electrostatic and radio
interference occur, the types of software and operating systems used, and
receiver sensitivity and antenna performance of communication equipment.
Profile
SPP (Serial Port Profile)
OPP (Object Push Profile)
BIP (Basic Imaging Profile)
HCRP (Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile)
Compatible PCs
A computer in which an internal Bluetooth module is installed or a computer to
which an optional Bluetooth adapter (available from various manufacturers) is
attached.
OS/Software:
Microsoft Windows Vista (Satisfying any one of the following conditions is needed)
Bluetooth Devices is displayed in Hardware and Sound under Control Panel
Bluetooth Stack for Windows by Toshiba Version 5.10.04 or later is installed
Microsoft Windows XP (Satisfying any one of the following conditions is needed)
Windows XP SP2 or later is installed, and Bluetooth Devices is displayed in
Printers and Other Hardware under Control Panel
Bluetooth Stack for Windows by Toshiba Version 3.00.10 or later is installed
Frequency band
2.4 GHz band (2.400 GHz to 2.4835 GHz)
Power supply
Supplied from the Direct Print Port on the printer, DC 4.4 V to 5.25 V
Maximum power
consumption
500 mW (MAX)
Operating
temperature
5 to 35˚C (41 to 95˚F)
Operating humidity
10 to 90% RH (no condensation)
Dimensions (Width 18.5 (W) x 47.5 (D) x 8.7 (H) mm (with cap attached)
x Depth x Height)
0.73 (W) x 1.87 (D) x 0.35 (H) inches
Weight
Approx. 7 g (0.25 oz)
Page top
Changing the Machine Settings
Page 751 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings
Changing the Machine Settings
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer
Page top
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Page 752 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Plain paper feed settings
Print settings
LAN settings
Advanced settings
Mobile phone print setting
Bluetooth settings
PictBridge print settings
Language selection
Reset setting
Page top
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Page 753 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > Changing the Machine
Settings on the LCD
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
This section describes the procedure to change the settings in the Device settings screen, taking the
steps to specify Extended copy amount as an example.
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Select
Settings on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
The Settings screen is displayed.
3. Select
Device settings, then press the OK button.
The Device settings screen is displayed.
4. Select the setting item, then press the OK button.
The setting screen for the selected item is displayed.
5. Select the menu, then press the OK button.
6. Select the setting item, then press the OK button.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Page 754 of 949 pages
Plain paper feed settings
Print settings
LAN settings
Advanced settings
Mobile phone print setting
Bluetooth settings
PictBridge print settings
Language selection
Reset setting
Page top
Plain paper feed settings
Page 755 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > Plain paper feed
settings
Plain paper feed settings
Specifies the paper source for A4, Letter, A5, and B5 plain paper.
Note
A4, Letter, A5, and B5 paper can be loaded in the Cassette. Load the other sizes of paper on the
Rear Tray.
Page top
Print settings
Page 756 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > Print settings
Print settings
Prevent paper abrasion
Use this setting only if the print surface becomes smudged.
Important
Be sure to set this back to OFF after printing since it may result in lower printing speed or lower
print quality.
Extended copy amount
Selects the amount of image that extends off the paper when printing in borderless (full).
Important
This setting can be applied only when copy or easy photo reprint mode is selected.
Note
If printouts contain margins even though you are printing in Borderless, specifying Large for
this setting may help solve the problem.
Auto Photo Fix setting
When ON is selected, you can select whether to print photos using the Exif information recorded in
the image files in the following cases.
Auto photo fix ON is selected when printing from a memory card
When a Photo Index Sheet with "Auto Photo Fix OFF" not filled in is used for printing
When printing with PictBridge compliant device that meets both the following conditions:
-The print setting on the PictBridge compliant device is set to Default
-Auto photo fix ON is selected for PictBridge print settings
Page top
LAN settings
Page 757 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > LAN settings
LAN settings
WLAN active/inactive
Activates/deactivates wireless LAN.
Wireless LAN setup
Selects the setting method for wireless LAN connection.
Note
You can enter this setting menu by following the procedure below:
1. Select Settings on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
2. Select Wireless LAN setup.
In this case, activate wireless LAN.
Easy settings
Select when you perform settings for wireless LAN manually.
WPS settings
Select when you perform settings for wireless LAN using Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS). Select
Push button method or PIN method according to the method your access point supports, then
follow the on-screen instructions.
WCN settings
Select when you perform settings for wireless LAN using Windows Connect Now (WCN)
feature. You need a USB flash drive on which settings for wireless LAN are saved.
Confirm LAN settings
The list of wireless LAN settings of this machine is displayed on the LCD.
You can print the list from this setting menu.
Wireless LAN setting list
The list of wireless LAN settings of this machine is displayed on the LCD.
The following setting items are displayed.
Setting (IPv4)
Setting (IPv6)
Items
Connection
Active/Inactive
Active/Inactive
SSID
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Communication
mode
Infrastructure
Infrastructure
Channel
XX
XX
Wireless LAN
security
Disable/WEP(64bit)/WEP(128bit)/
WPA-PSK(TKIP)/WPA-PSK(AES)/
WPA2-PSK(TKIP)/WPA2-PSK(AES)
Disable/WEP(64bit)/WEP(128bit)/
WPA-PSK(TKIP)/WPA-PSK(AES)/
WPA2-PSK(TKIP)/WPA2-PSK(AES)
IP address
XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX
XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX:
XXXX: XXXX
Subnet mask
XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX
-
Subnet prefix
length
-
XXX
Default gateway
XXX. XXX. XXX. XXX
XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX: XXXX:
XXXX: XXXX
MAC address
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
IPsec setting
-
Enable (ESP)/Enable (ESP & AH)/
Enable (AH)/Disable
Pre-shared key
-
XXXXXXXXXXX
LAN settings
Page 758 of 949 pages
Printer name
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Bonjour service
Canon MP560 series
Canon MP560 series
name
_XXXXXXXXXXXX
_XXXXXXXXXXXX
("X" represents an alphanumeric character ranging from 0 to 9 and A to F.)
Print LAN details
You can print out the network settings of the machine such as its IP address and SSID.
For more information on the machine's network setting is printed out, refer to Printing Out
Network Setting Information .
Important
This print out contains valuable information about your computer. Handle it with care.
Other settings
Set printer name
Specifies the printer name. You can use up to 15 characters for the name.
Note
You cannot change this setting with the memory card inserted in the Card Slot.
You cannot use the same printer name as that already used for other LAN connected
devices.
You cannot use a hyphen for the initial or last character of the printer name.
IPv4/IPv6 settings
Selects the IP version (IPv4 or IPv6). It is recommended to use the machine with IPv4.
Set memory card sharing
Selects whether to share the Card Slot with a LAN connected computer.
Note
You cannot change this setting with the memory card inserted in the Card Slot.
WSD settings
Activates/deactivates the WSD (one of the network protocols supported in Windows Vista)
setting.
Note
When you set WSD settings to Active, the printer icon is displayed on the Network Explorer
in Windows Vista.
LLTD setting
Activates/deactivates the Link Layer Topology Discovery (LLTD) setting.
Bonjour settings
Enable/disable Bonjour
Selecting Enable allows you to use Bonjour to perform the network settings.
Service name
Specifies the Bonjour service name. You can use up to 48 characters for the name.
Note
You cannot use the same service name as that already used for other LAN connected
devices.
LPR service advertising
Selects whether to advertise the Line PRinter daemon protocol (LPR).
Note
Select Enable for LPR protocol setting to activate this setting.
LPR protocol setting
Activates/deactivates the LPR setting.
LAN settings
Page 759 of 949 pages
Reset LAN settings
Initializes the network settings on the machine.
Important
Note that initialization erases all connection settings with computers, and printing or scanning
operation may become impossible. To use the machine over network, refer to your setup
manual. Be careful when you initialize the network settings on the machine.
Note
When you initialize the network settings using the Canon IJ Network Tool, refer to Initializing the
Network Settings of the Machine .
Page top
Advanced settings
Page 760 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > Advanced settings
Advanced settings
Date display
Changes the display format of shooting dates when printed.
Note
When Date ON is selected on the advanced print settings screen in memory card mode, the
shooting date is printed in the date display format you selected. For print settings, see Setting
Items .
The shooting date format is as specified in the DPOF setting from DPOF printing.
Read/write attribute
Selects whether to allow data to be written onto memory cards from a computer.
Important
Remove the memory card before changing this setting. For details, see Setting Up the Card
Slot as the Memory Card Drive of the Computer .
If you set this setting to Writable from USB PC or Writable from LAN PC, you cannot print photos
on a memory card using the Operation Panel of the machine. After you finish operation of the
memory card dedicated drive, be sure to set it back to Not writable from PC. When you turn off
the machine, Writable from USB PC or Writable from LAN PC will be canceled and the setting
is returned to Not writable from PC when you turn on the machine next time.
Quiet mode
Enables this function on the machine if you want to reduce the operating noise, such as when
printing at night.
Enabling this function reduces the noises generated in the following cases:
Copying
Printing from a memory card/USB flash drive
Printing from a PictBridge compliant device
Printing from a wireless communication device
Printing a template form
Important
Operating speed may be reduced compared to when this setting is set to OFF.
This function may not be so effective depending on the machine's setting.
Furthermore, certain noise, such as when the machine is preparing for printing, is not reduced.
Note
The noises generated while scanning or printing from the computer can also be reduced. To
reduce these noises, you need to configure the settings on the computer.
For the noises while scanning, refer to Scanner Tab .
For the noises while printing from the computer, refer to Reducing the Machine Noise .
Guide display settings
Changes the time before the guidance is displayed on the LCD, or selects not to be displayed.
Key repeat
,
,
,
, +, or - button
Enables/Disables continuous input by pressing and holding down the
when setting the number of copies, changing the photo displayed on the LCD, setting the zoom
ratio, etc.
Advanced settings
Page 761 of 949 pages
Page top
Mobile phone print setting
Page 762 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > Mobile phone print
setting
Mobile phone print setting
When printing from a mobile phone through Bluetooth communication, select the print settings such as
page size, media type, layout, and so on. For details on how to print from a mobile phone through
Bluetooth communication, see Printing Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device .
Note
This menu is displayed only when the optional Bluetooth Unit is attached.
1. Select the page size for printing photos saved on a mobile phone.
2. Select the media type for printing photos saved on a mobile phone.
3. Select Image optimizer ON to correct and smooth out the jagged contours when
printing.
4. Select the layout of the photos according to the paper for printing.
Sticker print:
Stickers x16, Stickers x9, Stickers x4, Stickers x2, Free-cut stickers 1, Free-cut stickers 2, Free-cut
stickers 3, Free-cut stickers 4
Printing on paper other than sticker:
Bordered x 1, x 2, x 4, x 8
Borderless x 1, x 2, x 4, x 8
Mixed 1, 2, 3
Note
Mixed 1, Mixed 2, or Mixed 3 can be selected only when the page size is set to A4 or
8.5"x11"(LTR).
Page top
Bluetooth settings
Page 763 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > Bluetooth settings
Bluetooth settings
You can change the device name of the machine, passkey, and so on in the Bluetooth settings.
For details on how to print from a mobile phone through Bluetooth communication, see Printing
Photographs from a Wireless Communication Device .
For details on how to print from a computer through Bluetooth communication, refer to About Bluetooth
Communication .
Note
This menu is displayed only when the optional Bluetooth Unit is attached.
Device name
Specifies the name of this machine that is displayed on a Bluetooth-compatible device.
For example, if you set it to XXX-2, the machine will be displayed as "Canon XXX-2" on the Bluetooth
device. The default value is XXX-1 (where "XXX" is your machine's name).
Access refusal
Selecting ON will disable searching of this machine by a Bluetooth-compatible device.
Security
When you select Enable, the passkey set on the Passkey screen becomes effective. Setting the
passkey prevents unwanted access from other Bluetooth devices. You can choose either of the
security modes below.
Mode 2
This mode is activated on service level enforced security.
The passkey will be required when printing through the Bluetooth communication.
After setting the security mode, we recommend making a trial print through Bluetooth
communication.
If printing does not start, change the security mode and try again.
Mode 3(recommended)
This mode is activated on link level enforced security.
The passkey will be required when a Bluetooth device communicates with the machine.
Normally select this mode.
Passkey
Changes the passkey. The passkey is a four-digit number used to prevent unwanted access from
other Bluetooth devices.
The initial value is "0000".
After you change the passkey, you may be required to input the new passkey on a Bluetooth device,
even though it had previous access to the machine. In this case, input the new passkey on the
device.
Page top
PictBridge print settings
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > PictBridge print
settings
PictBridge print settings
You can change the print settings when printing from a PictBridge compliant device.
Set the print settings to Default on the PictBridge compliant device when you want to print according to
the settings on the machine.
See Settings on a PictBridge Compliant Device to change print settings from the PictBridge compliant
device.
Photo print setting
Select the print quality, when printing directly from a PictBridge compliant device.
1.
Select the paper size when printing directly from a PictBridge compliant device.
When you perform PictBridge settings from the machine, set Paper size to Default on the
PictBridge compliant device.
2.
Select the media type when printing directly from a PictBridge compliant device.
When you perform PictBridge settings from the machine, set Paper type to Default on the
PictBridge compliant device.
3.
Select the print quality when printing directly from a PictBridge compliant device.
4.
Select bordered or borderless print.
When you perform PictBridge settings from the machine, set Layout to Default on the
PictBridge compliant device.
5.
Select automatic image correction or manual image correction.
When Auto photo fix ON is selected, the scene or person's face of a shot photo is recognized
and the most suitable correction for each photo is made automatically. It makes a darkened
face by backlight brighter to print. It also analyzes a scene such as scenery, night scene,
Page 764 of 949 pages
PictBridge print settings
person, etc. and corrects each scene with the most suitable color, brightness, or contrasts
automatically to print.
Note
After selecting Auto photo fix ON, select Red-Eye correc. ON or Red-Eye correc. OFF.
When Manual correction is selected, the setting items 6 to 15 below can be specified.
Set Image optimize to Default on the PictBridge compliant device.
6.
Photo optimizer pro
Automatically optimizes brightness and tone of a photo.
7.
Vivid photo
Makes green and blue more lively.
8.
Face brightener
Brightens a darkened face on the photo taken against the light.
9.
Noise reduction
Reduces the noise on blue areas like the sky as well as on black areas.
10.
Image optimizer
Corrects and smoothes the jagged contours for printing.
Page 765 of 949 pages
PictBridge print settings
11.
Page 766 of 949 pages
Red-Eye correction
Corrects red eyes in portraits caused by flash photography.
Depending on the type of the photo, red eyes may not be corrected or parts other than the
eyes may be corrected.
12.
Brightness
Adjust brightness.
13.
Contrast
Adjust contrast.
14.
Color hue
Adjust color hue. For example, you can increase red or yellow to adjust the skin tone.
15.
Effects
Applies special effects to the photo, such as printing in sepia tones or with a sketch
illustration like effect.
Page top
Language selection
Page 767 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > Language selection
Language selection
Changes the language for LCD messages and menus.
Page top
Reset setting
Page 768 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD > Reset setting
Reset setting
You can change the settings back to the default.
Note
You cannot change the following setting items back to the default:
The language displayed on the LCD
The current position of the Print Head
The Read/write attribute setting
LAN settings
Page top
Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer
Page 769 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer
Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer
Changing the Print Options
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper
Managing the Machine Power
Reducing the Machine Noise
Changing the Machine Operation Mode
Page top
Changing the Print Options
Page 770 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Changing the
Print Options
Changing the Print Options
You change the detailed print driver settings for print data that is sent from an application software.
Check this check box if part of the image data is cut off, the paper source during printing differs from the
driver settings, or printing fails.
The procedure for changing the print options is as follows:
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Print Options... on the Page Setup tab
The Print Options dialog box opens.
3. Change the individual settings
If necessary, change the setting of each item, and then click OK.
The Page Setup tab is displayed again.
Page top
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Registering a
Frequently Used Printing Profile
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
You can register the frequently used printing profile to Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab.
Unnecessary printing profiles can be deleted at any time.
The procedure for registering a printing profile is as follows:
Registering a Printing Profile
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Set the necessary items
From Commonly Used Settings on the Quick Setup tab, select the printing profile to be used and if
necessary, change the settings after Additional Features.
You can also set necessary items on the Main, Page Setup, and Effects tab.
3. Click Save...
The Save Commonly Used Settings dialog box opens.
4. Save the settings
Set Name, then click OK. If necessary, set the items in Options.... The printing profile is saved, and
the Quick Setup tab is displayed again.
The name and icon are added to the Commonly Used Settings list.
Page 771 of 949 pages
Registering a Frequently Used Printing Profile
Page 772 of 949 pages
Important
To save the page size, orientation, and number of copies that was set in each sheet, click
Options..., and check each item.
Note
When you install the printer driver again or upgrade the version of the printer driver, the print settings
you registered will be deleted from Commonly Used Settings.
Registered print settings cannot be saved and preserved. If a profile is deleted, register the print
settings again.
Deleting Unnecessary Printing Profile
1. Select the printing profile to be deleted
Select the printing profile you want to delete from the Commonly Used Settings list on the Quick
Setup tab.
2. Delete the printing profile
Click Delete. When the confirmation message appears, click OK.
The selected printing profile is deleted from the Commonly Used Settings list.
Note
Printing profiles that are registered in the initial settings cannot be deleted.
Page top
Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper
Page 773 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Setting the Paper
Source for Plain Paper
Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper
When you select Automatically Select from Paper Source, you can use the printer driver to select the
paper source for plain paper.
The procedure for setting the paper source is as follows:
Paper Source Setting for Plain Paper
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Paper Source Setting for Plain Paper on the Maintenance tab
The Paper Source Setting for Plain Paper dialog box opens.
3. Transmit the settings
Select the paper source for plain paper, and then click the Send button.
The selected settings are enabled hereafter.
Important
The descriptions in the machine manual assume that the plain paper is supplied from the
cassette. When you change the paper source setting, replace all instances of "cassette" with the
new paper source.
Page top
Managing the Machine Power
Page 774 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Managing the
Machine Power
Managing the Machine Power
This function allows you to manage the machine power from the printer driver.
The procedure for managing the printer power is as follows:
Power Off
The Power Off function turns off the machine. When you use this function, you will not be able to turn the
machine on from the printer driver.
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Execute power off
Click Power Off on the Maintenance tab. When the confirmation message appears, click OK.
The machine power switches off, and the Maintenance tab is displayed again.
Page top
Reducing the Machine Noise
Page 775 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Reducing the
Machine Noise
Reducing the Machine Noise
This function allows you to reduce the operating noise of the machine. Select when you wish to reduce
the operating noise of the printer at night, etc.
Using this function may lower the print speed.
The procedure for using the quiet mode is as follows:
Quiet Mode
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Click Quiet Mode on the Maintenance tab
The Quiet Mode dialog box opens.
3. Set the quiet mode
If necessary, specify one of the following items:
Do not use quiet mode
The operating noise of the machine is at normal volume.
Always use quiet mode
Select this option when you wish to reduce the operating noise of the machine.
Use quiet mode within specified time
The operating noise of the machine can be reduced during a specified period of time.
Set the Start time and End time when you wish the quiet mode to be activated.
Important
The time specified in Start time and in End time must be different.
4. Transmit the settings
Make sure that the machine is on and click Send.
Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
The settings are enabled hereafter.
Note
Depending on the paper source and the print quality settings, effects of the quiet mode may be
less.
Page top
Changing the Machine Operation Mode
Page 776 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Changing the Machine Settings > Changing Machine Settings from Your Computer > Changing the
Machine Operation Mode
Changing the Machine Operation Mode
If necessary, switch between various modes of machine operation.
The procedure for configuring settings is as follows:
Custom Settings
1. Open the printer driver setup window
2. Make sure that the machine is on, and then click Custom Settings on the
Maintenance tab
The Custom Settings dialog box opens.
Note
If the machine is off or bi-directional communication is disabled, a message may appear
because the computer cannot collect the machine status.
If this happens, click OK to display the most recent settings specified on your computer.
3. If necessary, complete the following settings:
Prevent paper abrasion
The machine can increase the gap between the print head and the paper during high-density
printing to prevent paper abrasion.
Check this check box to use this function.
Align heads manually
The Print Head Alignment function on the Maintenance tab is normally set to automatic head
alignment, but you can change it to manual head alignment. If the printing results are unsatisfactory
even after you execute automatic head alignment, see " Aligning the Print Head Position ," and
execute manual head alignment.
Check this check box to perform the manual head alignment.
Ink Drying Wait Time
You can set the length of the machine rest time until printing of the next page begins. Moving the
slider to the right increases the pause time and moving the slider to the left decreases the time.
If the paper gets stained because the next page is ejected before the ink on the printed page dries,
increase the ink drying wait time.
Reducing the ink drying wait time speeds up printing.
4. Transmit the settings
Click Send, and click OK when the confirmation message appears.
The machine operates with the modified settings hereafter.
Page top
Troubleshooting
Page 777 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
If an Error Occurs
The Machine Cannot Be Powered On
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD
LCD Cannot Be Seen At All
An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD
Cannot Install the MP Drivers
Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Printing Does Not Start
Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed
Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected
Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected
Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing
Paper Does Not Feed Properly
Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Driver
Paper Jams
Message Appears on the Computer Screen
Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing
For Windows Users
Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device
Cannot Print Properly from a Wireless Communication Device
Cannot Print Properly from a Photo Index Sheet
Cannot Remove a Memory Card
Problems with Scanning
Software Problems
MP Navigator EX Problems
If You Cannot Resolve the Problem
FAQs
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
Page top
Troubleshooting
Page 778 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section describes troubleshooting tips for problems you may encounter when using the machine.
For troubleshooting tips related to the setup, refer to the Network Setup Troubleshooting .
Page top
If an Error Occurs
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > If an Error Occurs
If an Error Occurs
When an error occurs in printing such as the machine is out of paper or paper is jammed, a
troubleshooting message is displayed automatically. Take the appropriate action described in the
message. The message may vary depending on the version of your operating system.
In Mac OS X v.10.5.x:
In Mac OS X v.10.4.x or Mac OS X v.10.3.9:
Page 779 of 949 pages
If an Error Occurs
Page 780 of 949 pages
Page top
The Machine Cannot Be Powered On
Page 781 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > The Machine Cannot Be Powered On
The Machine Cannot Be Powered On
Check 1: Press the ON button.
Check 2: Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged into the
Power Cord Connector of the machine, then turn it back on.
Check 3: Unplug the machine from the power supply, then plug the
machine back in and turn the machine back on after leaving it for at
least 3 minutes.
If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.
Page top
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD
Page 782 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD
If an error message is displayed on the LCD, take the corresponding action described below.
Action
Message
The following ink may have run out.
Replacing the ink tank is
recommended.
U041
If the lamp on the ink tank is flashing, ink may have run out.
Replacing the ink tank is recommended.
If printing is in progress and you want to continue printing,
press the machine's OK button with the ink tank installed.
Then printing can continue. Replacing the ink tank is
recommended after the printing. The machine may be
damaged if printing is continued under the ink out condition.
Routine Maintenance
Note
If multiple ink lamps are flashing red, see Routine
Maintenance and check the status of each ink tank.
Print head is not installed.
Install the print head.
U051/
The type of print head is incorrect.
Install the correct print head.
U052
Follow the directions given in your setup sheet to install the
Print Head.
If the Print Head is already installed, remove the Print Head
once and then reinstall it.
If the error is not resolved, the Print Head may be damaged.
Contact the service center.
Some ink tanks are not installed in
place.
U072/
More than one ink tank of the following
color is installed.
U071
Some ink tanks are not installed in the correct position.
(The lamp on the ink tank flashes.)
More than one ink tanks of the same color are installed.
(The lamp on the ink tank flashes.)
Confirm that the ink tanks are installed in the appropriate
positions.
Routine Maintenance
The remaining level of the following ink
cannot be correctly detected.
Replace the ink tank.
U130
The remaining ink level cannot be correctly detected. (The
lamp on the ink tank flashes.)
Replace the ink tank and close the Scanning Unit (Cover).
Routine Maintenance
Printing with an ink tank that was once empty may damage
the machine.
If you want to continue printing in this condition, you need to
release the function for detecting the remaining ink level.
Press and hold the machine's Stop button for at least 5
seconds, and then release it.
With this operation, releasing the function for detecting the
remaining ink level is memorized. Please be advised that
Canon shall not be liable for any machine malfunction or
damage caused by refilled ink tanks.
Note
If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is
disabled, the ink tank in gray is displayed on the LCD
when checking the current ink level.
Routine Maintenance
The following ink tank cannot be
recognized.
U043
U140
The ink tank is not installed. Install the ink tank.
Routine Maintenance
The ink tank is not compatible with this machine. (The
lamp on the ink tank is off.)
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD
U150
The following ink has run out.
Replace the ink tank.
U163
Install an appropriate ink tank.
Routine Maintenance
An ink tank error has occurred. (The lamp on the ink tank
is off.)
Replace the ink tank.
Routine Maintenance
Ink has run out. (The lamp on the ink tank flashes.)
Replace the ink tank and close the Scanning Unit (Cover).
Routine Maintenance
Printing under the current condition may damage the
machine.
If you want to continue printing in this condition, you need to
release the function for detecting the remaining ink level.
Press and hold the machine's Stop button for at least 5
seconds, and then release it.
With this operation, releasing the function for detecting the
remaining ink level is memorized. Please be advised that
Canon shall not be liable for any malfunction or trouble
which may be caused by continuation of printing under the
ink out condition.
Note
If the function for detecting the remaining ink level is
disabled, the ink tank in gray is displayed on the LCD
when checking the current ink level.
Routine Maintenance
There are no photos in memory card./
No photo data in USB flash drive.
There is no image data saved on the memory card or the
USB flash drive that can be read by this machine.
The machine may not recognize the file if the file name or
the folder path contains certain characters. Use only
alphanumeric characters.
Photo data edited or processed on a computer must be
printed from the computer.
Note
When a photo was processed on a computer is
selected, "?" is displayed on the LCD.
The ink absorber is almost full.
Press OK to continue printing.
Contact the service center.
The ink absorber is almost full.
Press the machine's OK button to continue printing. Contact
the service center.
Printer error has occurred
Contact the service center.
The machine error has occurred.
Contact the service center.
Timeout error has occurred.
Press OK.
Some errors occurred while copying and a certain time
The device may be incompatible.
Remove the device and check the
manual supplied with the connected
device.
Check the device connected to the Direct Print Port. Printing
photos directly is possible with a PictBridge compliant device
or the optional Bluetooth Unit BU-30, or a USB flash drive.
passed.
Press the OK button to dismiss the error, and try to copy
again.
A communication time out occurs if an operation takes too
long or if it takes too much time to send data. This may
cancel printing. In such cases, disconnect and reconnect the
USB cable.
When printing from a PictBridge compliant device,
depending on the model or brand of your device, you may
have to select a PictBridge compliant print mode on the
device before connecting it to the machine. You may also
Page 783 of 949 pages
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD
have to turn on your device or select Play mode manually
after connecting the device to the machine. Perform
necessary operations before connecting your device
referring to its instruction manual.
If the error is still not resolved, check if you can print another
photograph.
Failed to scan.
Check orientation/position and check
that platen/sheet is clean.
<See manual>
Scanning the print head alignment sheet has failed.
Press the OK button to dismiss the error, then take the
actions described below.
Make sure that the print head alignment sheet is set in
the correct position and orientation on the Platen Glass.
Make sure the Platen Glass and the print head alignment
sheet are not dirty.
Make sure the type and size of loaded paper is suitable
for Automatic Print Head Alignment.
For Automatic Print Head Alignment, always load one
sheet of A4 or letter-sized plain paper.
Make sure if Print Head nozzles are clogged.
Print the nozzle check pattern to check the status of the
Print Head.
Routine Maintenance
If the error is not resolved, connect the machine to the
computer and align the Print Head on the printer driver.
Aligning the Print Head Position
An unsupported USB hub is connected.
Remove the hub.
If a PictBridge compliant device is connected via a USB hub,
remove the hub and connect it directly to the machine.
B200
Printer error has occurred.
Unplug the power cord and contact the
service center.
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the
machine from the power supply.
Contact the service center.
****
"****" is displayed in the alphanumeric character and
depends on the error occurred.
5100/5110 is displayed:
Cancel printing, and turn off the machine. Then clear the
jammed paper or protective material that is preventing
the Print Head Holder from moving, and turn on the
machine again.
Printer error has occurred.
Turn off power then back on again.
If problem persists, see the manual.
Important
Be careful not to touch the components inside the
machine. The machine may not print out properly if
you touch it.
If the problem is not resolved, contact the service
center.
6000 is displayed:
If any object is placed in front of the machine, remove it.
Open the Paper Output Tray gently, then turn the power
off and back on.
In other cases:
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the
machine from the power supply.
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.
Scanner is not operating correctly.
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the
machine from the power supply.
After a while, plug the power cord of the machine back in,
and then turn on the machine. If the same error occurs,
contact the service center.
The card is currently writable from PC.
The Card Slot is set to Writable from USB PC or Writable
Page 784 of 949 pages
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD
Set to [Not writable from PC].
Page 785 of 949 pages
from LAN PC.
You cannot print from the memory card or save the scanned
data to the memory card when the Card Slot is set to
Writable from USB PC or Writable from LAN PC. After writing
on the memory card, set to Not writable from PC again.
Page top
LCD Cannot Be Seen At All
Page 786 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > LCD Cannot Be Seen At All
LCD Cannot Be Seen At All
If the Power lamp is off:
The machine is not powered on. Connect the power cord and press the ON button.
If the Power lamp is lit:
The LCD may be in the screen-saver mode. On the Operation Panel, press a button other than the
ON button.
Page top
An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD
Page 787 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD
An Unintended Language Is Displayed on the LCD
Select the language you want to be displayed according to the following procedure.
1. Press the HOME button and wait for about 5 seconds.
2. Select
, and then press the OK button.
3. Press the
button to select
4. Press the
button 5 times, then press the OK button.
, then press the OK button.
If the Bluetooth unit is connected to the machine, press the
OK button.
5. Use the
button 7 times, and then press the
button to select the language for the LCD, then press the OK button.
Page top
Cannot Install the MP Drivers
Page 788 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Install the MP Drivers
Cannot Install the MP Drivers
Important
If you cannot install the MP Drivers when you use the machine over LAN, refer to the setup manual.
If the installation does not start even after the Setup CD-ROM is inserted
into your computer's disc drive:
Start the installation following the procedure below.
1. Click Start then Computer.
In Windows XP, click Start then My Computer.
In Windows 2000, double-click the
2. Double-click the
My Computer icon on the desktop.
CD-ROM icon on the displayed window.
If the contents of the CD-ROM are displayed, double-click MSETUP4.EXE.
Double-click the
CD-ROM icon on your desktop to start installation.
Note
If the CD-ROM icon is not displayed, try the following:
Remove the CD-ROM from your computer, then insert it again.
Restart your computer.
If the icon is still not displayed, try different discs and see if they are displayed. If other discs are
displayed, there is a problem with the Setup CD-ROM . In this case, contact the service center.
If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen:
Cannot Install the MP Drivers
If you are unable to proceed beyond the Printer Connection screen, make sure that the USB cable is
securely plugged into the USB port of the machine and is connected to the computer, and then
follow the procedure below to reinstall the MP Drivers.
Note
In Windows Vista, The printer is not detected. Check the connection. may be displayed
depending on the computer you use. In this case, wait for a while. If you still cannot proceed to
the next step, follow the procedure below to reinstall the MP Drivers.
1. Click Cancel on the Printer Connection screen.
2. Click Start Over on the Installation Failure screen.
3. Click Back on the screen that appears next.
4. Click Exit on the PIXMA XXX screen, then remove the CD-ROM.
5. Turn the machine off.
6. Restart the computer.
7. Make sure that you have no application software running.
8. Insert the CD-ROM again, then perform Easy Install to install the MP Drivers.
In other cases:
Follow the procedure described in your setup manual to reinstall the MP Drivers.
If the MP Drivers were not installed correctly, uninstall the MP Drivers, restart your computer, and
then reinstall the MP Drivers.
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Page 789 of 949 pages
Cannot Install the MP Drivers
Page 790 of 949 pages
If you reinstall the MP Drivers, perform Custom Install on the Setup CD-ROM, then select MP Drivers.
Note
If the installer was forced to be terminated due to a Windows error, the system may be in an
unstable condition and you may not be able to install the drivers. Restart your computer before
reinstalling.
Page top
Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly
Page 791 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly
Cannot Connect to Computer with a USB Cable Properly
Printing or Scanning Speed Is Slow/Hi-Speed USB Connection Does Not Work/
"This device can perform faster" Message Is Displayed
If your system environment is not fully compatible with Hi-Speed USB, the machine will operate at
a lower speed provided under USB 1.1. In this case, the machine operates properly but printing
speed may slow down due to communication speed.
Check: Check the following to make sure that your system environment supports
Hi-Speed USB connection.
Does the USB port on your computer support Hi-Speed USB connection?
Do the USB cable, and the USB hub if you are using one, support Hi-Speed USB
connection?
Be sure to use a certified Hi-Speed USB cable. We recommend that the cable is no
longer than around 10 feet / 3 meters.
Does the operating system of your computer support Hi-Speed USB connection?
Obtain and install the latest update for your computer.
Does the Hi-Speed USB driver operate properly?
Obtain the latest version of the Hi-Speed USB driver compatible with your hardware
and reinstall it on your computer.
Important
For details on Hi-Speed USB of your system environment, contact the manufacturer of
your computer, USB cable, or USB hub.
Page top
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Page 792 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory
Print Results Not Satisfactory
If the print result is not satisfactory due to white streaks, misaligned lines, or uneven colors, confirm the
paper and print quality settings first.
Check 1: Do the page size and media type settings match the size and
type of the loaded paper?
When these settings are incorrect, you cannot obtain a proper print result.
If you are printing a photograph or an illustration, incorrect paper type settings may reduce the quality
of the printout color.
Also, if you print with an incorrect paper type setting, the printed surface may be scratched.
In borderless printing, uneven coloring may occur depending on the combination of the paper type
setting and the loaded paper.
The method of confirming the paper and print quality settings differs depending on what you do with
your machine.
To copy by operating the machine
Confirm by using the Operation Panel on the
machine.
Setting Items
To print from your memory card by operating the
machine
Confirm by using the Operation Panel on the
machine.
Setting Items
To print from your USB flash drive by operating the Confirm by using the Operation Panel on the
machine
machine.
Setting Items
To print from printed photo by operating the
machine
Confirm by using the Operation Panel on the
machine.
Setting Items
To print from a PictBridge compliant device
Confirm by using your PictBridge compliant
device.
Printing Photographs Directly from a
Compliant Device
Confirm by using the Operation Panel on the
machine.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
To print from a wireless communication device
Confirm by using the Operation Panel on the
machine.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
To print from a computer
Confirm by using the printer driver.
Printing with Easy Setup
Check 2: Make sure that the appropriate print quality is selected
according to the media type and printing data referring to the table in
Check 1.
Select a print quality option suitable for the paper and image for printing. If you notice blurs or uneven
colors, increase the print quality setting and try printing again.
Note
When printing from a PictBridge compliant device, set the print quality setting by using the
Operation Panel on the machine.
You cannot make this setting from a PictBridge compliant device.
You cannot change the print quality setting when printing from a wireless communication
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Page 793 of 949 pages
device.
Check 3: If the problem is not resolved, there may be other causes.
See also the sections below:
Cannot Print to End of Job
Part of the Page Is Not Printed
No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks
Lines Are Misaligned
Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched
Back of the Paper Is Smudged
Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout
Colors Are Uneven or Streaked
Page top
Cannot Print to End of Job
Page 794 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Cannot Print to End of Job
Cannot Print to End of Job
Check 1: Is the size of the print data extremely large?
Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet. Then, select the Prevent loss of print data check box in
the displayed dialog.
Check 2: Is the space of your computer's hard disk sufficient?
Delete unnecessary files to free disk space.
Page top
Part of the Page Is Not Printed
Page 795 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Part of the Page Is Not Printed
Part of the Page Is Not Printed
Check: When performing automatic duplex printing, the reason below is
possible.
When performing automatic duplex printing, the printable area at the top of the page will be 0.08
inches / 2 mm narrower than the usual.
For this reason, the bottom of the page may not be printed. To prevent this, select Use reduced
printing from the printer driver.
Important
Reduced printing may affect the layout depending on your document.
1. Open the printer properties dialog box.
Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box (Windows)
Click Here: Printer Driver
* Before clicking here to open the printer properties dialog box, quit the running application
software.
2. Click Print Area Setup in the Page Setup sheet and select Use reduced printing.
1. Open the Print dialog box.
Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box (Macintosh)
2. Select Duplex Printing & Margin in the pop-up menu.
3. Select Automatic Duplex Printing.
4. Click Use reduced printing in Print Area.
Page top
No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks
Page 796 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are
Wrong/White Streaks
No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White
Streaks
No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks
Page 797 of 949 pages
Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Check 2: Check the status of ink tanks. Replace the ink tank if the ink
has run out.
Routine Maintenance
Check 3: Is the orange tape or protective film remaining?
Make sure that all of the protective film is peeled off and the air hole is exposed, as illustrated in (A).
If the orange tape is left as in (B), pull the orange tape and remove it.
Check 4: Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary
maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning.
Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head
nozzles.
Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing, Print Head Cleaning, and Print
Head Deep Cleaning.
If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly:
Check to see if a particular color's ink tank is not empty.
If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly though ink is sufficient, perform the Print Head
Cleaning and try printing the Nozzle Check Pattern again.
If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice:
Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning.
If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning, turn off the
machine and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours.
If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice:
If Print Head Deep Cleaning does not resolve the problem, the Print Head may be damaged.
Contact the service center.
Check 5: When using paper with one printable surface, make sure that
the paper is loaded with the printable side facing up.
Printing on the wrong side of such paper may cause unclear prints or prints with reduced quality.
Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the paper for detailed information on the printable side.
Check 6: Is the Platen Glass dirty?
Clean the Platen Glass.
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover
When copying, see also the sections below:
Check 7: Make sure that the original is properly loaded on the Platen
No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks
Page 798 of 949 pages
Glass.
Loading Paper / Originals
Check 8: Is the original loaded with the side to be copied facing down
on the Platen Glass?
Check 9: Did you copy a printout done by this machine?
Print from the memory card, from the USB flash drive, or from the digital camera directly, or reprint
from the computer.
If you copy a printout done by this machine, print quality may be reduced.
Page top
Lines Are Misaligned
Page 799 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Lines Are Misaligned
Lines Are Misaligned
Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Check 2: Perform Print Head Alignment.
If printed lines are misaligned or print results are otherwise unsatisfactory, adjust the print head
position.
Aligning the Print Head
Note
If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment, perform Print Head
Alignment manually referring to Aligning the Print Head Position .
Check 3: Is the size of the print data extremely large?
Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet. Then, select the Prevent loss of print data check box in
the displayed dialog.
Check 4: Is the Page Layout Printing performed or the Binding margin
function used?
When the Page Layout Printing or Binding margin function is being used, thin lines may not be
printed. Try thickening the lines in the document.
Page top
Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots
Page 800 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots
Printed Paper Curls or Has Ink Blots
Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Check 2: If the intensity is set high, reduce the Intensity setting in the
printer driver and try printing again.
If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity, the paper may absorb too much ink
and become wavy, causing paper abrasion.
When printing from your computer
Confirm the intensity using the printer driver.
Adjusting Intensity
When copying
Setting Items
Check 3: Is Photo Paper used for printing photographs?
When printing data with high color saturation such as photographs or images in deep color, we
recommend using Photo Paper Plus Glossy II or other Canon speciality paper.
Loading Paper / Originals
Page top
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched
Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Check 2: Is the appropriate type of paper used? Check the followings:
Check to see if the paper you are printing on is suitable for your printing purpose.
Loading Paper / Originals
When performing Borderless Printing, make sure that the paper you are using is suitable for
Borderless Printing.
If the paper you are using is not suitable for Borderless Printing, the print quality may be
reduced at the top and bottom edges of the paper.
Printing Area
Check 3: Load the paper after correcting its curl.
For Plain Paper
Turn the paper over and reload it to print on the other side.
Leaving the paper loaded on the Rear Tray for a long time may cause the paper to curl. In this
case, load the paper with the other side facing up. It may resolve the problem.
We recommend putting unused paper back into the package and keeping it on a level surface.
For Other Paper
If the curl on the four corners of the paper is more than 0.1 inch / 3 mm (A) in height, the paper
may be smudged or may not be fed properly. In such cases, follow the procedure described
below to correct the paper curl.
1. Roll up the paper in the opposite direction to the paper curl as shown below.
Page 801 of 949 pages
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched
2. Check that the paper is now flat.
We recommend printing curl-corrected paper one sheet at a time.
Note
Depending on the media type, the paper may be smudged or may not be fed properly even if it
is not curled inward. In such cases, follow the procedure described below to curl the paper
outward within 0.1 inch / 3 mm (B) in height before printing. This may improve the print result.
(C) Printing side
We recommend printing paper that has been curled outward one sheet at a time.
Check 4: If you are printing on thick paper, select the Prevent paper
abrasion setting.
Selecting the Prevent paper abrasion setting will widen the clearance between the Print Head and
the loaded paper. If you notice abrasion even with the media type set correctly to match the loaded
paper, set the machine to prevent paper abrasion by using the Operation Panel or the printer driver.
Print speed is reduced if you are selecting the Prevent paper abrasion setting.
* Deactivate the Prevent paper abrasion setting once printing is complete. If not, this setting remains
enabled for all subsequent print jobs.
To set by using the Operation Panel
Press the HOME button, select Settings, Device settings, and Print settings in this order, and
then set Prevent paper abrasion to ON.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
To set by using the printer driver
Open the printer properties dialog box, and in Custom Settings in the Maintenance sheet, select
the Prevent paper abrasion check box, and then click Send.
To open the printer properties dialog box, see Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box
(Windows).
In the Canon IJ Printer Utility, select Custom Settings in the pop-up menu, select the Prevent
paper abrasion check box, and then click Send.
To open the Canon IJ Printer Utility, see Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh) .
Check 5: If the intensity is set high, reduce the Intensity setting in the
printer driver and try printing again.
If you are using plain paper to print images with high intensity, the paper may absorb too much ink
and become wavy, causing paper abrasion.
When printing from your computer
Reduce the Intensity setting in the printer driver and try printing again.
Page 802 of 949 pages
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched
Page 803 of 949 pages
1. Open the printer properties dialog box.
Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box (Windows)
Click Here: Printer Driver
* Before clicking here to open the printer properties dialog box, quit the running application
software.
2. On the Main sheet, select Manual for Color/Intensity, and then click Set.
3. Drag the Intensity slide bar on the Color Adjustment sheet to adjust the
intensity.
1. Open the Print dialog box.
Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box (Macintosh)
2. Select Color Options in the pop-up menu.
3. Drag the Intensity slide bar to set the intensity.
When copying
Setting Items
Check 6: Is printing performed beyond the recommended printing area?
If you are printing beyond the recommended printing area of your printing paper, the lower edge of
the paper may become stained with ink.
Resize your original document in your application software.
Printing Area
Check 7: Is the Platen Glass dirty?
Clean the Platen Glass.
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover
Check 8: Is the Paper Feed Roller dirty?
Clean the Paper Feed Roller.
Routine Maintenance
Note
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller will wear the roller, so perform this procedure only when
necessary.
Check 9: Is inside of the machine dirty?
When performing duplex printing, the inside of the machine may become stained with ink, causing
the printout to become smudged.
Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the machine.
Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
Note
To prevent the inside of the machine from stains, set the paper size correctly.
Paper Is Smudged/Printed Surface Is Scratched
Page 804 of 949 pages
Check 10: Set Ink Drying Wait Time longer.
Doing so gives the printed surface enough time to dry so that paper smudged and scratched are
prevented.
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Open the printer properties dialog box.
Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box (Windows)
3. Click the Maintenance tab and then Custom Settings.
4. Drag the Ink Drying Wait Time slide bar to set the wait time, and then click Send.
5. Confirm the message and click OK.
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Open the Canon IJ Printer Utility.
Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh)
3. Select Custom Settings in the pop-up menu.
4. Drag the Ink Drying Wait Time slide bar to set the wait time, and then click Send.
5. Confirm the message and click OK.
Check 11: Is the paper scratched by other loaded paper?
Depending on the media type, the paper may be scratched by other loaded paper when feeding from
the Rear Tray. In this case, load one sheet at a time.
Page top
Back of the Paper Is Smudged
Page 805 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Back of the Paper Is Smudged
Back of the Paper Is Smudged
Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Check 2: Perform the Bottom Plate Cleaning to clean the inside of the
machine.
Cleaning the Inside of the Machine (Bottom Plate Cleaning)
Note
When performing borderless printing, duplex printing, or too much printing, the inside may
become stained with ink.
Page top
Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout
Page 806 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the
Printout
Vertical Lines Are Printed on the Sides of the Printout
Check 1: Did you confirm the paper type and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Check 2: Is the size of the loaded paper correct?
The vertical lines may be printed in the margin if the size of the loaded paper is larger than that
specified in the printer driver.
Set the paper size correctly according to the paper you loaded.
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Note
The direction of the vertical line pattern may vary depending on the image data or the print
setting.
This machine performs automatic cleaning when necessary to keep printouts clean. A small
amount of ink is ejected for cleaning.
Although ink is usually ejected on the ink absorber, it may be ejected on the paper if you load
paper larger than that specified with the printer driver.
Page top
Colors Are Uneven or Streaked
Page 807 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Results Not Satisfactory > Colors Are Uneven or Streaked
Colors Are Uneven or Streaked
Check 1: Did you confirm the paper and print quality settings?
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Check 2: Print the Nozzle Check Pattern and perform any necessary
maintenance operations such as Print Head Cleaning.
Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head
nozzles.
Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing, Print Head Cleaning, and Print
Head Deep Cleaning.
If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly:
Check to see if a particular color's ink tank is not empty.
If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly though ink is sufficient, perform the Print Head
Cleaning and try printing the Nozzle Check Pattern again.
If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice:
Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning.
If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning, turn off the
machine and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours.
If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice:
If Print Head Deep Cleaning does not resolve the problem, the Print Head may be damaged.
Contact the service center.
Check 3: Perform Print Head Alignment.
Colors Are Uneven or Streaked
Page 808 of 949 pages
Aligning the Print Head
Note
If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Alignment, perform Print Head
Alignment manually referring to Aligning the Print Head Position .
Page top
Printing Does Not Start
Page 809 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Printing Does Not Start
Printing Does Not Start
Check 1: Make sure that the power plug is securely plugged in, then
turn the machine on.
While the Power lamp is flashing green, the machine is initializing. Wait until the Power lamp stops
flashing and remains lit green.
Note
When printing large data such as a photo or graphics, it may take longer to start printing. While
the Power lamp is flashing green, the computer is processing data and sending it to the
machine. Wait until printing starts.
Check 2: Check the status of ink tanks. Replace the ink tank if ink has
run out.
Check 3: Open the Scanning Unit (Cover) and check to see if the ink
lamps are flashing red.
If there is still sufficient ink but its ink lamp is flashing red, an ink tank may not be installed in a right
position.
Routine Maintenance
Check 4: Open the Scanning Unit (Cover) and make sure that the ink
lamps light up red.
If the ink lamp is not lit, press the
mark on the ink tank until it clicks into place.
Check 5: Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer
properly.
When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable, make sure that the USB cable
is securely plugged in to the machine and the computer, then check the followings:
If you are using a relay device such as a USB hub, disconnect it, connect the machine directly to
the computer, and try printing again. If printing starts normally, there is a problem with the relay
device. Consult the reseller of the relay device for details.
There could also be a problem with the USB cable. Replace the USB cable and try printing
again.
When you use the machine over LAN, make sure that the machine is set up to be used over network
correctly. For details, refer to your setup manual.
Check 6: Restart your computer if you are printing from the computer.
If there are any unnecessary print jobs, delete them.
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
Check 7: Make sure that your machine's name is selected in the Print
dialog box.
The machine will not print properly if you are using a driver for a different printer.
In Windows, make sure that your machine's name is selected in the Print dialog box.
In Macintosh, make sure that your machine's name is selected in Printer in the Print dialog box.
Printing Does Not Start
Page 810 of 949 pages
Note
To make the machine the one selected by default, select Set as Default Printer (Windows),
Default Printer or Make Default (Macintosh).
Check 8: Configure the printer port appropriately.
Make sure that the printer port is configured appropriately in the printer driver.
1. Log on as a user account with administrator privilege.
2. Click Control Panel, then Printer under Hardware and Sound.
In Windows XP, click Control Panel, Printers and Other Hardware, then Printers and Faxes.
In Windows 2000, click Control Panel then Printers.
3. Right-click the Canon XXX Printer icon, then select Properties.
4. Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings.
Make sure that a port named USBnnn (where "n" is a number) with Canon XXX Printer
appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port(s).
If the setting is incorrect, reinstall the MP Drivers or change the printer port to the correct one.
Note
When the machine is used over LAN, the port name of the machine is displayed as
"CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx".
* "xxxxxxxxxx" is the character string generated from the MAC address or a character string
specified by the user when setting up the machine.
Check 9: Is the size of the print data extremely large?
Click Print Options on the Page Setup sheet. Then, select the Prevent loss of print data check box in
the displayed dialog.
Page top
Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed
Page 811 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed
Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed
Check 1: Has the machine been printing continuously for a long
period?
If the machine has been printing continuously for a long time, the Print Head may overheat. To
protect the Print Head, the machine may stop printing at a line break for a period of time and then
resume printing.
In this case, interrupt your print session at a convenient time and turn the machine off for at least 15
minutes.
Additionally, if the machine has been printing graphics or photos with intense colors continuously
over a period of time, the machine may stop printing to protect the Print Head. In this case, printing
will not resume automatically. Turn the machine off for at least 15 minutes.
Caution
The Print Head and the surrounding area can become extremely hot inside the machine. Never
touch the Print Head or nearby components.
Check 2: Is the paper loaded?
Make sure that paper is loaded in the Rear Tray or Cassette.
Confirm the paper source, then reload paper.
Check 3: Do the printing documents have lots of photographs or
illustrations?
Printing large data such as photos or graphics takes time for the machine and the computer to
process, during which the machine may appear to have stopped operating.
In addition, when printing data that uses a large amount of ink continuously on plain paper, the
machine may pause temporarily. In either case, wait until the process is complete.
Note
If you are printing a document with a large printing area or printing multiple copies of a
document, printing may pause to allow the ink to dry.
Page top
Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected
Page 812 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected
Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected
Check 1: Are the Print Head nozzles clogged?
Print the Nozzle Check Pattern to determine whether the ink ejects properly from the print head
nozzles.
Refer to Routine Maintenance for the Nozzle Check Pattern printing, Print Head Cleaning, and Print
Head Deep Cleaning.
If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly:
Check to see if a particular color's ink tank is not empty.
If the Nozzle Check Pattern is not printed correctly though ink is sufficient, perform the Print Head
Cleaning and try printing the Nozzle Check Pattern again.
If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Cleaning twice:
Perform the Print Head Deep Cleaning.
If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning, turn off the
machine and perform another Print Head Deep Cleaning after 24 hours.
If the problem is not resolved after performing the Print Head Deep Cleaning twice:
If Print Head Deep Cleaning does not resolve the problem, the Print Head may be damaged.
Contact the service center.
Check 2: Has the ink run out?
See An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD to identify the ink error, and then take the
appropriate action depending on the error condition.
Check 3: Is the orange tape or protective film remaining?
Make sure that all of the protective film is peeled off and the air hole is exposed, as illustrated in (A).
If the orange tape is left as in (B), pull the orange tape and remove it.
Page top
Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected
Page 813 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected
Printing Speed Is Not as Fast as Expected
Check 1: Is printing performed in Quiet Mode?
Print speed is reduced if you specified to print in Quiet Mode in the printer driver or Operation Panel.
For faster printing, do not print in Quiet Mode.
For information on the printer driver settings, refer to Reducing the Machine Noise .
For information to make setting on the Operation Panel, see Changing the Machine Settings on the
LCD .
Check 2: Is the print quality set too high?
Increase the printing speed setting in the printer driver. Setting to prioritize speed makes printing
faster.
1. Open the printer properties dialog box.
Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box (Windows)
Click Here: Printer Driver
* Before clicking here to open the printer properties dialog box, quit the running application
software.
2. On the Main sheet, select Fast for the Print Quality setting.
Depending on the media type, the Fast option may not be available.
1. Open the Print dialog box.
Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box (Macintosh)
2. Select Quality & Media in the pop-up menu and then select Fast for the Print
Quality setting.
Depending on the media type, the Fast option may not be available.
Note
Printing speed may not improve noticeably by following the instructions above, depending on your
system environment.
Page top
Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing
Page 814 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing
Print Head Holder Does Not Move to the Position for Replacing
Check 1: Is the Power lamp off?
Check if the Power lamp is lit green.
The Print Head Holder will not move unless the power is on. If the Power lamp is off, close the
Scanning Unit (Cover) and turn the machine on.
While the Power lamp is flashing green, the machine is initializing. Wait until the Power lamp stops
flashing and remains lit green, and then open the Scanning Unit (Cover) again.
Check 2: Is an error message displayed on the LCD?
Close the Scanning Unit (Cover), follow the directions displayed in the error message to resolve the
error, and then reopen it. For details on how to resolve the error, see An Error Message Is Displayed
on the LCD .
Check 3: Has the Scanning Unit (Cover) been left open for 10 minutes or
longer?
If the Scanning Unit (Cover) is left open for more than 10 minutes, the Print Head Holder moves to
the right to prevent the Print Head from drying out. Close and reopen the Scanning Unit (Cover) to
return the Print Head Holder to the center.
Check 4: Has the machine been printing continuously for a long
period?
Close the Scanning Unit (Cover), wait a while, then reopen it.
If the machine has been printing continuously for a long time, the Print Head Holder may not move to
the center since the Print Head may overheat.
Note
Opening the Scanning Unit (Cover) while printing moves the Print Head Holder to the right. Close
the Scanning Unit (Cover), and reopen it after printing finishes.
Page top
Paper Does Not Feed Properly
Page 815 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Does Not Feed Properly
Paper Does Not Feed Properly
Check 1: Make sure of the following when you load paper.
When loading two or more sheets of paper, flip through the paper before loading.
When loading two or more sheets of paper, align the edges of the sheets before loading.
When loading two or more sheets of paper, make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the
paper load limit.
However, proper feeding of paper may not be possible at this maximum capacity depending on
the type of paper or environmental conditions (either very high or low temperature and humidity).
In such cases, reduce the sheets of paper you load at a time to less than half of the paper load
limit.
Always load the paper in portrait orientation, either in the Rear Tray or the Cassette, regardless
of the printing orientation.
When you load the paper on the Rear Tray, load the paper with the print side facing UP and
slide the Paper Guides to align with the both sides of the paper.
When loading paper in the Cassette, load the paper with the print side facing DOWN. Align the
right edge of the paper stack against the right edge of the Cassette and slide the Paper Guides
against the left and bottom edges of the stack.
Loading Paper / Originals
Check 2: Check to see if the paper you are printing on is not too thick or
curled.
Loading Paper / Originals
Check 3: Make sure of the following when you load envelopes.
When printing on envelopes, refer to Loading Paper / Originals , and prepare the envelopes before
printing.
Once you have prepared the envelopes, load them in portrait orientation. If the envelopes are placed
in landscape orientation, they will not feed properly.
Check 4: Confirm the paper source setting.
* If the paper source setting is not changed since you purchased this machine, the paper source for
plain paper is the Cassette.
Setting with the Operation Panel on the machine:
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Setting with the printer driver:
Switching the Paper Source to Match the Purpose
For information on the paper source for plain paper when the Paper Source on the printer driver
is set to Automatically Select:
Setting the Paper Source for Plain Paper
Check 5: Remove the foreign object in the Cassette.
Paper Does Not Feed Properly
Page 816 of 949 pages
Check 6: Make sure that there are not any foreign objects in the Rear
Tray.
If the paper tears in the Rear Tray, see Paper Jams to remove it.
If there are any foreign objects in the Rear Tray, be sure to turn off the machine, unplug it from the
power supply, then remove the foreign object.
Check 7: Clean the Paper Feed Roller.
Routine Maintenance
Note
Cleaning the Paper Feed Roller will wear the roller, so perform this procedure only when
necessary.
Check 8: If two or more sheets of paper feed from the Cassette at once,
clean the inside of the Cassette.
For information on cleaning the inside of the Cassette, refer to Routine Maintenance .
Check 9: Is the Rear Cover closed completely?
Paper may be jammed if the Rear Cover is not closed completely. Push the Rear Cover until it is
closed completely.
Refer to Overview of the Machine for the position of the Rear Cover.
Page top
Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Driver
Page 817 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the Printer Driver
Paper Does Not Feed from the Paper Source Specified in the
Printer Driver
Check: Is the paper source setting inconsistent between the application
program and the printer driver?
Change the application software setting corresponding to the printer driver setting, or click the Print
Options on the Page Setup sheet in the printer driver and select Disable the paper source setting of
the application software on the Print Options screen.
When the paper source setting is inconsistent between an application program and the printer
driver, the application software setting takes precedence.
Page top
Paper Jams
Page 818 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams
Paper Jams
Note
If you need to turn off the machine to remove jammed paper during printing, press the Stop button
to cancel print jobs before turning off the machine.
Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray
Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine at the Transport Unit
Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing
In Other Cases
Page top
Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray
Page 819 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray
Paper Is Jammed in the Paper Output Slot or the Rear Tray
Remove the paper following the procedure below.
1. Slowly pull the paper out, either from the Rear Tray or from the Paper Output Slot,
whichever is easier.
Note
If the paper tears and a piece remains inside the machine, turn the machine off, open the
Scanning Unit (Cover), and remove the paper.
Be careful not to touch the components inside the machine.
After removing all paper, close the Scanning Unit (Cover), and turn the machine back on.
If you cannot pull the paper out, turn the machine off and turn it back on. The paper may be
ejected automatically.
2. Reload the paper, and press the OK button on the machine.
If you turned off the machine in step 1, all print jobs in the queue are canceled. Reprint if necessary.
Note
When reloading the paper, confirm that you are using the correct paper and are loading it
correctly.
Loading Paper / Originals
A5 sized paper is suited to printing documents consisting mainly of text. We do not recommend
using such paper to print documents with photos or graphics, since the printout may curl and
cause paper exit jams.
If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the machine, or if the paper jam error continues
after removing the paper, contact the service center.
Page top
Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine at the Transport Unit
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine at the Transport Unit
Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine at the Transport Unit
Remove the paper following the procedure below.
1. Detach the Rear Cover.
2. Pull the paper out slowly.
Note
Be careful not to touch the components inside the machine.
If you cannot pull the paper out, turn the machine off and turn it back on. The paper may be
ejected automatically.
3. Attach the Rear Cover.
Push the left side of the Rear Cover until it is closed completely.
If you were not able to remove the paper out in step 2:
4. Remove the Cassette.
5. Pull the paper out slowly.
Page 820 of 949 pages
Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine at the Transport Unit
Page 821 of 949 pages
6. If any paper is sticking out of the Cassette, remove the paper, align and reload the
paper in the Cassette.
If you did not remove the jammed paper out in step 1 to 5 when automatic duplex printing, check the
duplex transport section.
Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing
Note
When reloading the paper into the machine, confirm that you are using the correct paper and
are loading it into the machine correctly.
Loading Paper / Originals
7. Insert the Cassette into the machine again, and press the OK button on the
machine.
If you turned off the machine in step 2, all print jobs in queue are canceled. Reprint if necessary.
If you cannot remove the paper or if the paper tears inside the machine, or if the paper jam error
continues after removing the paper, contact the service center.
Page top
Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing
Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex
Printing
Before removing the jammed paper, see Paper Is Jammed inside the Machine at the Transport Unit to
remove it from Transport Unit. If the paper jam error continues, remove the jammed paper following the
procedure below.
1. Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power
supply.
2. Remove the Cassette.
If the paper is loaded on the Rear Tray, remove the paper from the Rear Tray and retract the Paper
Support.
3. Set the machine upright with the left side down.
Important
When standing the machine, make sure that the Scanning Unit (Cover) is closed securely.
4. Slowly pull the jammed paper out so that the paper does not tear.
Note
Set the machine back to its original position immediately after removing the jammed paper.
5. Align the paper, then reload it in the Cassette.
Reload paper in the Rear Tray, if necessary.
Note
When reloading the paper into the machine, confirm that you are using the correct paper and
are loading it into the machine correctly.
Loading Paper / Originals
6. Insert the Cassette into the machine again.
7. Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
All print jobs in queue are canceled. Reprint if necessary.
If you cannot remove the paper or the paper tears inside the machine, or if the paper jam error continues
after removing the paper, contact the service center.
Page 822 of 949 pages
Jammed Paper Is Not Removed out When Automatic Duplex Printing
Page 823 of 949 pages
Page top
In Other Cases
Page 824 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Paper Jams > In Other Cases
In Other Cases
Make sure of the following:
Check 1: Are there any foreign objects around the Paper Output Slot?
Check 2: Are there any foreign objects in the Rear Tray?
If there are any foreign objects in the Rear Tray, be sure to turn off the machine, unplug it from the
power supply, then remove the foreign object.
Check 3: Is the Rear Cover closed completely?
Check 4: Is the paper curled?
Check 3: Load the paper after correcting its curl.
Page top
Message Appears on the Computer Screen
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Message Appears on the Computer Screen
Message Appears on the Computer Screen
Error Number: B200 A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord of the
printer from the power supply. Then contact the service center. Is Displayed
Error Number: **** A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and then on again. If this doesn't
clear the error, see the user's guide for more detail. Is Displayed
Error Regarding Automatic Duplex Printing Is Displayed
Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error
Error Number: 300 Is Displayed
Error Number: 1700 Is Displayed
Ink Info Number: 1600 Is Displayed
Ink Info Number: 1683 Is Displayed
Ink Info Number: 1688 Is Displayed
Error Number: 2001 Is Displayed
Error Number: 2002 Is Displayed
Other Error Messages
The Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed
The Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program Icon Appears
Error Number: B200 A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and unplug the
power cord of the printer from the power supply. Then contact the service center. Is
Displayed
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Contact the service center.
Error Number: **** A printer error has occurred. Turn the printer off and then on again. If
this doesn't clear the error, see the user's guide for more detail. Is Displayed
"****" is displayed in the alphanumeric character and depends on the error occurred.
5100 or 5110 Is Displayed
Confirm the movement of the Print Head Holder blocked.
Cancel printing from your computer and turn off the machine. Then clear the jammed paper or
protective material that is preventing the Print Head Holder from moving, and turn on the
machine again.
Important
Be careful not to touch the components inside the machine. The machine may not print
out properly if you touch it.
If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.
6000 Is Displayed
If any object is placed in front of the machine, remove it.
Open the Paper Output Tray gently, then turn the power off and back on.
Four-Digit Alphanumeric and "Printer error has occurred." Is Displayed
Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord of the machine from the power supply.
Page 825 of 949 pages
Message Appears on the Computer Screen
Plug the machine back in and turn the machine back on.
If the problem is not resolved, contact the service center.
Error Regarding Automatic Duplex Printing Is Displayed
Check: See Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing and take the
appropriate action.
Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error
Check 1: If the Power lamp is off, make sure that the power plug is plugged in,
then turn the machine on.
While the Power lamp is flashing green, the machine is initializing. Wait until the Power lamp
stops flashing and remains lit green.
Check 2: Make sure that the printer port is configured appropriately in the printer
driver.
* In the following instructions, " XXX" signifies your machine's name.
1.
Log on as a user account with administrator privilege.
2.
Click Control Panel, then Printer under Hardware and Sound.
In Windows XP, click Control Panel, Printers and Other Hardware, then Printers and
Faxes.
In Windows 2000, click Control Panel then Printers.
3.
Right-click the Canon XXX Printer icon, then select Properties.
4.
Click the Ports tab to confirm the port settings.
Make sure that a port named USBnnn (where "n" is a number) with Canon XXX Printer
appearing in the Printer column is selected for Print to the following port(s).
If the port setting is not correct, reinstall the MP Drivers or change the port setting
according to the interface you are using.
Note
When the machine is used over LAN, the port name of the machine is displayed as
"CNBJNP_xxxxxxxxxx".
* "xxxxxxxxxx" is the character string generated from the MAC address or a character string
specified by the user when setting up the machine.
Check 3: Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer properly.
When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable, make sure that the USB
cable is securely plugged in to the machine and the computer, then check the followings:
If you are using a relay device such as a USB hub, disconnect it, connect the machine
directly to the computer, and try printing again. If printing starts normally, there is a
problem with the relay device. Consult the reseller of the relay device for details.
There could also be a problem with the USB cable. Replace the USB cable and try
printing again.
When you use the machine over LAN, make sure that the machine is set up to be used over
network correctly. For details, refer to your setup manual.
Check 4: Make sure that the MP Drivers are installed correctly.
Uninstall the MP Drivers following the procedure described in Deleting the Unnecessary MP
Drivers, insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive and perform Custom Install
and select MP Drivers to install again.
Page 826 of 949 pages
Message Appears on the Computer Screen
Check 5: When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable,
check the status of the device on your computer.
Follow the procedure below to check the status of the device.
1.
Click Control Panel, Hardware and Sound, then Device Manager.
If the User Account Control screen is displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.
In Windows XP, click Control Panel, Performance and Maintenance, System, then click
Device Manager on the Hardware sheet.
In Windows 2000, click Control Panel, System, then Device Manager on the Hardware
sheet.
2.
Double-click Universal Serial Bus controllers then USB Printing Support.
If USB Printing Support is not displayed, make sure that the machine is correctly
connected to the computer.
Check 3: Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer properly.
3.
Click the General tab and make sure that there is no indication of a problem with the
device.
If a device error is displayed, refer to Windows help to resolve the error.
Error Number: 300 Is Displayed
Check 1: If the Power lamp is off, make sure that the power plug is plugged in,
then turn the machine on.
While the Power lamp is flashing green, the machine is initializing. Wait until the Power lamp
stops flashing and remains lit green.
Check 2: Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer properly.
When the machine is connected to your computer with a USB cable, make sure that the USB
cable is securely plugged in to the machine and the computer, then check the followings:
If you are using a relay device such as a USB hub, disconnect it, connect the machine
directly to the computer, and try printing again. If printing starts normally, there is a
problem with the relay device. Consult the reseller of the relay device for details.
There could also be a problem with the USB cable. Replace the USB cable and try
printing again.
When you use the machine over LAN, make sure that the machine is set up to be used over
network correctly. For details, refer to your setup manual.
Check 3: Make sure that your machine's name is selected in the Print dialog
box.
Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box (Macintosh)
Error Number: 1700 Is Displayed
Check: See The ink absorber is almost full. in An Error Message Is Displayed on
the LCD and take the appropriate action.
Ink Info Number: 1600 Is Displayed
Check: See The following ink may have run out. in An Error Message Is
Displayed on the LCD and take the appropriate action.
Page 827 of 949 pages
Message Appears on the Computer Screen
Ink Info Number: 1683 Is Displayed
Check: See The remaining level of the following ink cannot be correctly
detected. in An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD and take the appropriate
action.
Ink Info Number: 1688 Is Displayed
Check: See The following ink has run out. in An Error Message Is Displayed on
the LCD and take the appropriate action.
Error Number: 2001 Is Displayed
Check: See The device may be incompatible. in An Error Message Is Displayed
on the LCD and take the appropriate action.
Error Number: 2002 Is Displayed
Check: See An unsupported USB hub is connected. in An Error Message Is
Displayed on the LCD and take the appropriate action.
Other Error Messages
Check: If an error message is displayed outside the printer status monitor, check
the following:
"Could not spool successfully due to insufficient disk space"
Delete any unnecessary files to increase the amount of free space on the disk.
"Could not spool successfully due to insufficient memory"
Quit other running applications to increase available memory.
If you still cannot print, restart your computer and retry printing.
"Printer driver could not be found"
Uninstall the printer driver according to the procedure described in Deleting the
Unnecessary MP Drivers , and then reinstall it.
"Could not print Application name - File name"
Try printing again once the current job is complete.
The Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program Screen Is Displayed
If the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program is installed, a confirmation screen
asking for permission to send the printer usage information will be displayed three months and
then six months after the installation. After that, it will be displayed every six months for about four
years.
Read the instructions on the screen and follow the procedure below.
Page 828 of 949 pages
Message Appears on the Computer Screen
If you agree to participate in the survey program:
Click Agree, then follow the on-screen instructions. The printer usage information will be sent
via the Internet. If you have followed the on-screen instructions, the information will be sent
automatically from the second time onward and the confirmation screen will not be displayed
again.
Note
When the information is being sent, a caution screen such as an Internet security screen
may be displayed. In this case, confirm that the program name is "IJPLMUI.exe", then
allow it.
If you deselect the Send automatically from the next time check box, the information will
not be sent automatically from the second time onward and a confirmation screen will be
displayed at the time of the next survey. To send the information automatically, see
Changing the confirmation screen setting: .
If you do not agree to participate in the survey program:
Click Do not agree. The confirmation screen will be closed, and the survey at that time is
skipped. The confirmation screen will be displayed again three months later.
To uninstall the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program:
To uninstall the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program, click Uninstall, then
follow the on-screen instructions.
Changing the confirmation screen setting:
1. Select items the Start menu as shown below.
In Windows Vista, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Uninstall a program.
In Windows XP, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Add or Remove
Programs.
In Windows 2000, select the Start menu > Settings > Control Panel > Add/Remove
Programs.
Note
In Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing,
uninstalling or starting up software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
If you are logged on to an administrator account, click Continue or Allow to continue.
2. Select Canon Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program.
3. Select Change.
Page 829 of 949 pages
Message Appears on the Computer Screen
If you select Yes after you have followed the on-screen instructions, the confirmation
screen will be displayed at the time of the next survey.
If you select No, the information will be sent automatically.
Note
If you select Uninstall (or Remove), the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey
Program is uninstalled. Follow the on-screen instructions.
The Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program Icon Appears
If the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program is installed, the printer usage
information is scheduled to be sent three months and then six months after the installation. After
that, it is scheduled to be sent every six months for about four years. The Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax
Extended Survey Program icon appears in the Dock when it is time to send the printer usage
information.
In Mac OS X v.10.3.9, the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program is not installed.
Read the instructions on the screen after clicking the icon, then follow the procedure below.
If you agree to participate in the survey program:
Click Agree, then follow the on-screen instructions. The printer usage information will be sent
via the Internet. If you have followed the on-screen instructions, the information will be sent
automatically from the second time onward and the confirmation screen will not be displayed
again.
Note
If you deselect the Send automatically from the next time check box, the information will
not be sent automatically from the second time onward and the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/
Fax Extended Survey Program icon will appear in the Dock at the time of the next survey.
Page 830 of 949 pages
Message Appears on the Computer Screen
Page 831 of 949 pages
If you do not agree to participate in the survey program:
Click Do not agree. The confirmation screen will be closed, and the survey at that time is
skipped. The confirmation screen will be displayed again three months later.
To stop sending the information:
Click Turn off. The Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program is stopped, and the
information will not be sent. To resume the survey, see Changing the setting: .
To uninstall the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program:
1. Stop the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program.
Changing the setting:
2. Select Applications from the Go menu, and double-click the Canon Utilities folder, then
the Inkjet Extended Survey Program folder.
3. Place the Canon Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program.app file into the
Trash.
4. Restart the computer.
Empty the Trash and restart your computer.
Changing the setting:
To display the confirmation screen every time the printer usage information is sent or to
resume surveying, follow the procedure below.
1. Select Applications from the Go menu, and double-click the Canon Utilities folder, then
the Inkjet Extended Survey Program folder.
2. Double-click the Canon Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey Program icon.
Do not display the confirmation screen when information is sent:
If the check box is selected, the information will be sent automatically.
If the check box is not selected, the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey
Program icon will appear in the Dock at the time of the next survey. Click the icon,
then follow the on-screen instructions.
Turn off/Turn on button:
Click the Turn off button to stop the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey
Program.
Click the Turn on button to restart the Inkjet Printer/Scanner/Fax Extended Survey
Program.
Page top
Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing
Page 832 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing
Cannot Print Properly with Automatic Duplex Printing
Check: Is the paper size or media type appropriate?
Make sure that the actual size of the paper is suitable for automatic duplex printing.
The sizes of media suitable for automatic duplex printing are A4, Letter, A5, and 5" x 7".
Load paper of suitable size, then press the OK button on the machine.
Make sure that the Page Size or Paper Size setting matches the actual size of the paper with a
size suitable for automatic duplex printing.
First, check the Page Size setting in the application software you are printing from.
Then, check the Page Size setting on the Page Setup sheet in the printer properties dialog box
(Windows) or the Paper Size on the Page Setup dialog box (Macintosh).
Note
Duplex printing may not be available depending on the version of the application software.
Make sure that the type of loaded paper is suitable for automatic duplex printing on the Main
sheet (Windows) or the Quality & Media sheet on the Print dialog box (Macintosh).
To switch to manual duplex printing, follow the procedure below.
Open the printer properties dialog box, clear the Automatic check box on the Page Setup sheet, and
reprint.
When performing manual duplex printing, note the following.
If you are printing three or more pages of a document with manual duplex printing, one side of
all sheets of paper will be printed first. Turn over the paper and reload the paper in the machine,
and then the reverse side of all sheets of paper will be printed. Be careful not to change the
order of paper in the stack.
The procedure for reversing the paper varies depending on the staple side and printing
orientation. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Manual duplex printing is not available.
Page top
For Windows Users
Page 833 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > For Windows Users
For Windows Users
Printer Status Monitor Is Not Displayed
Check: Is the printer status monitor enabled?
Make sure that Enable Status Monitor is selected on the Option menu of the printer status
monitor.
1.
Open the printer properties dialog box.
Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box (Windows)
2.
On the Maintenance sheet, click View Printer Status.
3.
Select Enable Status Monitor on the Option menu if it is not selected.
If you are using Windows Vista:
Launching MP Navigator EX Whenever Pressing the Color or Black Button on the Machine
Check: Specify the response from pressing the Color or Black button on the
machine.
Follow the procedure below to specify the response on your computer.
1.
Log on as a user account with administrator privilege.
2.
Click Control Panel, Hardware and Sound, then Scanners and Cameras.
3.
Select WIA Canon XXX ser, then click the Properties button.
If the User Account Control screen appears, click Continue.
4.
Click the Events tab on the WIA Canon XXX ser Properties screen.
5.
Select Start this program for Actions, then select MP Navigator EX Ver3.0 from the
pull-down menu.
Choose an event from the Select an event pull-down menu, then select MP Navigator EX
Ver3.0 to launch for each event. If MP Navigator EX Ver3.0 is already selected for each
event, click Cancel.
6.
Click OK.
Page top
Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device
Page 834 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device
Error Message Appears on a PictBridge Compliant Device
The following are the possible errors that may occur when printing directly from a PictBridge compliant
device and the countermeasures to clear them.
Note
This section describes errors that are indicated on Canon-brand PictBridge compliant devices. The
error messages and operations may vary depending on the device you are using. For errors on non
-Canon PictBridge compliant devices, check the error message on the LCD and take the
appropriate action to clear the error. For details, see An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD .
For the errors indicated on the PictBridge compliant device and their solution, also refer to the
instruction manual of the device. For other troubles on the device, contact the manufacturer.
Error Message on the PictBridge
Compliant Device
Action
"Printer in use"
If the machine is printing from the computer or warming up,
wait until the job ends.
When it is ready, the machine starts printing automatically.
"No paper"
Load paper on the Rear Tray, and select Continue* in the
display on your PictBridge compliant device.
* To resume printing, you can also press the OK button on
the machine instead of selecting Continue on the device.
"Paper jam"
Select Stop in the display on your PictBridge compliant
device to stop printing.
Remove the jammed paper, load new paper, press the OK
button on the machine, and try printing again.
"Printer cover open"
Close the Scanning Unit (Cover) on the machine.
"No print head"
The Print Head is defective or is not installed.
Check: See Print head is not installed. in An Error Message
Is Displayed on the LCD and take the appropriate action.
"Waste tank full"/"Ink absorber full"
The ink absorber is nearly full.
Check: See The ink absorber is almost full. in An Error
Message Is Displayed on the LCD and take the appropriate
action.
"No ink"/"Ink cassette error"
The ink tank is not installed properly or empty.
Check the error message on the LCD and take the
appropriate action to resolve the error.
An Error Message Is Displayed on the LCD
"Ink Error"
An ink tank that was once empty is installed.
Check: See The remaining level of the following ink cannot
be correctly detected. in An Error Message Is Displayed on
the LCD and take the appropriate action.
"Hardware Error"
Ink tank errors have occurred.
Replace the ink tank.
Routine Maintenance
Page top
Cannot Print Properly from a Wireless Communication Device
Page 835 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Print Properly from a Wireless Communication Device
Cannot Print Properly from a Wireless Communication Device
Check: Is printing possible through Bluetooth communication?
Printing via Bluetooth Communication
Page top
Cannot Print Properly from a Photo Index Sheet
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Print Properly from a Photo Index Sheet
Cannot Print Properly from a Photo Index Sheet
Failed to scan Photo Index Sheet. Is Displayed
Check: Check the following, press the OK button, then perform the Scan sheet
and print menu again.
Did you set Photo Index Sheet in the correct position and orientation on the Platen
Glass?
Are the Platen Glass and the Photo Index Sheet dirty?
Are all required circles on the Photo Index Sheet filled in?
Note
If the filled circles on the Photo Index Sheet are not dark or vast enough, the machine
may not scan the Photo Index Sheet properly.
Cannot print the selected photo. Is Displayed/Differ Photo or Blank Is Printed out/Paper
Feeds Before Printing Is Complete
Check 1: Make sure that the photo you want to print is displayed on the LCD.
Press the HOME button, select Memory card and Select and print in this order, then select the
photo you want to print to make sure that it is saved on the memory card or USB flash drive.
Check 2: Reprint out the Photo Index Sheet.
Note
The machine may not scan the Photo Index Sheet properly even though Print a blank
Photo Index Sheet circle is filled in. Press the HOME button, select Photo index sheet,
follow the on-screen instructions to reprint out the Photo Index Sheet.
Check 3: Make sure that the photo saved on the memory card or USB flash drive
can be read by this machine.
Printing from a Memory Card
Check 4: Was the photo saved on the memory card or USB flash drive processed
on a computer?
A photo processed on a computer may not be printed.
Note
When a photo was processed on a computer is selected, "?" is displayed on the LCD.
Check 5: Did you make any changes to the memory card or USB flash drive after
printing the Photo Index Sheet?
If you added photos to or deleted photos from the memory card or USB flash drive, reprint out
the Photo Index Sheet.
Important
Do not rewrite the contents of the memory card or USB flash drive until printing and
scanning of the Photo Index Sheet are complete.
Check 6: Did you remove the memory card or USB flash drive while printing?
Do not remove the memory card or USB flash drive before printing is complete.
Important
Page 836 of 949 pages
Cannot Print Properly from a Photo Index Sheet
Page 837 of 949 pages
If the memory card or USB flash drive is removed while printing, the stored data may be
damaged or the selected photo may not be printed as the reading of the photo on the
memory card or USB flash drive and the printing of the photo are simultaneous.
Page top
Cannot Remove a Memory Card
Page 838 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Cannot Remove a Memory Card
Cannot Remove a Memory Card
Contact the service center.
Important
Never attempt to remove a memory card using a thin stick or tweezers. Doing so may damage the
machine.
Note
Exclusive adapters are required for the following memory cards. Insert these cards in the machine
with adapters attached.
miniSD Card/miniSDHC Card/microSD Card/microSDHC Card/xD-Picture Card/xD-Picture Card
Type M/xD-Picture Card Type H/Memory Stick Micro/RS-MMC
Page top
Problems with Scanning
Page 839 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning
Problems with Scanning
Scanner Does Not Work
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not Appear
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas
Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time
Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode
Slow Scanning Speed
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning
Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows
Page top
Scanner Does Not Work
Page 840 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanner Does Not Work
Scanner Does Not Work
Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on.
Check 2: Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer.
Check 3: If the USB cable is connected to a hub, remove it from the hub
and connect it to a USB port on the computer.
Check 4: Restart the computer.
Page top
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
Page 841 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Does Not Start
Check 1: Make sure that the MP Drivers is installed.
If it is not installed, insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then select Custom Install
and install MP Drivers.
Check 2: On the File menu of the application, select Select Source and
select the machine.
Important
Do not select the model name that includes WIA in it.
Note
The operation may differ depending on the application.
Check 3: Start from a TWAIN-compliant application.
Page top
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver) Screen Does Not ...
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner
Driver) Screen Does Not Appear
Error Message Appears and the ScanGear (Scanner Driver)
Screen Does Not Appear
Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on.
Check 2: Connect the USB cable to a different USB port on the computer.
Check 3: If the USB cable is connected to a hub, remove it from the hub
and connect it to a USB port on the computer.
Check 4: Make sure that the MP Drivers is installed.
If it is not installed, insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then select Custom Install
and install MP Drivers.
Check 5: On the File menu of the application, select Select Source and
select the machine.
Note
The operation may differ depending on the application.
Check 6: Make sure that the application is TWAIN-compliant.
You cannot open ScanGear (scanner driver) from applications not supporting TWAIN.
Check 7: Exit ScanGear (scanner driver) if it is running on another
application.
Page top
Page 842 of 949 pages
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
Page 843 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
Scan Quality (Image Displayed on the Monitor) Is Poor
Check 1: Increase the scanning resolution.
Resolution
Check 2: Set the scale to 100%.
Some applications do not display images clearly if the image is too small.
Check 3: If moire (stripe pattern) appears, take the following measures and
scan again.
On the Basic Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver), select Magazine(Color) in Select Source.
Basic Mode Tab
On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver), set Descreen in Image Settings to ON.
Image Settings
Note
If moire appears when you scan a digital print photo, take the above measures and scan again.
If you use MP Navigator EX, set Document Type to Magazine(Color) or enable Descreen in the Scan
Settings dialog box and scan again.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Check 4: Check the monitor's color depth.
From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Appearance and Personalization > Adjust screen resolution
to open the Display Settings dialog box. Set the color depth to Medium (16 bit) or Highest (32 bit).
Windows XP:
From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Display to open the Display Properties dialog box. On
the Settings tab, set Colors to Medium (16 bit) or Highest (32 bit).
Windows 2000:
From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel > Display to open the Display Properties dialog
box. On the Settings tab, set Colors to High Color (16 bit) or True Color (32 bit).
Check 5: Clean the Platen and Document Cover.
Cleaning the Platen Glass and Document Cover
Check 6: If the document is in poor condition (dirty, faded, etc.), use
Reduce Dust and Scratches, Fading Correction, Grain Correction, etc. in
Image Settings on the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver).
Image Settings
Check 7: If the color tone of images is different from the original document,
take the following measures and scan again.
On the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver), set Image Adjustment in Image Settings to
None.
Image Settings
Open the Preferences dialog box from the Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver) and set
Color Matching on the Color Settings tab.
Color Settings Tab
Page top
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas
Page 844 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas
Scanned Image Is Surrounded by Extra White Areas
Check: Specify the scan area.
(Auto Crop) in ScanGear (scanner driver) to automatically display the cropping frame (scan
Click
area) according to the document size. You can also manually specify the scan area, for example when
there are white margins along the document or when you want to create custom cropping frames.
Adjusting Cropping Frames
Page top
Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time
Page 845 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time
Cannot Scan Multiple Documents at One Time
Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen.
Placing Documents
Check 2: Scan each item individually.
Some applications do not support multiple image scanning.
Page top
Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode
Page 846 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode
Cannot Scan Properly in Auto Scan Mode
Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen.
Placing Documents
Check 2: Multiple image scanning may not be supported.
Some applications do not support multiple image scanning. In that case, scan each item individually.
Page top
Slow Scanning Speed
Page 847 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Slow Scanning Speed
Slow Scanning Speed
Check 1: To view the image on a monitor, set the output resolution to
around 150 dpi. To print, set it to around 300 dpi.
Resolution
Check 2: Set Fading Correction, Grain Correction, etc. to None.
Image Settings
Check 3: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Correct slanted document
checkbox and scan again.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Check 4: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Detect the orientation of text
documents and rotate images checkbox and scan again.
Scan Settings Dialog Box
Page top
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed
Page 848 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > "There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed
"There is not enough memory." Message Is Displayed
Check 1: Exit other applications and try again.
Check 2: Reduce the resolution or output size and scan again.
Resolution
Page top
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning
Page 849 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Computer Stops Operating during Scanning
Computer Stops Operating during Scanning
Check 1: Restart the computer, reduce the output resolution in ScanGear
(scanner driver) and scan again.
Check 2: Delete unnecessary files to obtain sufficient free hard disk space,
then scan again.
Error message may appear if there is not enough hard disk space to scan and save, when the image
size is too large (such as when scanning a large document at high resolution.)
Check 3: For Location of Temporary Files in MP Navigator EX, specify a
folder on a drive with sufficient free space.
General Tab
Check 4: Multiple devices may be connected to USB ports.
Disconnect other devices.
Page top
Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows
Page 850 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Problems with Scanning > Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows
Scanner Does Not Work After Upgrading Windows
Check: Disconnect the machine from the computer, then uninstall and
reinstall the MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX.
Step 1: Uninstall the MP Drivers.
See "Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers " for details.
Step 2: Uninstall MP Navigator EX.
1.
From the Start menu, select (All) Programs > Canon Utilities > MP Navigator EX 3.0 > MP
Navigator EX Uninstall.
2.
When a confirmation appears, click Yes.
3.
When uninstallation is complete, click OK.
MP Navigator EX is uninstalled.
Step 3: Reinstall the MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX.
Insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive, then select Custom Install and reinstall the
MP Drivers and MP Navigator EX.
Page top
Software Problems
Page 851 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems
Software Problems
E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail
Software Program
Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced)
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor
Scanned Image Does Not Open
Page top
E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in the Screen for...
Page 852 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear
in the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software Program
E-mail Software Program You Want to Use Does Not Appear in
the Screen for Selecting an E-mail Software Program
Check 1: MP Navigator EX may not support the e-mail software program.
The following e-mail software programs are supported. (Image are attached to the mail message
automatically.)
- Windows Mail (Windows Vista)
- Outlook Express (Windows XP/Windows 2000)
- Microsoft Outlook
Check 2: If an e-mail software program does not operate properly, check
that the program's MAPI is enabled.
To enable MAPI, refer to the manual of the e-mail software program.
Check 3: If using an e-mail software program other than the ones listed
above, select None (Attach Manually) when prompted to select a program
and attach the scanned image manually.
Page top
Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced)
Page 853 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced)
Scanned Image Is Printed Enlarged (Reduced)
Check: Set the printing size in the application.
Page top
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer Monitor
Page 854 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer
Monitor
Scanned Image Is Enlarged (Reduced) on the Computer
Monitor
Check 1: Change the display setting in the application.
You cannot reduce the display size in "Paint." To reduce the display size, open the images in an
application.
For details, refer to the application's manual. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the
application.
Check 2: Change the resolution setting in ScanGear (scanner driver) and
scan again.
The higher the resolution, the larger the resulting image will be.
Resolution
Page top
Scanned Image Does Not Open
Page 855 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Software Problems > Scanned Image Does Not Open
Scanned Image Does Not Open
Check: If the file format is not supported by the application, scan the image
again and save it in a popular file format such as JPEG.
For details, refer to the application's manual. If you have any questions, contact the manufacturer of the
application.
Page top
MP Navigator EX Problems
Page 856 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems
MP Navigator EX Problems
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned Image
Page top
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size
Page 857 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Cannot Scan at the Correct Size
Cannot Scan at the Correct Size
Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen.
Placing Documents
Check 2: Set Document Size to the actual document size and scan again.
If the matching size is not found, scan at a larger size and trim the image.
See the Toolbar (Trimming) in " Correct/Enhance Images Window " for details.
Page top
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly When Scanning U...
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected
Correctly When Scanning Using the Operation Panel
Position or Size of the Image Cannot be Detected Correctly
When Scanning Using the Operation Panel
Check 1: Make sure that the documents are placed correctly on the Platen.
Placing Documents
Check 2: Check that the MP Navigator EX settings are correctly set
according to the document.
If you cannot scan properly with Auto Scan using the Operation Panel, specify the document type on the
Scanner Button Settings tab of the Preferences dialog box.
Scanner Button Settings Tab (Save)
Page top
Page 858 of 949 pages
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is Slanted
Page 859 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image
Is Slanted
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Scanned Image Is
Slanted
Check: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Correct slanted document
checkbox and scan again.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Page top
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in the Scanned I...
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > MP Navigator EX Problems > Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation
Changes in the Scanned Image
Document Is Placed Correctly, but the Orientation Changes in
the Scanned Image
Check: In MP Navigator EX, deselect the Detect the orientation of text
documents and rotate images checkbox and scan again.
Scan Settings Dialog Box (Photos/Documents)
Page top
Page 860 of 949 pages
If You Cannot Resolve the Problem
Page 861 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > If You Cannot Resolve the Problem
If You Cannot Resolve the Problem
If you cannot resolve the problem with any of the workarounds in this chapter, please contact the seller of
the machine or the service center.
Canon support staff are trained to be able to provide technical support to satisfy customers.
Caution
If the machine emits any unusual sound, smoke, or odor, turn it off immediately. Unplug the power
cord from the outlet and contact the seller or the service center. Never attempt to repair or
disassemble the machine yourself.
Attempts by customers to repair or take apart the machine will invalidate any warranty regardless of
whether the warranty has expired.
Before contacting the service center, confirm the following:
Product name:
* Your machine's name is located on the front cover of the setup manual.
Serial number: please refer to the setup manual
Details of the problem
What you tried to solve the problem, and what happened
Page top
FAQs
Page 862 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > FAQs
FAQs
No Printing Results/Printing Is Blurred/Colors Are Wrong/White Streaks
Machine Moves But Ink Is Not Ejected
Cannot Install the MP Drivers
Printing Does Not Start
Copying/Printing Stops Before It Is Completed
Writing Error/Output Error/Communication Error
Print Results Not Satisfactory
Paper Jams
Paper Does Not Feed Properly
Page top
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
This printer driver is subject to the following restrictions. Keep the following points in mind when using
the printer driver.
Restrictions on the Printer Driver
Depending on the document type to be printed, the paper feed method specified in the printer driver
may not operate correctly.
If this happens, open the printer driver setup screen from the Print dialog box of the application
software, and check the setting in the Paper Source field on the Main tab.
With some applications, the Copies setting in the Page Setup tab of the printer driver may not be
enabled.
In this case, use the copies setting in the Print dialog box of the application software.
If the selected Language in the About dialog box does not match the operating system interface
language, the driver screen may not be displayed properly.
Do not change the Advanced tab items of the printer properties. If you change any of the items, you
will not be able to use the following functions correctly.
Also, if Print to file is selected in the Print dialog box of the application software and with applications
that prohibit EMF spooling, such as Adobe Photoshop LE and MS Photo Editor, the following
functions will not operate.
Preview before printing on the Main tab
Prevent loss of print data in the Print Options dialog box
Page Layout, Poster, Booklet, Duplex Printing (manually), Specify Margin..., Print from Last Page,
Collate, and Stamp/Background... on the Page Setup tab
Since the resolution in the preview display differs from the printing resolution, text and lines in the
preview display may appear different from the actual print result.
With some applications, the printing is divided into multiple print jobs.
To cancel printing, delete all divided print jobs.
If image data is not printed correctly, display the Print Options dialog box from the Page Setup tab
and change the setting of Disable ICM required from the application software. This may solve the
problem.
When you use the Bluetooth option and perform one of the actions listed below, the print job may not
end and "Printing" may remain displayed on the status monitor even after printing ends and the
printout is ejected. If this happens, either click the Cancel Printing button on the status monitor or
cancel that print job from the print job queue of the printer.
When you move the machine during printing to a location where radio waves cannot reach or
when the radio wave status becomes poor
When you turn off the machine
When you are using a Bluetooth printer and you cancel printing after a printer error occurs, you may
not be able to execute subsequent printing operations. If this happens, turn off the machine and turn
it back on again.
When you are using Bluetooth, you cannot use the operation panel on the machine while the status
monitor is displayed from View Printer Status... on the Maintenance tab.
Software windows may not appear correctly on Windows Vista when fonts are set to Larger scale.
When you want to display the windows with Larger scale fonts, set the desktop theme to Windows
Classic as follows:
Page 863 of 949 pages
Instructions for Use (Printer Driver)
Page 864 of 949 pages
1. Select Control Panel from the Start menu.
2. Select Appearance and Personalization -> Personalization -> Theme.
The Theme Settings dialog box opens.
3. At the Theme Settings dialog box, click the Themes tab, and select Windows Classic from
Theme.
4. Click OK.
Desktop changes to Windows Classic display.
Do not start up the Canon IJ Network Tool while printing.
Do not print when the Canon IJ Network Tool is running.
The card slot (memory card) of the machine may become inaccessible. In such cases, restart the
machine or turn it off and reconnect the USB cable.
Points to Note with Applications
There are following restrictions in Microsoft Word (Microsoft Corporation).
When Microsoft Word has the same printing functions as the printer driver, use Word to specify
them.
When selecting Scaled, Fit-to-Page, or Page Layout from the Page Layout list on the Page Setup
tab, the selected printing function may not be effective, depending on the version of Word.
If this happens, follow the procedure below.
1. Open Word's Print dialog box.
2. Open the printer driver setup window, specify Page Layout on the Page Setup tab, and click
OK.
3. Without starting printing, close the Print dialog box.
4. Open Word's Print dialog box again.
5. Open the printer driver setup window again and click OK.
6. Start printing.
Illustrator/Adobe Systems Inc.
If bitmap printing takes effect, printing may take time or some data may not be printed. Print after
unchecking the Bitmap Printing check box in the Print dialog box.
Page top
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
Page 865 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Troubleshooting > General Notes (Scanner Driver)
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
ScanGear (scanner driver) is subject to the following restrictions. Keep these points in mind when using
it.
Scanner Driver Restrictions
When using the NTFS file system, the TWAIN data source may not be invoked. This is because the
TWAIN module cannot be written to the winnt folder for security reasons. Contact the computer's
administrator for help.
Some computers (including laptops) connected to the machine may not resume correctly from
standby mode. In that case, restart the computer.
Do not connect two or more machines or multifunction printers with scanner function to the same
computer simultaneously. If multiple scanning devices are connected, you cannot scan from the
Operation Panel of the machine and also may experience errors while accessing the devices.
Software screens may not appear correctly on Windows Vista when font size is set to Larger scale. If
you want to display the screens with Larger scale fonts, change the theme in Appearance and
Personalization to Windows Classic as follows:
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel.
2. Select Appearance and Personalization > Personalization > Theme.
The Theme Settings dialog box opens.
3. On the Themes tab of the Theme Settings dialog box, select Windows Classic under Theme.
4. Click OK.
Desktop changes to Windows Classic view.
Use the default display font size of the OS. Otherwise, software screens may not appear correctly.
Scanning may fail if the computer has resumed from sleep or standby mode. In that case, follow
these steps and scan again.
1. Turn off the machine.
2. Exit ScanGear (scanner driver), then disconnect the USB cable from the computer and reconnect
it.
3. Turn on the machine.
ScanGear (scanner driver) cannot be opened in multiple applications at the same time. Within an
application, ScanGear (scanner driver) cannot be opened for the second time when it is already
open.
Be sure to close the ScanGear (scanner driver) window before closing the application.
With network connection, the machine cannot be accessed from multiple computers at the same
time.
With network connection, scanning takes longer than usual.
Make sure that you have adequate disk space available when scanning large images at high
resolutions. For example, at least 300 MB of free space is required to scan an A4 document at 600
dpi in full-color.
ScanGear (scanner driver) and WIA driver cannot be used at the same time.
Do not enter the computer into sleep or hibernate state during scanning.
Calibration may take time if the machine is connected via USB 1.1.
Applications with Restrictions on Use
If you start Media Center included in Windows XP Media Center Edition 2005, you may not be able to
scan using the Operation Panel of the machine. In that case, restart the computer.
General Notes (Scanner Driver)
Page 866 of 949 pages
You cannot scan images with Media Center included in Windows Vista and Windows XP Media
Center Edition 2005. Scan with other applications such as MP Navigator EX.
In some applications, you may encounter a problem when you switch to thumbnail view in the
Advanced Mode tab of ScanGear (scanner driver). In that case, scan each document individually,
changing Paper Size according to the document.
In some applications, if you select the View scanned images checkbox in the Auto Scan Mode tab of
ScanGear (scanner driver), the window displaying the thumbnails of the scanned images may close
automatically.
Some applications may not display the TWAIN user interface. In that case, refer to the application's
manual and change the settings accordingly.
Some applications do not support continuous scanning of multiple documents. In some cases, only
the first scanned image is accepted, or multiple images are scanned as one image.
When scanning platen size images into a Microsoft Office application (such as Word, Excel or
PowerPoint), click Custom Insert in the Insert Picture from Scanner or Camera screen. Otherwise,
images may not be scanned correctly.
Images may not be scanned correctly in some applications. In that case, increase the operating
system's virtual memory and retry.
When image size is too large (such as when scanning large images at high resolution), your
computer may not respond or the progress bar may remain at 0% depending on the application. In
that case, cancel the action (for example by clicking Cancel on the progress bar), then increase the
operating system's virtual memory or reduce the image size/resolution and retry. Alternatively, scan
the image via MP Navigator EX first, then save and import it into the application.
Page top
Appendix
Page 867 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Appendix
Appendix
Printing Area
How to Detach/Attach the Document Cover
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
Updating the MP Drivers
Uninstalling the On-Screen Manuals
Transporting the Machine
Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box (Windows)
Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box (Macintosh)
Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh)
Page top
Printing Area
Page 868 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Printing Area
Printing Area
To ensure the best print quality, the machine allows a margin along each edge of media. The actual
printable area will be the area inside these margins.
Recommended printing area
Printable area
: Canon recommends that you print within this area.
: The area where it is possible to print.
However, printing in this area can affect the print quality or the paper feed precision.
Note
Borderless Printing
By selecting Borderless Printing option, you can make prints with no margins.
When performing Borderless Printing, slight cropping may occur at the edges since the printed
image is enlarged to fill the whole page.
For Borderless Printing, use the following paper:
Glossy Photo Paper "Everyday Use" GP-501
Photo Paper Glossy GP-502
Photo Paper Plus Semi-Gloss SG-201
Photo Paper Pro Platinum PT-101
Photo Paper Plus Glossy II PP-201
Photo Paper Pro II PR-201
Matte Photo Paper MP-101
Performing Borderless Printing on any other type of paper may substantially reduce printing
quality and/or result in printouts with altered color hues.
Borderless Printing on plain paper may result in printouts with reduced quality. Use them only
for test printing. You can perform Borderless Printing on plain paper only when printing from
your computer.
Borderless Printing is not available for legal, A5, or B5 sized paper, or envelopes.
Depending on the type of paper, Borderless Printing may reduce the print quality at the top and
bottom edges of the paper or cause these parts to become smudged.
With performing Automatic Duplex Printing and Duplex (Two-sided) Copying, the printable area will
be 0.08 inches / 2 mm smaller at the top margin.
When performing Borderless Printing in copy or easy photo reprint mode, you can specify the
amount of images that extends off the paper by Extended copy amount in Print settings under
Device settings.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Letter, Legal
Envelopes
Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes
Page top
Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes
Page 869 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Printing Area > Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes
Other Sizes than Letter, Legal, Envelopes
Size
Printable Area (width x height)
A5
5.56 x 7.95 inches / 141.2 x 202.0 mm
A4
8.00 x 11.38 inches / 203.2 x 289.0 mm
B5
6.90 x 9.80 inches / 175.2 x 249.0 mm
4" x 6" / 10 x 15 cm
3.73 x 5.69 inches / 94.8 x 144.4 mm
4" x 8" / 10 x 20 cm*
3.73 x 7.69 inches / 94.8 x 195.2 mm
5" x 7" / 13 x 18 cm
4.73 x 6.69 inches / 120.2 x 169.8 mm
8" x 10" / 20 x 25 cm
7.73 x 9.69 inches / 196.4 x 246.0 mm
Wide
3.73 x 6.80 inches / 94.8 x 172.6 mm
* This page size can be used only when printing from your computer.
Recommended printing area
Printable area
Page top
Letter, Legal
Page 870 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Printing Area > Letter, Legal
Letter, Legal
Size
Printable Area (width x height)
Letter
8.00 x 10.69 inches / 203.2 x 271.4 mm
Legal*
8.00 x 13.69 inches / 203.2 x 347.6 mm
* This page size can be used only when printing from your computer.
Recommended printing area
Printable area
Page top
Envelopes
Page 871 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Printing Area > Envelopes
Envelopes
Size
Recommended Printing Area (width x height)
European DL*
4.06 x 7.07 inches / 103.2 x 179.6 mm
US Comm. Env. #10*
3.86 x 7.91 inches / 98.0 x 200.9 mm
* This page size can be used only when printing from your computer.
Recommended printing area
Page top
How to Detach/Attach the Document Cover
Page 872 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Appendix > How to Detach/Attach the Document Cover
How to Detach/Attach the Document Cover
Detaching the Document Cover:
Hold up the Document Cover vertically and then pull up it.
Attaching the Document Cover:
Fit both hinges (A) of the Document Cover into the holder (B) and insert both hinges of the Document
Cover vertically as illustrated below.
Page top
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
Page 873 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Deleting the Undesired Print Job
Deleting the Undesired Print Job
If the printer does not start printing, the print job data cancelled or failed may be remaining.
Delete the undesired print job by using the Canon IJ Status Monitor.
1. Display the Canon IJ Status Monitor
Click the status monitor button displayed on the task bar.
The Canon IJ Status Monitor appears.
2. Display the print jobs
Click Display Print Queue....
The print queue window opens.
3. Delete the print jobs
Select Cancel All Documents from the Printer menu.
When the confirmation message appears, click Yes.
The deletion of the print job is complete.
Important
Users who have not been granted access permission for printer management cannot delete the
print job of another user.
Note
When you perform this operation, all print jobs are deleted. If the print queue list contained a
necessary print job, start the printing process over from the beginning.
Page top
Updating the MP Drivers
Page 874 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers
Updating the MP Drivers
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Before Installing the MP Drivers
Installing the MP Drivers
Page top
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Page 875 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
The MP Drivers include a printer driver and scanner driver (ScanGear).
By updating the MP Drivers to the latest version of the MP Drivers, unresolved problems may be solved.
Access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model.
Important
You can download the MP Drivers for free, but any Internet access charges incurred are your
responsibility.
Before installing the latest MP Drivers, delete the previously installed version.
For information on how to delete the MP Drivers, see " Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers ."
Related Topics
Before Installing the MP Drivers
Installing the MP Drivers
Page top
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
The MP Drivers you no longer use can be deleted.
When deleting the MP Drivers, first exit all programs that are running.
The procedure to delete the unnecessary MP Drivers is as follows:
When There is an Uninstaller
1. Start the uninstaller
In Windows Vista, select the Start menu -> All Programs -> "Your model name" -> MP Drivers
Uninstaller.
In Windows XP, select the start menu -> All Programs -> "Your model name" -> MP Drivers
Uninstaller.
In Windows 2000, select the Start menu -> Programs -> "Your model name" -> MP Drivers
Uninstaller.
The MP Drivers Uninstaller dialog box is displayed.
Important
In Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing, uninstalling
or starting software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
When you are logged on to an administrator account, click Continue or Allow to continue.
Some applications require an administrator account to continue. When you are logged on to a
standard account, switch to an administrator account, and restart the operation from the
beginning.
2. Execute the uninstaller
Click Execute. When the confirmation message appears, click Yes.
When all the files have been deleted, click Complete.
The deletion of the MP Drivers is complete.
Important
Printer driver and scanner driver (ScanGear) will be deleted when you uninstall the MP Drivers.
When There is No Uninstaller
When there is no uninstaller in the Start menu of Windows Vista, follow these steps:
1. Select the printer to be deleted
Select the Start menu -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Printers.
Click the model to delete, then press the Alt key on your keyboard. On the File menu, click Delete.
2. Delete the printer
When the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue. Then when the confirmation
message appears, click Yes.
The icon is deleted.
3. Select the printer driver to be deleted
Page 876 of 949 pages
Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers
Page 877 of 949 pages
Press the Alt key. On the File menu, select Run as administrator, and then click Server Properties....
When the User Account Control dialog box appears, click Continue.
Click the Drivers tab. In the Installed printer drivers list, click the printer to delete.
4. Delete the printer driver
When you click Remove..., Remove Driver And Package dialog box is displayed.
Select Remove driver and driver package, and then click OK.
In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
When data collection is completed in the Remove Driver Package dialog box, click Delete.
5. Click OK
The deletion of the printer driver is complete.
Important
You may not be able to delete the printer driver properly from the Installed printer drivers list.
If this happens, restart your computer, and try again.
Page top
Before Installing the MP Drivers
Page 878 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Before Installing the MP Drivers
Before Installing the MP Drivers
This section describes the items that you should check before installing the MP Drivers. You should also
refer to this section if the MP Drivers cannot be installed.
Checking the Machine Status
Properly connect the personal computer and the machine. For details on connection instructions,
refer to the "Setup the Machine and the Computer" in the manual: Getting Started.
Turn off the machine.
Checking the Personal Computer Settings
Terminate all running applications.
In Windows Vista, log on as a user who has the administrator rights.
In Windows XP, log on as the computer administrator.
In Windows 2000, log on as a member of the Administrators group.
Note
When an old version of the MP Drivers is already installed, first delete (uninstall) that version. For
instructions on deleting the MP Drivers, see " Deleting the Unnecessary MP Drivers ."
Related Topics
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Installing the MP Drivers
Page top
Installing the MP Drivers
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Updating the MP Drivers > Installing the MP Drivers
Installing the MP Drivers
You can access our web site through the Internet and download the latest MP Drivers for your model.
The procedure for installing the downloaded MP Drivers is as follows:
1. Turn off the machine
Important
When you turn on the computer while the machine is on, the Windows Plug and Play function is
executed automatically, and the Found New Hardware window (Windows Vista) or Found New
Hardware Wizard window (Windows XP, Windows 2000) is displayed. In this case, click
Cancel.
2. Start the installer
Double-click the icon of the downloaded file.
The installation program starts.
Important
In Windows Vista, a confirmation/warning dialog box may appear when installing, uninstalling
or starting software.
This dialog box appears when administrative rights are required to perform a task.
When you are logged on to an administrator account, click Continue or Allow to continue.
Some applications require an administrator account to continue. When you are logged on to a
standard account, switch to an administrator account, and restart the operation from the
beginning.
3. Install the driver
At the Welcome window, click Next.
Read the contents of the License Agreement window. After checking the contents, click Yes.
Installation of the MP Drivers begins.
After the Installation Complete window is displayed, check that the machine and the computer are
connected through a cable.
When the machine is connected directly to the network, follow the procedure below to select the
connection destination.
1. Check the Select printer port check box, and click Manual Selection.
2. At the Select Port window, select printer output port (FILE) as connection destination, and then
click OK.
4. Complete the installation
Click Complete.
Turn on the machine, and wait awhile until the connection is recognized.
When you are using a USB connection, the installation of the MP Drivers is complete.
Depending on the environment you are using, a message prompting you to restart the computer may be
displayed. To complete the installation properly, restart the computer.
If a problem occurs, such as not being able to scan through a network connection, reinstall Canon IJ
Network Tool. To do so, download the latest Canon IJ Network Tool from our web site, and then set up
the software.
Important
You can download the MP Drivers for free, but any Internet access charges incurred are your
Page 879 of 949 pages
Installing the MP Drivers
Page 880 of 949 pages
responsibility.
Related Topics
Obtaining the Latest MP Drivers
Before Installing the MP Drivers
Page top
Uninstalling the On-Screen Manuals
Page 881 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Uninstalling the On-Screen Manuals
Uninstalling the On-Screen Manuals
Follow the procedure below to uninstall all of the installed on-screen manuals from your computer.
All of the installed on-screen manuals will be deleted at the same time.
1. Click Start > All Programs (Programs in Windows 2000) > Canon XXX Manual
(where "XXX " is your machine's name) > Uninstall.
2. Click OK when the confirmation message appears.
Note
When the message prompting you to restart your computer is displayed, click OK to restart your
computer.
On-screen manuals other than printer driver's help and scanner driver's help are uninstalled at a time.
1. Select Applications on the Go menu.
2. Double-click the Canon Utilities folder, and then the IJ Manual folder.
3. Drag the folder of your machine's name into the trash.
4. Drag the
Canon XXX On-screen Manual icon (where " XXX " is your machine's
name) on your desktop into the trash.
Page top
Transporting the Machine
Page 882 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Transporting the Machine
Transporting the Machine
When relocating the machine, pack the machine using the original packing materials.
If you do not have the original packing materials, pack the machine carefully using protective material
and place it inside a sturdy box.
Important
Do not transport or store the machine slanted, vertically, or upside-down, as the ink may leak and
damage the machine.
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Confirm that the Power lamp is off and unplug the machine.
Important
Do not unplug the machine while the Power lamp is lit or flashing green, as it may cause
malfunction or damage to the machine, making the machine unable to print.
3. Retract the Paper Support and the Output Tray Extension, close the Paper Output
Tray, then close the Operation Panel.
4. Disconnect the printer cable from the computer and from the machine, and then
disconnect the power plug from the machine.
5. Use adhesive tape to secure all the covers on the machine to keep them from
opening during transportation. Then pack the machine in the plastic bag.
6. Attach the protective material to the machine when packing the machine.
Important
Pack the machine with the Print Head and ink tanks left installed in the machine.
Note
Clearly label the box as "FRAGILE" or "HANDLE WITH CARE".
Page top
Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box (Windows)
Page 883 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box (Windows)
Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box (Windows)
The printer driver setup window can be displayed through the application software in use or the Start
menu of the Windows.
Open the Printer Properties Dialog Box through the Application Software
Follow the procedure below to configure print settings when printing.
1.
Select the command you perform printing on the application software in use.
In general, select Print on the File menu to open the Print dialog box.
2.
Select your model name and click Preferences (or Properties).
The printer properties dialog box opens.
Note
Depending on application software you use, command names or menu names may vary
and there may be more steps. For details, refer to the user's manual of your application
software.
Open the Printer Properties Dialog Box through the Start Menu
Follow the procedure below to perform maintenance operations such as print head cleaning, or to
configure print settings that are common for all application software.
1.
Select items from the Start menu as shown below.
In Windows Vista, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.
In Windows XP, select the Start menu > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware >
Printers and Faxes.
In Windows 2000, select the Start menu > Settings > Printers.
2.
Right-click your model name icon and then select Printing Preferences from the displayed
menu.
The printer properties dialog box opens.
Important
Opening the printer properties dialog box through Properties displays such tabs
regarding the Windows functions as the Ports (or Advanced) tab. Those tabs do not
appear when opening through Printing Preferences or application software. About tabs
regarding Windows functions, refer to the user's manual for the Windows.
Page top
Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box (Macintosh)
Page 884 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box (Macintosh)
Opening the Page Setup and Print Dialog Box (Macintosh)
You can open the Page Setup dialog box and the Print dialog box from the application program you are
using.
Opening the Page Setup Dialog Box
Open the Page Setup dialog box to specify page (paper) settings before printing.
1.
Select Page Setup... on the File menu in your application program.
The Page Setup dialog box opens.
Opening the Print Dialog Box
Open the Print dialog box to specify print settings before printing.
1.
Select Print... on the File menu in your application program.
The Print dialog box opens.
Page top
Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh)
Advanced Guide > Appendix > Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh)
Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh)
To open the Canon IJ Printer Utility, follow the procedure below.
In Mac OS X v.10.5.x
1.
Select System Preferences on the Apple menu.
2.
Click Print & Fax.
3.
Select your machine's name in the Printers and click Open Print Queue....
The job list of your machine is displayed.
4.
Click Utility.
The Printer List opens.
5.
Select your machine's name in the Product list and click Maintenance.
The Canon IJ Printer Utility starts up.
Page 885 of 949 pages
Opening the Canon IJ Printer Utility (Macintosh)
Page 886 of 949 pages
In Mac OS X v.10.4.x or Mac OS X v 10.3.9
1.
Select Applications on the Go menu.
2.
Double-click the Utilities folder, and then double-click the Printer Setup Utility icon.
The Printer List opens.
3.
Select your machine's name in the Name list and click Utility.
4.
Select your machine's name in the Product list and click Maintenance.
The Canon IJ Printer Utility starts up.
Page top
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Page 887 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
--- Transforming Your Photos into Creative Works of Art --Easy-PhotoPrint EX allows you to create albums, calendars and stickers easily using photos taken with
digital cameras.
You can also print borderless photos easily.
Start Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Click Here: Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Note
See the section below for details on how to use Easy-PhotoPrint EX.
Printing with the Bundled Application Software
Create a Personalized Photo Album
Creating a personalized photo album is an easy task if you use Easy-PhotoPrint EX!
All you need to do is select which photos to use, select a layout, then load paper into your printer and
print. After you bind the printed sheets, you'll have the one and only album of your memories!
You can change the layout and background, and attach
comments to photos.
You can also select the size and orientation.
You can arrange a photo across the left and right
pages.
CHECK!
Select a theme (background design) to create a single-themed album.
Decorate Items with Text and Frames
You can add text and frames to photos. Attach a description of the photo in an album, and add a frame to
enhance the photo's atmosphere.
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Page 888 of 949 pages
CHECK!
Select Album to add text and frames. You cannot decorate photos with Photo Print.
Create a Calendar Using Your Favorite Photos
Create calendars easily with Easy-PhotoPrint EX. Create your own calendar using your favorite photos!
It'll be exciting to turn the calendar pages.
You can use all kinds of photos.
You can also create 2-month, 6-month and 12-month
calendars.
Create Stickers
Create stickers easily with Easy-PhotoPrint EX!
Create stickers of your favorite photos and share them with your friends!
CHECK!
You can add text to photos.
Using Easy-PhotoPrint EX
Page 889 of 949 pages
Page top
Using MP Navigator EX
Advanced Guide > Using MP Navigator EX
Using MP Navigator EX
MP Navigator EX is an application that enables you to easily scan photos and documents. It is suitable
even for beginners.
Start MP Navigator EX
Click Here: MP Navigator EX
Note
See "Let's Try Scanning" for details on how to scan images using MP Navigator EX.
Scan Photos and Documents
You can scan easily by navigating through MP Navigator EX screens. You can also save/print scanned
images using MP Navigator EX.
Scan Small Documents at One Time
You can scan multiple small documents (photos, cards, etc.) at one time. It is useful as you do not need
to scan multiple times.
Scan Large Documents
You can easily scan documents that are larger than the Platen using MP Navigator EX. It allows you to
scan the left and right halves of a document separately and combine them back into one image.
Page 890 of 949 pages
Using MP Navigator EX
Page 891 of 949 pages
Scan with One-click
In One-click Mode, MP Navigator EX completes from scanning to saving, with a click of an icon. One-click
Mode also allows you to scan and save images as PDF files or attach them to e-mail automatically.
Scan and Correct/Enhance Photos
You can easily correct/enhance scanned photos using MP Navigator EX. You do not need to use other
applications.
For details on how to use MP Navigator EX, refer to " Scanning with the Bundled Application Software ."
Page top
About Solution Menu
Page 892 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Solution Menu
About Solution Menu
Quick Shortcut!! Solution Menu
Solution Menu is a menu window that provides quick access from your desktop to Canon applications,
manuals, and online product information.
Important
The number and types of buttons displayed in the window may vary depending on your printer and
region.
Starting Solution Menu
Click Here: Solution Menu
To start from desktop, see below.
Double-click the Canon Solution Menu icon on the desktop. Alternatively, from the Start menu, select (All)
Programs > Canon Utilities > Solution Menu > Solution Menu.
From the next time, Solution Menu starts when Windows starts.
If the Start Solution Menu when Windows starts checkbox at the bottom left of the window is not selected,
Solution Menu does not start when Windows starts.
Note
Solution Menu will start automatically when you install it using the Setup CD-ROM that
accompanies the printer.
Changing the Window Size
Click
(window size: large) or
(window size: small) on the title bar to change the window size
About Solution Menu
Page 893 of 949 pages
(large or small).
Solution Menu opens with the last used window size next time it is started.
When screen size is small
Starting an Application
1. Point to a button on the window to display the description of each application.
2. By clicking each button, the introduced application starts.
Follow the same steps to view the manuals or online product information.
Important
Internet connection is required to access the online information. Internet connection fees apply.
Exiting Solution Menu
Click
(Close) on the title bar.
Restriction on Use of Solution Menu
This software is subject to the following restriction. Keep this point in mind when using it.
All icons of the installed applications that support Solution Menu are displayed in the window. After
the installation, you cannot rearrange the icons or delete only the icons.
Page top
About Network Communication
Page 894 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication
About Network Communication
Changing and Confirming Network Settings
Troubleshooting
Appendix
Glossary
Page top
Changing and Confirming Network Settings
Page 895 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings
Changing and Confirming Network Settings
Canon IJ Network Tool
Canon IJ Network Tool Dialog Box
Canon IJ Network Tool Menus
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet
Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings
Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet
Monitoring Wireless Network Status
Initializing the Network Settings of the Machine
Viewing the Modified Settings
Printing Out Network Setting Information
Page top
Canon IJ Network Tool
Page 896 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Canon IJ Network Tool
Canon IJ Network Tool
The Canon IJ Network Tool is a utility that enables you to display and modify the machine network
settings. It is installed when the machine is set up.
Important
Do not start up the Canon IJ Network Tool while printing.
Do not print when the Canon IJ Network Tool is running.
If the firewall function of your security software is turned on, a message may appear warning that
Canon software is attempting to access the network. If the warning message appears, set the
security software to always allow access.
Canon IJ Network Tool has been verified to work on Windows XP, however, it does not support Fast
User Switching. It is recommended to exit Canon IJ Network Tool when switching users.
Starting up Canon IJ Network Tool
1.
Double-click the
Canon IJ Network Tool shortcut icon on the desktop.
Click Start and select All programs (or Programs), Canon IJ Network Utilities, Canon IJ
Network Tool, and then Canon IJ Network Tool.
Page top
Canon IJ Network Tool Dialog Box
Page 897 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Canon IJ Network Tool
Dialog Box
Canon IJ Network Tool Dialog Box
This section describes the items displayed on the Canon IJ Network Tool dialog box.
Important
To use the machine over LAN, make sure you have the equipment necessary for the connection
type, such as an access point.
1. Printers
The printer name, status, printer model name, and port name are displayed.
A check mark next to the printer in the Name list indicates it is set as the default printer.
Configuration changes are applied to the selected printer.
2. Update
Performs printer detection again. Click this button if the target printer is not displayed.
Important
To change the printer's network settings using the Canon IJ Network Tool, it must be
connected via a LAN.
If No Driver is displayed for the name, associate the port with the printer.
If Not Found is displayed for the status, make sure that the access point is turned on.
If the printer on a network is not detected, make sure that the printer is turned on, then click
Update. It may take several minutes to detect printers. If the printer is still detected, connect the
machine and the computer with a USB cable, then click Update.
If the printer is being used from another computer, a dialog box is displayed informing you of
this condition.
Note
This item has the same function as Refresh in the View menu.
3. Configuration
Click to configure settings of the selected printer.
Note
You cannot configure a printer that has the status Not Found.
This item has the same function as Configuration in the Settings menu.
Canon IJ Network Tool Dialog Box
Page 898 of 949 pages
Page top
Canon IJ Network Tool Menus
Page 899 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Canon IJ Network Tool
Menus
Canon IJ Network Tool Menus
This section describes the menus in the Canon IJ Network Tool dialog box.
1. File menu
Exit
Exits the Canon IJ Network Tool.
2. View menu
Status
Displays the Status dialog box to confirm the printer connection status and wireless communication
status.
Refresh
Updates and displays the contents of Printers to the latest information.
Important
To change the printer's network settings using the Canon IJ Network Tool, it must be
connected via a LAN.
If No Driver is displayed for the name, associate the port with the printer.
If Not Found is displayed for the status, make sure that the access point is turned on.
If the printer on a network is not detected, make sure that the printer is turned on, then click
Update. It may take several minutes to detect printers. If the printer is still detected, connect the
machine and the computer with a USB cable, then click Update.
If the printer is being used from another computer, a dialog box is displayed informing you of
this condition.
Note
This item has the same function as Update in the Canon IJ Network Tool dialog box.
Network Information
Displays the Network Information dialog box to confirm the network settings of the printer and the
computer.
Display Warning Automatically
Enables or disables automatic display of warnings.
When this menu is selected, a warning is displayed if one or more ports are unavailable for printing.
Canon IJ Network Tool Menus
Page 900 of 949 pages
3. Settings menu
Configuration
Displays the Configuration dialog box to configure settings of the selected printer.
Note
This item has the same function as Configuration in the Canon IJ Network Tool dialog box.
Associate Port
Displays the Associate Port dialog box and you can associate a port with the printer.
This menu is available when No Driver is displayed for the selected printer. Associating a port with
the printer enables you to use it.
Maintenance
Displays the Maintenance dialog box to revert the network settings of the printer to factory default and
to mount the Card Slot as the network drive.
4. Help menu
Help Topics
Displays the application's online help.
About
Displays the version of the Canon IJ Network Tool.
Page top
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet
Page 901 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Changing the Settings
in the Wireless LAN Sheet
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet
To change the wireless network settings of the printer, connect the printer and the computer with a USB
cable temporarily. If you modify the wireless network settings of the computer over wireless connection
without USB connection, your computer may not be able to communicate with the machine after
modifying the settings.
Note
Select Wireless LAN active in the WLAN active/inactive on the Operation Panel to change the
settings in the Wireless LAN sheet.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
1. Start up the Canon IJ Network Tool.
Starting up Canon IJ Network Tool
2. Select the printer in Printers.
3. Select Configuration from the Settings menu.
4. Click the Wireless LAN tab.
Click OK after changing configuration. A dialog box is displayed asking you for confirmation before
the settings are sent to the printer. If you click Yes, the settings are sent to the printer and the
Transmitted Settings dialog box is displayed.
1. Network Type
Infrastructure
Connects the printer to the wireless LAN with an access point.
2. SSID
The SSID of the wireless LAN is displayed.
Note
Enter the same SSID that the access point is configured to use. The SSID is case
sensitive.
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet
3. Search
The Search dialog box is displayed to select an access point to connect to.
Search dialog box
Note
When the Canon IJ Network Tool runs over a LAN, the button is grayed out and cannot be
selected. Connect the printer and the computer with a USB cable temporarily to change
the settings.
4. Encryption Method
Select the encryption method used over the wireless LAN.
Important
If all encryption types of the access point, printer, or computer do not match, the printer
cannot communicate with the computer. If the printer cannot communicate with the
computer after the encryption type of the printer was switched, make sure that encryption
types for the computer and the access point matches that set to the printer.
How to Set a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key
If you connect to a network that is not protected with security measures, there is a risk of
disclosing data such as your personal information to a third party.
Do not use
Select to disable encryption.
Use WEP
Transmission is encrypted using a WEP key you specified.
If a WEP key has not been set, the WEP Details dialog box is displayed automatically. To
change WEP settings set before, click Configuration to display the dialog box.
WEP Details dialog box
Use WPA/Use WPA2
Transmission is encrypted using a WPA or WPA2 key you specified.
The security has been strengthened more than WEP.
If a WPA or WPA2 key has not been set, the Authentication Type Confirmation dialog box is
displayed automatically. To change WPA or WPA2 settings set before, click Configuration to
display the WPA Details dialog box or WPA2 Details dialog box.
Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings
5. Configuration
The detailed settings dialog box is displayed. The WEP, the WPA, or the WPA2 key selected in
Encryption Method can be confirmed and changed.
For details on WEP setting:
WEP Details dialog box
For details on WPA or WPA2 setting:
Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings
6. TCP/IP Setup
Sets the IP address of the printer to be used over the LAN. Set a value appropriate for your
network environment.
Get IP address automatically
Select this option to use an IP address automatically assigned by a DHCP server. DHCP server
functionality must be enabled on your wireless LAN router or access point.
Use next IP address
If no DHCP server functionality is available in your setup where you use the printer or you want
to use a particular IP address, select this option to use a fixed IP address.
Search dialog box
Page 902 of 949 pages
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet
1. Detected Access Points
The signal strength from the access point, encryption type, name of access point, and the radio
channel can be confirmed.
Important
If you connect to a network that is not protected with security measures, there is a risk of
disclosing data such as your personal information to a third party.
Note
Signal strength is displayed as follows.
: Good
: Fair
: Poor
Type of encryption is displayed as follows.
Blank: No encryption
WEP: WEP is set
WPA: WPA is set
WPA2: WPA2 is set
2. Update
Click to update the list of access points when your target access point is not detected.
If the target access point is set to the stealth mode, click Cancel to return to the previous screen
and enter the access point's Service Set Identifier in SSID.
Note
Make sure that the access point is turned on.
3. Set
Click to set the access point's SSID in SSID on the Wireless LAN sheet.
Note
Depending on your settings, WEP Details dialog box, WPA Details dialog box, or WPA2
Details dialog box appears when you click the Set button. In the dialog box, configure the
details to use the same encryption settings set to the access point.
Access points that cannot be used by this machine (including those configured to use
different encryption methods) are displayed grayed out and cannot be configured.
WEP Details dialog box
Page 903 of 949 pages
Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet
Page 904 of 949 pages
Specify the printer WEP settings. When changing the password (WEP key), the same change must
be made to the password (WEP key) of the access point.
1. WEP Key
Enter the same key as the one set to the access point.
The number of characters and character type that can be entered differ depending on the key
length and key format.
Key Length
Key Format
64 bit
128 bit
ASCII
5 characters
13 characters
Hexadecimal (Hex)
10 digits
26 digits
2. Key Length
Select either 64bit or 128bit.
3. Key Format
Select either ASCII or Hex.
4. Key ID
Select the Key ID (index) set to the access point.
5. Authentication
Select the authentication method to authenticate the printer's access to the access point.
Normally, select Auto. If you want to specify the method manually, select Open System or
Shared Key according to the setting of the access point.
Important
If the printer cannot communicate with the computer after the encryption type of the printer
was switched, make sure that encryption types for the computer and the access point
matches that set to the printer.
How to Set a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key
Page top
Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings
Page 905 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Changing the WPA or
WPA2 Detailed Settings
Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings
To change the wireless network settings of the printer, connect the printer and the computer with a USB
cable temporarily. If you modify the wireless network settings of the computer over wireless connection
without USB connection, your computer may not be able to communicate with the machine after
modifying the settings.
The example screenshots in this section refer to the WPA detailed settings.
1. Start up the Canon IJ Network Tool.
Starting up Canon IJ Network Tool
2. Select the printer in Printers.
3. Select Configuration from the Settings menu.
4. Click the Wireless LAN tab.
5. Select Use WPA or Use WPA2 in Encryption Method and click Configuration.
Go to step 7 if encryption is not set to the printer.
6. Click Change Settings.
1. Authentication Type
Displays the type of authentication used for client authentication.
This machine supports the PSK authentication method.
2. Dynamic Encryption Type
Displays the dynamic encryption method as either TKIP (Basic Encryption), or AES (Secure
Encryption).
3. Change Settings
Displays a dialog box to change WPA or WPA2 settings.
7. Check the client authentication type and click Next.
Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings
1. Authentication Type
Type of authentication used for client authentication is displayed.
This machine supports the PSK authentication method.
PSK
This authentication type uses a passphrase entered in the next screen.
8. Enter the passphrase, confirm the type of dynamic encryption and click Next.
1. Passphrase
Enter the passphrase set to the access point. The passphrase should be a string of 8 to 63
alphanumeric characters or a 64-digit hexadecimal value.
If you do not know the access point passphrase, refer to the manual provided with the access
point or contact its manufacturer.
2. Dynamic Encryption Type
Select the dynamic encryption method from either TKIP (Basic Encryption), or AES (Secure
Encryption).
9. Click Finish.
Page 906 of 949 pages
Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings
Page 907 of 949 pages
Important
If the printer cannot communicate with the computer after the encryption type of the printer was
switched, make sure that encryption types for the computer and the access point matches that
set to the printer.
How to Set a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key
Page top
Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet
Page 908 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Changing the Settings
in the Admin Password Sheet
Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet
1. Start up the Canon IJ Network Tool.
Starting up Canon IJ Network Tool
2. Select the printer in Printers.
3. Select Configuration from the Settings menu.
4. Click the Admin Password tab.
1. Use admin password
Set a password for the administrator with privileges to set up and change detailed options. To
use this feature, select this check box and enter a password.
Important
The password should consist of alphanumeric characters and be no longer than 32
characters. The password is case-sensitive. Do not forget the password you set.
2. Password
Enter the password to set.
3. Password Confirmation
Enter the password again for confirmation.
5. Click OK.
A dialog box is displayed asking you for confirmation before the settings are sent to the printer. If you
click Yes, the settings are sent to the printer and the Transmitted Settings dialog box is displayed.
Page top
Monitoring Wireless Network Status
Page 909 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Monitoring Wireless
Network Status
Monitoring Wireless Network Status
1. Start up the Canon IJ Network Tool.
Starting up Canon IJ Network Tool
2. Select the printer in Printers.
3. Select Status from the View menu.
1. Signal Strength
Indicates the strength of the signal received by the printer, ranging from 0% to 100%.
2. Link Quality
Indicates the signal quality excluding the noise while communicating, ranging from 0% to 100
%.
Important
If the indicated value is low, move your printer closer to the wireless network device.
3. Advanced Measurement
Click to examine the connection performance between the printer and the access point. Follow
the instructions on the screen to start measuring and display the status. Measurement takes a
few minutes.
When
is displayed in Connection Performance between the Printer and the Access Point,
the printer can communicate with the access point. Otherwise, refer to displayed comments
and Help for improving the status of communication link.
Note
If any messages appear on Overall Network Performance, move the machine and access
point as instructed to improve the performance.
Page top
Initializing the Network Settings of the Machine
Page 910 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Initializing the Network
Settings of the Machine
Initializing the Network Settings of the Machine
Important
Note that initialization erases all network settings on the machine, and printing or scanning
operation from a computer over network may become impossible. To use the machine over
network, refer to the setup manual of the machine to set up the machine again.
1. Start up the Canon IJ Network Tool.
Starting up Canon IJ Network Tool
2. Select the printer in Printers.
3. Select Maintenance from the Settings menu.
1. Setting Initialization
Initialize
Reverts all the network settings of the printer to factory default. Click Initialize to display the
Initialize Settings dialog box and click Yes to initialize the network settings of the printer. Do not
turn off the printer during initialization. Click OK when initialization is complete.
Performing initialization when connected over wireless LAN will break the connection, so refer
to your setup manual of the machine to set up the machine again.
2. Network Setup of the Card Slot
Displays the status of the Card Slot. For details on how to mount the Card Slot as a network
drive, see Using the Card Slot over a Network .
Note
You can change the network settings of the printer using Canon IJ Network Tool with USB
connection after initializing the LAN settings. To change the network settings using Canon IJ
Network Tool, set WLAN active/inactive in Device settings to Wireless LAN active.
Page top
Viewing the Modified Settings
Page 911 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Viewing the Modified
Settings
Viewing the Modified Settings
The Confirmation dialog box is displayed when you modified the printer settings on the Configuration
dialog box. When you click Yes on the Confirmation dialog box, the following screen is displayed for
confirming the modified settings.
1. Settings
A list of changes made in the Configuration dialog box is displayed.
Page top
Printing Out Network Setting Information
Page 912 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Changing and Confirming Network Settings > Printing Out Network
Setting Information
Printing Out Network Setting Information
You can print out the network settings of the machine such as its IP address and SSID.
Important
This print out contains valuable information about your computer. Handle it with care.
1. Make sure that the machine is turned on.
2. Load a sheet of A4 or Letter-sized plain paper in the Cassette.
3. Select
Settings on the HOME screen, then press the OK button.
4. Select
Device settings, then press the OK button.
5. Select LAN settings, then press the OK button.
6. Select Confirm LAN settings, then press the OK button.
7. Select Print LAN details, then press the OK button.
8. Select Yes, then press the OK button.
The following information on the machine's network setting is printed out.
Item
Explanations of the item
Setting
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN
Enable/Disable
Link Status
Status of the Wireless LAN
Active/Inactive
MAC Address
MAC Address
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
SSID
SSID
SSID of the wireless LAN
Connection Mode
Connection Mode
Infrastructure
Channel
Channel
XX (1 to 13)
Encryption
Method of the Encryption
none/WEP/TKIP/AES
WEP Key Length
WEP Key Length
Inactive/128/64
Authentication
Method of the Authentication
auto/open/shared/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK
Signal Strength
Signal Strength
0 to 100 [%]
TCP/IP Version
TCP/IP Version
IPv4/IPv6
IP Address
Selected IP Address
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Default Gateway
Default Gateway
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Subnet Mask*1
Subnet Mask
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Subnet Prefix
Length*2
Subnet Prefix Length
XXX
IPsec*3
IPsec setting
Active
Security Protocol*3
Method of the Security Protocol ESP/ESP & AH/AH
Printer Name
Printer name
Printer name (Up to 15 characters)
Printing Out Network Setting Information
Page 913 of 949 pages
Shared Memory Card
Memory card sharing
Enable/Disable
WSD
WSD setting
Enable/Disable
WSD Timeout
Timeout
1/5/10/15/20 [min]
LLTD
LLTD setting
Enable/Disable
LPR Protocol
LPR protocol setting
Enable/Disable
Bonjour
Bonjour setting
Enable/Disable
Bonjour Service
Name
Bonjour service name
Bonjour service name (Up to 52
characters)
Bonjour LPR Service
Bonjour LPR service
advertising
Enable/Disable
("X" represents an alphanumeric character ranging from 0 to 9 and A to F.)
*1 Only when IPv4 is selected on IPv4/IPv6 settings, the status of the network is printed.
*2 Only when IPv6 is selected on IPv4/IPv6 settings, the status of the network is printed.
*3 Only when IPv6 is selected on IPv4/IPv6 settings and Active is selected on IPsec Settings, the
status of the network is printed.
Page top
Troubleshooting
Page 914 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
How to Set a Network Key/Network Password
Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine
The Following Screen Is Displayed During Setup
Printer Status Monitor of the Machine Does Not Operate
Cannot Print, Scan, or Access the Card Slot from a Computer Connected to the Network
It Takes a Long Time for Printing to Start
The Admin Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten
Checking Information about the Network
Restoring the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default
Updating the MP Drivers
Uninstalling the Canon IJ Network Tool/Canon IJ Network Scan Utility
Cannot Mount the Card Slot
Cannot Use the Card Slot
Cannot Access to the Memory Card in the Card Slot Using MP Navigator EX
Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security Settings on the Computer
Date Modified of Files Changes When Saving Them on the Memory Card over Network
Page top
Troubleshooting
Page 915 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section describes troubleshooting tips for problems you may encounter when using the machine.
For troubleshooting tips related to the setup, refer to the Network Setup Troubleshooting .
Page top
How to Set a Network Key/Network Password
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > How to Set a Network Key/Network Password
How to Set a Network Key/Network Password
Cannot Connect with an Access Point to Which a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key Is Set (You Forgot the WEP/
WPA/WPA2 Key)
How to Set a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key
Cannot Connect with an Access Point to Which a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key Is Set (You Forgot
the WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key)
For information on how to set up the access point, refer to the manual provided with the access
point or contact its manufacturer. Make sure that the computer and the access point can
communicate with each other, then set up the machine to match the settings of the access point.
How to Set a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key
Refer to the manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer and check the
access point settings. Make sure that the computer and the access point can communicate with
each other, then set up the machine to match the settings of the access point.
When using WEP
The key length, key format, the key to use (out of 1 to 4), and the authentication method must
match among the access point, the printer, and the computer.
For access points that use automatically generated WEP keys, use the hexadecimal key
format for the machine.
Example:
Using 64 bit key length, when the string "canon" is entered, an access point generates the
following codes.
Key 1: C9 42 28 B8 AE
Key 2: 87 C0 FB 05 6B
Key 3: 9A 15 FB F6 F3
Key 4: 62 56 67 58 44
In order to communicate with such an access point, you must configure the machine to use
the key generated by the access point by entering it in hexadecimal format.
Normally, select Auto for the authentication method. Otherwise, select Open System or
Shared Key according to the setting of the access point.
When the WEP Details dialog box appears after clicking Set on the Search dialog box, follow
the on-screen instructions and set the key length, the key format, the key number, and the
authentication to enter a WEP key.
For details, see WEP Details dialog box .
When using WPA or WPA2
The authentication method, passphrase, and dynamic encryption type must match on the
access point, the machine, and the computer.
Enter the passphrase configured on the access point (a sequence of between 8 and 63
alphanumeric characters, or a 64-character hexadecimal number).
Select either TKIP (Basic Encryption) or AES (Secure Encryption) for the dynamic encryption
method.
For details, see Changing the WPA or WPA2 Detailed Settings.
Note
This machine supports WPA-PSK (WPA-Personal) and WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Personal).
WPA-Enterprise and WPA2-Enterprise are not supported.
Page 916 of 949 pages
How to Set a Network Key/Network Password
Page 917 of 949 pages
Page top
Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot
Print from the Machine
Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the
Machine
Cannot Communicate with the Machine after Applying MAC/IP Address Filtering or Entering a WEP/
WPA/WPA2 Key to the Access Point
Cannot Communicate with the Machine After the Network Settings Are Changed
Cannot Connect to the Target Access Point
When Encryption Is Enabled, Cannot Communicate With the Machine After the Encryption Type Was
Switched on the Access Point
Cannot Communicate with the Machine with USB Connection
Cannot Communicate with the Machine over the Network
The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Network
Cannot Communicate with the Machine after Applying MAC/IP Address Filtering or
Entering a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key to the Access Point
Check 1: Confirm the access point setting.
Refer to the manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer to confirm the
access point setting. Make sure that the computer and the access point can communicate
with each other under this setting.
Check 2: If you are performing MAC address filtering at the access point, confirm
that the MAC addresses for both the computer or the network device and the
printer are registered.
Check 3: If you are using a WEP/WPA/WPA2 key, make sure that the key for the
computer or the network device and the printer matches that set to the access
point.
Besides the WEP key itself, the key length, key format, the key ID to use, and the
authentication method must match among the machine, the access point, and the computer.
Normally, select Auto for the authentication method. If you want to specify the method
manually, select Open System or Shared Key according to the setting of the access point.
How to Set a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key
Cannot Communicate with the Machine After the Network Settings Are Changed
Wait until the IP address is assigned to the computer. You may need to restart your computer.
Search for the printer again after confirming a valid IP address is assigned to the computer.
Cannot Connect to the Target Access Point
Check 1: Make sure that the SSID/network name of the target access point and
the machine are identical.
For the procedures to connect an access point and set it up, refer to the manual of your
access point or contact its manufacturer.
For the procedures to set up the printer, see Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN
Sheet .
Check 2: Make sure that Wireless LAN active is selected in the WLAN active/
inactive on the Operation Panel.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Page 918 of 949 pages
Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine
Check 3: If a network key is set to the access point, set the machine to match it.
How to Set a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key
Check 4: Make sure that the valid wireless channel is used.
The wireless channel to be used may be limited depending on wireless network devices
installed in the computer. Refer to the manual provided with your computer or your wireless
network device to specify the valid wireless channel.
Check 5: Make sure that the channel set to the access point is valid to
communicate with the computer, confirmed in Check 4.
If not, change the channel set to the access point.
For placement:
Make sure that there is no barrier or obstacle between the access point and the machine.
When using the printer in a multiple access point setup, make sure that the
access point to be used can communicate with the machine and the computer.
Make sure that the wireless channel of the access point is far enough away with those of
other access points.
Windows XP may automatically connect to an unintended access point. Follow the steps
below to make your access point the highest priority.
1.
Select Start and Connect To.
2.
Right click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.
3.
Click the Wireless Networks tab and confirm that Use Windows to configure my
wireless network settings is checked.
4.
Confirm that the target access point is displayed in the Preferred networks list.
When Encryption Is Enabled, Cannot Communicate With the Machine After the Encryption
Type Was Switched on the Access Point
If the printer cannot communicate with the computer after the encryption type of the printer was
switched, make sure that encryption types for the computer and the access point matches that set
to the printer.
Cannot Communicate with the Machine after Applying MAC/IP Address Filtering or Entering a
WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key to the Access Point
Cannot Communicate with the Machine with USB Connection
Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on.
Check 2: Make sure that the USB cable is connected properly.
Refer to the setup manual of the machine to connect the USB cable properly.
Check 3: Do not start up the Canon IJ Network Tool while printing.
Check 4: Do not print while the Canon IJ Network Tool is running.
Check 5: Make sure that Enable bidirectional support is selected in the Ports
sheet of the properties dialog box of the printer driver.
Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box (Windows)
Cannot Communicate with the Machine over the Network
Page 919 of 949 pages
Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine
Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on.
Check 2: Is WLAN active/inactive in Device settings set to Wireless LAN active?
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Check 3: Make sure that the network settings in the machine are identical with
those of the access point.
Refer to the manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer to check the
access point settings, and then modify the machine settings.
How to Set a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key
Check 4: Make sure that the machine is not place as far away from the access
point.
The access point is located indoors within the effective range for wireless communication.
Locate the machine within 50 m from the access point.
Check 5: Make sure that there is no obstruction.
Wireless communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. Adjust the
location of the devices.
Check 6: Make sure that there is no source of radio wave interference in your
vicinity.
There may be a device such as a microwave oven using the same frequency bandwidth as
the wireless station. Place the wireless devices as far away from the interference source as
possible.
Check 7: Make sure that the network settings of the computer are correct.
For the procedures to connect a network device to the computer and set them up, refer to the
manual of your network device or contact its manufacturer.
Check 8: Make sure that the radio status is good and adjust the installation
positions while monitoring the radio status with Canon IJ Network Tool.
Monitoring Wireless Network Status
Check 9: Make sure that the valid wireless channel is used.
The wireless channel to be used may be limited depending on wireless network devices
installed in the computer. Refer to the manual provided with your computer or your wireless
network device to specify the valid wireless channel.
Check 10: Make sure that the channel set to the access point is valid to
communicate with the computer, confirmed in Check 9.
If not, change the channel set to the access point.
Check 11: Make sure that the firewall of the security software is disabled.
If the firewall function of your security software is turned on, a message may appear warning
that Canon software is attempting to access the network. If the warning message appears,
set the security software to always allow access.
If using any programs that switch the network environment, check their settings. Some
programs will enable a firewall by default.
Check 12: When using a router, connect the printer and computer to the LAN
side (same network segment).
For placement:
Make sure that there is no barrier or obstacle between the access point and the machine.
The Machine Cannot Be Detected in the Network
Page 920 of 949 pages
Cannot Communicate With the Machine/Cannot Print from the Machine
Page 921 of 949 pages
Check 1: Make sure that the machine is turned on.
Check 2: Make sure that the machine setup is completed.
If not, refer to your setup manual of the machine to complete the machine setup.
Check 3: When using Canon IJ Network Tool, click Update to search for the
printer again.
Canon IJ Network Tool Dialog Box
Check 4: When searching for a printer over a network, make sure that the
machine is associated with the port driver.
When No Driver is displayed under Name in the Canon IJ Network Tool, there is no
association. Select Associate Port on the Settings menu, then associate the port with the
printer.
Canon IJ Network Tool Menus
Check 5: Make sure that the network settings in the printer are identical with
those of the access point.
Refer to the manual provided with the access point or contact its manufacturer to check the
access point settings, and then modify the machine settings.
How to Set a WEP/WPA/WPA2 Key
Check 6: Make sure that there is no obstruction.
Wireless communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. Adjust the
location of the devices.
Check 7: Make sure that the machine is not place as far away from the access
point.
The access point is located indoors within the effective range for wireless communication.
Locate the machine within 50 m from the access point.
Check 8: Make sure that there is no source of radio wave interference in your
vicinity.
There may be a device such as a microwave oven using the same frequency bandwidth as
the wireless station. Place the wireless devices as far away from the interference source as
possible.
Check 9: Make sure that the network settings of the computer are correct.
Make sure that the computer can communicate with the printer and the access point over the
wireless LAN.
Check 10: Make sure that Enable bidirectional support is selected in the Ports
sheet of the properties dialog box of the printer driver.
Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box (Windows)
Check 11: Make sure that the firewall of the security software is disabled.
If the firewall function of your security software is turned on, a message may appear warning
that Canon software is attempting to access the network. If the warning message appears,
set the security software to always allow access.
If using any programs that switch the network environment, check their settings. Some
programs will enable a firewall by default.
Check 12: When using a router, connect the printer and computer to the LAN
side (same network segment).
Page top
The Following Screen Is Displayed During Setup
Page 922 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > The Following Screen Is Displayed During Setup
The Following Screen Is Displayed During Setup
The Enter Password Dialog Box Is Displayed During Setup
The Dialog Box for Setting the Encryption Is Displayed After Selecting the Access Point in the Search
Dialog Box
"You are connecting the machine to the non encrypted wireless network" Is Displayed
The Enter Password Dialog Box Is Displayed During Setup
The following dialog box is displayed if an administrator password is set to the machine which
has already been set up.
Enter the administrator password you have set.
Changing the Settings in the Admin Password Sheet
The Dialog Box for Setting the Encryption Is Displayed After Selecting the Access Point in
the Search Dialog Box
This dialog box is displayed automatically if the encryption settings are changed on the access
point. You need to change the machine's encryption settings to match those of the access point.
For information on the encryption settings, see Changing the Settings in the Wireless LAN Sheet .
"You are connecting the machine to the non encrypted wireless network" Is Displayed
Security is not configured on the access point. The machine can still be used, so continue the
setup procedure to complete it.
Important
If you connect to a network that is not protected with security measures, there is a risk of
disclosing data such as your personal information to a third party.
Page top
Printer Status Monitor of the Machine Does Not Operate
Page 923 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Printer Status Monitor of the Machine Does Not
Operate
Printer Status Monitor of the Machine Does Not Operate
Use the printer driver with bidirectional communication.
Select Enable bidirectional support in the Ports sheet of the properties dialog box of the printer driver.
Opening the Printer Properties Dialog Box (Windows)
Page top
Cannot Print, Scan, or Access the Card Slot from a Computer Connected to th...
Page 924 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Print, Scan, or Access the Card Slot from
a Computer Connected to the Network
Cannot Print, Scan, or Access the Card Slot from a Computer
Connected to the Network
Check 1: Make sure that the network settings of the computer are
correct.
For the procedures to set up the computer, refer to the manual of your computer or contact its
manufacturer.
Check 2: If the MP Drivers is not installed, install the MP Drivers.
Insert the Setup CD-ROM into the computer's disc drive and perform Custom Install and select MP
Drivers to install again.
Check 3: Make sure that access control is not set to the access point.
For the procedures to connect an access point and set it up, refer to the manual of your access point
or contact its manufacturer.
Note
Print out the network setting information of the computer to check whether the MAC address or
the IP address is registered or not. For details, see Checking the IP Address or the MAC
Address of the Computer .
Page top
It Takes a Long Time for Printing to Start
Page 925 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > It Takes a Long Time for Printing to Start
It Takes a Long Time for Printing to Start
Check 1: The machine may be printing out or scanning a large job
issued from another computer.
Check 2: Make sure that the radio status is good and adjust the
installation positions while monitoring the radio status with Canon IJ
Network Tool.
Monitoring Wireless Network Status
Make sure that there is no barrier or obstacle between the access point and the machine. Wireless
communication between different rooms or floors is generally poor. The metal, concrete, or timber
including the metallic material, mud wall, or insulator may interrupt a wireless communication. If the
machine cannot communicate with the computer over a Wireless LAN for the wall material, place the
machine and the computer in the same room or floor.
Check 3: Make sure that there is no source of interference in your
vicinity.
Since a device such as a microwave oven uses the same frequency bandwidth, it may cause
interference. Place the wireless devices as far away from the source of interference as possible.
Page top
The Admin Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten
Page 926 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > The Admin Password Set to the Machine Was
Forgotten
The Admin Password Set to the Machine Was Forgotten
Initialize the LAN settings.
Restoring the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default
After initializing the LAN settings, refer to your setup manual of the machine to set up the machine again.
Page top
Checking Information about the Network
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Checking Information about the Network
Checking Information about the Network
Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Machine
Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Computer
Checking If the Computer and the Machine, or Computer and the Access Point Can Communicate
Checking the Network Setting Information
Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Machine
To check the IP address or the MAC address of the machine, display the network setting
information using the Operation Panel of the machine or print out the network setting information
of the machine.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Printing Out Network Setting Information
To display the network setting information using the Canon IJ Network Tool, select Network
Information on the View menu.
Canon IJ Network Tool Menus
Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the Computer
To check the IP address or MAC address assigned to the computer, follow the procedure below.
1.
Click Start > All Programs (or Programs) > Accessories > Command Prompt.
2.
Enter "ipconfig/all" and press the Enter key.
The IP addresses and the MAC addresses of the network devices installed on your computer
are displayed. When the network device is not connected to the network, the IP address is not
displayed.
Checking If the Computer and the Machine, or Computer and the Access Point Can
Communicate
To check that communication is available, perform the ping test.
1.
Display the command prompt.
Windows Vista or Windows XP
From the Start menu, select All Programs, Accessories, and Command Prompt.
Windows 2000
From the Start menu, select Programs, Accessories, and Command Prompt.
2.
Type the ping command and the IP address of the target printer or the target access point,
and then press the Enter key.
ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
"XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" is the IP address of the target device.
If the communication is available, a message such as the following is displayed.
Reply from XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX: bytes=32 time=10ms TTL=255
When Request timed out is displayed, the communication is not available.
Checking the Network Setting Information
To check the IP address or the MAC address of the machine, display the network setting
information using the Operation Panel of the machine or print out the network setting information
Page 927 of 949 pages
Checking Information about the Network
Page 928 of 949 pages
of the machine.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Printing Out Network Setting Information
Page top
Restoring the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default
Page 929 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Restoring the Machine's Network Settings to
Factory Default
Restoring the Machine's Network Settings to Factory Default
Important
Note that initialization erases all network settings on the machine, and printing or scanning
operation from a computer over network may become impossible. To use the machine over
network, refer to the setup manual of the machine to set up the machine again.
Select Reset LAN settings on the Operation Panel of the machine to initialize the network setting.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Page top
Updating the MP Drivers
Page 930 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Updating the MP Drivers
Updating the MP Drivers
Download the latest MP Drivers in advance.
After uninstalling the MP Drivers, install the latest MP Drivers according to the regular procedure. When
the connection method selection screen is displayed, select Use the printer on network. The machine
will be detected automatically in the network.
After making sure that the machine is detected, install the MP Drivers following the on-screen
instructions.
Note
You can use the machine over a LAN without performing setup again.
Page top
Uninstalling the Canon IJ Network Tool/Canon IJ Network Scan Utility
Page 931 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Uninstalling the Canon IJ Network Tool/Canon IJ
Network Scan Utility
Uninstalling the Canon IJ Network Tool/Canon IJ Network Scan
Utility
Uninstalling the Canon IJ Network Tool
Follow the procedure below to uninstall the Canon IJ Network Tool from your computer.
Important
Even if the Canon IJ Network Tool is uninstalled, you can print over network and scan from the
computer. However, you cannot change the network settings and use the Card Slot of the
machine over network.
Log into a user account with administrator privilege.
1. Click Start > All Programs (or Programs) > Canon IJ Network Utilities > Canon IJ
Network Tool > Uninstaller.
2. Click Yes when the confirmation message appears.
When the message prompting you to restart your computer is displayed, click OK to restart your
computer.
Note
You can also use Uninstall a program (or Add or Remove Programs, or Add/Remove
Applications) on Control Panel to uninstall the Canon IJ Network Tool.
Uninstalling the Canon IJ Network Scan Utility
Follow the procedure below to uninstall the Canon IJ Network Scan Utility from your computer.
Important
Even if the Canon IJ Network Scan Utility is uninstalled, you can print and scan from a computer
over network. However, you cannot scan over network using the Operation Panel on the
machine.
Log into a user account with administrator privilege.
1. Click Start > All Programs (or Programs) > Canon IJ Network Utilities > Canon IJ
Network Scan Utility > Uninstaller.
2. Click Yes when the confirmation message appears.
When the message prompting you to restart your computer is displayed, click OK to restart your
computer.
Note
You can also use Uninstall a program (or Add or Remove Programs, or Add/Remove
Applications) on Control Panel to uninstall the Canon IJ Network Scan Utility.
Page top
Cannot Mount the Card Slot
Page 932 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Mount the Card Slot
Cannot Mount the Card Slot
The Available Drive Letter Cannot Be Selected on the Network Setup of the Card Slot Dialog Box
The Card Slot Cannot Be Mounted with the Canon IJ Network Tool
The Available Drive Letter Cannot Be Selected on the Network Setup of the Card Slot
Dialog Box
On this dialog box, only D to Z can be selected as the network drive for the Card Slot.
When the Card Slot has been set up to be used over network, you cannot select a drive letter. If you
want to assign another drive letter to the network drive for the Card Slot, disconnect it from the
network, then set up the Card Slot again using the Canon IJ Network Tool.
Using the Card Slot over a Network
The Card Slot Cannot Be Mounted with the Canon IJ Network Tool
If you cannot mount the Card Slot to use it over network with the Canon IJ Network Tool, follow the
procedure below to mount the Card Slot manually.
1.
Check the Default Name of the machine by selecting Network Information on the View
menu of the Canon IJ Network Tool.
2.
Click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Run.
In Windows XP and Windows 2000, click Start > Run.
3.
Input "\\xxxxxxxxxxxx\", then click OK.
For example, if the Default Name is "0000000847B6\canon_memory", then input only "\\
0000000847B6\".
Note
If you cannot mount the Card Slot with the method above, input the IP address of the
machine instead of the 12 alphanumeric characters of the Default Name, and try again.
For example, "\\192.168.1.1\". If you mount the Card Slot with the IP address, you have to
remount it whenever the machine's IP address changes.
4.
When the
Drive.
5.
Select the drive letter, then click Finish.
canon_memory icon appears, right-click the icon, then select Map Network
Page top
Cannot Use the Card Slot
Page 933 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Use the Card Slot
Cannot Use the Card Slot
Check 1: Is the icon of the Card Slot displayed?
To use the Card Slot over network, you have to mount the Card Slot as the network drive of the
computer.
The canon_memory (\\xxxxxxxxxxxx) (or canon_memory on `xxxxxxxxxxxx') icon with the mapped drive
letter appears on Computer (or My Computer).
"xxxxxxxxxxxx" is a string of 12 alphanumeric characters.
The icon name may vary depending on the language version of Windows you are using.
If the icon is not displayed, mount the Card Slot.
Mounting the Card Slot as the Network Drive
Check 2: Is the memory card inserted in the Card Slot?
Make sure that a memory card is inserted in the Card Slot. If it is not inserted, insert it.
For information on how to insert a memory card, refer to Printing from a Memory Card .
Check 3: Is Read/write attribute set to Writable from USB PC?
When Read/write attribute in Device settings is set to Writable from USB PC, you cannot access the
memory card over network. Set Read/write attribute to Writable from LAN PC to write data to the
memory card over network.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Check 4: Is Read/write attribute set to Not writable from PC?
When Read/write attribute in Device settings is set to Not writable from PC, you can read data on the
memory card, but cannot write data to it. To write data to the memory card in the Card Slot over
network, set Read/write attribute to Writable from LAN PC.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Check 5: To share the printer's Card Slot with multiple computers over a
network, set Set memory card sharing in Device settings to Enable.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Check 6: Is another computer writing data to the memory card?
While one computer is writing a file into the memory card, other computers cannot access the same
file. Wait for a while, then try again.
Page top
Cannot Access to the Memory Card in the Card Slot Using MP Navigator EX
Page 934 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Access to the Memory Card in the Card
Slot Using MP Navigator EX
Cannot Access to the Memory Card in the Card Slot Using MP
Navigator EX
If "Cannot access the memory card" is displayed when you click Memory Card under Scan/Import
Documents or Images on MP Navigator EX, confirm what the message says, then click Retry. If the
message appears again, mount the Card Slot as the network drive. For details on how to mount the
Card Slot, see Mounting the Card Slot as the Network Drive . Confirm the icon for the Card Slot appears
on Computer (or My Computer), and try to access using MP Navigator EX.
Page top
Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security Settings on the Co...
Page 935 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of
Some Security Settings on the Computer
Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security
Settings on the Computer
Check 1: Make sure that Read/write attribute in Device settings is set to
Writable from LAN PC.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Check 2: Make sure that the memory card is inserted in the Card Slot.
Check 3: To share the printer's Card Slot with multiple computers over a
network, set Set memory card sharing in Device settings to Enable.
Changing the Machine Settings on the LCD
Check 4: Disable the Windows Firewall function, or open port 137:139
to allow communication with the machine following the procedure
below.
For information on other security software, refer to its instruction manual or manufacturer.
Important
If you disabled the firewall function, disconnect your network from the Internet. You can do this
by configuring your access point or router not to connect to the Internet or WAN.
To disable the Windows Firewall:
1. Click Start > Control Panel > Security > Windows Firewall > Change
settings.
In Windows XP, click Start > Control Panel > Security Center > Windows Firewall.
2. Select Off and click OK.
To open port 137:139:
1. Click Start > Control Panel > Security > Windows Firewall > Change
settings.
In Windows XP, click Start > Control Panel > Security Center > Windows Firewall.
2. Click the Exceptions tab, and click Add port.
3. On the Add a Port dialog box, input the following information, and click OK.
Name: Input any name for the port.
Port number: Input "137".
Protocol: Select TCP.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3.
On the Add a Port dialog box, input the same information as you did in step 3 except for
selecting UDP in Protocol.
Cannot Access to the Card Slot Because of Some Security Settings on the Co...
5. Use the same procedure to open the other ports (138TCP, 138UDP,
139TCP, and 139UDP).
6. Confirm that the port names are added on the Exceptions sheet, and click
OK.
Check 5: Change the workgroup name to "WORKGROUP" following the
procedure below.
1. Right-click Computer (or My Computer), select Properties, then click Change
settings.
In Windows XP, right-click My Computer, then select Properties.
2. Click the Computer Name tab, then click Change.
3. Change the workgroup name to "WORKGROUP", then click OK.
Check 6: Disconnect the network drive for the Card Slot and mount it
again following the procedure below.
1. Right-click Computer (or My Computer), and select Disconnect Network Drive.
2. Select the network drive to disconnect, then click OK.
3. Remount the Card Slot using the Canon IJ Network Tool.
Using the Card Slot over a Network
Page top
Page 936 of 949 pages
Date Modified of Files Changes When Saving Them on the Memory Card over...
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Troubleshooting > Date Modified of Files Changes When Saving
Them on the Memory Card over Network
Date Modified of Files Changes When Saving Them on the
Memory Card over Network
Check: Does the Canon IJ Network Scan Utility run?
If you write files to a memory card over a network when the Canon IJ Network Scan Utility is not
running, the Date Modified of the files will change. Make sure to start up the Canon IJ Network Scan
Utility before you write files to a memory card over the network.
Page top
Page 937 of 949 pages
Appendix
Page 938 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Appendix
Appendix
Restrictions
Initial Values Set at Factory (Network)
Using the Card Slot over a Network
Page top
Restrictions
Page 939 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Appendix > Restrictions
Restrictions
If you use a printer over the wireless LAN, the printer may recognize nearby wireless systems, you
should set a network key (WEP, WPA, or WPA2) to the access point to encrypt wireless transmission.
Wireless communication with a product that does not comply with the Wi-Fi standard cannot be
guaranteed.
Connecting with too many computers may affect the printer performance, such as printing speed.
Page top
Initial Values Set at Factory (Network)
Page 940 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Appendix > Initial Values Set at Factory (Network)
Initial Values Set at Factory (Network)
Initial Values
Item
WLAN active/inactive
Disable LAN
SSID
BJNPSETUP
Communication mode
Infrastructure
Wireless Security
Disable
IP address
Getting automatically
Printer name setting*
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
IPv4/IPv6 setting
IPv4
Set memory card sharing
Enable
Enable/disable WSD (WSD settings)
Active
Timeout setting (WSD settings)
1 minute
LLTD setting
Enable
Enable/disable Bonjour (Bonjour settings)
Enable
Service name (Bonjour settings)*
Canon XXX series _XXXXXXXXXXXX
LPR service advertising (Bonjour settings)
OFF
LPR protocol setting
Enable
* The initial value in this item varies by machine. You can check the value in this item using the Operation
Panel on the machine.
Page top
Using the Card Slot over a Network
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Appendix > Using the Card Slot over a Network
Using the Card Slot over a Network
Confirming Whether the Card Slot is Mounted
Mounting the Card Slot as the Network Drive
Restrictions on Card Slot Use over a Network
Confirming Whether the Card Slot is Mounted
The Card Slot must be mounted to use it over a network.
When the Card Slot is mounted, the following icon appears on Computer (or My Computer). If the
icon does not appear, see Cannot Use the Card Slot .
If these icons are not found, the network drive for the Card Slot is not mounted yet. For details on
how to mount the Card Slot, see Mounting the Card Slot as the Network Drive .
Mounting the Card Slot as the Network Drive
1.
Start up the Canon IJ Network Tool.
Double-click the
Canon IJ Network Tool icon on the desktop.
You can also click Start > All Programs (or Programs) > Canon IJ Network Utilities > Canon IJ
Network Tool > Canon IJ Network Tool to start up the tool.
2.
Select the machine.
3.
Select Maintenance on the Settings menu.
4.
Click Setup.
5.
Specify the drive letter, then click OK.
Page 941 of 949 pages
Using the Card Slot over a Network
6.
Confirm that the
Computer).
canon_memory icon for the Card Slot appears on Computer (or My
Note
If the Card Slot cannot be mounted properly, see Cannot Mount the Card Slot.
Restrictions on Card Slot Use over a Network
The Card Slot can be shared by multiple computers, if the machine is connected
to a network. Multiple computers can read files from a memory card in the Card
Slot at the same time. However, while one computer is writing a file into a
memory card, other computers cannot access the same file.
If your computer joins a domain, the Card Slot may not be mounted as the
network drive.
If you use the memory card stored the large size files or many files, a large
amount of card access may be generated. In this case, the operation in the
memory card may be impossible or slow. Operate after the Access lamp of the
machine is lit.
When you access the network drive for the Card Slot over the network, file
names consisting of eight or less lowercase letters (not including its extension)
may be shown in uppercase.
For example, a file name such as "abcdefg.doc" will be "ABCDEFG.DOC", while
a name such as "AbcdeFG.doc" will appear the same.
The file is not actually renamed, but merely appears to be changed.
When the Read/write attribute setting of the machine is set to Writable from USB
PC, you cannot access the network drive of the Card Slot. On the other hand,
when this setting is set to Writable from LAN PC, the Card slot is not detected via
USB. Make sure that the Read/write attribute setting is set properly depending
on your connection type. Select Not writable from PC to read files from a
memory card via USB and over a network, although you cannot write files to a
memory card in either way with this setting.
For details on how to change the machine setting, refer to Changing the
Machine Settings on the LCD .
When the Read/write attribute setting of the machine is set to Writable from LAN
PC, you can write files to a memory card from a computer connected to a
network. Note that it may increase the risk that the data on the memory card is
infected by computer viruses or accessed illegally.
It is recommended to use the access control function of the machine or connect
Page 942 of 949 pages
Using the Card Slot over a Network
Page 943 of 949 pages
to the Internet via a router. For information on using a router, contact your
Internet service provider or a network device manufacturer.
If you write files to a memory card over a network when the Canon IJ Network
Scan Utility is not running, the Date Modified of the files may not be proper.
Make sure to start up the Canon IJ Network Scan Utility before you write files to
a memory card over the network. For details on how to use the Canon IJ
Network Scan Utility, refer to the online help of the Canon IJ Network Scan
Utility.
Note
If the following occurs when using the network drive for the Card Slot over a network, see
Cannot Use the Card Slot .
Cannot access the Card Slot after the network setup of the Card Slot is complete
Can read the memory card in the Card Slot, but cannot write to it
The Card Slot is disconnected
The Date Modified of files changes when saving them in the network drive for the
Card Slot
Page top
Glossary
Page 944 of 949 pages
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Glossary
Glossary
About Technical Terms
Page top
About Technical Terms
Advanced Guide > About Network Communication > Glossary > About Technical Terms
About Technical Terms
In this section, technical terms used in the manual are explained.
A
B
C
D
F
I
K
L
M
O
P
R
S
T
U
W
A
Access Point
A wireless transceiver or base station that receives information from wireless clients/the
machine and rebroadcasts it. Required in an infrastructure network.
Ad-hoc
Client computer and machine setting where wireless communication occurs on a peer-topeer basis, i.e., all clients in with the same SSID/network name communicate directly with
each other. No access point is required. This machine does not support ad-hoc
communication.
Admin Password
Administration password in Canon IJ Network Tool to restrict access to network users. It must
be entered to access the printer and change printer settings.
When the printer's network settings are factory default, the admin password does not have to
been entered.
AES
An encryption method. It is optional for WPA. Strong cryptographic algorithm adopted within
U.S. government organizations for information processing.
Authentication Method
The method that an access point uses to authenticate a printer through a wireless LAN. The
methods are agreeable each other.
When using WEP as an encryption method, the authentication method is able to fix to Open
System or Shared Key. (The default authentication method is Auto.)
For WPA/WPA2, authentication method is PSK.
Auto
The printer automatically changes its authentication method to match the access
Page 945 of 949 pages
About Technical Terms
point.
Open System
In this authentication method, the communication partner is authenticated without
using WEP key even if "Use WEP" is selected.
Shared Key
In this authentication method, the communication partner is authenticated using the
WEP key that was set for encryption.
B
Bonjour
A service built into Mac OS X operating system to detect the connectable devices on a network
automatically.
C
Channel
Frequency channel for wireless communication. In the infrastructure mode, the channel is
automatically adjusted to match that set to the access point. This machine supports channels
1 to 13. Note that the number of channels that can be used for your wireless LAN varies
depending on the region or country.
D
Default Gateway
A relay device to connect to another network such as a router or a computer.
DHCP server functionality
The router or the access point assigns an IP address automatically whenever the printer or
the personal computer on a network starts up.
F
Firewall
It is a system that prevents an unlawful computer access in the network. To prevent, you can
use the firewall function of a broadband router, the security software installed in the computer,
or operation system for computer.
I
IEEE 802.11b
International standard for wireless LAN using the 2.4 GHz frequency range with a throughput
of up to 11 Mbps.
IEEE 802.11g
International standard for wireless LAN using the 2.4 GHz frequency range with a throughput
of up to 54 Mbps. Compatible with 802.11b.
Infrastructure
Client computer and machine setup where all wireless communications pass through an
access point.
IP Address
A unique number with four parts separated by dots. Every network device that is connected to
the Internet has an IP address. Example: 192.168.0.1
An IP address is usually assigned by an access point or a DHCP server of the router
Page 946 of 949 pages
About Technical Terms
automatically.
For the procedure to check the IP address of the printer, see Checking the IP Address or the
MAC Address of the Machine .
IPv4/IPv6
They are internetwork-layer protocol used on the internet. IPv4 uses 32-bit addresses and
IPv6 uses 128-bit addresses.
K
Key Format
Select either ASCII or Hex as the WEP key format. The character that can be used for the WEP
key differs depending on the selected key formats.
ASCII
Specify with a 5 or 13-character string that can include alphanumeric and underscore
"_" characters. It is case-sensitive.
Hex
Specify a 10-digit or 26-digit string that can contain hexadecimal (0 to 9, A to F, and a to
f).
Key Length
Length of the WEP key. Select either 64 bits or 128 bits. Longer key length allows you to set a
more complex WEP key.
L
Link Quality
The status of connection between the access point and the printer excluding noise
(interference) is indicated with a value from 0 to 100%.
LLTD
A Link Layer protocol built in Windows Vista for network topology discovery and quality of
service diagnostics.
LLTD is used by its Network Map feature to display a graphical representation of the local
network.
LPR
A platform-independent printing protocol used in TCP/IP networks. It is not supported
bidirectional communication.
M
MAC Address
Also known as the physical address. A unique and permanent hardware identifier that is
assigned to network devices by its manufacturer. MAC addresses are 48 bits long and are
written as a hexadecimal number separated by colons, i.e., 11:22:33:44:55:66. To check the
MAC address of this machine, see Checking the IP Address or the MAC Address of the
Machine .
O
Operation Status
Indicates the status on whether the printer can be used.
P
Page 947 of 949 pages
About Technical Terms
PSK
An encryption method employed by WPA/WPA2.
R
Router
A relay device to connect to another network.
S
Signal Strength
The strength of the signal received by the printer from the access point is indicated with a
value from 0 to 100%.
SSID
Unique label for wireless LAN. It is often represented such as a network name or a access
point name.
SSID distinguishes one wireless LAN from another to prevent interference.
The printer and all clients on a wireless LAN must use the same SSID in order to
communicate with each other. The SSID can be up to 32 characters long, and is made up of
alphanumeric characters. The SSID may also be referred to by its network name.
Stealth
In the stealth mode, an access point hides itself by not broadcasting its SSID. The client must
specify the SSID set to the access point to detect it.
Subnet Mask
IP address has two components, the network address and the host address. Subnet Mask
used to calculate the Subnet Mask address from the IP address. A Subnet Mask is usually
assigned by an access point or a DHCP server of the router automatically.
Example:
IP Address: 192.168.127.123
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Subnet Mask Address: 192.168.127.0
T
TCP/IP
Suite of communications protocols used to connect hosts on the Internet or the LAN. This
protocol allows different terminals to communicate with each other.
TKIP
An encryption protocol employed by WPA/WPA2.
U
USB
Serial interface designed to enable you to "hot-swap" devices, i.e., by plugging and
unplugging them without turning off the power.
W
WCN (Windows Connect Now)
Users running Windows Vista can easily create network configuration settings and transmit
them to the access point using the USB flash memory.
Page 948 of 949 pages
About Technical Terms
Page 949 of 949 pages
WEP/WEP Key
An encryption method employed by IEEE 802.11. Shared security key used to encrypt and
decrypt data sent over wireless networks. This printer supports key length of 64 bits or 128
bits, key format of ASCII code or Hexadecimal, and key number of 1 to 4.
Wi-Fi
International association that certifies interoperability of wireless LAN products based on the
IEEE 802.11 specification.
This machine is a Wi-Fi authorized product.
Wireless LAN
A network that, instead of being connected by physical wires, is connected by a wireless
technology, such as Wi-Fi.
WPA
Security framework announced by the Wi-Fi Alliance in October 2002. The security has been
strengthened more than WEP.
Authentication
WPA defines the following authentication methods: PSK that can be used without an
authentication server, plus WPA-802.1x that do require an authentication server.
This machine supports WPA-PSK.
Passphrase
This encrypted key is used to perform WPA-PSK authentication.
The passphrase should be a string of 8 to 63 alphanumeric characters or a 64-digit
hexadecimal value.
WPA2
Security framework released by the Wi-Fi Alliance in September in 2004 as a later version of
WPA. Provides a stronger encryption mechanism through Advanced Encryption Standard
(AES).
Authentication
WPA defines the following authentication methods: PSK that can be used without an
authentication server, plus WPA2-802.1x that do require an authentication server.
This machine supports WPA2-PSK.
Passphrase
This encrypted key is used to perform WPA2-PSK authentication.
The passphrase should be a string of 8 to 63 alphanumeric characters or a 64-digit
hexadecimal value.
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
WPS is a standard for easy and secure establishment of a wireless network.
There are 2 primary methods used in the Wi-Fi Protected Setup:
PIN entry: a mandatory method of setup for all WPS certified devices
Push button configuration (PBC): an actual push button on the hardware or through a
simulated push button in the software.
Page top